JP2020054910A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably executing a performance.SOLUTION: A performance display section and an opening/closing section which is installed in a near side of the performance display section to a game board so as to perform an opening/closing operation and configured that the performance display section may be exposed as it is opened are provided in opening/closing display means. A performance mode is at least set to a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode, by performance mode setting means. Opening/closing control means controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing section, and determination means determines whether or not the opening/closing section is at a specific open position which is the position that the opening/closing section can take and a part of the performance display section is exposed from an opening/closing member from when a closing operation of the opening/closing section starts to when it is completely closed. When the performance display section is set to the first mode, the performance display section is set to the second mode by performance mode setting means, on the basis of the determination that the opening/closing section is at a specific open position by the determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a variable means operated by a motor or the like. Some of such gaming machines can execute a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means.

JP 2008-012194 A

  However, with the above-described conventional gaming machines, there has been a possibility that it may be difficult to appropriately perform an effect on the variable means having a complicated configuration with the diversification of the variable means.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine in which the operation of the accessory can be set appropriately.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is arranged such that an effect display unit capable of changing an effect mode and an opening / closing operation can be performed on a front side of the effect display unit with respect to the game board, and the game machine is opened. Opening / closing display means having an opening / closing section configured to expose the effect display section as much as possible, and at least the effect mode to a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. Rendering mode setting means that can be set, opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing section, and a position that the opening / closing section can take between the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing section and the complete closing. And determining means for determining whether or not a part of the effect display unit is at a specific open position that is a position exposed from the opening / closing member, and the effect mode setting unit includes: When set to the first mode Is for setting the effect display unit on the basis that it is determined that the closing part has become the specific open position by said determination means to the second aspect.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a detecting unit that detects whether an opening degree of the opening / closing unit is equal to or less than an opening degree at the specific opening position,
The determining means determines whether or not the specific opening position has been reached based on a detection result by the detecting means.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the effect mode setting unit sets the brightness of the effect display unit to a first luminance as the first mode. In the second aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to a second brightness lower than the first brightness.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the effect display unit that can change the effect mode, and the effect display unit is installed in front of the effect display unit with respect to the game board so as to be openable and closable, and the effect display unit is more open. And an opening / closing portion configured to expose the opening / closing portion are provided in the opening / closing display means. The production mode is set at least to the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode by the production mode setting means. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing part is controlled by the opening / closing control means, and the opening / closing part can be located between the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing part and the complete closing thereof, and a part of the effect display part is provided with an opening / closing member It is determined by the determination means whether or not the specific opening position which is a position exposed from the camera is reached. When the effect display unit is set to the first mode, the effect display unit is switched to the second mode by the effect mode setting unit based on the determination unit determining that the opening / closing unit is at the specific open position. Is set.

  Thus, the second mode can be set before the opening / closing section is completely closed. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the detection unit detects whether the degree of opening of the opening / closing unit is equal to or less than the degree of opening at the specific opening position, and determines whether the specific opening position has been reached based on the detection result by the detection unit. Is determined.

  Thus, the degree of opening can be determined only by the detection result of the detection result, so that the determination by the determination unit can be further simplified. That is, when determining the degree of opening / closing of the opening / closing section, there is no need to predict according to the setting of the opening / closing operation such as the opening / closing speed and the elapsed time from the start of opening / closing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for the determination by the determination unit can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a first mode, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to the first luminance by the effect mode setting means. As a second aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to a second brightness lower than the first brightness by the effect mode setting means.

  Accordingly, when the opening / closing section is closed, the second brightness can be set to be lower than the first brightness from the time when the opening / closing section reaches the specific opening position until the opening / closing section is completely closed. Therefore, the brightness of a part of the effect display unit exposed from the opening / closing unit can be made inconspicuous, so that there is an effect that the visual quality of the effect display unit can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit in the state where the 2nd slide operation unit was attached to the back case. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where the upright part moved to the overhang position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where the tilting role object moved to the overhang position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide accessory moved to the overhang position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide role and tilting role moved to the overhang position, respectively. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide character and the standing character moved to the overhang position, respectively. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide character and the center rocking character moved to the extended position. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the second random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation start condition table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a load reference value table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the power return operation | movement table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory operation setting table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. (A), (b) is a figure which illustrated the content of an accessory composite reach effect. It is the figure which illustrated the content of the substitute production of a role item combination reach production. (A), (b) is a figure which illustrated the content of the opening effect. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an initial operation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of LED current at the time of employ | adopting the current dimming system in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the LED at the time of employ | adopting PWM dimming system in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the time change of an electric current. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an initial operation process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation stop process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the backlight control processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the hemispherical accessory in the third embodiment, (b) is a side view of the hemispherical accessory in the third embodiment, and (c) is the third embodiment. It is a front view of the hemispherical accessory in FIG. (A)-(d) is a side view of the hemispherical accessory in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(d) is a side view of the light shielding sensor and light shielding plate provided in the hemispherical accessory in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between a positional relationship between a light-shielding sensor and a light-shielding plate and an output of the light-shielding sensor in a third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the operation | movement start condition table in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the load reference value table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing a power return operation table in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed origin return processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory lighting control processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory lighting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory opening / closing process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the operation start condition table in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the load reference value table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the power return operation table in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the content of the power return operation for every accessory in the modification of 1st Embodiment. . It is a figure showing the accessory operation setting table in the modification of a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an initial operation process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to a modification of the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the operation | movement start setting process performed by the MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a stepping motor, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of an excitation table and a correspondence relationship between an excitation counter and a state of the stepping motor. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a priority order table in a second modification of the first embodiment, and (b) is a priority order in a second modification of the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed another example of the table typically. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an adjustment control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to a second modification of the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the control timing of the LCD backlight and the accessory motor in the modification of 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the LCD backlight in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of light control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation start condition table in a modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an origin return operation table in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory recovery process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the origin position setting process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the modification of the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the nail-shaped accessory return process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the half moon-shaped accessory return process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 14) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 228 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 228 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 228 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 228 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 228 while the selection screen is being displayed, the effect at the time of super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guide nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are illustrated. (Not shown), rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first opening 64, a second opening 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device (not shown), ordinary The entrance 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 14) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion (a lower left portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are used for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. . Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated. On the other hand, when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate in a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, during a time saving operation, or during a normal operation, or to indicate in a lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is changing. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, there is prepared a probability-variable jackpot (jackpot A) and a time-saving jackpot (jackpot B). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the change is completed, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot. .

  Here, the “probable change jackpot” is a probability change jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 16 rounds of jackpots, and the “time saving jackpot” is the maximum round number after the 16 rounds of jackpots. A transition to the low-probability state, and a predetermined number of times of change (for example, 100 times of change) is a jackpot in which the time saving state is set.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, the state shifts to the special game state (jackpot). It is a game state that is easy to play. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the winning probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of probability change. In the “low probability state”, the time saving state (medium time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the hit probability of an ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased to the second entrance 640. This refers to a state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (the state in which neither the special jackpot probability nor the ordinary symbol hit probability increases).

  During probable changes or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the symbol usually increase, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and a longer time than normal is used. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one time are not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing symbol variation display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball at the normal entrance 67. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 14), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 14) described later is a big hit, a fluctuating display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. In the case of "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device alternates a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. A variable display for lighting is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ball is hit. If the lottery results in a win, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the normal symbol (the second symbol) is changed and displayed. Further, if the lottery result of winning or non-winning is out of order, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol).

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is held for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (open).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than in the normal game state. Accordingly, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the ordinary symbol can be performed more often than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of hitting the normal symbol increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. Accordingly, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, other methods (for example, increasing the probability of hitting a normal symbol, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the electric accessory 640a per hit, etc.) are used to perform promising or working hours. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set shorter than during the normal change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. In addition, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entrance 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board is used. It is configured to allow passage. When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a winning lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is changed to the above-described first symbol display device 37a. , 37b, and is also lit on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of times of holding, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The change display of the second symbol is performed by alternately lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol (a symbol of “○” and a symbol of “X”) on the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment. , The first symbol display device 37a, 37b and a part of the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). . Further, the number of assembled normal entrances 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). The position where the normal entrance 67 is assembled is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on when the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view, a second entrance 640 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on by the second entrance switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are different numbers (for example, the first entry). The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins the mouth 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 may be five).

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is higher during the probability change and during the shortened working hours, and the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is shorter than that during the normal time. Therefore, the symbol “O” is easily displayed in the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol), and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (increased) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable changes and during working hours, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 as compared with during normal times.

  Here, the probability of a big hit in the case where a ball has won in the first entrance 64 and the case where a ball has won in the second entrance 640 is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. Further, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult for the second entrance 640 to win a prize. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the 64 (so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for a player to aim for a jackpot.

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, by passing a ball through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. The ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-hit”), and passes through the normal entrance 67. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640 while the electric accessory is opened.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is provided on the lower right side of the first entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses. The first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to become a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening-hole solenoid (shown in FIG. Zu). The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed, and is in a closed state where a ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. On the other hand, at the time of a big hit, the large open mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning ports 65a is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first entrance 64 or the lower left side of the first entrance 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first entrance port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided. In the present embodiment, a first slide operation unit 500 is provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a front view (see FIG. 2). A decoration accessory unit 700 is provided on the upper center of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 14). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 14). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 300 when the disassembled operation unit 300 is viewed from the front. In FIG. 7,
The state where the second slide operation unit 800 is mounted on the rear case 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 300 has one side (the front side in FIG. 6) opened from the bottom wall 311 and the outer wall 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 311. And a rear case 310 formed in a box shape. The rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 300, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, the decorative accessory unit 700, and the second slide operation unit 800 are accommodated in the internal space of the rear case 310, respectively. It is configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the second slide operation unit 800 is formed with an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall 312 of the rear case 310, and contacts the inner surface of the outer wall 312 while (See FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the second slide operation unit 800 has a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 in a front view.

  7, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, and the decorative accessory unit 700 are stacked on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800, respectively. It is arranged in a state and accommodated in the rear case 310 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 800) and another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 500) are stacked on the front side in a stacked state. Since it is provided, a predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in a front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, the predetermined operation unit Can be visually recognized by the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by other operation units. Thus, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation units on the assumption that the entire effect member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, an outline of an operation mode of the standing character 400, the first slide operation unit 500, and the second slide operation unit 800 will be described. 8 to 10 refer to FIGS. 5 to 7 as appropriate.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the upright part 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 are arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 9 shows a state in which the tilting part 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the extended position. FIG. 10 shows a state in which each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 is arranged at the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 400 includes an arm member 420 whose base end is pivotally supported so as to be swingable, and a swing end side which is opposite to the base end of the arm member 420. An upright supporting member 410 is provided so as to be rotatably supported, and the arm member 420 and the upright supporting member 410 are operated between a retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and an extended position shown in FIG. Let it. At the evacuation position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the uprights 410 and the arm member 420 are evicted below the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 420 is lifted, and the upright member 410 is disposed at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, at the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first sliding operation unit 500 includes a tilting member 510 that is slid diagonally downward, and a rotation that can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 520a as a rotation axis. An accessory 520 is provided. The tilting role object 510 operates between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the tilting accessory 510 is retracted to the right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 9, the tilting role object 510 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 800 includes slide members 810, 820, 830, and 840 formed to be slidable, and the respective slide members 810, 820, 830, and 840. Is operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the right sliding accessory 810 and the left sliding accessory 820 are retracted to the left and right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and the upper sliding accessory 830 and the lower The side sliding role item 840 is retracted above and below the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and is made invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 10, each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 is disposed at the center of the opening 311 a of the rear case 310 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). You.

  The right sliding role 810 and the left sliding role 820 are configured to operate on the same plane. As shown in FIG. 10, the overhang position of the right slide accessory 810 is on the right side of the overhang position of the left slide accessory 820, and the right slide accessory 810 and the left slide accessory 820 interfere with each other. (Not touch). Similarly, the upper sliding role 830 and the lower sliding role 840 are configured to operate on the same plane. As shown in FIG. 10, the extended position of the upper sliding role 830 is above the extended position of the lower sliding role 840, and the upper sliding role 830 and the lower sliding role 840 interfere with each other. They do not touch each other.

  Furthermore, the plane on which the right sliding role 810 and the left sliding role 820 operate is closer to the game board 13 than the plane on which the upper sliding role 830 and the lower sliding role 840 operate. (See FIG. 10). Therefore, the operation of the upper sliding role 830 or the lower sliding role 840 is not hindered by the right sliding role 810 or the left sliding role 820. Conversely, the operation of the right sliding role 810 or the left sliding role 820 is not hindered by the upper sliding role 830 or the lower sliding role 840. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the operation of each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, 840 can be increased, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  The second slide operation unit 800 is formed such that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state where the slide roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 are overhanging.

  Next, a case where a plurality of units constituting the operation unit 300 operate in a combined manner will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 11 shows an operation unit 300 in a case where the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 and the respective slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended positions. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 510 operates on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800 with respect to the game board 13. That is, the operation of the tilting member 510 is not hindered (interfered) regardless of the arrangement of the respective slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800. Also, regardless of the arrangement of the tilting member 510, the operation of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 is not hindered (interfered). Therefore, the degree of freedom of the operation of the tilting member 510 and each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 can be increased, so that the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 800 is disposed between the first slide operation unit 500 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 500 and the third symbol display are provided. A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 800 is generated between the device 81 and the device 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the extended position, the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is partially shielded so as to be invisible when viewed from the front. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by observing the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined leftward and rightward from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 and the respective slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are both arranged at the extended position. Thus, the gap that the player looks at from an oblique direction can be filled with each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840. Thus, a part of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so as not to be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 shows a case in which the upright member 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 and the respective slide members 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended positions. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operation unit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the upstanding object 410 and the arm member 420 operate on the game board 13 on the nearer side than the second slide operation unit 800. That is, regardless of the arrangement of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second sliding operation unit 800, the operation of the standing role 410 and the arm member 420 is prevented (interfered). There is no. Also, regardless of the arrangement of the standing role 410 and the arm member 420, the operation of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 is not hindered (interfered). Therefore, the degree of freedom of the operation of the standing role 410, the arm member 420, and each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 can be increased, so that the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 800 is disposed between the swing operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the oscillation operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 are arranged. And a gap for the second slide operation unit 800 is generated. Therefore, when only the standing role object 410 of the swinging operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhang position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as to be invisible when viewed from the front. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by observing the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined leftward and rightward from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the uprights 410 of the swing operation unit 400 and the respective slides 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended position. Thus, the gap that the player looks at from an oblique direction can be filled with each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840. Thereby, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be surely shielded so as not to be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

  FIG. 13 shows an operation unit 300 in a case where the center swinging object 720 of the decorative accessory unit 700 and each of the sliding objects 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second sliding operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended position. FIG. Here, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative accessory unit 700 is configured to include a left swinging accessory 710, a center swinging accessory 720, and a right swinging accessory 730. Is operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. The decoration unit 700 also causes the swinging members 710, 720, and 730 to swing at the retracted position (origin position) (see FIG. 5).

  In addition, the center swinging role 720 is disposed closer to the gaming board 13 than the left swinging role 710 and the right swinging role 730 (that is, the central swinging role 720 is , And not on the same plane as the left rocking role 710), even if the left rocking role 710 and the right rocking role 730 are rocked, the central rocking role There is no interference (contact) with the object 720. Further, even if the swinging operation or the overhanging operation is performed on the central swinging role 720, the center swinging role does not interfere (contact) with the left swinging role 710 or the right swinging role 730. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the swinging role objects 710, 720, and 730 from interfering with each other in the operation of the other swinging role items, and to increase the degree of freedom of the movement. Therefore, the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  In addition, the center swinging role 720 is disposed on the game board 13 at a position closer to the front side than each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840. Therefore, it is possible to operate the central rocking role 720 and the respective sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 without interfering with each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the operation can be increased, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  The box-shaped unit 600 does not have a member that protrudes into the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 400, 500, 700, and 800. . Therefore, the box-shaped unit 600 is always kept in a state of being arranged on the left side of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, each of the units 400 to 800 is formed so as to be operable independently of each other, and is disposed in a state of being overlapped (laminated) as described above. With respect to the components arranged in different layers, the components can be operated at the same time even if the operating member extends inward of the opening 311a of the rear case 310. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 13, not only can each of the units 400 to 800 operate independently, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The units 400 to 700 are arranged in the same layer, and the units 400 to 700 and the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7). In other words, when the accessory included in any one of the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, and the decorative accessory unit 700 is at the overhang position, the accessory included in the other unit If they are moved to the overhang position, they will interfere with each other (contact). Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the operating conditions are defined in units of units in order to prevent interference of the characters constituting the units arranged in the same layer. Then, when the accessory constituting any one of the units 400 to 700 is operated, the operation of the accessory is permitted only when it is determined that the accessory does not interfere with the other units. . Thus, it is possible to prevent the role articles from colliding with each other and from being damaged by the impact of the collision. Further, since the action of the accessory is obstructed by another accessory, the action of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are shifted, giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of accessories are provided to execute various motion effects. These accessories are driven by corresponding accessory motors 229 (see FIG. 14). Here, if each accessory motor 229 is driven indefinitely, a current (power) exceeding the available current capacity (rated power) is consumed by the accessory motor 229, and normal operation can be performed. There is a risk of disappearing. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total value of the load current value (power consumption) consumed by driving each accessory is calculated, and the total value of the load current value (power consumption) is calculated as described above. When it is determined that the current capacity (rated power or less) is exceeded, the driving of part or all of the accessory motor 229 is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) usable for the accessory motor 229. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the pachinko machine 10 from operating abnormally or from breaking down. Note that whether to stop the accessory may be determined based on whether the total load current exceeds the current capacity or based on whether the total power consumption exceeds the rated power. Good. Based on the specifications of the power supply device 15 employed in the pachinko machine 10, the more severe condition may be selected as the determination symmetry.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c. , A variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. Although the details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start is determined by one of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 15 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit types are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is assigned to each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, the jackpot A is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”. The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as the determination value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 15C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 15C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, the normal symbol It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the main control device 110, a lottery of a special symbol, a lottery of a normal symbol, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device, setting of display on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. Is performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, one execution area and four reserved areas corresponding to the first entrance 64 (special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas) and four reserved areas corresponding to the second entrance 640 ( A special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including special figure 2 holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and in each of these areas, a first symbol holding ball storing area 203a is set in accordance with the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. When the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the special symbol with a high probability and the first random number table 202a for the special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability. Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is 300 and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is 1, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers which are the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270” are: It is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 out of the total number of random numbers, and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/30”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability and the random number of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability are stored. In order to prevent the values from being duplicated with the numerical values, a random number value for each jackpot is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value of the jackpot, there is a possibility that the timing at which the random number value appears may be analyzed. That is, there is a possibility that the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to analyze a random number value which becomes a special symbol jackpot, thereby suppressing fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, the hit type when the random value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. When the value is “50 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that one of the two types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) is determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. I have. The random number value for determining the special symbol big hit type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random value) is set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 15B). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) that stores a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Have been.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, “variation (for long time)”, “variation (for short time)”, various types of “normal reach”, “variation of super reach”, “variation” Various types of "special reach" are defined, and as the fluctuation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B, "common normal reach" various, "common super reach" various, and "common special reach" various are defined. Various types of "special reach" are defined, and various types of "common normal reach", "common super reach", and "special special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns of winning / losing sharing. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number to be a hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set by a second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device. When the value of the random number counter C4 matches the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the winning is the second symbol (normal symbol). The second random number table is used for a low probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) (a period in which the symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability having a higher probability of hitting the symbol than the low probability. The number is divided into two types, one for time (a period in which the symbol is normally in a time saving state), and the number of random hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 15C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers that can hit the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, since the total number of random numbers is 240 out of the total of 240 random numbers, the probability of winning the normal symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes the ordinary entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the variation of the ordinary symbol in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) As a result, a symbol “○” is displayed and displayed, and the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, if the ordinary symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. Is released, but the release time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, the total number of the random hits is 200 out of the total of 240 random numbers, so the probability of the hit of the normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) And the symbol “○” is displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and furthermore, it is attached to the second entrance 640. Since the opening period of the electric accessory is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15 (c)) storing a random number value for determining whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202. Is provided. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 only has “1 second × 2 times” when it hits the normal symbol. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 35).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 16, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 35), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 34). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special figure 1 retaining ball number counter 203c, a special figure 2 retaining ball number counter 203d, It has a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e, a probable change flag 203f, and a time reduction counter 203g.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a includes one execution area, four holding areas (special figure 1 holding first area to special figure 1 holding fourth area) corresponding to the first entrance 64, and a second input area. It has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to special figure 2 reserved fourth area) corresponding to the ball opening 640. Each of these areas stores a value of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is transmitted to the first entrance 64. Among the vacant areas of the corresponding four reserved areas (special figure 1 reserved first area to special figure 1 reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). . That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  The same applies to the case where a ball enters the second entrance 640. That is, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) the second entrance 640, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the 4 corresponding to the second entrance 640. Of the vacant areas of the two reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to special figure 2 reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). Further, when data is stored in all four holding areas corresponding to the second entrance 640, nothing is newly stored.

  When a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each of the special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203a stored in either the special figure 1 reserved first area or the special figure 2 reserved first area is stored. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 is shifted (moved) to an execution area, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a lottery of a special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (lottery of the special figure 2) is performed by the ball to the first entrance 64. The lottery is configured to be executed with higher priority than the special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 1) based on the ball entry. That is, when data is stored in the special figure 2 reservation first area, the shift processing is performed in the special figure 2 reservation first area regardless of whether data is stored in the special figure 1 reservation first area. The stored data is shifted to the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from any of the reserved first areas to the execution area in the special figure 1 reserved first area or the special figure 2 reserved first area, the reserved data shifted first reserved area becomes empty. Become. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first opening 64 or the second opening 640, and when the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired in accordance with the starting winning. Immediately, in addition to the original special symbol jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S407 and S414 in FIG. 30). When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / failure, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). Of the vacant areas, the areas are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the first ball entry is performed. The number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth 64 is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S206 in FIG. 28).

  The special figure 2 pending ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the second entered ball is counted. The number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth 640 is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 (see S411 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S209 in FIG. 28).

  The value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N1 of the variable display based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d (the second entrance port) The number of suspensions N2 of the variable display based on the entry to the ball 640 is notified to the sound ramp control device 113 by a suspension ball number command (see S207 and S210 in FIG. 28 and S405 and S412 in FIG. 30). Each time the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 is issued. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs the main control by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d are changed. The value of the number of retained balls in the variable display retained in the device 110 can be obtained. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203e sets the maximum number of waiting balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67 to a maximum of four. This is a counter that counts up to the number of times. The initial value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the ordinary entrance 67 and the number of retaining balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 31).

  If the ball passes through one of the left and right ordinary entrances 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the second random number counter per second The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the ball passes through one of the right and left normal entrances 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 32: No).

  The probable change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). When the probability change flag 203f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state, and when it is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Show. The initial value of the probability change flag 203f is set to OFF, and when the jackpot A (probably variable jackpot) is won, the probability change flag 203f is set to ON when the end of the jackpot A is set.

  When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process, the probable change flag 203f is referred to. If the probable change flag 203f is on, a special symbol is drawn based on the first-period random number table 202a for high probability, while the probable change flag 203f is off. For example, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first-period random number table 202a for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 29).

  The time reduction counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving counter 203g is set to zero, and when a jackpot B (time saving jackpot) is won, the value is set to 100 when the end of the jackpot B is set. That is, when the jackpot B is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the counter 203g during the time reduction.

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203g during the time saving is referred to. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for low probability time (see S510 and S511 in FIG. 31).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and the lower side of the open / close plate of the specific winning opening 65a are set as axes. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 228, the accessory motor 229, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The accessory motor 229 is formed of, for example, a known stepping motor, and a plurality of the accessory motors 229 are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. The accessory motor 229 is driven by a corresponding motor control IC (motor driver). Specifically, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 sends a command to the motor control IC (motor driver) including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed. Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives the corresponding accessory motor 229 based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC capable of setting the operation of a plurality of accessory motors 229, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor driver ICs). ) May be provided to operate the accessory motors 229 corresponding to different accessories. When a motor control IC (motor driver) capable of setting operations for a plurality of accessory motors 229 is employed, the type of the accessory accessory motor 229 to be driven is included in a command for transmitting the number of rotation steps and the like. May be included and output.

  When the control IC (motor driver) operates the accessory motor 229 based on the set command, the operation is performed on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 each time the one-step operation is performed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the operation has been performed is output. The execution signal allows the MPU 221 to grasp the progress of the set operation. Note that a step counter (not shown) is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. The step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter for counting how many steps each accessory has moved from the origin position. That is, the origin position is set to the position of 0 step, and the value is updated by 1 each time the execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, each time the accessory moves one step in the direction from the origin position to the overhang position (positive direction), its value is incremented by one. Further, the value is decremented by 1 each time the step moves in the direction (negative direction) from the overhang position to the origin position. Therefore, the operating position of each accessory can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and refers to a position to which a transition is made in returning to the origin when the power is turned on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor for detecting whether or not the origin position is at the origin position. (That is, the accessory motor 229 is driven). This origin position is a reference position for the operation of each accessory. Note that the above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory comes to the origin position due to the origin return (that is, when the origin sensor detects ON). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  An example of control of the accessory motor 229 by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the description easy to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one revolution in four steps) will be described as an example, but the actual accessory motor 229 is a one-step motor. The rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 88A is a diagram showing an outline of the accessory motor 229 constituted by a stepping motor. The accessory motor 229 is configured such that a portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited by sending the excitation control data from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. More specifically, the motor control IC is excited by excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to “A, B, C, D” shown in FIG. 88 (a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part of the accessory motor 229 (that is, any one of A, B, C, and D) is “1”, the excitation is performed, and the excitation control data is “0”. If it is not excited. For example, if the data of the excitation control is “1100”, A and B are excited, and C and D are not excited. The excitation control data is specified in an excitation table (see FIG. 88 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The sound lamp control device 113 includes an excitation counter used to select and set one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data specified in an excitation table (see FIG. 88 (b)). Is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from “0”, and a loop counter that returns to “0” when the value of the excitation counter is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes “3”. Has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part is immediately performed based on the excitation control data (that is, the accessory motor 229 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). In addition, the excitation counter can be updated in the negative direction. That is, the values can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. In the case of updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the accessory motor 229 is opposite to the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether the direction is positive or negative) and the frequency of updating the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which an operation is set. The maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the accessory motor 229. Specifically, for example, in the case of the accessory motor 229 that rotates once in one step (that is, 360 steps are required for the motor to make one rotation), the excitation counter is in the range of “0” to “359”. It becomes the loop counter to be updated.

  Next, a specific example of the excitation control data for exciting each part of the accessory motor 229 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the excitation table defining the excitation control data and the state of the accessory motor 229 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the excitation table defines excitation control data for each value of the excitation counter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), as the sequence data corresponding to the accessory motor 229, the excitation control of “1100, 0110, 0011, 1001” in the order of the excitation counters “0” to “3” is performed. Data is specified respectively. When the sequence data “1100” corresponding to the excitation counter value “0” is set, the positions of A and B of the accessory motor 229 are excited. Also, when the sequence data “0110” corresponding to the excitation counter value “1” is set, the positions of B and C of the accessory motor 229 are excited, so that the excitation counter value becomes “0”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state. Further, when the sequence data “0011” corresponding to the excitation counter value “2” is set, the positions of C and D of the accessory motor 229 are excited, and the excitation counter value is “1”. From 90 degrees clockwise. Further, when the sequence data “1001” corresponding to the excitation counter value “3” is set, the positions of A and D of the accessory motor 229 are excited, so that the excitation counter value becomes “2”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state. In this manner, in the example shown in FIG. 88, the accessory motor 229 rotates clockwise by 90 degrees each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by one in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the accessory motor 229 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

  As described above, the control of the accessory motor 229 has been described using the simplified operation model. However, in the accessory motor 229 actually used in the present embodiment, the excitation counter is updated every step (that is, the excitation counter is updated by one). Can be rotated once each time. That is, when varying each of the accessories, the value of the excitation counter is updated one by one by the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be varied, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set every time the excitation counter is updated. Each character can be accurately changed.

  It should be noted that a unique operation pattern corresponding to the effect is set for each accessory. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the above-described motor control IC (motor driver) for each elapsed time. For example, the operation pattern of the standing accessory 410 is defined to operate the accessory motor 229 in the forward direction by 10 steps in a period from the timing of the operation start until 0.2 seconds elapse. ing. That is, at the start timing of the operation of the standing accessory 410, the number of operation steps is set to 10 for the motor driver, the forward direction (direction toward the overhang position) is set as the rotation direction, and the rotation speed is set every 20 ms. An operation pattern for outputting a command for setting a rotation speed (0.2 seconds / 10 steps) for one-step operation is defined. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and after 0.2 seconds from the start of the operation, the operation is performed for 10 steps.

  Further, for 1.6 seconds from 0.2 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the operation start timing, it is stipulated that the accessory motor 229 is operated in 160 steps in the forward direction. That is, when 0.2 seconds have elapsed from the operation start timing of the standing object 410 (that is, when the value of the step counter becomes 10), 160 operation steps are set for the motor driver, An operation pattern for setting a forward direction (direction toward the overhang position) as the rotation direction and outputting a command for setting a rotation speed (1.6 seconds / 160 steps) for performing one step operation every 10 ms as the rotation speed is described. Stipulated. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and the operation is performed 170 steps (160 steps + 10 steps until 0.2 seconds) from the start of the operation.

  Further, for 0.2 seconds from 1.8 seconds to 0.2 seconds after the operation start timing, it is stipulated that the accessory motor 229 is operated for 10 steps in the forward direction. In other words, when 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the operation start timing of the standing object 410 (that is, when the value of the step counter becomes 170), the number of operation steps is set to 10 for the motor driver, An operation pattern for setting a forward direction (direction toward the overhang position) as the rotation direction and outputting a command for setting a rotation speed (0.2 seconds / 10 steps) for performing one step operation every 20 ms as the rotation speed is described. Stipulated. On the basis of this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and after 180 seconds from the start of the operation, 180 steps (170 steps from 10 steps to 1.8 seconds) are activated. This position coincides with the overhanging position of the standing object 410 (see FIG. 8).

  An operation pattern is defined so that a stop command for setting operation stop for two seconds is set. The operation pattern is defined so that an operation for returning the upright character 410 to the origin position is performed after stopping at the overhang position for 2 seconds. Specifically, four seconds after the start of the operation, the number of operation steps is set to 10 times, the negative direction (direction toward the origin position) is set as the rotational direction, and the rotational speed is set to perform one step every 20 ms as the rotational speed. An operation pattern for outputting a command for setting is defined. Thus, it is possible to return to the origin position side by 10 steps over 0.2 seconds.

  Next, after 4.2 seconds from the start of the operation (that is, 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation from the overhang position to the origin position), 160 operations are set as the number of operation steps, and the rotation direction is set to a negative value. An operation pattern for setting a direction and outputting a command for setting a rotation speed for performing a one-step operation every 10 ms as a rotation speed is defined. Thus, it is possible to return to the origin position side by 160 steps over 1.6 seconds. Then, after 5.8 seconds from the start of the operation, a command for setting the number of operation steps to 10 times, setting the rotation direction to the negative direction, and setting the rotation speed to set the rotation speed to perform one step operation every 10 ms is output. Operating patterns are defined. Thereby, it can return to the origin position.

  By operating according to this operation pattern, it is possible to move the standing object 410 to the overhang position for 2 seconds, then stop at the overhang position for 2 seconds, and then return to the original position over 2 seconds. . The reason why the operation speed (the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229) is set to be lower than the rotation speed set in another period immediately after the operation starts or after the operation stop period has elapsed is that the operation of the accessory motor 229. Is to be excited normally. That is, when the operation of the stopped accessory motor 229 is started, if the rotation speed is too high (the frequency of the pulse output from the motor driver is too high), the accessory motor 229 is based on the excitation control data. In some cases, the excitation based on the next excitation control data may be started before the excitation is performed, and the excitation of the accessory motor 229 may become impossible (step out) in the order of the excitation control data. . Therefore, when the operation of the accessory motor 229 is started, a relatively slow rotation speed is set so that the output interval of the excitation control data is not too short, and the accessory motor 229 may lose synchronism. Has been suppressed.

  Also, before stopping the accessory motor 229 (a period of 1.8 seconds to 2 seconds and a period of 5.8 seconds to 6 seconds after the start of operation), the rotation speed is slower than the rotation speed set in other periods. This is to ensure that the rotation of the accessory motor 229 is stopped at the number of steps to be stopped. That is, by reducing the rotation speed and lengthening the output interval of the excitation control data, the period from the last output of the excitation control data to the output of the stop command can be increased. Can be received more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the stop command, and to surely stop the rotation of the accessory motor 229 at a predetermined timing.

  As described above, the accessory motor 229 of this embodiment is configured such that the motor rotates once each time one excitation control data is set. This one-step operation is configured such that every time new excitation control data is set, the motor is instantaneously excited with the new setting and rotates once. The period from the start to the end of this one-step (one-time) operation is constant irrespective of the excitation control data set interval (excitation counter update interval). In other words, the load current (power consumption) required to operate the motor for one step (once) is constant regardless of the setting interval of the excitation control data. The frequency of consuming load current (power) is reduced. Therefore, the load current (electric power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is also reduced. Therefore, the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 is set to be slower than the other periods immediately after the start of the operation, after the elapse of the operation stop period, and before the operation stop. Power). Therefore, when the operation start timing of one accessory is slightly before the operation stop timing of the other accessory (that is, the rotational speed of the accessory motor 229 is reduced toward the stop of operation). The load current (power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 for changing these accessories can be suppressed from becoming too high.

  As described above, the control content of the accessory motor 229 has been described using the standing accessory 410 as an example. It is defined in a motor control command setting table (not shown) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in association with the elapsed time from the operation start timing of the object. The motion pattern is defined for each character and for each type of effect. When setting the operation of the accessory, it is easy to output the command specified in the motor control command setting table (not shown) at the timing specified in the motor control command setting table. , A predetermined operation can be set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, the accessory motor 229 can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize various effect operations using the accessory.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the operation of the accessory motor 229 has been completed is determined based on a command set for the motor driver based on the number of steps in which the accessory motor 229 has operated. That is, the operation set for the accessory motor 229 is completed based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of receptions of the execution signal output from the motor driver each time the operation of one step is set by the motor driver. It is determined whether or not it has been done, but it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration is adopted in which the elapsed time after setting a command for operating the accessory motor 229 is measured, and whether or not the operation of the accessory motor 229 has been completed is determined based on the elapsed time. May be.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 228, and when the player operates the frame button 228, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, an operation error or a vibration error of the accessory) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay. .

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 defines at least a fluctuation pattern table 222a, an operation start condition table 222b, a load reference value table 222c, a power supply return operation table 222d, and a accessory operation setting table 222e. .

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is referred to in order to select a detailed mode of the fluctuation effect (variation display) based on the rough fluctuation effect (variation display) mode notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is a table. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S1704 in FIG. 43).

  The operation start condition table 222b is a data table that specifies operation start conditions for starting operation of each accessory. In the operation start condition table 222b, operation start conditions are defined for each group composed of one or more accessories. By operating each group in accordance with the operation start condition, each accessory can be changed without interference (contact) between the accessories.

  Here, a group refers to a set of one or more characters that do not interfere with each other even if the constituent characters are simultaneously changed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, five groups from group 1 to group 5 are provided. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the accessory is operated, it is configured to perform a predetermined operation in a group unit in principle, and the pachinko machine 10 may operate the group alone or simultaneously (compositely) a plurality of groups. By performing such operations, various effects can be realized. The operation predetermined for each group is defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is configured to read and set the operation content from the ROM 222 when the operation of each group starts.

  In addition, the group 1 is constituted by each accessory provided in the second slide operation unit. When the operating condition is satisfied, the group 1 operates each of the slide characters 810, 820, 830, and 840 from the origin position (see FIG. 5) to the overhang position (see FIG. 10), and then moves to the original position (see FIG. 5). (See Reference) is performed. The group 2 is constituted by each accessory provided in the first slide operation unit 500. When the operating condition is satisfied, the group 2 tilts while rotating the rotating accessory 520 clockwise around the rotating shaft 520 as a rotation axis. After operating the accessory 510 to the extended position (see FIG. 11), a series of returning the tilting accessory 510 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) while rotating the rotating accessory 520 counterclockwise. The operation is performed.

  The group 3 is constituted by the respective accessories provided in the swing operation unit 400. When the operating condition of the group 3 is satisfied, the erecting character 410 is operated to the overhang position (see FIG. 8), and then the erecting character is activated. A series of operations of returning the object 410 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) is performed. The group 4 is composed of the right swinging accessory 710 and the left swinging accessory 730 among the accessories provided in the decoration accessory unit 700, and when the operating condition is satisfied, the right swinging accessory 710, and After the left swinging object 730 performs the swinging operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5), a series of operations is performed in which the operation stops at the origin position (see FIG. 5).

  The group 5 is constituted by the central swinging actor 720 among the accessories provided in the decoration accessory unit 700, and is configured to be able to execute two kinds of operations according to the effect. Specifically, a series of operations in which the swing operation is performed at the origin position (see FIG. 5), and then the operation is stopped at the origin position (see FIG. 5). 13), and a series of operations of returning to the origin position (see FIG. 5) after execution of the descending operation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of groups are provided, and a predetermined operation is performed for each group. Thereby, one group can be operated independently, or a plurality of groups can be operated simultaneously (complexly), so that various effects can be realized. In addition, if the configuration is such that the actions of a plurality of characters are independently set one by one, the operating conditions become complicated. That is, at the time of starting the fluctuating effect or at the time of starting the operation of the character, such as during the effect, it is determined whether or not to start each of the characters, and further, the operation corresponding to the character to be started. Need to be set respectively. On the other hand, if a group is defined as in the present embodiment, a simple operation of selecting a group to be operated and setting a predetermined operation for the selected group is performed, Each accessory can be operated appropriately. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In addition, among the respective swinging members 710, 720, and 730 constituting the decorative accessory unit 700, only the center swinging member 720 is set as a different group (group 5) because of the other rocking members 710 and 730. There is no risk of interference with a role included in another unit, while the central swinging role 720 moves to another position (a standing role 410 or a tilting role when the descent operation is performed to the overhang position). This is because there is a risk of interference with the object 510). In other words, if all the belongings constituting the decorative accessory unit 700 are grouped into the same group, the central rocking role 720 must be operated at a timing that does not interfere with the other rocking roles. 710 and the operation of the right swinging accessory 730 are limited. In order to prevent this, in the present embodiment, the center rocking role 720 is grouped differently from the left rocking role 710 and the right rocking role 730, and the left rocking role 710 and the right rocking role are arranged. The degree of freedom of the operation of the object 730 is increased.

  The above-described operation start condition table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation start condition table 222b. As shown in FIG. 17A, the operation start condition table 222b defines operation start conditions for each group. Specifically, as the operation condition of the group 2, it is defined that both of the characters constituting the groups 3 and 5 are the origin positions. This is because the standing role 410 included in the group 3 or the tilting role 510 included in the group 2 moves to the extended position in a state where the central swinging component 720 included in the group 5 operates in the extended position. This is because, in such a case, there is a risk of colliding with the standing role 410 or the central swinging role 720.

  In addition, as the operation condition of the group 3, it is specified that both the characters constituting the groups 2 and 5 are the origin positions. This is because the tilting component 510 included in the group 2 or the central swinging member 720 included in the group 5 is operated to the overhang position and the upright agent 410 included in the group 3 is operated to the overhang position. This is because, in such a case, there is a risk of colliding with the tilting role object 510 or the central swinging role object 720.

  Further, as the operating condition of the group 5, it is defined that both the characters constituting the groups 2 and 3 are the origin positions. This is because the central swinging actor 720 included in the group 5 moves to the overhang position in a state where the tilting actor 510 included in the group 2 or the upright actor 410 included in the group 3 operates at the overhang position. In such a case, there is a risk of colliding with the tilting role object 510 or the standing role item 410.

  On the other hand, for groups 1 and 4, the operation start conditions are not specified. This is because, regardless of the arrangement of the slide roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 constituting the group 1, and the right swing role 710 and the left swing role 730 constituting the group 5, This is because the positional relationship is such that there is no risk of interfering with the operation of other characters.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by setting the operating condition of the accessory in units of groups, interference of the accessories in different groups is suppressed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the role articles from colliding with each other and from being damaged by the impact of the collision. Further, since the action of the accessory is obstructed by another accessory, the action of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are shifted, giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the operating conditions need not be set for each accessory but only for each group, the design can be simplified. Therefore, at the time of design, it is possible to reduce the work of the designer who sets the operation of the accessory. Also, it is sufficient to prepare a table for setting the operating conditions in groups, and it is not necessary to prepare a data table for setting the operating conditions for each accessory, and the operating conditions for each group are defined. It is sufficient to reduce the amount of data in the operation start condition table 222b. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage area.

  In the present embodiment, five groups are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of groups may be reduced, for example, three groups may be provided. Thereby, the data amount of the data table can be further reduced. In addition, the number of groups may be increased, for example, seven groups may be configured. Thereby, the action of the accessory can be set more finely, so that the degree of freedom of the effect action can be increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The load reference value table 222b is a data table that defines a value (drive load reference value) corresponding to a load current (power consumption) for driving each accessory motor 229 for each accessory. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the load reference value table 222b, the total value of the load current (power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the driven accessory is represented by the current capacity (rated power). (The sum of the drive load reference values exceeds 100). When it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed, the driving of the accessory to be newly driven is cancelled.

  Details of the load reference value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the load reference value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 17B, the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 17B) stores the drive load reference value (the load current (the consumption Power)).

  Specifically, the drive load reference value when driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 (group 1) is 15 It is. That is, when the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 is driven, a load current (electric power) corresponding to the drive load reference value 15 is consumed. Therefore, when the respective slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 (group 1) are simultaneously varied (see FIG. 10), this corresponds to the drive load reference value 60 (15 × 4). Load current (power) is consumed. Therefore, even if all the characters in Group 1 are simultaneously varied, there is a margin of 40 in terms of the driving load reference value with respect to the current capacity (rated power). , And can be operated simultaneously with other groups of characters.

  In addition, when the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the tilting accessory 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 (group 2) is driven, the driving load reference value is 30, and the accessory corresponding to the rotating accessory 520 is provided. The driving load reference value when the driving motor 229 is driven is 10. Therefore, when the characters constituting the group 2 are simultaneously changed, a load current (power) corresponding to the driving load reference value 40 (30 + 10) is consumed. The rotating accessory 520 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise about the rotating shaft 520a as a rotation axis. However, the rotating load 520 has the same driving load reference value in either direction. ).

  The group 3 is composed of only the standing object 410 of the swing operation unit 400. The driving load reference value corresponding to the standing character 410 is 15, and by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the standing character 410, the load current (power) corresponding to the driving load reference value of 15 is increased. Consumed.

  The group 4 is composed of the left swinging role 710 and the right swinging role 730 out of the bonuses constituting the decoration accessory unit 700. As shown in FIG. 17, the load reference values corresponding to these are all 10, and by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each swinging accessory 710, 730, the drive load reference value becomes 10. The corresponding load current (power) is consumed.

  The group 5 is composed of only the central swinging object 720 of the decorative accessory unit 700. The driving load reference value corresponding to the central swinging role 720 is 15, and by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the central swinging role 720, the load current corresponding to the driving load reference value of 15 is obtained. (Power) is consumed.

  In the present embodiment, based on the drive load reference value defined in the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 17B), the accessory motor corresponding to the variable accessory and the newly-variable accessory. 229 so that the total load current (power consumption) is equal to or less than the current capacity (less than the rated power). More specifically, a driving load reference value corresponding to the driven accessory motor 229 and a driving load reference value of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the newly changed accessory are added, and the total is 100. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that the number exceeds 100 (that is, the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed by newly changing the role), the role that is to be changed newly is changed. It is configured to stop the operation of the object.

  Here, conventionally, there are few types of accessories as compared with recent gaming machines, and even if the accessories are operated freely, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. I never did. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and the load current (electric power) consumed by operating the accessories has also increased. Therefore, when a plurality of characters are operated at the same time, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) may be consumed. In such a case, as a result of exceeding the specifications of the power supply device, the control device for controlling the accessory may be shut down, the power of the gaming machine itself may be turned off, or an abnormal operation of the accessory may occur. There is a possibility that a problem of being lost may occur.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed, the role of a new accessory to be operated is determined. Since the operation is canceled, the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within the range of the load current (power consumption) of the current capacity or less (the rated power or less). That is, it is possible to prevent the load current (power consumption) from exceeding the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 for controlling the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the operation of the accessory is abnormal. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the current capacity from being exceeded, the operating condition is not set in detail for each accessory motor 229, but the accessory motor 229 is simply newly driven. In this case, it is determined whether or not the drive load reference value exceeds a predetermined value (100), and it is determined whether or not the accessory motor 229 is to be newly driven. In other words, the driving of the accessory motor 229 within the range of the current capacity or less is realized by relatively simple processing. Therefore, the designer of the pachinko machine 10 only needs to describe a simple discriminating process in the program, and it is not necessary to define in detail a condition for changing each accessory in a data table or the like. Work amount can be reduced. Further, since the data amount of the data table and the like can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage capacity.

  In the load reference value table 222c of the present embodiment, only one type of load reference value corresponding to each character is defined, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, for example, the drive load reference value in the case where each accessory motor 229 is rotated at a normal speed (when each operation step of the accessory motor 229 is set at regular time intervals), Two types, that is, a drive load reference value when the motor is rotated at a low speed (when each operation step of the accessory motor 229 is set at a time interval longer than usual) may be provided. In this case, when the total of the drive load reference values when the normal speed is set exceeds 100, the total of the drive load reference values becomes 100 or less by rotating the motor at a speed lower than normal. May be controlled as follows. If the operation step interval of the accessory motor 229 is made longer, the average value of the load current (power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 becomes smaller, so that the drive load reference value can be made smaller.

  Also, the operation pattern of the accessory may be configured such that the operation speed changes during the operation (that is, the rotation speed of the motor changes), and a drive load reference value for each operation speed may be defined. . For example, within one second after starting the operation and within one second before the end of the operation, the accessory control motor 229 is operated at a lower speed than another operation period (operation period for a normal speed). Alternatively, the driving load reference value for the low speed and the driving load reference value for the normal speed may be defined. Thus, for example, when the operation start timing of one accessory is within one second before the end of the operation of the other accessory, it is possible to refer to the drive load reference value for the low speed instead of the normal speed. Since it is possible to start the operation, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the current capacity (rated power) may be exceeded.

  The power supply return operation table 222d is a data table that is referred to when performing a power supply return operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally changed when the power is turned on. The power return operation is executed each time the power is turned on (regardless of whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed). In the power return operation table 222d, a return operation for each type of accessory is defined in association with the value of the return pointer 223f. If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation of any of the accessories by the return operation, an error command is set (see S1503 in FIG. 41). This error command includes information indicating the type of abnormality and the location where the abnormality has occurred. The display control device 114 that has received the error command performs a display on the third symbol display device 81 indicating the type of abnormality and the location of the abnormality. As described above, by performing the return operation based on turning on the power, it is possible to quickly grasp whether or not each accessory has an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the clerk of the hall starts the game for the player without noticing that the accessory of the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to return all the accessories to the origin position (origin return) before executing the power return operation based on the power return operation table 222d. In other words, when the power supply is cut off during the change of the accessory, the power supply return operation is executed after the home position is returned based on the power-on. As a result, only one type of operation that starts from the origin position needs to be prepared for the power return operation. Therefore, the data amount of the power return operation table 222d can be reduced.

  When the power is cut off and the power is turned on again during the change of the accessory, the reason why the operation of the accessory is not executed from the continuation of the operation is that the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. That is, once the power is turned off, it becomes impossible to grasp the progress of the effect performed so far. Therefore, regardless of whether the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed or not, when the power is turned on, the home return operation is performed and then the power return operation is performed. In the case where the effect is in the middle of the effect when the power is turned off, a simple display effect is configured to be executed at least until the effect period elapses after the power is restored. This simple display effect (an effect using a power-on image, which will be described later) is configured so that the same effect is repeated until the end time of the effect, regardless of the degree of progress of the effect. The effect can be displayed immediately without requiring the progress of the effect. Therefore, since no effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the effect period elapses after the power is turned on, it is possible to suppress anxiety of the player. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the storage contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up. However, a configuration may be adopted in which backup power is supplied and the information stored in the RAM 223 can be retained even after the power is cut off. With this, when the power is cut off during the production, the progress of the production at the time of the power supply being turned off after the power is turned on can be determined, and the production can be executed from the continuation. be able to.

  The details of the power return operation table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of the power return operation table 222d. As shown in FIG. 18, the operation contents of the accessory are defined in the power supply return operation table 222d for each value of the return pointer 223f. Although the details will be described later, the return pointer 223f sets the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) every time the main process (see FIG. 39) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed until the return operation ends. Is updated one at a time.

As shown in FIG. 18, the power return operation table 222d of the present embodiment (see FIG. 18)
Are configured to execute the return operation in the order of group 1 → group 2 → group 3 → group 4 → group 5 in accordance with the update of the return pointer 223f. Further, in the return operation, each accessory is changed from the origin position to the overhang position, and then is changed to return to the origin position. That is, the entire operation range in which the accessory may change during the normal game is exhaustively operated by the return operation. Thus, when an abnormality has occurred in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected.

  In addition, the power return operation table 222d of the present embodiment is configured to stop the operation for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after changing each accessory to the overhang position. This makes it possible to detect whether an error has occurred during the operation from the overhang position and the operation from the overhang position to the origin position, and also to detect whether or not an abnormality has occurred during operation stop. can do. Note that the abnormality during the suspension of the operation is, for example, a case where the operation is not stopped in spite of the fact that the operation has been suspended, or the point of origin before the predetermined period (2000 ms) designated as the operation suspension period elapses. The return to the position may occur, or the return to the origin position may not be started even after the operation stop period has elapsed.

  Further, the power supply return operation table 222d of the present embodiment is configured to set an operation stop period for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after the return operation of all the characters from group 1 to group 5 is completed. I have. This suspension period is used as a timing for ending the confirmation and shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10 when confirming whether or not the sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 113 normally starts up by shipping inspection or the like. Is provided. That is, if the accessory is operated immediately after the return operation is completed, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 waits until the operated accessory returns to the original point and then shuts off the power or operates the accessory. It is necessary to shut down the power supply during the operation and manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power supply is cut off, which may deteriorate the inspection efficiency. On the other hand, by providing an operation stop period after the end of the return operation as in the present embodiment, if the power is shut off during the operation stop period, the power is shut off in a state where all the characters are at the origin positions. State. Therefore, since it is not necessary to wait until returning to the origin position or to manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power is turned off, it is possible to improve inspection efficiency such as shipping inspection.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The accessory operation setting table 222e is a data table that defines the type (group) of the accessory to be operated and the operation timing in various effects of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is set based on the accessory operation setting table 222e.

  The details of the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the accessory operation setting table 222e. As shown in FIG. 19, in the accessory operation setting table 222e, the timing of operating the accessory and the group of the accessory operated at the operation timing are defined for each corresponding effect.

  Specifically, in the opening effect in which the effect time is 5 seconds, the operation timing of the accessory is set at the start of the effect, and it is defined that the group of the accessory to be operated at the operation timing is Group 1. . That is, it is stipulated that the slide combination items 810, 820, 830, 840 are operated in accordance with the start of the opening effect. As described above, when the operating condition of Group 1 is satisfied, each of the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840 is moved from the origin position (see FIG. 5) to the overhang position (see FIG. 10), A series of operations of returning to the position (see FIG. 5) is performed. Further, as described above, the control contents (commands output to the motor driver for each elapsed time) for setting the series of operations are defined in the motor control command setting table (not shown).

  In addition, in super-reach productions where the production time is 20 seconds and super-reach productions and shared super-reach productions, it is stipulated that at least 8 seconds have passed since the production started, and the characters in groups 4 and 5 are rocked. I have. Note that, as described above, when the operating condition of the group 4 is satisfied, the right swinging accessory 710 and the left swinging accessory 730 perform the swinging operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5), and then move to the origin position (see FIG. 5). 5)), and when the operating condition of the swing operation is satisfied in the group 5, the central swinging member 720 performs the swing operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5). A series of operations that stop at the origin position (see FIG. 5) are executed.

  In addition, in the out-of-reach super-reach effect and the shared super-reach effect, it is defined that the character of group 2 is operated at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect. As described above, when the operating condition of the group 2 is satisfied, the tilting role object 510 is rotated clockwise around the rotation shaft 520 while the tilting role object 510 is extended to the extended position (see FIG. 11). After this operation, a series of operations of returning the tilting role object 510 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) while rotating the rotating role object 520 counterclockwise is executed. By operating different accessories at different timings, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation of the jackpot.

  In the special reach A for which the production time is 30 seconds and the special reach A for common use, it is specified that the character of group 3 is operated at the timing when 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production. Note that, as described above, when the operating condition of the group 3 is satisfied, the standing character 410 is moved to the overhang position (see FIG. 8), and then the standing character 410 is returned to the origin position (see FIG. 5). Is performed.

  Thereafter, it is defined that the character of group 2 is operated at a timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, and the characters of group 1 and group 3 are operated at a timing at which 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect ( That is, the operation is performed so as to be in the state shown in FIG. 12). The more actors act, the more the appearance of the effect becomes flashy, and it is possible to improve the player's expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, by operating a plurality of groups (group 1 and group 3) in combination at the end of the effect, it is possible to excite the player's expectation as the effect progresses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the special reach B for which the production time is 30 seconds and the shared special reach B, at the timing when 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, the characters in the groups 1 and 2 are operated (that is, the state shown in FIG. 11). To operate). In addition, it is defined that the character of group 3 is operated at a timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, and that the characters of group 1 and group 3 are to be operated at the time when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect. Is stipulated. By setting the movement pattern of the accessory to be different from the out-of-special reach A and the shared special reach A, it is possible to execute effects in different modes even during the same effect period. Therefore, the effects can be diversified.

  Also, in the special reach which is selected only when the production period is 30 seconds and the jackpot A is won, the characters in the group 1 and the group 2 are operated at a timing when 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production (ie, , Operating in the state shown in FIG. 11). In addition, it is defined that the character of group 3 is operated at a timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, and the character of group 1 is operated at a timing at which 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, and the group 5 is operated. Is made to move down (that is, to move to the state shown in FIG. 13).

  That is, until 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, the movement pattern of the accessory is the same as the special reach B and the shared special reach B, and only the operation after 25 seconds from the start of the effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the action of the accessory before the elapse of 25 seconds, whether it is the special reach B, the shared special reach, or the special reach. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player watch whether the player hits or misses the game until 25 seconds, which is the end of the effect. In addition, when the character in Group 5 descends after 25 seconds, the player recognizes that the current production was a special reach (that is, a big hit A after the end of the variable production). Can be done. Therefore, for the player who recognizes that the big hit will occur before the end of the production, for the remaining production period, the satisfaction with the big hit and the occurrence of the character action in which the big hit is determined You can have a sense of accomplishment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the operation timing of the accessory and the group of the accessory to be operated are defined in the accessory operation setting table 222e, each group is assigned based on the accessory operation setting table 222e. By simply performing a predetermined operation on the other hand, it is possible to realize operations of various kinds of accessories.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is not performed in all the variable effects, but the operation of the accessory is set only in a part of the variable effects having a relatively long fluctuation time. A fluctuation production with a relatively long fluctuation time has a low probability of being selected as a production for notifying a departure, and is likely to be selected as a production for notifying a jackpot. Thus, the player can have a high sense of expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether the accessory operates or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the accessory is operated only in the opening effect or a part of the variation pattern effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that an accessory may operate also in other effects, such as an ending effect and a round effect. Further, the type of the variable effect for operating the accessory may be increased, and for example, the accessory may be operated even in the off-normal reach or the hit normal reach. This makes it possible to further diversify the effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a load value storage area 223e, and a return pointer 223f. , An initialization flag 223g, a closing operation flag 223h, an accessory operation flag 223i, and a discrimination value storage area 223j.

  The winning information storage area 223a corresponds to one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first entrance 64 (special figure 1 first area to special figure 1 fourth area), and a second entrance 640. There are four areas (first area of special figure 2 to fourth area of special figure 2), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and holds the variable effect held by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of times of waiting) up to four times for each type of the entrance that has entered the ball.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control apparatus 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added due to the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, the special figure 1 reservation after the addition is performed. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the ball number counter 203c or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the fluctuation display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is changed. The command for indicating the number of retained balls is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113 calculates the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and special figure 2 reserved ball number of main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203d is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1608 in FIG. 42). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command and the type of the reserved ball (whether the reservation is based on the entering ball into the first entrance port 64 or not). , And whether the hold is based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the 81 small area Ds1. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also changed to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 42), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 42), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1708 in FIG. 43). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The load value storage area 223e is a storage area in which a value (drive load total value) corresponding to the total load current supplied to the driven accessory motor 229 is stored. The drive load total value is a value represented by the ratio of the load current value to the current capacity, similarly to the drive load reference value. For example, when all of the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840 constituting the group 1 are variable, and the other roles constituting the group are inactive, the driving load reference corresponding to the group 1 is set. The total value of 60 is stored in the load value storage area 223e.

  Based on the driving load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the driving load reference value corresponding to the newly changed accessory, whether the current capacity is exceeded when the accessory is newly driven is determined. Is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the driving load total value and the newly variable driving load reference value exceeds 100. If it is determined that the total exceeds 100 (that is, the load current supplied to the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity), the accessory corresponding to the accessory that is to be newly changed Of the motor 229 is canceled. This allows the accessory motor 229 to be constantly driven within the range of the load current that is equal to or less than the current capacity, so that the load current can be prevented from exceeding the current capacity. Therefore, when the current capacity is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or an abnormal operation of the accessory occurs. It is possible to suppress the situation.

  The return pointer 223f is used to select the operation data of the accessory from the power supply return operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) that defines the operation content of the return operation of the accessory performed based on the power-on. More specifically, each time the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) executed at 1 ms intervals is performed, the return pointer 223f is updated (1 is added to the value of the return pointer 223f), and the updated value is updated. The action of the accessory indicated by the value is set. Since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the return pointer 223f is cleared to zero (the value becomes 0000H) when the power is turned off. For this reason, every time the power is turned on, the return operation of the accessory can be executed from the beginning of the power return operation table 222d.

  The initialization flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the return operation of the accessory performed upon turning on the power is performed. While the initialization flag 223g is on, an initial operation process (see FIG. 41) for setting a return operation of the accessory is executed. On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223g is off, it indicates that the return operation of the accessory has already been completed, and thus the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) is skipped (see S1401: No in FIG. 40). The initialization flag 223g is set on (see S1206 in FIG. 38) in the home position return process (see S37) of the startup process (see FIG. 37). On the other hand, in the initial operation process, when it is determined that the return operation of the accessory has been completed (that is, when the END information is read from the power return operation table 222d), it is set to off (see S1513 in FIG. 41). ).

  The closing operation flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the return to the original position of the accessory executed before the power return operation is completed. If the throwing operation flag 223h is on, it indicates that the return to origin of the accessory has been completed, and if it is off, it indicates that the return to origin has not been completed. The closing operation flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that the home position return has been completed (see S1507 in FIG. 41). Further, as described above, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the power-on operation flag 223h is also cleared (ie, turned off) when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The accessory operation flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not each accessory is being changed. The accessory operation flag 223i is composed of 2 bytes, and each accessory is associated with each bit. Specifically, in order from the lower bit, a right sliding role 810, a left sliding role 820, an upper sliding role 830, a lower sliding role 840, a tilting role 510, a rotating role 520, and a standing role. 410, a left swing role 710, a right swing role 730, and a center swing role 720 are associated with each other.

  Each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i has a value of 1 indicating that the corresponding accessory is being changed, and has a value of 0 indicating that the corresponding accessory has been stopped. The value of the empty bit is fixed to 0. For example, if the upper byte of the accessory operation flag 223i is 00H (that is, 00000000B in binary notation) and the lower byte is 40H (that is, 01000000B in binary notation), the standing agent 410 is variable. Yes, the other characters mean that they are suspended. Based on the state of each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i, the type of the operating accessory can be specified.

  The determination value storage area 223j is a storage area for storing a determination value for determining whether or not the total load current supplied to drive the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity. Specifically, a value (determination value) obtained by adding the drive load total value stored in the load value storage area 223i and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory motor 229 to be newly driven is determined. It is memorized. It is determined whether or not a load current exceeding the current capacity is to be supplied based on whether or not this determination value is 100. If the load current exceeds the current capacity, the accessory motor newly attempted to be driven is determined. 229 is canceled. This allows the accessory motor 229 to be constantly driven within the range of the load current that is equal to or less than the current capacity, so that the load current can be prevented from exceeding the current capacity. Therefore, when the current capacity is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or an abnormal operation of the accessory occurs. It is possible to suppress the situation.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 42) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power (drive current) to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storage. The character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. For transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and setting the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The processing of reading from the other bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table to be described later) used in the control program are stored in the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, by a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) which is executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1801 in FIG. 44) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list described later (see FIG. 23) transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 44). The power-on main image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, This is a simple image having a smaller data amount than an image displayed during a normal game. Therefore, the image data can be transferred quickly after the power is turned on, and the image can be displayed.

  During display of the main image at power-on, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 On the power-on main image display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "O" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on of the symbol "X" in the same position as the symbol "○" The change image is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the change period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", display "○" symbol for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if "missing special symbol", display "X" symbol after stopping the variable effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, for example, when the operation abnormality of the accessory is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 uses the error command to display both the type of the error and the location where the error has occurred in the display control device 114. Notify to The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. It is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, an opening data transfer flag. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the departure is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state. As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces (back surfaces A to C) corresponding to the stage (one of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, Information for specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Is defined (address "0002H" in FIG. 22 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 44). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 55B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 46B), and When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 46) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 46 (b) (see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 55A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for the image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 23) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image of one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. ) In S2103), a pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 52) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 23), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Accordingly, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 23, the back image used for the one-frame image, the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 46B Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The opening data transfer flag 233i is a flag indicating whether or not it is a timing to start the transfer of the image data used for the opening effect. Show. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that it is not the transfer timing of the image data used for the opening effect.

  The opening data transfer flag 233i is used for the display suspension received from the sound lamp control device 113 in the stop type command process (see FIG. 48B) which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 47). When it is determined that the type command is a command indicating a jackpot stop type, it is set to ON (see S2405 in FIG. 48). Also, in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56), this is set to off when setting the transfer of image data used for the opening effect (see S3510 in FIG. 56).

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite in which no image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 56). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 46B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 57).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, an example in which the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and the operation of various accessories are combined to perform one effect will be described. First, FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reach effect (combination reach reach effect) in which the display image and the operation of the accessory are combined. As described above in the description of FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the above-described combined benefit reach effect is generated in a part of the effect performed when the reach occurs. In addition, the role-combined reach effect is configured to easily appear in the case of a reach effect that is a big hit, and is configured to be less likely to appear in the case of an out-of-reach reach. As described above, the probability of a special symbol jackpot is 1/300 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/30 in the high probability state of the special symbol, so that most of the lottery is missed. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the role combination reach effect that is difficult to appear in the case of the off-reach becomes low.

  In the example of FIG. 24, in the special reach A or the shared special reach A, out of the combination composite reach production, immediately before 8 seconds elapse from the production start (see FIG. 24A), and 8 seconds elapse. And a state in which the accessory is operated based on the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 24B). As shown in FIG. 24A, in the role-combined reach effect, the right symbol column and the left symbol column among the varying symbol columns stop at the same symbol (for example, “7” symbol) ( FIG. 24 (a)). Then, before the middle symbol row stops, the standing character 410 is changed to operate up to the overhang position (the central portion of the third symbol display device 81) (see FIG. 24B). Although not shown, the swinging members 710, 720, and 730 constituting the decorative accessory unit are caused to swing at the origin positions. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the uprising role 410 has been operated and that it is a role-product composite reach effect. In addition, as described above, the role-combined reach effect is configured to easily appear when a big hit occurs, so that the player can expect the big hit after the end of the change. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity is exceeded by newly operating the accessory motor 229, the drive of the accessory motor 229 is canceled. Is configured. In other words, there may be a case where the standing character 410 cannot be changed in spite of the selection of the character combined reach effect. For example, in the power supply return operation, when the transfer operation of all the resident images is completed and the start condition of the accessory composite reach effect is satisfied while the return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is being executed. It is. In this case, a load current corresponding to a driving load reference value of 60 is used to operate each of the slide characters (group 1) (see FIG. 17B). When each of the swinging members 710, 720, and 730 is operated, a load current exceeding the current capacity is consumed. Therefore, the operations of the standing member 410 and each of the rocking members 710, 720, and 730 are performed. Canceled. Also in this case, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an alternative effect which is an alternative to the role-effect composite reach effect so that the player can recognize that the effect is the composite-effect reach effect.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of the alternative effect. In this alternative effect, the fish jumps to the middle symbol row portion of the third symbol display device 81 instead of changing the standing character 410 to the overhang position (see FIG. 24B) in the accessory complex reach effect. Display the image. This fish bouncing effect is configured not to appear in effects other than the alternative effect. In addition, even when the standing role 410 moves to the overhanging position (see FIG. 24B) in the role-combined reach effect, the appearance is as if the fish jumped on the water. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the alternative effect is an effect of the same system executed in place of the role-combined reach effect. Therefore, even if the operation of the standing role 410 is cancelled, by displaying the substitute effect, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit after the end of the reach effect.

  FIG. 26A is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect (opening effect) for notifying the player of the start of the big hit when the result of the variable effect is a big hit. In this opening effect, the operation of group 1 is set, and a predetermined display effect (see FIG. 26A) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 moves to the extended position, and each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the third symbol display device 81. Are displayed in the display area corresponding to the "heart" -shaped opening formed by the (see FIG. 26A). In this way, by displaying the character indicating the blessing, the player can easily recognize that the big hit state, which is an advantageous state for the player, has been achieved. In addition, by swinging the swinging members 710, 720, 730 at the origin position, the player's attention is attracted to the pachinko machine 10 more. Thereby, it is possible to make the player surely notice that the big hit is started. Therefore, as a result of the player not noticing the start of the jackpot and not launching the ball, the end condition of one or a plurality of rounds is suppressed without causing the ball to win at the specific winning opening 65a. can do.

  Note that, similarly to the role-combined reach effect, when the current capacity is determined to be exceeded by newly operating the special-purpose motor 229, the driving of the special-purpose motor 229 is canceled. I have. In other words, there is a case where the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840 cannot be changed regardless of the start timing of the opening effect. For example, when the opening effect is started during the return operation of the accessory, the current capacity is increased by operating each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 and each swinging accessory 710, 720, 730. For example, a case in which a load current exceeding the above is supplied. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an alternative effect instead of the opening effect so that the player can recognize that the big hit is started.

  FIG. 26 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an alternative effect executed when the operation of the accessory is canceled in the opening effect. In the alternative effect of the opening effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image similar to the appearance when each of the slide characters 810, 820, 830, and 840 has moved to the overhang position. In addition, as in the case of the normal opening effect, the character “Congratulations” is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, even if the operation of each of the bonuses is canceled, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is the timing to start the big hit. Therefore, since the player can have a sense of happiness due to the start of the jackpot, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol changing process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Execute (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d are acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204), (S204: No) Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S205).

  In the process of S205, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203c is 0 (S205: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S206). ), A reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S207). The set ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. I do.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S207, the data corresponding to the entry into the first entry opening 64 among the data stored in the special symbol reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved first area to the special figure 1 reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, special figure 1 reserved first area → execution area, special figure 1 reserved second area → special figure 1 reserved first area, special figure 1 reserved third area → special figure 1 reserved second area, special figure 1 reserved second area The data in each area is shifted, for example, the fourth area in FIG. 1 reservation → the third area in special figure 1 reservation. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S212.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one. Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S210). The set ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. I do.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S210, the data corresponding to the entry into the second entrance 640 is shifted among the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S211). In the process of S211, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area to the special figure 2 reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, Toku-zu 2 reserved first area → execution area, Toku-zu 2 reserved second area → Toku-zu 2 reserved first area, Toku-zu 2 reserved 3 area → Toku-zu 2 reserved 2nd area, toku The data in each area is shifted, for example, FIG. 2 reserved fourth area → special figure 2 reserved third area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S212.

  In the process of S212 executed after the process of S208 or S211, a special symbol change start process for starting a change display (change effect) based on the data of the execution area is executed (S212). Details of the special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the variable effect executed on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S214), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S212) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S217), and the process proceeds to S220. When the start of the special symbol big hit is set by the process of S217, the opening command is set when the big hit control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed. As a result, an opening effect (see FIG. 26 (a)) is executed, and a big hit is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S218). If the value of the counter 203g is 1 or more (S218: Yes), the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is decremented by 1 (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0 (S218: No), the process of S219 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S220.

  In the process of S220, a stop command for stopping and displaying the changing third symbol is set on the third symbol display device 81 (S220), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of a special symbol change start process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S212). This special symbol change start process (S212) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203f of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probable change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change flag 203f is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state (probable change state). If the probability change flag 203f is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol.

  If the probability change flag 203f is ON (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state (probability change state), so that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the high Based on the first random number table 202a for probabilities, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, ten random numbers of “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270” are set as the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot, and the first random number When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value which is the winning, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability change flag 203f is off (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 is obtained because the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol. Then, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the first probability random number table 202a for the low probability time (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. Only "7" is set as the random number value which becomes the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches "7", it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. . When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the processing of S305, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots) are compared. A, jackpot B), it is determined which is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined to be the big hit A (probably variable big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the big hit B (A time saving big hit) is determined (see FIG. 15B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for a long time)”, “outside (for a short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “outside special reach” various types are defined. The variation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B are defined as "common normal reach", "common super reach", and "special special reach". The variation pattern for jackpot A is "special reach". Are defined, and as the variation patterns of winning / losing sharing, various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “shared super reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot (that is, the special symbol is out of the way) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out-of-special is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete out is set. If it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (FIG. 35). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and when there is a start winning, a value indicated by various random number counters. And a process for executing the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the held random numbers counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, even if there is no ball entering the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is not changed. If it is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S408. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special figure 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. I do.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (special figure 1 reserved first area to special figure 1 reserved fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 1 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 1 reserved second area is used. If the value is 2, the special figure 1 reserved third area is used. If the value is 3, the special figure 1 reserved fourth area is used. And the first area.

  Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. Then, a winning information command for notifying the prediction result to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S407), and the process proceeds to S408.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / no-go, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  In the processing of S401, when the ball entry to the first entrance 64 is not detected (S401: No), there is a prize to the first entrance 64 and the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c In the case where the value (N1) is 4, which is the maximum value (S403: No), and in the process of S408 executed when the process of S407 is completed, the ball has entered the second entrance 640. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S408). In the process of S408, similarly to the process of S401, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S408: Yes), the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S409), and the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N2) of the number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S410).

  Then, whether there is no ball entering the second entrance 640 (S408: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is not changed. If it is not less than 4 (S410: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S408: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S410: Yes), the special figure 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S411). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S412).

  The reserved ball count command set here is also stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201 in the same manner as the reserved ball count command set in the processing of S405. In the external output process (S901) of FIG. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. I do.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S412, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to special figure 2 reserved fourth area) (S413). In the process of S413, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 2 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 reserved second area is used. If the value is 2, the special figure 2 reserved third area is used. If the value is 3, the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is used. And the first area.

  Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S413, the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and its variation pattern are predicted. Then, a winning information command for notifying the prediction result to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S414), and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric power attached to the second ball entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

  In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the middle symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device, and the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is performed. In the middle. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S502). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of the variable display is held on the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the during-hours counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time reduction counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203g during the time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol.

  If the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during a special symbol big hit, it is configured such that a lottery of a normal symbol is hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. The specific winning opening 65a is provided in the front right upper direction with respect to the second ball entrance 640 (see FIG. 2). Further, in the closed state of the specific winning opening 65a, the ball reaching the specific winning opening 65a is guided to the lower right direction because the upper part of the variable winning device 65 has a gentle inclination toward the lower right direction. Is done. Therefore, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second entrance 640 during the special symbol jackpot, a large number of balls that flow downward and to the lower right without entering the specific winning opening 65a. The ball enters the mouth 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so it is acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 15C).

  In the processing of S508, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 (S508: No), the processing shifts to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the low Based on the random number table for ordinary symbols for probability, a lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is obtained (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 15C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512), and when it is determined that it is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S514). If the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the special symbol is hit at this moment. It is determined whether or not it is (S515). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the processing of S515, if the special symbol is not during the jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 640 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S512: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203g during the time reduction is 1 or more (S519). If the value of the counter 203g during the time reduction is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the second entrance 640 is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed (S502). S522). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S520 or S521 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or the processing of S518, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S524). If the result of the lottery is a normal symbol hit (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and the process ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the processing of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, the first pass is performed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per two.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ordinary entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203e is less than 4 If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203e is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In the processing of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). If it is not stored (S805: No). Since the processing at the time of the previous power-off may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S812 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S812 in such a case. Although details will be described later in the description of the main processing (see FIG. 35), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S815, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power-off information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly performed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S804: No). S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later (see FIG. 35).

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic processing of a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripherals). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27). Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command to hold the number of balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) and the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process (S906), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends, the first symbol display is updated. The variable display executed on the symbol display device 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29). (1) Stop display (lighting display) on the symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S523 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31). I do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). In the process of S908, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has elapsed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S908, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 33 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the initialization process (see S801 in FIG. 34). When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). The jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the (large opening port) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and the process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1003, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1003: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is in a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1007, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all eight rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the processing of S1009, if it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects an ending effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1009, if it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect. If this is done (S1011: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1012), and this processing ends. The setting performed in the process of S1012 includes, for example, a process of setting the probability change flag 203f to ON when the jackpot to be ended is the jackpot A and a process of setting the jackpot to be ended when the jackpot to be ended is the jackpot B. A process of setting 100 to the counter 203g is exemplified. By executing the processing of S1012, it is possible to shift to the gaming state according to the type of big hit based on the end of the ending effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), this processing is ended as it is.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 37, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, the arrangement of each accessory is confirmed, and an origin return process for returning the accessory shifted from the origin position to the origin position is executed (S1102). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, by executing the origin return processing (S1102), the return operation of the accessory can be started from the origin position.

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). It is determined whether the process is started during the execution of (see FIG. 39) (S1103). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 39), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1317. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1317 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1103: No), this start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1317. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1104).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1105 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1104: No), the process proceeds to S1109.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1104: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1105. On the other hand, this startup process is started after the momentary power failure and after the execution of the power-off process in S1317 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1104: No), and the process proceeds to S1209.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1103: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1105 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1105, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1105). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1106: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1107). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1106: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1108), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1109, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1109). The power-off flag is turned on when executing the power-off process in S1317 (see S1316 in FIG. 39). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1317 is executed, the process starting at S1109 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1317 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1109: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1110), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1111), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1109 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1105 to S1107 is performed. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1109: No), the process skips S1110, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1210, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1111), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1112), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process in S1110 is skipped is that when the process from S1105 to S1109 is performed via the process in S1107, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1105. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the origin return processing (S1102) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 during the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the origin return processing. As described above, if there is any accessory deviating from the origin position when the power is turned on, this origin return process is executed to return the accessory deviating from the origin position to the origin position.

  When the origin return process (S1102) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is any accessory deviated from the origin position. As a method of determining whether or not the accessory is shifted from the origin position, for example, the state (rotation angle, etc.) of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each accessory may be determined.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1201 that there is a role object deviating from the origin (S1201: Yes), first, all the role components (each slide role product 810, 820, 830, 840) constituting the group 1 have the origin. It is determined whether or not the position is at the position (S1202), and if it is determined that all the characters constituting the group 1 are at the origin position (S1202: Yes), it is determined that the position is deviated from the origin position in the processing of S1201. The operation of the accessory motor 229 is started (S1205) in order to return all the accessories to the origin position, and the process shifts to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the characters constituting group 1 are deviated from the origin position (S1202: No), it is determined that all characters other than group 1 return to the origin position. The object motor 229 is operated (S1203), and after the completion of the original restoration, it is set so as to return to the origin of the character constituting the group 1 (S1204), and the process shifts to S1206.

  It should be noted that the different processing is performed depending on whether or not it is necessary to return the group 1 to the origin position, because the characters constituting the group 1 and the characters constituting the other groups are simultaneously moved to the origin position. This is because a load current exceeding the current capacity may be supplied to the accessory motor 229 during the return to origin operation. That is, even if the driving load reference values of the groups 2 to 5 are totaled, the sum is only 90 (see FIG. 17B). Even if it is made variable, it does not exceed the current capacity. On the other hand, the total of the drive load reference values of the group 1 is 60, and when it is changed at the same time as the role constituting the other group, a load current exceeding the current capacity may be supplied. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the characters constituting the group 1 are shifted from the origin position, the characters of the group 1 are returned to the origin position at a different timing from the other groups. It is composed. Therefore, when the accessory is returned to the origin, it is possible to suppress a problem that a load current exceeding the current capacity is supplied and the sound lamp control device 113 is shut down or the like.

  In the process of S1201, if it is determined that there is no accessory deviated from the origin position, the process of S1202 to S1205 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1206. In the processing of S1201, when there is no character deviating from the origin position (S1201: No), when the processing of S1204 is completed, and in the processing of S1206 executed when the processing of S1205 is completed, an initial state is set. The activation flag 223g is set to ON (S1206), and the process ends. When the initialization flag 223g is set to ON, it indicates that the home return operation is being performed.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processes in S1302 to S1310 are mainly related to display (production). , S1312, and the variable display setting process in S1313 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1313 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and thereafter, the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 228 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 228 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this processing, when an operation of the frame button 228 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 228 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 228 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 228 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 228 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 228 is not provided, the processing of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1310 ends, the accessory control process is executed (S1311), and the process shifts to S1312. In the accessory control process (S1311), the operation start and stop of the accessory are set according to the state of the game. Details of the accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the end of the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1313 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1314 (S1314: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1316), and the power-off processing is executed (S1317). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1318), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1315), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1315: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the accessory control process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the accessory control process (S1311). This accessory control process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and starts and stops the operation of the accessory as described above. This is a process for setting.

  In this accessory control process (S1311), first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is ON to determine whether or not the power supply return operation of the accessory has been completed (S1401). If it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is ON (S1401: Yes), then, an initial operation processing for setting a power supply return operation of the accessory is executed (S1402), and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it is determined whether there is a character to be set to stop the operation (S1401: No). S1403). The accessory that should be stopped is, for example, an accessory that has set an operation and has reached the overhang position, or has set a return operation from the overhang position and has returned to the origin position. In the processing of S1403, when it is determined that there is a character to be stopped (S1403: Yes), the operation stop of the character is set, and the operation stop is set among the bits of the character operation flag 223i. The bit corresponding to the character is set to 0 (S1404).

  Next, by referring to the load reference value table 222c, a drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which operation is set to be stopped is specified. By subtracting the reference value, the driving load total value is updated (S1405), and the process shifts to S1406. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1403 that there is no character to be set to stop the operation, the processes of S1404 and S1405 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1406.

  In the process of S1406, it is determined whether or not there is a character to be set to start operation (S1406). Specifically, when the operation timing specified in the accessory operation setting table 222e comes, the corresponding operation group is set to operate. For example, at the start of the opening effect, the group 1 corresponds to an accessory for which operation start should be set. If it is determined in the process of S1406 that there is no character that should be set to start the operation, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1406 that there is a character to be set to start operation (S1406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation start condition of the group to which the character to start operation belongs is satisfied. , Based on the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17A) (S1407). Then, if it is determined that the operation start condition is not satisfied by the process of S1407 (S1407: No), the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1407, when it is determined that the operation start condition of the accessory for which the operation start should be set is satisfied (S1407: Yes), the driving load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the operation A value obtained by adding the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to start to be set is stored in the determination value storage area 223j (S1408).

  Next, it is determined whether the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S1409). If it is determined that the stored value is equal to or less than 100 (S1409: No), even if the accessory determined to be started in the processing of S1406 is operated, it is supplied to the accessory motor 229. It means that the total value of the load currents to be applied falls within the range of the current capacity or less, so that the operation start of the accessory is set, and among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i, the accessory that sets the operation start is set. Is set to 1 (S1410). Then, the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (the sum of the drive load stored in the load value storage area 223e and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to set the operation start) is added. Is stored in the load value storage area 223e to update the driving load total value (S1411), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S1409: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. Setting the operation start means that a load current exceeding the current capacity is supplied to the accessory motor 229. Therefore, in this case, the start of the operation of the accessory is canceled (S1412), a display alternative effect command for displaying an alternative effect is set (S1413), and the process ends. The display alternative production command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display alternative effect command, the display control device 114 starts an alternative effect (see FIGS. 25 and 26 (b)) corresponding to the character whose operation stop has been canceled in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, even if the operation of the accessory is canceled, a display effect that makes the user feel as if the accessory has operated can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect has the same degree of expectation as when the accessory is operated, so that the player can play the game while having an appropriate degree of expectation for each effect. Can be done.

  In the present embodiment, a determination value storage area 223j for temporarily storing a calculation result for determining whether the sum of the drive load reference values exceeds 100 is provided separately from the load value storage area 223e. However, the determination value storage area 223j may be omitted. In this case, the driving load reference value corresponding to the character to be newly operated is once added to the driving load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e, and the operation of the character is canceled when the operation of the character is canceled. What is necessary is just to subtract the drive load reference value corresponding to the canceled accessory. Thereby, the storage area can be reduced.

  Next, an initial operation process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this initial operation processing (S1402). This initial operation process (S1402) is executed in the accessory control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for setting the power return operation of the accessory as described above.

  In the initial operation process (S1402), first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation of the accessory has been detected (S1501). If an abnormal operation is detected in the processing of S1501 (S1501: Yes), a notification operation is set according to the character that has detected the abnormal operation (S1502). In addition, the notification operation according to the accessory includes, for example, notifying by voice the type of the accessory in which the abnormality has occurred, blinking an LED around the accessory in which the abnormality has occurred, or generating an abnormality. For example, LEDs of different colors are turned on in accordance with the type of the accessory being performed. Thereby, it is possible to make the hall clerk easily recognize which of the plurality of the bonus items provided in the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to cause the clerk in the hall to take measures according to the character with the abnormality.

  Next, an error command is set (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. The error command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output processing (S1302) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to 114. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 starts error display on the third symbol display device 81 based on information indicating the type of error included in the error command and the type of the character in abnormal operation. Thereby, the type of the error and the accessory in which the error has occurred can be easily recognized by the hall clerk, so that the abnormal operation of the hall clerk can be more easily eliminated.

  On the other hand, if no abnormal operation is detected in the process of S1501 (S1501: No), the processes of S1502 and S1503 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1504. In the processing of S1504, it is determined whether or not the closing operation flag 223h is turned on (S1504). If it is determined that the closing operation flag 223h is turned off (S1504: Yes), the power return operation of the accessory is performed. Is not during the period of executing (that is, the origin is being returned to the origin). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S1505). If it is determined that is present (S1505: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, if it is determined that there is no accessory that is returning to the origin (S1505: No), either when the return to origin is completed, or when all powers are at the origin position when the power is turned on, the origin is returned. Either there is no need to perform a return. In other words, in either case, it is indicated that all the characters are at the origin position. Therefore, in this case, first, the number of driving steps of all the accessory motors is set to 0 (S1506), and the number of operation steps of the accessory motor 229 can be set based on the origin position of each accessory. I do. When the process of S1506 ends, an operation stop period of one second is set (S1507). The operation suspension period is a period set as a timing for shutting off the power in a shipping inspection or the like. That is, in the shipping inspection or the like, the audio lamp control device 113 or the like may determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 normally starts up based on the power supply to the pachinko machine 10, and then shut off the power and shift to the next inspection. In such a case, it is conceivable to return to the original position and then shift to the next inspection. However, unless an operation stop period is provided (that is, the home return operation ends, the power supply return operation of the accessory immediately occurs). Is started), it is necessary to wait until the power supply return operation is completed in all the inspections and all the accessories return to the origin positions, and then shut off the power supply, thereby lowering the inspection efficiency. There is a fear. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is stopped for a predetermined period (1 second) after the return to the origin is completed. The power supply can be shut off while in the position. Therefore, inspection efficiency can be improved in shipping inspection and the like.

  When the processing in S1507 ends, the power-on operation flag 223h is set to ON to indicate that it is the execution period of the power return operation (S1508), and the processing ends. In addition, in the processing of S1504, if it is determined that the closing operation flag 223h is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the return to the origin of the accessory has been completed, and thus the setting is performed by the processing of S1506. It is determined whether or not the operation stop period (1 second) has elapsed (S1509). If the operation stop period has not elapsed (S1509: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1509, when it is determined that the operation suspension period has elapsed (S1509: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the return pointer 223f (S1510), and the power return operation table 222d (FIG. 18) (step S1511), the data (defined content) corresponding to the value of the return pointer 223f after the update is read out (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the read data is END information (S1512). If it is determined that the data is not END information (S1512: No), the data read from the power return operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) is used. The drive of the accessory motor 229 is set based on the result (S1513), and the process ends.

  In the process of S1512, when it is determined that the data read from the power return operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) is the END information (S1512: Yes), both the initialization flag 223g and the input operation flag 223h are turned off. To indicate that the power return operation has ended (S1514), and ends this processing.

  By executing the initial operation process (S1402), the power supply of the accessory can be restored based on the power-on. Therefore, during the power supply return operation, whether or not each accessory operates normally. Can be checked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in a state where the accessory in which the operation abnormality has occurred remains.

  Next, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Processing.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1603). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 43) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). If the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 43) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 ( N1) or the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). In the process of S1608, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1608, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning) and when a special symbol is drawn by lottery. Since it is transmitted from 110, each time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is mainly controlled by the processing of S1608 by the processing of S1608. The value can be adjusted to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Even if it is deviated, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of detecting the start winning and the lottery of the special symbol, and the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, and It can be adjusted to the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d. When the process of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1607, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S1607: No), then, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1609). Then, when an opening command is received (S1609: Yes), first, a display opening command is set (S1610). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect.

  When the processing of S1610 ends, the operation pattern of the accessory for the opening effect is set (S1611), and the process returns to the main processing. As described above with reference to FIG. 19, in the opening effect, the operation of group 1 is set at the start of the effect. That is, a series of operations is set in which each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 is moved to the overhang position (see FIG. 26A) and is moved to the origin position (see FIG. 5). Based on the operation set here, an operation start is set in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) (see S1410 in FIG. 40). Note that, as described above, at the timing when the accessory is to start operating, as described above, the group of the accessory that is to start the operation determines the operation condition specified in the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17). When it is determined that it is not satisfied (see S1407: No in FIG. 40), by newly operating the accessory, the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 becomes equal to the current capacity (rated power). ) Is exceeded (see S1409: Yes in FIG. 40), the operation start of each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, 840 is canceled, and an alternative effect is set (S1412, FIG. 40). See S1413).

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1609 (S1609: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1612). When the round number command is received (S1612: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1613), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S1613). S1614), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output processing (S1302) of the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1612 (S1612: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1615). Then, when the ending command is received (S1615: Yes), the display ending command for notifying the display mode of the ending effect is set (S1616), and the process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the processing of S1615 (S1615: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed (S1617). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1313). The variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1707. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then, in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the operation pattern of the accessory corresponding to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the processing of S1703 is set (S1705). That is, the operation of the accessory is set based on the specified contents of the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 19). Based on the operation set here, an operation start is set in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) (see S1410 in FIG. 40). As described above, at the timing when the accessory is to start operating, it is determined that the group of the accessory that is to start the operation does not satisfy the operation condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17). In this case (see S1407: No in FIG. 40), it is determined that the total of the load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by newly operating the accessory. In this case (see S1409: Yes in FIG. 40), the operation start of the accessory in which the operation pattern is set in the processing of S1703 is canceled, and an alternative effect is set (see S1412 and S1413 in FIG. 40).

  When the processing in S1705 ends, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1706). In the process of S1706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S1707.

  In the process of S1707, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1707). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1707: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1707: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1708), and then, in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1709).

  When the process of S1709 is completed, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1710), and based on the set stop type. Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1711), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing in S1902, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 44). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S1802 in FIG. 44) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S1801) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 45, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S1902 and S1902, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 55A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 55A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B), the simple command determination processing (FIG. 46 (b) (see S2108) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 46 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. If the main controller 110 has received the display variation pattern command via the audio lamp controller 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command has been received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the simple variation is performed. You can make a production. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1806, the command interruption processing (see FIG. 46A) and the V interruption processing (FIG. 46B) are performed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal. ))).

  Next, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 46B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S2102) is performed so as to be displayed on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2103) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined according to each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2105) determined in the task processing (S2104). The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, reach out). The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), and returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. Is set (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402. In the above-described task process (S2104), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the process of S2403, the stop type information (any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the out-of-order reach, the reach other than the out-of-order or the out-of-order reach) indicated by the stop type command for display is the stop type of the jackpot. Is determined (S2404), and if the type is the jackpot stop type (S2404: Yes), the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) notifies the start of the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect when the switch is on. The opening data transfer flag 223i is set to ON (S2405), the stop type command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not the jackpot stop type (S2404: No), the process of S2505 is skipped, the stop type command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on the opening data transfer flag 223i, the image data to be used in the opening effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the variable effect that is a big hit is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. Can be transferred. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Since the display opening command for instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the display opening command is received. Therefore, when the image data used in the opening effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a lot of waiting time is generated from the end of the variable effect to the start of the opening effect. There is a fear that the user may feel uneasy or uncomfortable about stopping.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device is started. By 81, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is controlled by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit. With this, when the variable effect which becomes a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned about whether or not the operation is stopped. There is no unpleasant feeling. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2402.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the process of S2206, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among unprocessed commands (S2208), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2208: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In this opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2503). S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2505), the opening command processing is completed, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2504, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the content of the image is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated and the player will feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Also, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds) are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, a long waiting time is required between the end of the round effect and the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and until the change display of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 ends. , And the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to end. Thus, when the opening effect is completed on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds). ) When the game is finished, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not have anxiety as to whether or not the operation is stopped, and does not give a feeling of strangeness. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81. With this, when the variable effect which becomes a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned about whether or not the operation is stopped. There is no unpleasant feeling. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2208, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is a round number command for use (S2210: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2210), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2210, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command has a display ending command (S2212). If there is an ending command for use (S2212: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2213) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d is read. Is set to (S2701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

  Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2703). S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2212, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2214). If there is a change command (S2214: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S2802. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2802 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 228 within 20 milliseconds or less, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2214, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2216). If it is (S2216: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2902). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the processing of S2901, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the processing of S2902 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the error type is an operation error of the accessory, information indicating which of the accessories has an error and a warning image indicating the content of the error of the accessory are displayed. .

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S2216 (S2216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2218), and the processing returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2202 to S2218 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2201 to S2218 is repeatedly executed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 48B), which are the processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on which are set and required in this case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation image area at power-on 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, a pointer update process is performed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table buffer is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and the present processing is terminated and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the rendering contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3206). ), End this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the address immediately before the End information is described. Since the drawing content is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state (S3014), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the previous change effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is on rather than off (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the demonstration display data table is stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S3017), and then write Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and thus the display setting process ends. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S2105), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3401). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S3401: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3402). In the process of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3402 (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here) The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B), the command is not used in the simple command determination processing (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 46B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 56) (see S3301: No in FIG. 55A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2103). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3502). If the obtained information is the transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process shifts to S3505.

  Also, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been performed (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the processing in S3505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S3505: No), the processing shifts to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various kinds of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509).

  If the opening data transfer flag is ON (S3509: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 47), and as a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. This means that the type of stop has been determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed before the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 ends. That is, if the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), the opening data transfer flag is set to off (S3510), and the image data used in the opening effect is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data used in the opening effect and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained. Then, the flow shifts to the process of S3517.

  In the process of S3509, if the opening data transfer flag is not on but off (S3509: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after setting the back image change flag to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S3516), and the flow shifts to the process of S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S3517, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3517, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104), and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending) The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated from the information, the color information, the filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) (S3601). In other words, in the processing of S3601, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, so that the drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 46B) is executed, the process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to have a plurality of effect parts for production that can be varied by driving the accessory motor 229. Various entertainment effects can be realized by making the variable according to the situation. Each accessory motor 229 for driving these accessories is configured to operate based on a load current supplied from the power supply device 115.

  A unique current capacity (rated power) is set in the power supply device 115 (in this embodiment, 7 A / 1750 W), and the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 is equal to the current capacity (rated power). If the value exceeds (), the pachinko machine 10 may shut down or the sound lamp control device 113 may stop operating. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a load reference value table 222c is provided in order to set the load current value (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 to a current capacity or less (rated power or less). A value (drive load reference value) corresponding to the load current consumed when each accessory is varied is defined. When it is desired to change the accessory, a load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is supplied by newly changing the accessory based on the driving load reference value. When it is determined that the driving is performed, the driving of the accessory is cancelled. This allows the accessory to be varied within the range of the current capacity or less (the rated power or less), so that the pachinko machine 10 operates abnormally by supplying a load current exceeding the current capacity, Failure can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the action of the accessory is cancelled, the substitute effect corresponding to the accessory is executed. This alternative effect is equivalent to the effect of changing the character, even if the operation of the character is canceled, by displaying a display effect of the same system as the effect of changing the character on the third symbol display device 81. Can be held to the player. Also, when trying to execute a composite effect of a character and a display image, if the action of the character is simply canceled and the display content remains the same as the composite effect, an unnatural display effect There is a possibility that it becomes. For example, in the opening effect (see FIG. 26 (a)), if the movement of each of the slides 810, 820, 830, 840 to the overhang position is simply canceled, the center of the third symbol display device 81 will be displayed. The character "congratulations" is only displayed, and no display is performed around the character, resulting in an unnatural display. On the other hand, by preparing the above-described alternative effect that is completed only by the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress an effect of an unnatural display content. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the accessories are classified into a plurality of groups, and the operation is set for each group. Also, the characters constituting each group are characters in a positional relationship that does not interfere with each other. And when changing an accessory, it is comprised so that it may change, when the operation start conditions defined for every group are satisfy | filled. Specifically, the operation start condition is a condition that the presence or absence of interference with another group is determined, and the operation is performed at a timing at which interference with another group does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the interference between the characters in different groups and prevent the character from being damaged by the impact of the collision between the characters. Further, since the action of the accessory is obstructed by another accessory, the action of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are shifted, giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Can be suppressed. When the operation start condition of the group is not satisfied, the operation start of the accessory is canceled, and control is performed so as to execute the above-described alternative effect. Thereby, even if the action of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to make the player have the same degree of expectation as the effect of varying the accessory. Also, by preparing an alternative effect, it is possible to suppress the effect of an unnatural display content, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect. it can.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operating condition is not set for each of the accessories, but the operating condition is set for each group, so that the design can be simplified. Therefore, at the time of design, it is possible to reduce the work of the designer who sets the operation of the accessory. Also, it is sufficient to prepare a table for setting the operating conditions in groups, and it is not necessary to prepare a data table for setting the operating conditions for each accessory, so that the number of data tables is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the current capacity (rated power) is set as a threshold value, and when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the operation start of the accessory is canceled, but the present invention is limited to this. Not something. For example, a drive load reference value corresponding to 90% of the current capacity (rated power) is set as a threshold, and the operation start of the accessory is canceled based on whether or not the total load current (power consumption) exceeds the threshold. It may be configured to judge whether or not. By providing a margin of 10% with respect to the current capacity (rated power), there is included in the configuration a role-playing object whose load current (power consumption) is higher than the average due to individual variation of the role-playing motor 229. In this case, the accessory can be reliably operated within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that a load current (power) exceeding a predetermined threshold value (7 A / 1750 W) is supplied, the operation start of the accessory that is to be newly operated is canceled. But it is not limited to this. For example, the load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 may be configured to be equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power) by stopping a part of the operating accessory. Also, instead of stopping the operation of the accessory, the load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is reduced by reducing the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 to reduce the current capacity (rated power). ) May be configured.

  In addition, when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), the operation start and operation stop of each accessory is switched at high speed, and the timings during operation are shifted from each other. Thus, the load current (power consumption) may be configured to be equal to or less than the current capacity (not more than the rated power). For example, when it is determined that all the characters in group 1 and all the characters in groups 3 to 5 are to be moved at the same time (that is, the sum of the drive load reference values is 110, and it is determined that the current capacity is exceeded). In this case, first, only the characters forming the group 1 are operated for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second), and then the operation is stopped. Then, the operation of the characters constituting group 1 is stopped, and the characters constituting group 3 to group 5 are operated for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) and then stopped. Thereafter, the group 1 and the groups 3 to 5 are alternately operated by 0.1 seconds. Thus, a load current (power consumption) corresponding to the driving load reference value 60 can be obtained during the operation period of the group 1, and a load current corresponding to the driving load reference value 50 can be obtained during the operation periods of the groups 3 to 5. It can be power (power consumption). Therefore, the load current (power) supplied to the accessory motor 229 can be reduced to the current capacity (rated power) or less while operating all the accessories to be operated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble in the pachinko machine 10 due to the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  In the present embodiment, when performing an opening effect or various variable effects, the actor to be operated is determined in advance according to the type of effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be determined by lottery. For example, when the main controller 110 determines a variation pattern (variation time) in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) and is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device At 113, it may be configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to operate each accessory, and to set the operation of the accessory determined to be operated by the lottery. The accessory set here is determined in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) as an accessory to be started (see S1406 in FIG. 40), and satisfies the operation condition for each group (S1407: Yes), When the load current is equal to or smaller than the current capacity (S1409: No), the operation start is set (S1410).

  In addition, in the lottery of whether or not to operate the accessory, the operation probability may be changed according to the variation pattern type (variation time), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether or not a big hit), the type of the accessory, and the like. . Specifically, for example, in the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, it may be configured to make it easier to operate the accessory than the outlier variation pattern, or in the variation pattern with a longer variation time, than in the variation pattern with a shorter variation time. The accessory may be configured to be easily operated. As a result, the sense of expectation for the jackpot can be increased as the number of the bonus items moves, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, a priority order for operating each accessory is determined, and when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by operating the accessory, a load current (power consumption) equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power). Until, the operation may be canceled in order from the lower-priority role (the higher-priority role is operated as much as possible). Further, the priority order for operating the accessory may be made different according to conditions (type of effect, type of variation pattern, lottery result of special symbol, etc.).

  In the present modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), and whether or not the operation start of the accessory is canceled is determined. Yes, but it is not necessary. For example, in the case of a model in which the type of the accessory is small and the load current (power consumption) is equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power) even when all the variable items that can be operated at the same time are operated, or the current capacity (rated power) For example, when the power supply 115 having a sufficiently large power supply is employed, the determination of the load current (power consumption) can be omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, since the load reference value table 222c of the ROM 222, the load value storage area 223e and the determination value storage area 223j of the RAM 223 can be omitted, the storage capacity can be reduced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when it is attempted to newly change the accessory so that the load current exceeding the current capacity is not supplied by the power supply device 115, the operating accessory and the new The system is configured to calculate a value corresponding to the sum of the load currents when all of the accessories to be operated are operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded based on the calculated value. It was configured to cancel the operation start. Thus, the load current (power) supplied to the accessory motor 229 is configured to be equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, instead of canceling the operation start of the accessory, the third symbol display device 81 is illuminated. By controlling the brightness (brightness) of the LCD backlight 230, the total load current (power consumption) consumed by the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is configured. With such a configuration, each accessory can be operated without limitation of current capacity, so that the degree of freedom of the accessory operation can be increased.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that an LCD backlight 230 is added (the LCD backlight 230 is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113). The point that the content of the RAM 223 is partially changed in the audio lamp control device 113 is possible. Also, in the sound ramp control device 113, the start-up process (see FIG. 37) and the partial process included in the main process (see FIG. 39) are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. Is the same as the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. An LCD backlight 230 for illuminating the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the back side is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment. The LCD backlight 230 is constituted by an LED light source. The RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a backlight flag 223k and a luminance reduction flag 2231 in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment.

  The backlight flag 223k is a flag indicating that the process of returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 from a state darker than during the normal game to the normal luminance is being executed. More specifically, in the present embodiment, when turning on the LCD backlight 230 based on turning on the power, the brightness is set to be darker than during the normal game until the power return operation of the accessory ends. It is configured. As a result, even if the operation of the accessory based on the power return operation and the operation of the accessory based on another trigger (for example, the start of a jackpot) must be performed at the same time, the LCD backlight 230 may be set in advance. The load current (power consumption) that can be consumed by the accessory motor 229 can be given a margin by reducing the load current (power consumption) consumed by the power supply device 115. The current (power) can be within the range of the current capacity (rated power). Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power return operation ends, a process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 set to the dark brightness to the normal brightness is performed. The backlight flag 223k is a flag indicating that it is the execution period of the luminance return processing.

  If the backlight flag 223k is on, it indicates that it is during the execution period of the luminance return process, and if it is off, it indicates that it is outside the execution period of the return process. The backlight flag 223k is set to ON when the power return operation is completed (see S1522 in FIG. 63), and is set to OFF when the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 returns to the normal luminance (see FIG. 63). See S3805 in FIG. 65).

  The brightness reduction flag 223l causes the LCD backlight 230 to have a low brightness based on the determination that the total load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity (rated power). This flag indicates that the state has been set. If the luminance reduction flag 230 is on, it indicates that the LCD backlight 230 is in a dark state, and if it is off, it indicates that the luminance is normal. The luminance reduction flag 223l is set to ON when the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced in the accessory control processing 2 (see FIG. 62) described later (see S1427 in FIG. 62), and returns to the normal luminance. In this case, it is set to off (see S3706 in FIG. 64).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a transition of the LED current when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is varied will be described by taking a power-on example as an example. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the time change of the LED current flowing through the LEDs constituting the LCD backlight 230. FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show examples in which the brightness is varied by different light control methods, and either light control method can be adopted.

  Here, conventionally, there are few types of accessories as compared with recent gaming machines, and even if the accessories are operated freely, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. I never did. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and the load current (electric power) consumed by operating the accessories has also increased. Therefore, when a plurality of characters are operated at the same time, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) may be consumed. In such a case, as a result of exceeding the specifications of the power supply device, the control device for controlling the accessory may be shut down, the power of the gaming machine itself may be turned off, or an abnormal operation of the accessory may occur. There is a possibility that a problem of being lost may occur.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed by newly operating the accessory, FIG. ) Or the dimming method illustrated in FIG. 59 (b) so that the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced. That is, by reducing the load current (power) consumed in the LCD backlight 230, the total current supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is secured while securing the load current (power consumption) for newly operating the accessory. The configuration is such that the load current (power consumption) is less than the current capacity (less than the rated power). Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 for controlling the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the operation of the accessory is abnormal. Can be prevented from occurring.

  First, FIG. 59A is a diagram showing an example (current dimming method) of dimming the LCD backlight 230 by changing the absolute value of the LED current. As shown in FIG. 59A, the current cannot be supplied to the LEDs until the control of the LCD backlight 230 becomes possible after the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, The LED current is turned off (current is 0). Thereafter, when the control of the LCD backlight 230 becomes possible, a current value (IL) lower than the current value (IH) set during the normal game is set as the LED current value for the LCD backlight 230. You. By setting a current value lower than usual, the load current (power consumption) consumed by the LED can be reduced, so that the load current (power consumption) that can be supplied to the accessory motor 229 is increased. be able to. Also, by setting a current value lower than usual, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 becomes darker than usual.

  The state in which the luminance is reduced and the load current (power consumption) is reduced continues until the power return operation of the accessory ends. This is because, in the power supply return operation, since a plurality of accessories operate, the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 tends to be a large value. That is, when the operating conditions other than the power return operation are satisfied, the accessory may operate in a complex manner, and the load current (power consumption) may exceed the current capacity (rated power). By reducing the load current (power consumption) of the light 230, the total load current (power consumption) is prevented from exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  In the present embodiment, the luminance at power-on is configured to be 80% of the luminance during a normal game (that is, the current value IL is set to a value of 80% of the current value IH). There). The value of 80% is a value that is set so that the total value of the load current (power consumption) is surely lower than the current capacity (rated power) even if each accessory operates in combination. Therefore, it can be changed according to the number of the accessories of the pachinko machine 10 (the number of the accessory motors 229). For example, in a model with a small number of characters, even if a plurality of characters are operated in a complex manner, the amount of load current consumed is small. Therefore, the reduction amount of the load current (power consumption) in the LCD backlight 230 should be reduced. Can be. Therefore, the current value IL can be set high. Conversely, in a model with a large number of characters, the current capacity may be exceeded unless more load current (power consumption) is reduced in the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, in this case, the current value IL may be set to a lower value to ensure that the current capacity (rated power) is lower.

  When the power supply return operation of the accessory ends, the current value is gradually increased over a predetermined period so that the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 becomes a normal luminance. Specifically, the current value is increased by 1% every second, so that the brightness during the normal game is obtained over 20 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize a change in luminance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 from greatly changing due to a large change in the luminance in a short period, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  After returning to the normal brightness, the normal brightness is maintained until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off unless it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. After the power is turned off, the LED current cannot be supplied to the LCD backlight 230, so that the LED current is turned off. After the power is turned off, the LED current is turned off until the next power is turned on.

  FIG. 59B is a diagram showing an example in which the LED backlight 230 is dimmed by setting the LED current value to a fixed value and changing the ratio between the ON period and the OFF period of the LED current. Hereinafter, the dimming method shown in FIG. 59B is referred to as a PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) pulse dimming method.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the power is turned on and the control of the LCD backlight 230 becomes possible, IH is set as the LED current, and the LED is set to be repeatedly turned on and off. . The turning on and off of this LED is repeated at a constant frequency (for example, 320 Hz). Further, in one cycle composed of one set of the on-period and the off-period, the length of the on-period is set to 80% of one cycle, and the length of the off-period is set to 20% of one cycle. .

  Here, the setting of the ON period and the OFF period means that a lighting control command including data indicating the length of the ON period and data indicating the frequency is output to a known LED driver. The LED driver is configured to be able to switch between the ON period and the OFF period of the LCD backlight 230 based on the received lighting control command. For example, when a lighting control command indicating that the ON period is 80% and the frequency is 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the operation of the LED includes an ON period of 80% of one cycle (1/320 seconds) and one cycle. The 20% off period is repeatedly set by the LED driver. This operation is continued until a new lighting control command is received.

  A more specific description will be given of a method of specifying the ON period by a lighting control command output to the LED driver. The data indicating the length of the ON period (lighting rate data) described above is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (0 in decimal notation), the lighting rate is 0%, and if the lighting rate data is FFH (255 in decimal notation), the lighting rate is 100%. Further, the lighting rate is set to increase at regular intervals as the lighting rate data goes from 00H to FFH. For example, when 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as the lighting rate data, the lighting state is 50% (that is, 128/255).

  The reference signal (synchronization signal) serving as a reference for the lighting frequency of the LED can generate the frequency designated by the lighting control command by the LED driver itself (set it to free run), or can be input from outside the LED driver. The synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) can be used. Further, whether to use the free-run mode or use the external synchronization signal can be specified by a lighting control command. When an external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, it is not necessary to set the lighting frequency by the lighting control command.

  In one cycle of turning on and off the LED, the position of the on-period can be changed by the lighting control command. That is, the LED on-period can be set at the same time as the detection of the synchronization signal, and the LED off-period can be set at the end of the on-period. An on-period can also be set after the end of the period.

  A specific example of the lighting control command for setting the position of the ON period will be described in detail. The setting start position of the ON period is specified by, for example, 8-bit data. Specifically, one cycle is divided into 255 equal parts, and it is possible to specify from which section the on-period is started by 8-bit data. For example, if the data that specifies the position of the ON period is 00H, the ON period starts from the first section of one cycle divided into 255 (that is, simultaneously with the start of one cycle). If the data specifying the position of the on-period is 1EH (that is, 30 in decimal notation), the on-period is started from the 31st section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts.

  As described above, the LED driver for controlling the LED according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to receive a lighting control command including a plurality of data. Although not shown, the lighting control command is defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in association with the setting timing. For example, the lighting control command to be set when the power is turned on specifies that the ON period is 80%, the lighting frequency is 320 Hz, and the start position of the ON period is the first section of 255 equal periods. Data is specified.

  Note that the LED driver is not limited to the one that receives the lighting control command in the above-described mode. For example, a driver that can specify the position and length of the ON period with a simpler lighting control command may be employed. For example, an LED driver that can receive a lighting control command that associates the lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal parts for each bit of 8-bit data may be used. Specifically, the sections that are earlier in time are associated with the lower bits in order, the section corresponding to the bit of data 1 is set to the lighting state, and the section corresponding to the bit of data 0 is set to the off state. For example, if the control data is 07H (that is, 00000111B in binary notation), of the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight, the first three sections are turned on and the second half are turned off. Thus, the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver can be simplified, so that the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 59 (b), the description will be continued. The frequency at which the LED is turned on and off (lighting frequency) is a frequency (for example, 320 Hz) sufficiently high that the on period and the off period cannot be visually distinguished. Therefore, the luminance felt by the player is the luminance (that is, 80% of the normal luminance) obtained by averaging (integrating) the 80% on period and the 20% off period. The state in which the ON period is 80% continues until the power return operation of the accessory ends. When the power supply return operation of the accessory is completed, the length of the ON period is gradually increased over a predetermined period. Specifically, the length of the ON period is increased by 1% each time one second elapses, and the ON period is controlled to become 100% after 20 seconds. As a result, similarly to the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59A), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 from greatly changing due to a large change in the luminance in a short period, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  After the ON period of the LED becomes 100% and returns to the normal brightness, unless the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off unless it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. Normal brightness is maintained. Then, after the power is cut off, the LED current cannot be supplied to the LCD backlight 230, so that the LED current is turned off. After the power is turned off, the LED current is turned off until the next power is turned on.

  In the case of the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), it is only necessary that the LED current can be switched between the ON state (the state of the current value IH) and the OFF state, so that the LED driver is relatively simple. A circuit having a configuration can be employed. That is, since a relatively inexpensive driver can be adopted, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59A), it is necessary to employ an LED driver capable of setting the LED current value to a plurality of values. There is an advantage that the power consumption can be reduced. This is because the power consumption of the LED is proportional to both the LED current value and the anode voltage. That is, in order to reduce the LED current value to 80%, it is necessary to lower the anode voltage. Therefore, the power consumption is reduced to 80% of that in the normal game by the decrease in the LED current (20%) and the decrease in the anode voltage. Less than. On the other hand, in the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)), when the LED current is in the ON state, the current value is always IH and the anode voltage does not change. Is proportional to the lighting rate. Therefore, the power is 80% of the power during the normal game, and the current dimming method has a larger power drop than the power during the normal game. Therefore, by adopting the current dimming method, it is possible to save energy of the pachinko machine 10.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. This startup process is a process that is started when the power is turned on, similarly to the startup process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

  Of the start-up processes, in the processes of S1101 to S1112, the same processes as those of S1101 to S1112 of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment are respectively executed. Then, in the start-up process (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, when the initialization of the RAM 203 is executed by the process of S1111, then the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 becomes 80% of the luminance during the normal game. Is set to (S1121). Here, the current dimming method (see FIG. 59 (a)) or the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)) may be employed as a method for setting the luminance to 80%. . Further, a method different from these methods (for example, a method of reducing the LED current value to some extent and then performing PWM dimming) may be used.

  By reducing the load current (power consumption) in advance by lowering the brightness of the LCD backlight 230, even when a number of accessories are operated in the power return operation, the total load current (power consumption) is reduced. Can be suppressed from exceeding the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the pachinko machine 10 due to exceeding the current capacity (rated power). When the process of S1121 is completed, interrupt permission is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 61).

  Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In this main processing (see FIG. 61), in each processing of S1301 to S1310 and S1312 to S1318, the same processing as each processing of S1301 to S1310 and S1312 to S1318 of the main processing in the first embodiment is executed. Is done. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1310 ends, the accessory control process 2 for setting the start and stop of the operation of each accessory is executed (S1321). . Next, after the power supply return operation of the accessory is completed, a backlight control process for returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to the luminance during the normal game is executed (S1322), and the process proceeds to S1312. And migrate. Details of the accessory control process 2 (S1321) and the backlight control process (S1322) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64 and 65, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the accessory control processing 2 (S1321) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this accessory control processing (S1321). This accessory control process 2 (S1321) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As described above, the operation of each accessory is started. And a process for setting operation stop.

  In each of S1401, S1403, S1406, S1407, S1409, S1412, and S1413 of the accessory control process 2 (S1321), S1401, S1403 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S1406, S1407, S1409, S1412, and S1413 are executed.

  Then, in the accessory control process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is ON (S1401: Yes), the accessory control process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 40). ) Is performed (S1421) instead of the initial operation process (see FIG. 41). The initial operation process 2 (S1421) is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory, similarly to the initial operation process (see FIG. 41). Details of the initial operation process 2 (S1421) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the accessory control process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1403 that there is an accessory that should be set to stop the operation, the accessory operation is a process for setting the operation stop of the accessory. A stop process is performed (S1422). Details of the accessory operation stop processing (S1422) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the accessory control processing 2 of the present embodiment, after the processing of S1409 ends, the driving load corresponding to the accessory that starts operating is added to the total driving load stored in the load value storage area 223e. Then, that value is updated as a new driving load total value (S1423). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value (total drive load value) is greater than 100 (S1424). If it is determined that the updated value is less than or equal to 100 (S1424: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the total drive load value is greater than 100 (S1424: Yes), then it is determined whether the initialization flag 223g is on (S1425). If it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is ON as a result of the determination in S1425 (S1425: Yes), the power return operation of the accessory is not completed (that is, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 has already been increased). This state is set to 80%), and the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the processing of S1425 that the initialization flag 223g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1425: No), the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is set to 80% of that in the normal game to reduce the load. The current (power consumption) is reduced (S1426), the luminance reduction flag 223l is set to ON (S1427), and the present process ends to return to the main process (see FIG. 61).

  In the accessory control processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 40), the load value storage area 223e is not updated when it is determined that the sum of the drive load reference values exceeds 100. In the role control process 2 (see FIG. 62), when there is a role to be newly operated, the load value storage area 223e is updated regardless of whether the sum of the drive load reference values exceeds 100 (ie, , And a value greater than 100 is also stored as the driving load total value) (see S1423). This is because the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to always operate the accessory, even if the total drive load exceeds 100. As described above, when the total drive load value exceeds 100, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced by darkening the brightness of the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is configured to operate in a range of current capacity (rated power) or less. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from breaking down or malfunctioning due to the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  Next, an initial operation process 2 (S1421) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process 2 (S1421). This initial operation process 2 (S1421) is a process executed in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and is performed in the initial operation process ( As in the case of (40), this is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory.

  In the initial operation processing 2 (S1421), in each processing of S1501 to S1514, the same processing as each processing of S1501 to S1514 of the initial operation processing (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment is respectively executed.

  In the initial operation process 2 (S1421) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1512 that the data read from the power return operation table 222d is the END information (S1512: Yes), the LCD backlight 230 is determined. Is set so as to increase the luminance by 1% (S1521). That is, when the power is turned on, the LCD backlight 230 that has been set to have a luminance of 80% of the luminance during a normal game is controlled to have a luminance of 81%. Specifically, in the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59A), the LED current value flowing through the LED of the LCD backlight 230 is increased by 1%. In the case of the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), the on-period is increased by 1%, and 81% of one cycle composed of one set of on-period and off-period is used. Is set so that the off period is 19%.

  When the setting of the LCD backlight 230 is completed by the process of S1521, the backlight flag 223k is set to ON (S1522), and the process proceeds to S1514. By turning on the backlight flag 223k in the process of S1522, the power supply return operation of the accessory ends, indicating that it is the execution period of the process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the normal brightness. . Therefore, thereafter, control is performed so as to increase the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 by 1% every one second. Controlling the luminance so as to gradually increase over a predetermined time (20 seconds in the present embodiment) makes the change in luminance less noticeable to the player, This is to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from giving a strange feeling to the appearance. That is, if the brightness is instantaneously set to the brightness during the normal game (that is, if the brightness is increased by 20%) at the end of the power return operation, the game is performed based on the rapid change in brightness. This is to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from feeling uncomfortable when viewed by the user.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the accessory operation stop processing (S1422) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the accessory operation stop processing (S1422). This accessory operation stop process (S1422) is a process executed in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This is a process for stopping the operation of the object.

  In the accessory operation stop processing (S1422), first, in the processing of S1403 of the accessory control processing 2 (see FIG. 62), the operation stop of the accessory determined to be stopped is set, and the accessory operation is performed. In the flag 223i, 0 is set to the bit corresponding to the character for which the operation stop is set (S3701). Next, the driving load reference value corresponding to the character whose operation has been stopped by the processing of S3701 is subtracted from the driving load total value stored in the load reference value table 222c, and the value after the subtraction is used as the new driving load total. The value is overwritten in the load reference value table 222c (S3702).

  When the process of S3702 is completed, next, a process (S3703 to S3706) of returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the brightness during the normal game is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on (S3703). In the processing of S3703, if the initialization flag 223g is ON (S3703), it means that the power-return operation of the accessory has not been completed, and the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is set to 80% of that in the normal game. Since there is no need to make any changes, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223g is off (S3703: No), then whether or not the luminance reduction flag 223l is on (that is, when the operation of the accessory stopped this time is started, the LCD It is determined whether or not the brightness of the light 230 has been reduced to 80% (S3704), and if the brightness reduction flag 223l is off (S3704: No), it means that the brightness is during the normal game. Since there is no need to perform the process of returning the luminance, the present process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3704 that the luminance reduction flag 223l is on (S3704: Yes), it is next determined whether the total driving load value updated in the processing of S3702 is 100 or less (S3705). ). If it is determined in the process of S3705 that the total drive load value is larger than 100 (S3705), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is returned to the brightness during the normal game, and the load current (power consumption) is reduced. Since the current capacity may exceed the current capacity (rated power), the present process is terminated without changing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 from 80%.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3705 that the updated driving load total value is equal to or less than 100 (S3705: Yes), the current of the LCD backlight 230 may be returned to the luminance during the normal game, Since there is no possibility of exceeding the capacity (rated power), the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is set to the luminance during the normal game (S3706), and this processing ends.

  Next, a backlight control process (S1322) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the backlight control processing (S1322). The backlight control process (S1322) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 61) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As described above, the power supply return operation of the accessory is performed. This is a process for returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to the luminance during the normal game after the end.

  In this backlight control processing (S1322), first, it is determined whether or not the backlight flag 223k is on (S3801). If it is determined that the backlight flag 223k is off (S3801: No), the power return operation of the accessory is performed. This means that it is not the execution period of the brightness return process based on the completion of the process, and thus this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the backlight flag 223k is ON (S3801: Yes), then it is determined whether one second has elapsed since the last change in the brightness of the LCD backlight 230. (S3802), and if it is determined that one second has not elapsed (S3802: No), the process ends as it is not the timing to increase the brightness of the LCD backlight 230.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if it is determined that one second has elapsed since the last change in the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 (S3802: Yes), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is increased by 1% (S3802: Yes). S3803). Next, it is determined whether or not the increased brightness has reached 100% (that is, the brightness during a normal game) (S3804). If the brightness has not reached 100% (S3804: No), the brightness is maintained thereafter. In order to continue the process of gradually increasing, this process is ended as it is. Also, in the processing of S3804, when it is determined that the luminance has become 100% (the luminance has become a normal game luminance) (S3804: Yes), the backlight flag 223k is turned off (S3805). The process ends.

  By performing the backlight control process (see FIG. 65), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is gradually increased (1% per second) after the power supply return operation of the accessory has been completed, and is performed for 20 seconds. To return to the brightness during the normal game. In this way, by changing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 stepwise, it is possible for the player to have difficulty in recognizing the change in brightness. Therefore, by causing the player to recognize the change in the luminance, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling strange in the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by newly operating the accessory, or when the power of the accessory is restored based on power-on. In the execution period of the operation, the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced so that the load current (power consumption) consumed as the pachinko machine 10 as a whole falls within the range of the current capacity (rated power). I have. As a result, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 drops, or the operation of the accessory. The occurrence of an abnormality can be suppressed.

  Also, unlike the first embodiment, even if the total value of the driving load exceeds 100, the action of the accessory is not canceled, so that there is no need to prepare an alternative effect. Therefore, the storage capacity for storing the substitute effect can be omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the brightness is gradually increased when the power supply return operation of the accessory ends, and the brightness is returned to the brightness during the normal game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even after the power supply return operation of the accessory is completed, the luminance is gradually increased when it is determined that the driving load total value exceeds 100 and the reduced luminance is returned to the luminance during the normal game again. Is also good. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance, so that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the change in luminance.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to immediately increase the luminance during the normal game only when returning the reduced luminance to the luminance during the normal game again when it is determined that the driving load total value exceeds 100. However, even when the power supply return operation of the accessory ends, the luminance may be immediately increased to the luminance during the normal game. Thus, the period during which the brightness is low can be shortened, so that the appearance of the third symbol display device can be improved. Further, in a case where the luminance is immediately increased to the luminance during the normal game, a black image of the entire screen may be displayed as a video at the timing of changing the luminance. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the change in brightness of the LCD backlight 230, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by recognizing the change in brightness. be able to. For the same reason as in the case of increasing the luminance, a black image of the entire screen may be displayed even at the timing of decreasing the luminance. If the liquid crystal display used in the third symbol display device 81 adopts a system in which the transmittance is minimized (that is, a black image) in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal, a change in luminance is noticed to the player. In addition to the effect of making it difficult to obtain, the power consumption of the driver for driving the liquid crystal can be reduced.

  In addition, as the liquid crystal display, a type in which the transmittance becomes maximum (that is, a white image) in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal may be adopted. In this case, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, a white image is displayed to reduce the power of the driver for driving the liquid crystal and secure a margin for the current capacity (rated power). You may comprise.

  In the present embodiment, all the accessories determined to be operated are operated. However, control for reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to reduce the load current (power consumption) and driving Control for canceling the operation start for all or a part of the accessory to be performed may be made to coexist. The control may be given a priority. For example, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, first, the brightness is reduced to a predetermined value (for example, 90% of a normal game). If it is determined that it exceeds, the operation of the accessory to be driven may be stopped. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the apparent brightness of the third symbol display device 81 becomes too dark.

  In the present embodiment, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced when the power is turned on or when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by driving the accessory. Although the configuration is such that the load current (power consumption) is reduced, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display backlight unit 230 may be configured to be controllable in the display control device 114, and the brightness of the backlight may be adjusted according to the type of video displayed on the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, for example, in an image having a low APL (Average Picture Level, average image level) (an image having a relatively large number of low gradation pixels), the load current (power consumption) is reduced by reducing the luminance. May be configured. By reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 in an image with a low APL, the brightness of black can be reduced, so that an image with a good sense of contrast (an image in which black is tightened) can be obtained. Further, energy saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved. Further, for example, when a black image of the entire screen is detected as a video, the LCD backlight 230 may be turned off. This is because it is useless to turn on the LCD backlight 230 even though no video is displayed. Thereby, energy saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved.

  If there is room to increase the gain of the image according to the histogram of the image, the gain of the image may be increased instead of greatly reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230. More specifically, for example, if the histogram of an image is determined and the image is determined to be an image composed of only pixels having a pixel level of 50% or less, the gain of the image is increased to double the pixel level of all pixels. Instead, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 may be reduced by reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 without changing the apparent brightness. As a result, the load current (power consumption) can be further reduced and the apparent brightness can be ensured as compared with the case where the LCD backlight 230 is simply darkened according to the video.

  In the present embodiment, when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced, control is performed so that the entire third symbol display device 81 becomes dark. However, a plurality of regions are defined in the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, an LCD backlight 230 that illuminates each area may be provided so that the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 can be controlled for each area. When the accessory is operated to block a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 with the accessory, and in the third symbol display device 81, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the shielded portion. The LCD backlight 230 that illuminates an area that is difficult to view may be turned off. For example, the LCD backlight 230 that illuminates the central area of the screen is turned off when the upstanding character 410 or the central swinging material 820 moves to the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 at the overhang position. You may be comprised so that it may be performed. As a result, the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity (rated power) can be obtained without dimming the luminance of the portion visible to the player.

  When controlling the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 for each area, the brightness of the entire screen is reduced by the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), and the off period of the LED current is set for each area. You may comprise so that it may stagger. That is, the on-period of one region may be configured to coincide with the off-period of another region. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the current (power) of the LCD backlight 230 from instantaneously increasing at the timing when the ON periods of all the regions overlap. Therefore, it is possible to suppress not only the average value of the load current (power consumption) but also the instantaneous value from exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  In the present embodiment, the dimming frequency is set to 320 Hz in the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is difficult to recognize the period (that is, flicker does not occur), the frequency may be higher than 320 Hz (for example, 400 Hz) or lower than 320 Hz (for example, 200 Hz).

  In the present embodiment, during the normal game, it is determined whether or not the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded. If the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the luminance is reduced to reduce the load current (power consumption). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation pattern of the LCD backlight 230 may be determined in advance according to the effect, and the LCD backlight 230 may be operated according to the operation pattern. For example, in the out-of-range super-reach and the shared super-reach, the configuration is such that the luminance is reduced when the operation timing of the accessory is 8 seconds and 15 seconds, and the load current (power consumption) is reduced. You may. This allows the load current (power consumption) to be within the range of the current capacity (rated power). In this case, the brightness is gradually reduced from before the operation timing of the accessory (for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect), and the operation timing of the accessory (when 8 seconds and 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect). The luminance may be set to be the lowest (for example, 80% luminance). This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance, so that it is possible to prevent the player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable with the effect.

  Alternatively, only the operation pattern of the LCD backlight 230 may be determined in advance, and a role to be operated at each operation timing may be selected by lottery. For example, when the main controller 110 determines a variation pattern (variation time) in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) and is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device At 113, each accessory is operated at the operation timing of the accessory determined for each variation pattern (for example, at the time of 8 seconds, 15 seconds, and 25 seconds after the start of the production in the case of special reach). It may be configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not the action of the accessory determined to be operated by the lottery is set. On the other hand, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 may be reduced in accordance with the operation timing of the accessory provided for each effect. As a method of reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230, for example, a method of decreasing the luminance by gradually decreasing the luminance several seconds before the operation timing of the accessory, or a method of reducing the luminance of the entire object as an image at the operation timing of the accessory. And a method of reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to a target brightness at once. Thereby, it is possible to realize operation effects of various kinds of accessories while keeping the total load current (power consumption) supplied to the pachinko machine 10 within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less.

  In the present embodiment, when the brightness of the backlight is reduced, the brightness is set to be 80% of the brightness during the normal game. However, the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is reduced. The brightness set in accordance with the value may be varied. For example, when the current capacity (rated power) exceeds 30% or more (that is, the driving load total value becomes 130 or more), the luminance is set to 80% of the normal game, and the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is If it is 20% to 30% (that is, if the total driving load value is in the range of 120 to 130), the luminance is set to 85%, and the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is set to 10% to 20%. In some cases (i.e., if the total drive load value is in the range of 110 to 120), the luminance is set to 90%, and if the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is less than 10% (i.e., the drive load is If the total value is less than 110), the luminance may be 95%. As a result, the reduction in luminance can be suppressed to the minimum, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the apparent brightness of the third symbol display device 81 has decreased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the pachinko machine including only the accessory that operates between the retreat position (origin position) and the overhang position, and the accessory that rotates or swings from the origin position as a starting point. 10 has been described.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, an accessory that can perform the opening / closing operation and the lighting operation in a combined manner is included. In other words, the configuration includes a staging accessory having a member that opens and closes, and a light source provided inside the member that opens and closes. It becomes visible. In this way, by including a role that can execute a complex operation in the configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the role. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the role of a staging machine provided on the game board 13 is the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the audio ramp control device 113, the configuration of the RAM 223 is changed, and the start-up process (see FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 221 and the main process (see FIG. 39) are different. The difference is that the included processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Is the same as the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the game board 13 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 66, in the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the first entrance 64 in front view. The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance 640.

  Next, an operation unit 300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. 67, the operation unit 300 includes a back case 310 formed in a box shape having one open side from a bottom wall 311 and an outer wall 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 311. Prepare. The rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 66) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The operation unit 300 includes four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 that perform opening and closing operations and lighting operations in a combined manner in the inner space of the rear case 310. As shown in FIG. 67, the hemispherical accessory 910 is provided on the upper right of the opening 311a in a front view, and the hemispherical accessory 920 is provided on the upper left of the opening 311a in a front view. The hemispherical accessory 930 is provided on the lower right of the opening 311a in a front view, and the hemispherical accessory 940 is provided on the lower left of the opening 311a in a front view.

  In addition, the composite operation unit 1000 is accommodated in the internal space of the rear case 310. The composite operation unit 1000 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310, and abuts on the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 while being surrounded by the outer wall portion 312. It is arranged on the wall 311. In the combined operation unit 1000, in an assembled state (see FIG. 67), a rectangular opening is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 in a front view.

  Next, an outline of an operation mode of the composite operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. FIG. 68 shows a state in which the pair of half-moon-shaped objects 1060 of the combined operation unit 1000 are arranged at the overhang position.

  At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 67, the pair of half-moon members 1060 of the combined operation unit 1000 are retracted above and below the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and are invisible to the player (FIG. 66). reference). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 68, the pair of half-moon-shaped objects 1060 is slid in the directions facing each other, and the pair of half-moon-shaped objects 1060 is moved to the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, the third symbol). It is arranged on the front side of the display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Each of these hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 and the composite operation unit 1000 are formed so as to be operable independently of each other, and are disposed in a superimposed (laminated) state as described above. Therefore, for each of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, and the composite operation unit 1000 that are arranged in different layers, the operation members are disposed inside the opening 311a of the rear case 310. However, even if they are overhanging, they can be operated simultaneously. In other words, the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, and the composite operation unit 1000 can be operated not only individually but also in combination, so that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the composite operation unit 1000, the retracted position (origin position) and the extended position of the pair of slide members 1020 are formed as the ends of the movable range of the pair of slide members 1020.

  Next, the composite operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 69A and 69B are front perspective views of the composite operation unit 1000. FIG. In FIG. 69 (a), the slide member 1020 and the half-moon shaped object 1060 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 69 (b), the slide member 1020 and the half-moon shaped object 1060 are arranged at the extended position. Is illustrated. Note that the overhang position of the slide member 1020 and the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is formed as the end of the end of the movable range of the slide member 1020 which is located on the opposite side to the above-described retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pair of slide members 1020 of the composite operation unit 1000 is slid vertically, and in the process of the slide movement, the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 rotates 180 degrees. In other words, the pair of half-moon-shaped objects 1060 are stationary at the retracted position (see FIG. 69 (a)) with the semicircular arc sides facing the other half-moon-shaped object 1060. In the process of being slid vertically by the slide member 1020, the slide member 1020 rotates about a rotation axis in a direction perpendicular to a plane including the game board 13 and has a semicircular shape with respect to the other half-moon shaped object 1060. Is rotated until the straight line portion (string portion) of the is turned. In the overhang position (see FIG. 69 (b)), the straight portions (string portions) of the pair of upper and lower half-moon-shaped objects come into contact with each other, so that the pair of semicircular-shaped objects 1060 is combined. Form a circular shape. Furthermore, when the semicircular-shaped accessory 1060 moves to the overhang position, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 housed inside the semi-circular accessory 1060 is normally exposed to the outside of the semi-circular accessory 1060 when the semicircular accessory 1060 operates to the overhang position. Operate. Four claw-shaped objects 1063 are provided for each one half-moon-shaped object 1060, and are arranged at equal intervals in an arc portion of the half-moon-shaped object 1060.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72, the structure of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 will be described. Since all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 have the same structure, here, the hemispherical item 910 will be described as an example, and the other hemispherical items 920, 930, The description of 940 is omitted.

  FIG. 70A is a front perspective view when the hemispherical accessory 910 is taken out of the operation unit 300. FIG. This hemispherical accessory 910 includes a light source 231 for the accessory inside, and emits light by turning on or off the light source 231 for the accessory, and a pair of upper and lower opening and closing units that can open and close. 912a, 912b and a plurality of gears 913a, 913b, 913c, 913d, 913e for transmitting the power of the accessory motor 229 to the opening / closing portions 912a, 912b are provided.

  The state of FIG. 70A shows a state in which the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are each opened to the maximum extent. By driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the hemispherical accessory 910, the opening / closing portion 912a is opened. Can be changed downward, and the opening / closing portion 912b can be changed downward to be in a closed state. When the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are in the closed state, the light emitting portion 911 is in a state where the light emitting portion 911 cannot be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 67).

  FIG. 70B is a side view of the hemispherical accessory 910. The gear 913a and the gear 913b are fixed (adhered) to the opening / closing section 912b and the opening / closing section 912a, respectively, and the opening / closing sections 912b and 912a perform opening / closing operations in conjunction with the rotation amounts of the gears 913a and 913b. It is configured as follows. Further, a light-shielding plate 916 is provided in the opening / closing part 912b. Although details will be described later, the light-shielding plate 916 is used for determining the degree of opening and closing of the opening and closing unit 912b. Since the light blocking plate 916 is fixed to the opening / closing section 912b, it operates in conjunction with the operation of the opening / closing section 912b.

  A light shielding sensor 915 is provided behind the gear 913a. The light-shielding sensor 915 is a sensor for determining whether or not the position of the opening / closing unit 912b is closer to the closed state (below the specific position) than the specific position (see FIG. 71C). Although the details will be described later, based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor 915, it is determined that the opening / closing unit 912b is closer to the closed state (below the specific position) than the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)). In this case, the light emitting unit 911 is turned off, and when it is determined that the light emitting unit 911 is on the open state side (above the specific position) with respect to the specific position (see FIG. 71C), the light emitting unit 911 is turned on. Is configured. When the light shielding by the light shielding plate 916 is detected by the light shielding sensor 915, it is determined that the opening / closing unit 912b is closer to the closed state (below the specific position) than the specific position (see FIG. 71C). .

  Here, as in the case of the hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 mounted on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an accessory that operates the opening / closing unit and the light emitting unit in a combined manner (combined operation accessory). Has existed conventionally. In addition, as a method of controlling the turning on or off of the composite operating accessory, there is a control of turning off the light based on whether or not the opening / closing unit is completely closed. However, in this conventional control, if the opening / closing section is slightly opened, the light emitting section remains lit. Therefore, when the opening / closing section immediately before closing is slightly opened, the gap between the opening / closing section is small. The light of the light emitting part leaked out from the camera. That is, there is a problem that the appearance of the composite action character is poor. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the light blocking sensor 915 detects that the opening / closing portion 912b has reached the specific position (see FIG. 71C) (that is, before the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed). B) Since the light emitting portion can be turned off, light leakage in a state where there is a slight gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b is prevented, and the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, The quality of the 940 is improved.

  FIG. 70 (c) is a front view of the hemispherical accessory 910. As shown in FIG. 70 (c), when the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are opened to the maximum extent, the entire light emitting portion 911 becomes visible from the front side.

  Next, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b of the hemispherical accessory 910 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram illustrating a state where the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are opened to the maximum limit, and FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram illustrating a state where the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are approximately half open. FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing a case where the opening / closing unit 912b is at the above-described specific position (a detection start position of the light shielding sensor 915). FIG. 71 (d) shows that the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are completely closed. It is a figure showing the state where it was done.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d), the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b operate so that the positions are always vertically symmetric. The operation of the opening / closing members 912a and 912b is performed in a positive direction (opening direction) or a negative direction (closing direction) with respect to the accessory motor 229 using the specific position as a reference position (position where the number of steps is 0). The number of steps is set. Specifically, in order to operate (open) from the position of FIG. 71 (c) to the position of FIG. 71 (a), it is necessary to operate the accessory motor 229 in the forward direction by 25 steps (25 degrees). . On the other hand, in order to operate (close) from the position of FIG. 71 (c) to the position of FIG. 71 (d), it is necessary to operate the accessory motor 229 in the negative direction by 5 steps (5 degrees). That is, when changing the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b from a completely closed state to a completely open state, the accessory motor 229 that is advanced five steps in the negative direction is moved in the positive direction. What is necessary is just to operate 30 steps, and to make it the state which advanced 25 steps as a step number in the forward direction. Also, when changing from a completely opened state to a completely closed state, the accessory motor 229 which is in a state advanced 25 steps in the positive direction is operated in the negative direction for 30 steps, and What is necessary is just to make it the state which advanced 5 steps as a step number in the negative direction. As described above, by controlling the operation of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b by the number of steps starting from the origin position, the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b can be arranged as desired.

  As the opening / closing unit 912b of the accessory motor 229 moves toward the closed state (upper side), the light blocking plate 916 moves down (see FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b)). The operation of the light shielding plate 916 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the light shielding sensor 915 and the light shielding plate 916. FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (d) show the states of the light shielding sensor 915 and the light shielding plate 916 when the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state of FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d), respectively. FIG.

  The light-blocking sensor 915 is provided with a light-blocking detection section 915a (see FIG. 72A), and it is determined whether or not the light-blocking plate 916 overlaps the light-blocking detection section 915a (whether or not the light-blocking plate 916 is blocked). The output of the sensor 916 is changed (set to the H output state). In the states of FIG. 72A and FIG. 72B, the light-shielding sensor 916 is in the L output state because the light-shielding detector 915a and the light-shielding plate 916 do not overlap. Then, when the arrangement shown in FIG. 72C is obtained (that is, the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state shown in FIG. 71C), a part of the light-shielding detection unit 915a is shielded by the light-shielding plate 916. The light-blocking sensor 915 is set to the H output state. Note that the position at which the light-blocking sensor 915 starts detection is set as the origin position of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b. The origin position is a return position when the origin return operation is performed based on power-on. However, when the operation of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b is completed during a normal game, the origin position is closed beyond the origin position. State (see FIG. 71 (d)).

  Even if the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed from the origin position and the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed, the state where the light shielding detection portion 915a is blocked by the light shielding plate 916 continues (see FIG. 72 (d)). ). That is, while the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state shown in FIG. 71 (c) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (d), the output of the light shielding sensor 916 is always in the H state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the arrangement of the light shielding sensor 916 and the light shielding plate 915 and the output of the light shielding sensor 916 will be described in association with each other. 73 shows the positional relationship between the light shielding sensor 916 and the light shielding plate 915, and the lower part of FIG. 73 shows the output of the light shielding sensor 915 in each positional relationship.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in a state where the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely opened (see FIG. 71A), the output of the light-shielding sensor 916 is in the L state. Then, when the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are changed to the closed state side and the light shielding plate 916 blocks a part of the light shielding detection portion 915a (see FIG. 71 (c)), the output of the light shielding sensor 916 is output. Rises to the H state. The state where the output is H does not change even if the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the normal game, while the output of the light-shielding sensor 915 is in the H state, the light-emitting unit 911 is turned off, and when the output of the light-shielding sensor 915 is in the L state, The unit 911 is turned on. That is, when closing the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b in the open state (see FIG. 71 (a)), the light-emitting portion is brought to a specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)) before being completely closed. 911 can be turned off.

  If the light-emitting unit 911 is kept turned on until the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are completely closed, the light-emitting unit 911 is in a state immediately before closing (a state where a slight gap is formed between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b). Also, since the light emitting unit 911 is turned on, light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, and the quality of appearance is deteriorated.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four hemispherical accessories are provided, but the period and the number of steps until each accessory is closed due to individual variation or the like are not always the same. Under such a situation, a situation may occur in which the opening / closing portion is closed first of only some of the four hemispherical objects. In this case, the hemispherical accessory that closes slower than the other will be in a state where light leaks from a slight gap created before the opening and closing part is closed, so the hemispherical shape with the other opening and closing part closed There is a possibility that light leakage may be conspicuous due to comparison with the accessory.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the positions of the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are determined based on the output of the light-shielding sensor 915, and the light emitting unit 911 is activated when the light emitting unit 911 is operated closer to the closed state than the specific position (see FIG. 71C). It is configured to be turned off. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a state in which light leaks from the gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b, so that the apparent quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

  Further, by configuring only the output state of the light-shielding sensor 915 to turn on and off the light emitting unit 911, even if a plurality of operation patterns of the hemispherical accessory 910 are provided, the opening / closing unit 912b can be used. When the light reaches the specific position (see FIG. 71C), the light emitting unit 911 can be mechanically turned off. That is, it is not necessary to define the lighting timing and the lighting-off timing of the light emitting unit 911 for each of the plurality of operation patterns. Therefore, by defining the lighting data and the turning-off data for each operation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. A light source 231 for the accessory, which is a light source of each of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940, is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment. In addition, the contents of various tables specified in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from the load reference value table 222b in the first embodiment. That is, the content is changed to match the character of the present embodiment. The RAM 223 is provided with a lighting flag 223m in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. The other electrical configurations are the same as the electrical configurations in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  The lighting flag 223m is a flag indicating the state of the accessory light source 231 corresponding to each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. This flag is composed of 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. Specifically, hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are sequentially associated with the lower bits.

  If the value of each bit of the lighting flag 223m is 1, it indicates that the corresponding accessory is being lit, and if it is 0, it indicates that the corresponding accessory is being turned off. The value of the empty bits (upper 4 bits) is fixed to 0. For example, if the lighting flag 223m is 03H (00000011B in binary notation), it means that the hemispherical accessory 910 and the hemispherical accessory 920 are on, and the other accessories are off. . Based on the state of each bit of the lighting flag 223m, it is possible to specify the hemispherical accessory that is lighting.

  Next, an operation start condition table 222b and a load reference value table 222c provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation start condition table 222b in the present embodiment. The operation start condition table 222b is a table in which, similarly to the operation start condition table 222b in the first embodiment, the operation start condition of the accessory is defined for each group. Only when this occurs, the operation start of the corresponding accessory can be set.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the characters in this embodiment are classified into three groups. Specifically, four hemispherical characters 910, 920, 930, and 940 are classified into group 1, a plurality of claw-shaped characters 1063 are classified into group 2, and a half-moon-shaped character 1060 is classified into group 3. ing. Since the group 1 does not interfere with other groups, no operation start conditions are defined. The group 2 is defined so that the operation can be started only when the group 3 is stopped. Further, the group 3 is defined so that the operation can be started only when the group 2 is at the origin position (in a state where the group 2 is housed inside the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060).

  Similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, by starting the operation of the accessory according to the conditions defined in the operation start condition table 222b, each of the accessories can be changed without interference (contact) between the accessories. be able to.

  FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the load reference value table 222c in the present embodiment. The load reference value table 222c is a load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each accessory when operating each accessory in the same manner as the load reference value table 222c in the first embodiment. Is a data table that defines values (drive load reference values) corresponding to. By operating the accessory based on the load reference value table 222c in a range where the total of the driving load reference values is 100 or less, the accessory can be operated in a range equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power).

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the drive load reference value when opening / closing any of the opening / closing portions of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 is 10. That is, the drive load reference value when the four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are simultaneously opened and closed is 40. The drive load reference value is 10 when any of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 is turned on. That is, when all the four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are turned on, this corresponds to the drive load reference value 40. As a result, the driving load reference value when the accessory of group 1 is operated becomes 80 at the maximum.

  In addition, the driving load reference value for operating the claw shaped object 1063 constituting the group 2 is 15, and the driving load reference value for rotating the half-moon shaped object 1060 of the group 3 is 15, respectively. In other words, the driving load reference value when rotating the upper and lower half-moon-shaped objects 1060 simultaneously is 30. The driving load reference values when the half-moon-shaped object 1060 is slid from the retracted position (origin position) to the overhang position or from the extended position to the retracted position (origin position) are respectively Fifteen. That is, the driving load reference value when the upper and lower half-moon-shaped objects 1060 are simultaneously slid is 30. Therefore, the drive load reference value when the accessory of group 3 is operated is 60 at the maximum.

  Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, based on the drive load reference value defined in the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 75 (b)), the variable character and the role to be newly changed. Control is performed so that the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the object is equal to or less than the current capacity (not more than the rated power). This allows the accessory motor 229 to be constantly driven within the range of the load current (power consumption) of the current capacity or less (the rated power or less), so that the load current (power consumption) reduces the current capacity (rated power). Excess can be suppressed. Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 for controlling the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the operation of the accessory is abnormal. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, a power return operation table 222d provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The power supply return operation table 222d executes a return operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally changed when the power is turned on, similarly to the power supply return operation table 222d in the first embodiment. This is a data table that is referred to at the time.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the power return operation table 222d (see FIG. 76) of the present embodiment is configured such that the return operation is executed in the order of group 1 → group 2 → group 3 in accordance with the update of the return pointer 223f. Have been. Further, in the return operation of the present embodiment, as the power return operation of the four hemispherical objects constituting Group 1, the opening / closing unit is opened to the maximum extent, and then the closing operation is performed until it is completely closed. It is configured as follows. That is, the return operation is performed beyond the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)). This is because the boundary position (see FIG. 71 (c)) at which the output of the light shielding sensor switches from the L state to the H state is set as the origin position of the opening / closing unit. By setting the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) as the origin position, the origin position can be accurately determined based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. Therefore, in the home position return operation performed before performing the power supply return operation using the power supply return operation table 222d, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 have the same degree of opening. Can be. Therefore, since the power return operation can be performed starting from the same state, the same power return operation may be performed for all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 each time. Therefore, only the single data table shown in FIG. 76 needs to be prepared as the power return operation table 222d, and it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns according to the start position, so that the data amount can be reduced.

  In addition, when the state where the opening / closing section is completely closed is set as the origin position, whether or not the opening / closing section is completely closed cannot be detected by the light-shielding sensor according to the present embodiment. , 93, and 940 may be completely closed before they are completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be further driven several steps after being completely closed. If the home position return processing is completed before completely closing, the operation start position of the power supply return operation may vary, and the power supply return operation may not be able to be executed accurately. Further, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing portions may come into contact with each other and be pushed into each other, so that the opening / closing portions and gears may be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor, the start position of the power return operation can be made exactly the same position. Further, by causing the opening / closing section to close excessively, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing section and the gear from being damaged.

  Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, by executing the power supply return operation of the accessory based on the power supply return operation table 222d, the entire operation range in which the accessory may operate during the normal game Can be exhaustively operated. Thus, when an abnormality has occurred in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in any of the opening and closing operations of each of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, a sound, an LED, and a display on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. In addition to notifying the abnormality by, for example, it is configured to notify that the abnormality has occurred by blinking the light emitting portion of the hemispherical accessory in which the abnormality has occurred. By blinking the accessory in which the abnormality has occurred, the hall clerk can more easily recognize the portion in which the abnormality has occurred. In addition, since the light-emitting portion of the hemispherical accessory performs either a lighting operation or a light-off operation during a normal game, some abnormality occurs by executing a blinking operation that is not performed during a normal game. Can be more easily recognized. Note that the operation mode of the light emitting unit when an abnormality occurs is not limited to the blinking operation. For example, it may be configured to be lit at a brightness higher than when lit during a normal game, or conversely, may be lit at a darker brightness. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the location of the abnormality is visually notified by continuously changing the luminance of the light emitting unit corresponding to the hemispherical accessory in which the abnormality has occurred. These also allow the clerk of the hall to more easily recognize the site where the abnormality has occurred.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the home position return process 2 (S1131) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. This origin return process 2 (S1131) is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 37) by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed instead of the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. This is the process to be performed.

  In the origin return process 2 (S1131), in the process of S1206, the same process as the process of S1206 of the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the origin return process 2 (S1131) of the present embodiment, when the process is started, first, the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory corresponding to the light-shielding sensor that is detecting the H (ON) output (ie, FIG. 71). The opening / closing part located closer to the closed state than the arrangement (c) is set to be opened until the original position (see FIG. 71 (c)) is reached (S1211).

  If the opening operation is performed in the state of the H (ON) output, the origin position cannot be detected. This is because the light shielding sensor is in an H (on) output state even at the origin position. Therefore, in the process of S1211, the opening operation is performed until the light-shielding sensor is set to the L (off) output state (that is, until the light-shielding sensor passes the origin position), and then the light-shielding sensor outputs the L (off) output. Then, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing unit is stopped, and the accessory motor 229 is driven in the direction of the closing operation by one step. Thus, even if the light-shielding sensor performs the home return operation from the H (on) output state, the opening / closing unit can be returned to the home position.

  When the process of S1211 is completed, the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory corresponding to the light-shielding sensor that is detecting the L (off) output (ie, is located closer to the open state than the arrangement of FIG. 71 (c)). The opening / closing section is set to perform the closing operation until it reaches the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)) (S1211). That is, the opening and closing unit is closed until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (ON) first.

  Next, it is determined whether or not all of the characters (plural claw-shaped characters 1063) constituting Group 2 are at the origin position (S1213). If any of the characters are deviated from the origin position (S1213: No) ), The setting is made so that the characters constituting group 2 return to the origin position (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1215. On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if it is determined that all the characters constituting the group 2 are at the origin position (S1213: Yes), the process of S1214 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1215.

  In the processing of S1215, it is determined whether or not all the characters constituting the group 3 are at the origin position (S1215). The group 3 is set so as to start the origin return after the origin return of the character has been completed (S1216), and the process proceeds to S1206. If there is no character that is shifted from the origin position in group 3 (S1215: No), the process of S1216 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1206.

  By executing the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77), each accessory can be set at the origin position, similarly to the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Therefore, at the time of starting the power return operation performed after the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77) is completed, it is possible to ensure that the respective accessories are in the same arrangement state. Therefore, since the same operation may be set each time as the setting of the power return operation, the prescribed contents of the power return operation table 222d can be reduced.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  In this main processing (see FIG. 78), in each processing of S1301 to S1310 and S1311 to S1318, the same processing as each processing of S1301 to S1310 and S1311 to S1318 of the main processing in the first embodiment is executed. Is done. Then, in the main processing (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1310 ends, the accessory lighting for setting the lighting operation and the light-off operation of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. A control process is executed (S1331). Next, a hemispherical role opening / closing process, which is a process for setting an opening / closing operation of each hemispherical role 910, 920, 930, 940, is executed (S1332), and the process proceeds to S1311.

Next, the accessory lighting control process (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This accessory lighting control process (S1331) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 78), and as described above, for setting the lighting operation and the extinguishing operation of the hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. This is the process.

  In the accessory lighting control process (S1331), first, it is determined whether or not the lighting flag 223m has an ON bit (S3901). If it is determined that there is no ON bit (S3901: No), all Since the light emitting portion of the hemispherical accessory is turned off and there is no additional accessory for setting the light-off, the processing for setting the light-off (S3902 to S3907) is skipped and the process proceeds to S3908. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3901 that there is an ON bit (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor corresponding to the ON bit is H (ON) (S3902). If it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S3902: No), it means that the opening / closing unit is closer to the open state than the position to be turned off (see FIG. 71 (c)). Since there is no need to set off, the process moves to S3908.

  In the process of S3902, if it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (ON) (S3902: Yes), then, among the bits of the lighting flag 223m, the H (ON) state is set as the output of the light-shielding sensor. The bit corresponding to the detected hemispherical character is set to 0 (S3903).

  When the processing of S3903 ends, it is next determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on and the closing operation flag 223h is off to determine whether or not the home position return operation is being performed (S3904). , S3905). If it is determined that the home position return operation is being performed (S3905: Yes, S3906: Yes), the driving of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the accessory including the light-blocking sensor that has detected the H (ON) output state is configured. , The opening / closing unit is stopped (S3906), and the process shifts to S3908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3904 that the initialization flag 223g is off (S3904: No), the light emitting unit of the accessory corresponding to the light shielding sensor that has detected the state of H (on) in the processing of S3902. Light-off is set (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908. Also, in the process of S3905, if it is determined that the closing operation flag 223h is off (S3906: No), the home position return operation has already been completed and the power supply return operation is being performed (that is, the current light-shielding sensor ON detection means that it has not returned to the origin position due to the origin return), and the process shifts to S3908.

  In the process of S3908, a hemispherical accessory lighting process for setting lighting of the hemispherical accessory is executed (S3908), and this process ends. The details of the hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In this way, by executing the accessory lighting control process (see FIG. 79), each of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 is moved when the opening / closing unit is at the position shown in FIG. 71 (c). Can be turned off. Here, assuming that the light-emitting unit 911 is kept turned on until the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed, a state immediately before closing (a slight gap is generated between the opening / closing portion 912a and the opening / closing portion 912b). State), the light emitting unit 911 is turned on, so that light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, and the quality of appearance deteriorates. I will.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four hemispherical accessories are provided, but the period and the number of steps until each accessory is closed due to individual variation or the like are not always the same. Under such a situation, a situation may occur in which the opening / closing portion is closed first of only some of the four hemispherical objects. In this case, the hemispherical accessory that closes slower than the other will be in a state where light leaks from a slight gap created before the opening and closing part is closed, so the hemispherical shape with the other opening and closing part closed There is a possibility that light leakage may be conspicuous due to comparison with the accessory.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by turning off the light at the stage when the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 71 (c), it is possible to prevent a state in which light leaks from the gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b. . Thereby, the appearance quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

  Further, by executing the above-mentioned accessory lighting control process (see FIG. 79), in the origin return operation, the opening / closing portion of each accessory can be stopped at the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)). The reason why the detection start position of the light shielding sensor is set to the origin position instead of the state where the opening / closing unit is completely closed (see FIG. 71 (d)) is that the origin position is determined by the detection result of the light shielding sensor. This is because it can be accurately determined based on this. That is, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 can have the same degree of opening. Therefore, since the power return operation can be performed starting from the same state, the same power return operation may be performed for all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 each time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns for the power return operation, the data amount of the power return operation table 222d can be reduced.

  Further, when the completely closed state is set as the origin position, it is not possible to detect whether or not it is completely closed by the light-shielding sensor of the present embodiment. In some cases, the return to origin may be completed before the shutter is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be further driven several steps after the shutter is completely closed. If the home position return processing is completed before completely closing, the operation start position of the power supply return operation may vary, and the power supply return operation may not be able to be executed accurately. Further, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing portions may come into contact with each other and be pushed into each other, so that the opening / closing portions and gears may be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor, the start position of the power return operation can be made exactly the same position. Further, by causing the opening / closing section to close excessively, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing section and the gear from being damaged.

  Next, the hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) executed in the above-described accessory lighting control process will be described with reference to FIG. The hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) is a process for setting lighting of the hemispherical accessory.

  In the hemispherical accessory lighting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an off bit in the lighting flag 223m (S4001). If it is determined that there is no off bit (S4001: No), all the hemispheres are determined. Since the characters 910, 920, 930, and 940 are being lit, which means that there are no characters to be newly lit, the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4001 that there is an off bit (S4001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor corresponding to the off bit is L (off) (S4002). If it is determined that the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) (S4002: No), the opening / closing part of the accessory corresponding to the OFF bit is closer to the closed state than the arrangement shown in FIG. (That is, the arrangement is in the light-off state), and the present processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S4002: Yes), the light-shielding sensor that has detected off of the bits of the lighting flag 223m is configured. The bit corresponding to the included hemispherical accessory is set to 1 (S4003).

  When the process of S4003 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on and the closing operation flag 223h is off in order to determine whether or not the home position return operation is being performed (S4005). S4006). If it is determined that the home position return operation is being performed (S4005: Yes, S4006: Yes), the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the hemispheric accessory including the light-shielding sensor that has detected the L (off) output is included. After the drive is stopped to stop the opening / closing unit, the accessory motor 229 is closed by one step (S4007), and the process ends. Thus, even when the light-shielding sensor detects H (ON) when the power is turned on (the degree of opening is lower than the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), the home position return operation is performed as shown in FIG. 71 (c). Can be returned to the configuration. That is, regardless of the arrangement of the opening / closing portions when the power is turned on, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 can be returned to the origin positions (see FIG. 71 (c)).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4004, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is off (S4004: No), the light emitting unit of the accessory corresponding to the light shielding sensor that has detected the L (off) state in the process of S4002. Lighting is set (S4007), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4005, when it is determined that the closing operation flag 223h is off (S4006: No), the home position return operation has already been completed and the power supply return operation is being performed (that is, the current light-shielding sensor The ON detection means that it has not returned to the origin position due to the origin return), and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, since the detection start position of the light shielding sensor is set at the origin position in the origin return, the start position of the power return operation can be set to the exact same position. Further, when the completely closed position is set as the origin position, after the light shielding sensor detects the state of the H output, it is necessary to further drive the accessory motor 229 by 5 steps to close the opening / closing section. is there. However, due to individual variations in the opening / closing unit, individual variations in the accessory motor 229, and variations in the installation position of the light shielding sensor, the position driven by five steps is not necessarily completely closed. In addition, taking into account the individual variation of the accessory, the number of steps from when the light-shielding sensor is in the H output state to when the light-shielding sensor is in the closed state is set to one by one (further, one pachinko machine 10 is provided with one step). It is not realistic to set individually for each of the four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940, and set the same number of steps for all pachinko machines 10 There is a need to. Therefore, when the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are operated until the opening / closing portions are completely closed (the same number of steps is set for the accessory motor 229) every time the home position is returned, Depending on the individual, the number of steps may be too large. For example, the opening / closing unit may be closed at the stage of performing four steps in the negative direction from the origin position, and the upper and lower opening / closing units may be pushed into each other at the fifth step. That is, there is a possibility that the upper and lower opening / closing portions are pushed into each other during the return to the origin, thereby damaging the opening / closing portion. Therefore, in this embodiment, since the origin position is set to the position where the light-shielding sensor is in the H output state (see FIG. 71 (c)), it is possible to suppress further pushing after the opening / closing part is completely closed. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion from being damaged during the return to the origin.

  Next, a hemispherical accessory opening / closing process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The hemispherical accessory opening / closing process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 78), and is a process for setting opening and closing of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940.

  In the hemispherical accessory opening / closing process (S1332), first, it is determined whether or not there is a light-shielding sensor in an H (on) state (S4101). (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4104. On the other hand, if there is a light blocking sensor in the H (on) state (S4101), it is determined whether the number of times of detection of the on state is the fifth (S4102). That is, it is determined whether or not H (ON) is continuously detected over five main processes (see FIG. 78), and the case where H (ON) is momentarily caused by noise or the like is eliminated. I have.

  In the process of S4102, if the detection of the H (ON) state is less than five times (S4102: No), the process proceeds to S4104. On the other hand, in the process of S4102, when the H (ON) state is detected five times consecutively (S4102: Yes), then, the hemispherical character corresponding to the light-shielded sensor that has detected the H (ON) state is removed. The number of operation steps until the operation is stopped is set for the accessory motor 229 to be operated (S4103). The number of steps is the number of steps from when ON is detected by the light shielding sensor to when the opening / closing unit is completely closed.

  In the process of S4104, it is determined whether or not there is an L (off) state light-shielding sensor (S4104). If there is no L (off) state light-shielding sensor (S4104: No), the present process is terminated as it is. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the light-shielding sensor in the L (off) state exists, it is determined whether the L state (off) has been detected five times in a row (S4105), and the fifth L (off) state is not detected. In this case (S4105: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the detection of the current L (off) state is the fifth detection, the number of operation steps of the accessory motor 229 for driving the hemispherical accessory for which lighting is set is determined by the state in which the opening and closing unit is fully open (FIG. 71). (Refer to (a)), the number of steps up to (step S4106) is set, and the process ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a hemispherical accessory capable of performing an opening / closing operation and a lighting operation in a combined manner. Further, in order to control the turning on and off of the hemispherical accessory, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can determine whether or not the opening / closing unit is closed for a certain amount or more based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. And turning on and off is controlled based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor. That is, the light-blocking sensor detects light-blocking, turns off the light-emitting unit while the output is in the H (on) state, and turns on the light-emitting unit while the output is in the L (off) state. It is composed. That is, the light emitting unit can be turned off before the opening / closing unit is completely closed.

  If the light-emitting unit 911 is kept turned on until the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are completely closed, the light-emitting unit 911 is in a state immediately before closing (a state where a slight gap is formed between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b). Also, since the light emitting unit 911 is turned on, light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, and the quality of appearance is deteriorated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the positions of the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are determined based on the output of the light-shielding sensor 915, and the light emitting unit 911 is activated when the light emitting unit 911 is operated closer to the closed state than the specific position (see FIG. 71C). It is configured to be turned off. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a state in which light leaks from the gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b, so that the apparent quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor (the position at which the state switches from the L output state to the H output state) is set to the origin position of the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory. This is because the origin position can be accurately determined based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. That is, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 can have the same degree of opening. Therefore, since the power return operation can be performed starting from the same state, the same power return operation may be performed for all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 each time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns for the power return operation, the data amount can be reduced.

  Further, when the completely closed state is set as the origin position, it is not possible to detect whether or not it is completely closed by the light-shielding sensor of the present embodiment. In some cases, the return to origin may be completed before the shutter is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be further driven several steps after the shutter is completely closed. If the home position return processing is completed before completely closing, the operation start position of the power supply return operation may vary, and the power supply return operation may not be able to be executed accurately. Further, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing portions may come into contact with each other and be pushed into each other, so that the opening / closing portions and gears may be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor, the start position of the power return operation can be made exactly the same position. Further, by causing the opening / closing section to close excessively, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing section and the gear from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, when each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 93, 940 is opened from a closed state to a certain level or higher (see FIG. 71 (c)), the corresponding accessory is turned on, When the door is closed to a certain level or higher from the open state (see FIG. 71 (c)), the corresponding accessory is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the accessory is turned on, the accessory may be turned on at the same time as the opening operation of the accessory starts. In addition, instead of configuring the light emitting unit to be turned on or off, the light emitting unit may be configured to be turned on even in a closed state and set to have a darker luminance than the luminance in an open state. .

  In the present embodiment, the state of the light emitting unit is switched based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor, but the switching is not limited to the brightness of the light emitting unit. For example, in place of the light emitting unit, a display unit capable of displaying display information such as an image is mounted on the hemispherical accessory, and the image displayed on the display unit is switched based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. Is also good. In this case, a transparent or translucent member may be adopted as the opening / closing section, and the image displayed on the display means may be visible to the player even while the opening / closing section is closed. . Further, as a specific example of the image displayed on the display means, for example, when the light blocking sensor is in an H (ON) output state (that is, when the opening / closing unit is completely closed or slightly opened), And the image of a person is displayed while the light-blocking sensor is in the L (OFF) output state (ie, the state in which the opening / closing unit is opened from the position shown in FIG. 71C). Good. Further, a different image may be selected for a displayed person's shadow or a displayed person's image depending on the mode of the effect and the result of the effect (whether or not a big hit will occur). This allows the player to play the game while being interested in which person is displayed while the figure is displayed. In addition, when the light-shielding sensor outputs L (OFF) and an image of a person is displayed, it is possible to predict the contents and results of the effect depending on the type of the person. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the effect using the hemispherical accessory can be further increased, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing section having a structure in which the upper and lower members operate symmetrically is employed, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, a sliding door-type opening / closing unit in which left and right members open / close, a door-type opening / closing unit that opens / closes inward or forward, a shutter-type opening / closing unit that opens / closes in one direction, or the like may be employed.

  In the present embodiment, in the origin return operation, it is configured to always return to the specific position (the position shown in FIG. 71 (c)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off), the closing operation is performed to return to the specific position, and when the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on), the opening / closing unit is stopped without operating. It may be left as it is. During a normal game, the opening / closing portions of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are in a completely closed state for most of the period. The likelihood increases. That is, the period required for the return to the origin tends to be longer. On the other hand, if the origin return is not performed when the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on), the time required for the origin return can be reduced. In the power return operation performed thereafter, first, the opening / closing portions of the respective hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 may be opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off). . Then, the opening operation and the closing operation may be performed starting from the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the L (off) state. Thereby, the operation after the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (OFF) can be shared.

  In the present embodiment, the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the H state from the state where the opening / closing portions of the respective hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 are closed to the origin position shown in FIG. Although the position of the light shielding sensor is set as described above, the position is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the opening / closing section is opened and a state where the opening / closing section is closed, both of the light-shielding sensors are in an L-output state, and the transition from the closed state to the open state (the transition from the open state to the closed state). , The light-shielding sensor may be set to the H output state. Further, the origin position may be the edge on the open state side or the edge on the closed state side among the detection positions of the light shielding sensor. Further, for example, when the edge on the open state side is set to the origin position, if the light-shielding sensor is in the H state when the power is turned on, the accessory motor 229 is opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L when the power is turned on. You just have to move it to the side. Then, when the output of the light-shielding sensor detects L, it may be returned by one step in the direction of the closed state (negative direction). On the other hand, if the output of the light-shielding sensor is L when the power is turned on, it cannot be determined whether the origin position is in the open state or the closed state. If one step operation is performed and the output of the sensor does not change, two step operation is performed in the closed state side (negative direction). If the output of the sensor does not change, the steps may be incremented by one and the operation may be alternately performed in the positive direction and the negative direction until the light shielding sensor detects the state of the H output. As a result, the origin position can be searched for while increasing the amplitude by one step in the positive direction and the negative direction, so that if it is moved in the direction opposite to the origin position, it will be excessively opened or closed. Can be suppressed. If the light-shielding sensor detects H by operating in the forward direction, it means that the edge on the opposite side of the origin position has been reached, so that the accessory motor 229 is opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L. You just have to move it to the side. Then, when the output of the light-shielding sensor detects L, it may be returned by one step in the direction of the closed state (negative direction). Conversely, if the output of the sensor is switched to H while operating in the negative direction during home return, this means that the position is the home position, so the home return is performed when the light shielding sensor detects H. May be ended. Thus, even when the light-shielding sensor is at an intermediate position between the closed state and the open state, the opening / closing section is returned to the original position without excessively opening or closing the opening / closing section excessively. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion from being damaged by excessive operation.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, one or a plurality of characters that do not interfere with each other are grouped, and the operating conditions are set for each group. In other words, in the case of changing the characters constituting one group, the operation is performed only when the condition that does not interfere with other groups is satisfied based on the operation condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b. The start was configured to be configurable. In addition, each group is composed of an accessory that operates simultaneously (executes an operation effect of the same system) at an operation timing such as at the start of an effect.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, while there is a possibility that the characters that do not possibly interfere with all the other characters are grouped (group 1), the characters that may interfere with each other by changing Are grouped (group 2). Then, an operating condition for each of the accessories constituting the group 2 is defined, and the accessory is operated according to the operating conditions. As a result, it is possible to freely (freely) change the accessories constituting the group 1 except for the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the movement of the accessory constituting Group 1. In addition, it is possible to suppress occurrence of troubles such as breakage of the accessory due to interference between the accessory.

  The modification of the first embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the configuration of the first embodiment in that the operation start condition table 222b and the load reference value table specified in the ROM 222 are different in the sound lamp control device 113. The point that the contents of 222c are changed, the point that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is provided in the RAM 223, and the partial processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 39) are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. This is a different point. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. Is the same as the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, an operation start condition table 222b, a load reference value table 222c, a power return operation table 222d provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the first embodiment, And the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, the load reference value table 222c will be described first, and then the operation start condition table 222b and the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described.

  The load reference value table 222c is a data table that defines a drive load reference value for each accessory when each accessory is varied, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the drive load reference value when varying each accessory is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), in this modification, two types of groups, group 1 and group 2, are provided, and the characters constituting each group are the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Has been changed from. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the group 1 includes each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840, the rotating role 520, the left swing role 710, and the right swing role. 730 and a central swinging component 720. It should be noted that the central swinging member 720 is configured so that only the swinging operation belongs to group 1 and the descending operation belongs to group 2. All of the characters constituting group 1 are characters that have no possibility of interfering with other characters regardless of the arrangement of the other characters. Therefore, it is not necessary to set an interference condition with respect to the belongings forming the group 1, and the accessories can be freely operated in principle.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the roles constituting the group 2 are the tilting role 510, the standing role 410, and the center swinging role 720. As described above, since all of these accessories are moved to the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 by being changed, one of the accessories constituting the group 2 is operating or is in the overhang position. In this case, when the other characters constituting the group 2 are operated, there is a possibility that these characters come into contact with each other (collide). Therefore, in the present embodiment, an operation start condition is set for group 2. The operation start condition for this group 2 is defined in the operation start condition table 222b.

  Next, an operation start condition table 222b according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. The operation start condition table 222b is a data table that defines operation start conditions for starting the operation of each accessory, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the operation start condition table 222b of the present embodiment, only the operation start condition of each of the roles (the tilting role 510, the standing role 410, and the center swinging role 720) constituting the group 2 is defined. There is no provision for Group 1. This is because, as described above, there is no risk that even if the characters in Group 1 are operated, they will interfere with other characters, and it is not necessary to set operation start conditions.

  The operation start condition table 222b stipulates that the standing role 410 and the center swinging role 720 are at the origin position as conditions under which the tilting role 510 can start operating. In addition, as a condition under which the standing role 410 can start operating, it is defined that the tilting role 510 and the center swinging role 720 are at the origin positions. In addition, as a condition under which the lowering operation of the central swinging member 720 can be started, it is defined that the tilting member 510 and the standing member 410 are at the origin positions. By operating each of the characters constituting the group 2 according to these conditions, it is possible to suppress the respective characters constituting the group 2 from interfering with each other. Therefore, the action of the accessory and the action of the accessory are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the action of the accessory being damaged due to the interference between the accessories and the action of the accessory being prevented by the other accessory. It is possible to prevent the content of the displayed presentation effect from being shifted and giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the order of operation, the operation prohibition condition, and the like are finely set for each accessory without setting the group. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and setting various conditions for all of the accessories increases the work load of the designer, and the operating conditions. However, there is a problem that the data capacity of the data table for defining the data size also increases.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, a plurality of accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 are divided into a group 1 composed of only an accessory that does not cause interference with other accessories, and a group 1 in the group. Is divided into a group 2 composed of a character with a possibility of interfering with the character with the other. Then, as the operation start conditions specified in the operation start condition table 222b, only the conditions for the belongings belonging to the group 2 are specified. As a result, the data amount of the operation start condition table 222b can be reduced, so that a storage device with a small capacity can be adopted as the ROM 222. Therefore, an inexpensive storage device can be introduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Note that, in this modification, as the operation condition of the group 2, when one of the characters in the group 2 is operated, the operation can be started only when no other characters in the group 2 are operating. But it is not limited to this. For example, a character (property A) that may interfere with another character only during operation (that is, has no possibility of interfering with another character of group 2 at the origin position and the overhang position). May be added to the configuration, or a role that may only interfere with a specific role in group 2 (for example, standing character 410) (position B) may be added to the configuration. In the case of such a configuration, for example, in addition to the condition that the tilting role object 510 and the center swinging role item 720 are at the origin positions, the operating condition of the standing role object 410 is, And the condition that the accessory B is not operating. In this way, even if the number of actors to be operated is increased, the operation of the accessory can be set appropriately.

  Next, a power return operation table 222d according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83A is a diagram showing the specified contents of a power return operation table 222d in the present modification. The power return operation table 222d is a table that is referred to when performing a power return operation, as in the first embodiment.

  In the present modification, the operation is roughly divided into three stages (operation of operation scenario 1 to operation scenario 3). In the power return operation table 222d, the type of the accessory to be operated is defined for each of the above-mentioned stages (operation scenarios). Specifically, in the operation scenario 1, the power return operation of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840, the power return operation of the rotating role 520, and the power return operation of the tilting role 510 are simultaneously performed. It is specified that it will be executed. That is, it is stipulated that a plurality of characters belonging to the group 1 and one character belonging to the group 2 operate simultaneously. As described above, a character belonging to group 1 can be operated without interfering with another character, so that a plurality of characters can be simultaneously operated. On the other hand, since there is a possibility that a character belonging to group 2 may interfere with another character belonging to group 2, it is stipulated that only one character is operated at a time so that interference does not occur. I have. Note that, in the operation scenario 1, all the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840 and the rotating role 520 among the roles in the group 1 are operated without moving all the roles in the group 1 at the same time. The reason for this is to prevent the total of the load currents (power consumption) from exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the contents of the power return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 include the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 in which the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is extended from the original position. (See FIG. 10), an operation of returning to the origin position is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)). In addition, as the power return operation of the rotating accessory 520, an operation of rotating the rotating accessory 520 one turn clockwise to return to the origin position, and then performing one rotation counterclockwise to stop at the origin position is executed. (See FIG. 83 (b)). Further, as the power return operation of the tilting role object 510, an operation is performed in which the tilting role item 510 is operated from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 9), and then returned to the origin position and stopped (FIG. 83 ( b)).

  In the operation scenario 2 executed after the power restoring operation of the tilting accessory 510 is completed, the power restoring operation of each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 is executed following the operation scenario 1. This is because the power return operation of each of the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840 is configured to require a longer time than other combinations. In addition, by ending the operation of the tilting accessory 510 belonging to the group 2, a new accessory belonging to the group 2 can be operated. Therefore, the power returning operation of the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 is performed in parallel. It is specified to execute. In addition, in the operation scenario 1, when the power return operation of the rotating accessory 520 of the group 1 is not completed, the operation may be performed over the operation scenario 2. This is because the rotating accessory 520 belonging to the group 1 does not interfere with another accessory, and therefore does not have any influence on the other accessories even if it extends over the operation scenario 2.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the power-return operation of the standing role object 410 involves operating the standing role item 410 from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 8), and then returning to the origin position. An operation to stop is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)).

  Further, in the operation scenario 3 that is executed after the power restoring operation of the standing accessory 410 is completed, the power restoring operation of each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 is executed following the operation scenario 2. As described above, this is because the power return operation of each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840 is configured to take a longer time than other combinations. In addition, the power returning operation of the left swinging role 710 and the right swinging role 730 belonging to the group 1 is started. Further, by ending the operation of the standing role member 410 belonging to the group 2, a new character belonging to the group 2 can be operated, so that the power returning operation of the central swinging role 720 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), as the power return operation of the left swinging role 710 and the right swinging role 730, after each swinging role is oscillated, the swinging role is set at the origin position. An operation to stop is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)). Further, as the power return operation of the central rocking role 720, an operation of operating the central rocking role 720 from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 13), and then returning to the origin position and stopping is performed. (See FIG. 83 (b)).

  Although not shown, when the operation scenario is updated after the control based on the operation scenario 3 is completed, the END data is read. By defining the END data, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is the end timing of the power return operation.

  As described above, in the power return operation table 222d of the present modification, when performing the power return operation, the power return operations are performed one by one for the belongings of Group 2 that cannot be operated simultaneously. It is stipulated as follows. In addition, with respect to the accessories in Group 1 that do not interfere with other accessories, the configuration is such that any of the accessories in Group 2 is operated while the power supply return operation is being performed. Thus, the power return operation can be performed on a plurality of characters in parallel, so that the time required until the power return operation ends can be reduced.

  Next, the accessory operation setting table 222e in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. Like the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the accessory operation setting table 222e is a data table in which the operation timing of the accessory and the accessory to be operated are defined for each type of effect. As described above, in the present modified example, one or a plurality of characters to be operated simultaneously is not formed as a group, but the groups are distinguished according to whether or not they interfere with other characters. Therefore, in the accessory operation setting table 222e in the present modification, the accessory itself to be started to operate is defined for each group.

  More specifically, in the opening effect, each slide item 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to group 1 is defined as an item to start operating at the start of the effect. On the other hand, there is no stipulation on the belongings belonging to group 2. Further, in the out-of-range super-reach and the shared super-reach, the swinging role objects 710, 720, and 730 belonging to the group 1 are defined as the role to start the operation when 8 seconds elapse. On the other hand, there is no stipulation on the belongings belonging to group 2. In addition, a rotating role item 520 belonging to group 1 and a tilting role item 510 belonging to group 2 are defined as the role items to be started when 15 seconds have elapsed.

  In the out-of-reach special reach A and the shared special reach A, a standing role 410 belonging to group 2 is defined as a role to be started when eight seconds elapse after the production starts. On the other hand, there is no stipulation on the belongings belonging to group 1. In addition, a rotating role item 520 belonging to group 1 and a tilting role item 510 belonging to group 2 are defined as the role items to be started when 15 seconds have elapsed. In addition, as the role to start the operation after 25 seconds, the slide roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 belonging to group 1 and the standing role 410 belonging to group 2 are defined.

  In the off-special reach B and the shared special reach B, as slides to be started when 8 seconds elapse from the production start, each slide role 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to the group 1 and a rotating role 520, A falling role item 510 belonging to group 2 is defined. In addition, as the accessory to start the operation when 15 seconds have elapsed, the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 is defined. On the other hand, there is no stipulation on the belongings belonging to group 1. In addition, as the role to start the operation after 25 seconds, the slide roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 belonging to group 1 and the standing role 410 belonging to group 2 are defined.

  In the special reach, each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 and the rotating role 520 belonging to the group 1 and the tilting role 510 belonging to the group 2 as the role to be started when 8 seconds elapse from the production start. It is prescribed. In addition, as the accessory to start the operation when 15 seconds have elapsed, the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 is defined. In addition, as the accessory to be started when 25 seconds have elapsed, the sliding operation of each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 belonging to group 1 and the descending operation of the central swinging accessory 720 belonging to group 2 are defined.

  As described above, in the accessory operation setting table 222e of the present embodiment, the accessory to be started at each production start timing is defined separately for the belonging belonging to the group 1 and the belonging belonging to the group 2. I have. Thus, instead of distinguishing each of the characters defined in the operation start condition table 222b and the characters to be started, only the items defined as the belongings belonging to the group 2 in the character operation setting table 222e are determined. What is necessary is just to make it a judgment object. Therefore, in the processing for determining the operation start condition, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification Example of First Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the accessory control process 3 (S1341) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification. This accessory control process 3 (S1341) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed instead of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. This is the process to be performed.

  In this accessory control process 3 (S1341), S1401 and each process of S1403 to S1405 are the same as S1401 and S1403 to S1405 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is performed. Then, in the accessory control process 3 (S1341) of the present embodiment, when the process of S1405 ends, or when it is determined in the process of S1403 that there is no accessory that should be set to stop operation (S1403). : No), an operation start setting process, which is a process for setting the operation start of the accessory, is executed (S1431), and this process ends. The operation start setting process (S1431) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is ON (S1401: Yes), then the initial operation processing 3 is executed (S1432), and this processing ends. The details of the initial operation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the initial operation process 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process 3. The initial operation process 3 is a process for setting the power supply return operation of the accessory and the like, similarly to the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment.

  In the initial operation processing 3 (S1432), in each of the processing of S1501 to S1509 and S1512 to S1514, the processing of S1501 to S1509 and the processing of S1512 to S1514 of the initial operation processing (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed. In the initial operation process 3 (S1432) of the present modification, if it is determined that the operation suspension period has ended in the process of S1509 (S1509: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the operation scenario execution flag 223n is on. (S1531), and if it is on (S1531), it means that one of the operation scenarios (see FIG. 83 (a)) is being executed, and the accessory of group 2 ends the power return operation. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1532). Then, when it is determined that the power recovery operation is being performed based on the operation scenario (see FIG. 83A) in which the character of Group 2 is set (S1532: No), the power recovery operation is continued in the current operation scenario. May be executed, and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1532, when it is determined that the power return operation of the character belonging to group 2 has been completed (S1532: Yes), the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to off (S1533), and this process ends. . By setting the operation scenario execution flag 223n to off, a new scenario can be started in the next initial operation setting process 3.

  In the process of S1531, if it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is off (S1531: No), the operation scenario is updated (S1534), and the updated operation scenario is read (S1535). For example, if the completed operation scenario is the operation scenario 1, the operation scenario 2 is newly read.

  In addition, in the initial operation processing 3 of the present modification, when the processing of S1512 ends, the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to ON (S1536), and the processing ends. By turning on the operation scenario execution flag 223n, the power supply return operation of the accessory can be executed according to the currently selected operation scenario.

  In this manner, by performing the initial operation process 3 (see FIG. 86), the power return operation of the belongings of group 1 is executed in parallel with the power return operation of the belongings of group 2 in order. be able to. Therefore, the power return operation can be efficiently executed.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the operation start setting process (S1431). In this operation start setting process, first, it is determined whether there is a character to be set to start the operation (S4201), and if it is determined that there is no character to be started (S4201: No), This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4201 that there is a character to be set to start the operation (S4201: Yes), then, there is a character belonging to group 2 among the characters to be set to start the operation. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S4202). That is, in the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 84), it is determined whether or not the data of the accessory of Group 2 is not blank (Null data). If there is a character belonging to group 2 (that is, the data of the character in group 2 is not null data) (S4202), the operation start condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b is read (S4203). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation start condition is satisfied (S4204).

  If it is determined that the operation start condition is satisfied as a result of the determination in S4204 (S4204: Yes), the process proceeds to S4207. Also, in the process of S4202, when it is determined that there is no role belonging to group 2 among the roles to be started (that is, the role belonging to group 1) (S4202: No), The process of S4206 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4207. If all of the characters to be set to start operation belong to group 1, skipping the process from S4203 to S4206 means that even if the characters belonging to group 1 are operated, they will interfere with other characters. This is because there is no possibility, and it is not necessary to read the operation start condition from the operation start condition table 222b to determine whether the operation can be started. In this way, by performing grouping from the viewpoint of whether or not there is a possibility of interfering with another character, it is possible to omit the process of determining the operation start condition for the character in group 1. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  In the process of S4204, when it is determined that the operation start condition is not satisfied (S4204: No), the operation start of the character of Group 2 that does not satisfy the operation start condition is canceled (S4205), and A corresponding display effect command is set (S4206), and the process moves to S4207. As described above, since the operation start condition is not set for the group 1 character, the operation start is not canceled in the process of S4205. That is, in order to prevent interference with another accessory, only a minimum operation of the accessory can be canceled.

  In the process of S4202, when it is determined that there is no character belonging to group 2 among the characters to be started (S4202: No), the character to be started includes the character of group 2 and In the case where the accessory belonging to the group 2 satisfies the operation start condition (S4204: Yes), or in the process of S4207 executed after the process of S4206 is completed, the character is stored in the load value storage area 223e. The sum of the driving load total value and the driving load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to be set to start operation is stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (S4207).

  Next, it is determined whether the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S4208). If it is determined that the stored value is 100 or less (S4208: No), even if the accessory determined to be started in the processing of S4201 is operated, the accessory is supplied to the accessory motor 229. It means that the total value of the load currents to be applied falls within the range of the current capacity or less, so that the operation start of the accessory is set, and among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i, the accessory that sets the operation start is set. Is set to 1 (S4209). Then, the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (the sum of the drive load stored in the load value storage area 223e and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to set the operation start) is added. Is stored in the load value storage area 223e to update the driving load total value (S4210), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4208, when it is determined that the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is greater than 100 (S4208: Yes), the operation start of the accessory is canceled (S4211), and an alternative effect is displayed. Is set (S4212), and the process ends. Note that, when the display alternative effect command is set in the process of S4206, the display alternative effect command by this process is overwritten. The display alternative production command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display alternative effect command, the display control device 114 starts an alternative effect (see FIGS. 25 and 26 (b)) corresponding to the character whose operation stop has been canceled in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, even if the operation of the accessory is canceled, a display effect that makes the user feel as if the accessory has operated can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect has the same degree of expectation as when the accessory is operated, so that the player can play the game while having an appropriate degree of expectation for each effect. Can be done.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the first embodiment, there is a case where a role that does not have a possibility of interfering with another role is defined as a group 1 and interferes with each other by changing the group. Characters are defined as Group 2. Then, an operating condition is defined for each of the characters constituting the group 2, and the characters belonging to the group 2 are operated according to the operating conditions. As a result, it is possible to freely (freely) change the accessories constituting the group 1 except for the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the movement of the accessory constituting Group 1. In addition, it is possible to suppress occurrence of troubles such as breakage of the accessory due to interference between the accessory. Further, since the operation start condition and the interference condition are not set for all the characters, the operation start condition is set only for the character in group 2, so that the operation conditions can be simplified. . Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the present modification, a group 1 composed of characters that do not interfere with each other and a group 2 composed of characters that may interfere with each other are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a plurality of groups composed of characters that do not interfere with each other may be provided. In this case, it may be configured such that the roles that are operated at the same time (for example, each of the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840) are grouped into one group, and a predetermined operation is performed according to the group. . Thus, when the accessory is operated, the operation may be set for each group instead of for each accessory, so that the processing load can be reduced. In addition, a plurality of groups each including an accessory that does not interfere with an accessory of another group but interfere with an accessory in the same group may be provided. This makes it possible to simplify the operating conditions of each accessory, even if the types of the accessory increase and the interference conditions become complicated. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the present modification, the pachinko machines 10 that interfere with each other when one of the characters belonging to the group 2 is at the overhanging position and the other characters belonging to the group 2 change are described. It is not something that can be done. As another character constituting group 2, if another character is operated during the change of one character, the other characters may interfere with each other, but the one character stops at the origin position or the overhang position. In such a case, an accessory that does not have a risk of interference may be included in the configuration. For example, a case where a set of bar-shaped accessories that are in parallel with each other when located at the origin position and the overhang position is changed in an arc shape such that one end thereof is a starting point and is close to the other accessory. Is mentioned. In other words, it is possible to operate from the origin position to the overhang position by changing the angle by 180 degrees from one end of the accessory, or to move to the origin position by changing the angle by 180 degrees from the overhang position. An accessory can be illustrated. In this case, as the operation condition of the group 2, the operation can be started only when the other character is at the origin position or the overhang position (that is, the other character of the group 2 is not being changed). ) May be specified.

  In the present modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), and whether or not the operation start of the accessory is canceled is determined. Yes, but it is not necessary. For example, in the case of a model in which the type of the accessory is small and the load current (power consumption) is equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power) even when all the variable items that can be operated at the same time are operated, or the current capacity (rated power) For example, when the power supply 115 having a sufficiently large power supply is employed, the determination of the load current (power consumption) can be omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, since the load reference value table 222c of the ROM 222, the load value storage area 223e and the determination value storage area 223j of the RAM 223 can be omitted, the storage capacity can be reduced.

<Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when setting the action of the accessory, if it is determined that the total value of the load reference values exceeds 100, the actions of all the accessories for which the action is to be newly set are canceled. Was configured as follows. On the other hand, in the second modified example, the priority of stopping the operation is set for each accessory, and the operation is stopped from the accessory having the higher priority. Thereby, even when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, more accessories can be operated.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the priority table 222f which defines the priority of the accessory in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided. This is provided, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. Is the same as the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical Configuration of Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a priority table 222f added to the ROM 222 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the priority table 222f is a table in which the priorities for setting the operation stop are determined. In the priority table 222f, the smaller the priority number, the higher the priority of stopping the operation.

  FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are diagrams each showing an example of the priority order table 222f. The priority order table 222f defines the priority order for setting the operation stop for each type of character.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the priority order table 222f in the case where the higher the driving load reference value, the higher the priority. As shown in the figure, the tilting role object 510 having the largest driving load reference value has the highest priority. In addition, there are a plurality of characters with the second highest driving load reference value (that is, 15 characters with a driving load reference value of 15). I have. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that only a part of each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840 that operate at the same time stops operating. Similarly, with respect to the rotating role component 520, the left swing role component 710, and the right swing role component 730 having the lowest drive load reference values, the priorities of the swing role components 710 and 730 that are simultaneously operated in the effect are lowered. Thus, the swinging objects 710 and 730 are preferably operated together.

  By determining the role to be stopped based on the priority order table 222f, when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), the operation of more roles is started. be able to.

  FIG. 89B is another example of the priority order table 222f. The example of FIG. 89 (b) is an example of a case where the operation stop is set for each of the role objects (for example, each slide role 810, 820, 830, 840) which are operated in combination in various effects. . That is, the priority order for setting the operation stop is set higher in the descending order of the load reference value for each unit to be operated simultaneously. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which only a part of the accessory that normally operates in a combined manner operates, and the player does not feel uncomfortable with the effect contents.

  In the example of FIG. 89 (b), the priority of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 is the highest, and the priority of the combination of the tilting role 510 and the rotating role 520 is the highest. . In addition, each swinging character 710, 730 is defined as one unit of the character having the third highest priority, and then the standing character 410 is defined, and the central rocking character is the lowest priority character. A moving object 720 is defined.

  In this way, by preferentially stopping the operation of the combination that operates, only a part of the combination that normally operates operates, and the player feels uncomfortable with the effect contents. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the method of assigning priorities is not limited to this. For example, the priority may be set based on the distance from the third symbol display device 81 that the player will pay attention during the normal game. That is, the player is harder to notice the presence / absence of the action of the accessory as being farther from the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the accessory is farther from the third symbol display device 81, the priority of setting the operation stop is set higher. Good. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the operation has been canceled even when the operation of the accessory is cancelled.

  In addition, for example, a configuration may be such that a role that operates independently has a higher priority of stopping operation. For example, when a plurality of combinations are stopped, such as each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840, the player is likely to notice that the operation has been stopped. There is a fear. Therefore, by stopping the accessory that operates alone, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the operation has been canceled.

  Further, for example, for an accessory that gives some notification to the player depending on the operation content, the priority of canceling the operation may be set lower. For example, if a roulette-shaped accessory is included in the configuration, and if the jackpot of the roulette is notified of whether or not the jackpot is stopped, if the operation is canceled during the operation of the roulette-shaped accessory, There is a possibility that the needle of the roulette-shaped accessory may be stopped at a position different from the lottery result of the original special symbol. That is, there is a possibility that the player may mistake the result of the special symbol lottery. On the other hand, by configuring the operation of the accessory that gives some notification to the player so as not to be easily canceled, it is possible to allow the player to accurately recognize the notification content of the accessory.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device of Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the second modification example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 90, the accessory control processing 4 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the second modified example will be described. This accessory control process 4 (S1351) replaces the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. This is the process to be performed.

  Of the accessory control processing 4 (S1351), in the processing of S1401 to S1406 and S1408 to S1411, each of S1401 to S1406 and S1408 to S1411 of the accessory control processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing is performed. Further, in the accessory control process 4 (S1351) of the present embodiment, in the process of S1409, the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (the drive load reference value corresponding to the active accessory and a new operation start When it is determined that the sum of the drive load reference values to be set) is greater than 100 (S1441), an adjustment control process for stopping the operation of the accessory according to the priority is executed (S1441). This processing ends. By executing the adjustment control process (S1441), it is possible to operate more accessories while keeping the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity.

  Next, details of the adjustment control process (S1441) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the adjustment control processing (S1441) for setting the operation stop of the accessory according to the priority order. In this adjustment control process (S1441), first, the operation priority data is read from the priority order table 222f (S4301). Next, the operation data of the character with the highest priority of the operation stop among the characters with the operation data set is set to be released (S4302), and the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (during operation). (The sum of the driving load reference value corresponding to the character and the driving load reference value to be newly set to start operation) is subtracted from the driving load reference value corresponding to the character whose release is set by the process of S4302. (S4303). Next, by setting a display alternative effect command corresponding to the character for which the operation data is set to be released, the display effect is set to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 in place of the character whose operation has been released. (S4304). Thereby, even if the action of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to display an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  When the processing of S4304 ends, it is then determined whether or not the sum of the drive load reference values after the subtraction in the processing of S4303 exceeds 100 (S4305). If it is determined that it exceeds (S4305: Yes), the process is repeated. The process proceeds to S4302, and the processes of S4302 to S4305 are repeated until the sum of the drive load reference values becomes 100 or less.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4305, when it is determined that the total of the drive load reference values is 100 or less (S4305: No), the operation data of the accessory is set by setting the drive data of the accessory in which the operation data is set. The start is set (S4306), and among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i, 1 is set to the bit corresponding to the accessory for which the operation start is set (S4307). Then, the driving load total value of the load value storage area e is updated based on each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i updated in the process of S4307 and the load reference value table 222c (S4308), and this process ends. I do.

  By executing the adjustment control process (S1441), it is possible to operate more accessories while keeping the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second modified example is configured such that the operation stop priority is set for each of the accessories, and the operation is stopped from the higher-priority accessory. Thereby, even when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, more accessories can be operated.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment described above, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced, so that a larger load current (power consumption) can be used for the operation of the accessory motor 229. Was.

  In this modification, various examples in which a period in which the load current (power consumption) is low in one configuration matches a period in which the load current (power consumption) is high in another configuration will be described. That is, various examples for preventing the load current (power consumption) of the entire pachinko machine 10 from excessively increasing will be described. The period during which the load current (power consumption) is high includes, for example, a period during which the LED current of the LED such as the LCD backlight 230 is turned on, and a period during which excitation is set for the accessory motor 229. . Examples of the period in which the load current (power consumption) is high include a period in which the LED current of the LED such as the LCD backlight 230 is on, a period in which the excitation of the accessory motor 229 is not set, and the like. Can be

  First, an example in which a period during which the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 is turned off and a period during which excitation is set for the accessory motor 229 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a time change of the LED current value of the LCD backlight 230 and a timing of setting the excitation to the accessory motor 229. As shown in the drawing, in the present modification, periods a to g are associated with a period in which the LCD backlight 230 is off. In this modified example, the excitation is set for the accessory motor 229 during these periods a to g. More specifically, for example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 periodically turns on and off in an ON period of 80% and an OFF period of 20%. It is set as follows.

  Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the operation of returning to the origin of the accessory and the operation of returning to the power supply are executed. In these home position return and power return operations, it is necessary to set the operation for a plurality of accessories, so that the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 tends to increase. For this reason, in this modification, the operation of one step of the accessory motor 229 is set every time the LED of the LCD backlight 230 is turned off (each of the periods a to g). As a result, the load current (power consumption) is prevented from instantaneously increasing, and the total of the load current (power) supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated as an average value or an instantaneous value. It can be within the range of capacity (rated power).

  In this modification, the off-period of the LCD backlight 230 is set to an audio lamp so that the off-period of the LCD backlight 230 does not deviate from the timing for setting the excitation of the accessory motor 229. The MPU 221 of the control device 113 is configured to be able to grasp. Specifically, the LED driver that controls the LCD backlight 230 sends a reference signal (synchronous signal) used for periodically setting the LED on period and the off period to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Output. Based on this reference signal, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether the LCD backlight 230 is currently in the ON period or the OFF period, and sets the excitation when it is in the OFF period. Is configured.

  In the above modification, the LED driver outputs a reference signal to the MPU 221. On the contrary, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a means for generating a reference signal (synchronization signal), You may comprise so that a reference signal may be output to a driver.

  Next, an example in which the LCD backlight 230 is independently controlled in association with a plurality of areas of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, the area about three-quarters above the screen is area a, and the area about one-fourth below the screen is area b. It is configured to be variable. That is, different control commands are set for the LED driver in the area a and the area b.

  As a configuration for making the lighting timing variable between the area a and the area b, for example, LED bars are provided on the upper and lower sides of the screen, and the upper and lower LED bars are respectively assigned to different channels of the LED driver. By connecting, the upper and lower LED bars may be controlled independently. In this case, a light guide plate having a shape that covers each of the region a and the region b may be adopted as a light guide plate for uniformly irradiating the light of the LED bar to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel. That is, a light guide plate (light guide plate A) having substantially the same shape as the region a is provided on the back surface of a portion corresponding to the region a in the liquid crystal panel, and a light guide plate (light guide plate B) having substantially the same shape as the region b is provided on the liquid crystal panel. It is provided on the back of a portion corresponding to the area b. Accordingly, the light from the LED bar provided on the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 is incident on the light guide plate A, so that the incident light can be uniformly applied to the region a. . Further, since the light from the LED bar provided on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81 is incident on the light guide plate B, the incident light can be uniformly applied to the region b. .

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the LED current flowing through the LED bar (LEDa) for illuminating the area a and the LED bar (LEDb) for illuminating the area b. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in this modification, the lighting phase of the LED is inverted between the LEDa and the LEDb, and the LED current of one LED bar is turned off (the light is turned off), and The LED current of the LED bar is turned on (lit).

  More specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 92 (b), the LED current of LEDa rises from the state where the LED current of LEDa is off and the LED current of LEDb is on, and the LED current of LEDb rises. Fall off. Then, after a certain period (for example, 1.5 ms when the lighting frequency of the LED is 320 Hz and the ON period is 50%), the LED current of the LEDa falls off and the LED current of the LEDb rises on. Then, this state is maintained for a certain period (for example, 1.5 ms), and after the certain period elapses, the LED current of LEDa rises again and the LED current of LEDb falls off. Thereafter, the ON / OFF of the LED current of LEDa and the LED current of LEDb is switched every 1.5 ms. Thus, the peak current can be reduced as compared with the case where the ON periods of the LEDa and the LEDb are synchronized. Further, by setting the on-periods of the LEDa and the LEDb to the same length (50% in this specific example), the luminance of the LEDa and the luminance of the LEDb can be made equal. That is, since the apparent brightness of the area a and the area b can be made equal, it is possible to suppress the player from having a strange feeling in the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the lighting frequency of the LCD backlight 230 is not limited to 320 Hz, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as the frequency is high enough that the player cannot recognize the ON period and the OFF period. At least a frequency equal to or higher than the update frequency (50 Hz in the present embodiment) of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, if one cycle of the ON period and the OFF period is set to 20 ms or less). It is possible to set at least one or more ON periods during the period in which each image is displayed. That is, when the period during which a part of the image is displayed coincides with the off period of the LCD backlight 230, it is possible to prevent the part of the image displayed during the off period from becoming invisible. Can be. Therefore, since all the images sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable in the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In this specific example, the on-period and the off-period of the LED current are both set to 50%, and the apparent luminances of the area a and the area b match, but the luminance of the area b is darker than the area a. It may be configured as follows. For example, the period during which the LED current of the LEDa is on may be 80%, and the period during which the LED current is off may be 20%. Then, the LED b may be turned on only during the off period of the LED a. The area b provided on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81 is a part that is relatively difficult for the player to pay attention to, and thus it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable even when the luminance is low.

  Alternatively, both the ON period and the OFF period of the LED current of LEDa may be kept at 50%, and only the ON period of the LED current of LEDb may be shortened (for example, 20%). That is, the LED current of the LEDb may be set to ON at a timing such that the ON period of the LEDb is included during the 1.5 ms period during which the LED current of the LEDa is OFF. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load current (power consumption) in the region b in which the player is relatively hard to pay attention (that is, the change is difficult for the player to recognize even if the luminance is changed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the peak of the LED current value can be reduced more reliably.

  In the diagram of FIG. 92 (b), the LEDa is turned on at the same time as the LEDa is turned on, and the LEDb is turned on at the same time as the LEDa is turned off. May be delayed. Thus, for example, even if the fall of the LED current value becomes slow when the LEDa is turned off (that is, even if the current value of the LEDa does not turn off instantaneously), it is possible to set the LEDb on. During the delay, the current value of LEDa can be turned off. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the LEDa and the LEDb from being simultaneously turned on.

  This control is not limited to the LED of the LCD backlight 230. For example, the overall peak current of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by shifting the lighting phases of the illumination LEDs (illumination units 29 to 33) provided at different positions. Also, by making the brightness of the illumination LED in an arrangement that is relatively difficult for the player to pay attention to to be darker than that of the illumination LED that easily enters the field of view of the player, the pachinko game does not give the player a sense of incongruity. Energy saving of the machine 10 can be achieved.

  Further, the above control is not limited to the same type of LEDs. For example, a configuration is adopted in which the lighting phase of the LED of the backlight 230 for LCD and the lighting phase of the LED for illumination are shifted, and May be configured to turn on the other LED during the period when is turned off. Further, the above control is not limited to the LED current value, and control is performed so that the timing for operating the accessory motor 229 does not overlap with the lighting period of the LCD backlight 230 or the LED for illumination. By shifting the operation timings of the respective accessory motors 229 from each other, the current value supplied to each section of the pachinko machine 10 may be prevented from instantaneously increasing.

  As a specific example of shifting the on-period of the load current supplied to the different configurations, a period during which the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 is on, and a period during which the LED current value of the LED for illumination is on. Will be described in detail. In this specific example, a case where the LCD backlight 230 is electrically connected to the display control device 114 will be described as an example. That is, for the configuration controlled by the different control devices (the LED for illumination which is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and the backlight 230 for LCD which is controlled by the display control device 114), the ON period of the supplied load current, An example in which the off period is shifted will be described. That is, when controlling the illumination LED, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver. On the other hand, when controlling the LCD backlight 230, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 outputs a lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver.

  In this case, the LED driver (lighting driver) provided for the LED for illumination and the LED driver (backlight driver) provided for the LCD backlight set the LED on period and the off period. If the reference signals (synchronization signals) do not match, the lighting periods may overlap with the passage of time. In other words, if the frequencies of the reference signals do not match, the on-periods may overlap with the passage of time even if the on-periods do not overlap at the start of control. Further, even if the frequency of the reference signal is the same, the generation timing of the reference signal is shifted, and if the timing of starting the setting of the lighting state for each LED is shifted, the ON periods of the LEDs are mutually different. There is a risk that they will overlap.

  Thus, in the present modification, the display control device 114 is configured to periodically output a synchronization signal to the audio lamp control device 113, and each LED (lighting device) is set based on the timing at which the synchronization signal is output. , And on / off of the LCD backlight 230). That is, the same synchronization signal is output to the LED driver that drives the LED for illumination and the driver that drives the backlight 230 for LCD.

  As the synchronization signal, for example, a V interrupt signal (vertical synchronization interrupt signal) output from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds may be used. That is, the V interrupt signal configured to be output from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231 may be branched and output to the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 may be configured to directly output the V interrupt signal to the corresponding LED driver. Accordingly, the ON period and the OFF period can be set for each LED driver based on the same synchronization signal, so that the ON periods overlap each other, and the load current (power consumption) instantaneously decreases. The increase can be suppressed.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 outputs, as a lighting control command to be output to the backlight driver, information indicating that the ON period is 50% (lighting rate data 80H, 128 sections out of 255 divided one cycle are ON). And the information that the synchronization signal (V interrupt signal) is externally input, and the first half of one cycle is set to the ON period (the ON period starts from the first section of each section obtained by dividing one cycle into 255 equal parts) Set a lighting control command that includes the information. As a result, the LCD backlight 230 is turned on at the same time as detecting the V interrupt signal, and the on state is maintained for 10 ms (50% of the V interrupt signal generation cycle of 20 ms), and then the LCD backlight 230 is turned on. 230 can be set off until the next V interrupt signal.

  On the other hand, in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114, the LED driver for driving the LED for illumination is informed that the ON period is 50% (lighting rate data 7FH, 127 out of 255 divided one cycle. Information that the section is on), the external input of the synchronization signal (V interrupt signal), and the on-period in the second half of one cycle (on from the 129th section of each section obtained by dividing one cycle into 255 equal parts) Start a period) and set a command that includes the information. As a result, the LED for illumination is turned off at the same time as the detection of the V interrupt signal, and the off state is maintained for 10 ms (50% of the 20 ms which is the generation cycle of the V interrupt signal), and then the backlight for LCD is used. 230 can be set on until the next V interrupt signal.

  By outputting the above-mentioned lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver, the on-period and the off-period can be reversed by the LED for illumination and the backlight 230 for LCD. It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the load current (power) supplied thereto.

  The lighting control command for setting the lighting operation for the lighting LED is associated with the setting timing of the command, and the lighting control command (shown in FIG. None), the MPU 221 can easily select and set a lighting control command for executing the above control on the LED for illumination only by referring to the illumination setting table. it can.

  A lighting control command for setting the lighting operation for the LCD backlight 230 is defined as an LCD setting table in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in association with the command setting timing. (See FIG. 45). The MPU 231 can easily select and set a lighting control command for executing the above-described control on the LED for illumination only by referring to the LCD setting table.

  Note that the control setting timing specified in the LED driver setting table and the illumination driver setting table is, for example, a timing at which a light emission effect is performed by an illumination LED. In other words, when the lighting effect is performed by the illumination LED, the LCD backlight 230 is turned off during the ON period of the illumination LED in order to cover the increase in the load current to the illumination LED. By matching the periods, it is possible to suppress the peak of the load current from instantaneously increasing. Note that, in a gaming machine in which the LED for illumination is always in a light emitting state during the game, the time at which the power is turned on may be defined as the setting timing of the control.

  Note that the above control may be adopted by using a driver that can specify the position and length of the above-described ON period with a simpler lighting control command as the LED driver. In other words, an LED driver that can receive a lighting control command that associates the lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal to each bit of the 8-bit data may be used. In this case, as described above, when the LED driver of this aspect receives the 8-bit command, the section corresponding to the bit of data 1 is turned on, and the section corresponding to the bit of data 0 is turned off. The LED is controlled to perform the operation. Further, as described above, the sections that are earlier in time are associated with the lower bits of the 8-bit command in order. For example, when the control data is 0FH (that is, 000011111B in binary notation), in each of the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight, the first four sections are turned on, and the second four sections are turned off. Is controlled.

  When this driver is adopted, an 8-bit command output by the MPU 231 to the LED driver of the LCD backlight 230 and an 8-bit command output by the MPU 221 to the LED for illumination are mutually “1”. By simply setting the bits storing the data of "" not to overlap, it is possible to easily control the lighting of the LEDs so that the lighting periods of the LEDs do not overlap. The command may be separately defined in an illumination setting table (not shown) and an LCD setting table (not shown). For example, only the illumination setting table is provided, and the illumination setting table is provided. May be configured to output a lighting control command to the LED driver corresponding to the LED for illumination and to the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 when the data setting timing specified in (1) is reached. Then, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 inverts “1” data and “0” data of each bit of the command, and outputs a lighting control command to the LED driver corresponding to the LCD backlight 230. You may. For example, when “0FH” (that is, 000011111B in binary notation) is output as a lighting control command by the MPU 231, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 converts “1” data and “0” data of the lighting control command. By inverting the LED driver, it is converted into a lighting control command of “F0H” (that is, 11110000B in binary notation) and output to the LED driver. Thus, in the first half of one cycle, the backlight 230 for LCD can be in the on state, and the LED for illumination can be in the off state. In the latter half of one cycle, the backlight 230 for LCD can be turned off, and the LED for illumination can be turned on. Therefore, the overlapping of the ON periods can be suppressed, and the instantaneous increase in the load current (power consumption) supplied to each LED can be suppressed. Further, only the illumination setting table needs to be provided, and the LCD setting table can be omitted, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Further, this control can be realized even when a simpler LED driver capable of accepting only an LED on / off instruction (command) by the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 is used. That is, in the first 10 ms of the generation interval (1 V period) of the V interrupt signal, the illumination lamp control device 113 sets the illumination LED (the illumination portions 29 to 33) to ON and the display control device 114 sets the LCD. The backlight 230 for lighting may be turned off, and in the latter 10 milliseconds of the 1 V period, the LED for lighting (the lighting units 29 to 33) may be turned off and the backlight 230 for LCD may be turned on. . More specifically, for example, when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the audio lamp control device 113 that the V interrupt signal has been received from the display control device 114, the lighting of the LED for illumination is turned on. Configure to add processing to be set. On the other hand, in the display control device 114, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B) executed each time a V interrupt signal is detected, a process of setting the LCD backlight 230 to be turned off is added. To be configured. Thus, the backlight 230 for LCD can be turned off at the same time as turning on the LED for illumination.

  Further, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to grasp the elapsed time from the detection of the V interrupt signal, and when it is determined that 10 milliseconds have elapsed, The illumination LED is turned off and the LCD backlight 230 is turned on. Thereby, the backlight 230 for LCD can be turned on at the same time as turning off the LED for illumination. By repeating these processes, it is possible to invert the lighting phase of the illumination LED (illumination units 29 to 33) and the lighting phase of the LCD backlight 210 without providing a dedicated synchronization signal. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illumination LED (the illumination units 29 to 33) and the LCD backlight 230 from being turned on at the same time, so that the load current (supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10) (Power consumption) can be prevented from instantaneously increasing.

  Also, by setting the ON period and the OFF period of each LED based on the V interrupt signal output every 20 milliseconds, the illumination LED (the illumination units 29 to 33) and the LCD backlight are set. It is possible to prevent the lighting timing of the LED from being shifted from that of the LED 230. That is, even if the lighting timing of any of the LEDs is shifted during a certain 1V period, the 1V period ends, and the shift generated in the previous 1V period is canceled by receiving the next V interrupt signal. Then, the ON period and the OFF period of each LED can be set based on a new V interrupt signal.

  Note that a timer or the like that measures 10 milliseconds is provided only in the audio lamp control device 113, and when the LED for illumination is turned off in the audio lamp control device 113, a command for notifying that is turned off. A light-off command may be output to the display control device 114. In the command interruption process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a light-off command. May be configured to add a process for setting lighting of the LCD backlight 230. With this configuration, the display control device 114 does not need to determine the elapsed time from the detection of the V interrupt signal, so that the timekeeping means can be omitted.

  In addition, for example, each time the V interrupt signal is received, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to switch on and off the LED for illumination (the illumination portions 29 to 33), and the display control device 114 In this configuration, each time the V interrupt signal is received, the LCD backlight 230 may be switched on and off at a timing opposite to that of the illumination LED (the illumination units 29 to 33). By switching between the ON state and the OFF state of each LED in response to the reception of the V interrupt signal, it is possible to suppress the timing of setting each LED to the ON period or the OFF period from being shifted. In addition, since it is only necessary to switch the LED controlled by each control device between the on state and the off state in response to the V interrupt signal, the time elapsed from the reception of the V interrupt signal is given to each control device. There is no need to provide a configuration for timing. Therefore, the timekeeping means can be reduced.

  Note that the synchronization signal for setting the ON period and the OFF period of the LED is not limited to the V interrupt signal. For example, a synchronization signal output at a shorter cycle (for example, 3 milliseconds) than the V interrupt signal may be separately generated.

  Further, in the case of generating a synchronization signal different from the V interrupt signal, the generation position of the synchronization signal is not limited to the display control device 114, and may be provided on the audio lamp control device 113 side. A clock unit such as a crystal oscillator is electrically connected to the audio lamp control unit 113, and a synchronization signal periodically output from the clock unit is branched to the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114. It may be configured to output each of them. By employing a synchronization signal having a shorter cycle than the V interrupt signal (that is, a synchronization signal output at an interval shorter than the update interval of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81), one V interrupt can be achieved. The lighting period of the LCD backlight 230 can be set at least once during a 1 V period from when the display image is updated based on the signal to when the next V interrupt signal is output. Therefore, the load current supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 instantaneously increases while displaying all the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the LCD backlight 230 turned on. Can be suppressed.

  Note that, even when the on-period of the LED is shifted between the LCD backlight 230 and the illuminated LED (the illuminated portions 29 to 33), the on-period and the off-period need not necessarily be the same length. For example, the on-period of the LCD backlight 230 may be longer than the on-period of the illumination LEDs (illuminations 29 to 33). Since the third design display device 81 allows the player's line of sight to concentrate more easily (i.e., easily enters the field of view) than the illumination LED (illumination unit 29 to 33), the illumination LED (illumination). Even if the ON period of the units 29 to 33) is shortened (that is, even if the LED for illumination is darkened), the player is hard to notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the illumination LED. As a method of extending the ON period of the LCD backlight 230, for example, instead of making the ON period of the LCD backlight 230 longer than 50% (for example, 80%), an LED for illumination is used. The on-period of the (illuminated parts 29 to 33) may be shortened (for example, set to 20%). Then, the configuration may be such that one off-period is set for one on-period. This makes it possible to shift (disperse) the period during which the LED current is on while brightening the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. That is, it is possible to prevent the load current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 from instantaneously increasing.

  As another method of extending the on-period of the backlight 230 for LCD, for example, the on-period of the backlight 230 for LCD is set to 50%, and the on-period of the LED for illumination (the illumination parts 29 to 33) is set. May be shortened (for example, set to 20%). Then, the configuration may be such that one off-period is set for one on-period. This makes it possible to reduce the load current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 and suppress the load current value from instantaneously increasing.

  In this modification, the lighting frequency of the LED for illumination and the lighting frequency of the backlight 230 for LCD are matched (for example, 60 Hz or 320 Hz). If the lighting period of the light 230 does not overlap, it may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the lighting frequency of the illumination LED may be reduced to half the lighting frequency of the LCD backlight 230, and the length of the ON period may be reduced to half. With this configuration, the ON period of the LED for illumination is set once while the ON period and the OFF period of the LCD backlight 230 are repeated twice. Further, the ON period of the LED for illumination is set during the OFF period of the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the ON periods of the LEDs from overlapping, it is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the load current (power consumption) supplied to each unit of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present modification, the state that the LED can assume is one of the ON state and the OFF state, but is not limited to this. For example, a different current value can be set for each LED, and while some LEDs are set to a high current value, the current values of the other LEDs are set to a low current value, so that a pachinko machine is provided. The total load current value supplied to each section of the machine 10 may be prevented from instantaneously increasing.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, one or a plurality of characters that do not interfere with each other are grouped, and the operating conditions are set for each group. In other words, in the case of changing the characters constituting one group, the operation is performed only when the condition that does not interfere with other groups is satisfied based on the operation condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b. The start was configured to be configurable. In addition, each group is composed of an accessory that operates simultaneously (executes an operation effect of the same system) at an operation timing such as at the start of an effect. Further, in the third embodiment, the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) is returned to the position shown in FIG. 71C (ie, the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H first when the opening / closing portion is closed from the open state) in the home position return. And it was configured to return. That is, the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) is set as the origin position.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, while there is a possibility that the characters that do not possibly interfere with all the other characters are grouped (group 1), the characters that may interfere with each other by changing Are grouped (group 2). Then, in the case of setting the origin return operation, the origin of the group 1 and the group 2 can be returned to the origin in parallel. As a result, the time required for returning to the origin can be reduced. Furthermore, in this modification, the position where the opening / closing unit is completely closed (see FIG. 71 (d)) becomes the origin position without changing the position or number of the light shielding sensors. That is, the origin position of the opening and closing unit is set to a closed state that occupies most of the normal game, and the position at which the light emitting unit is closed can be detected based on a detection result of a light blocking sensor for switching between turning on and off the light emitting unit. Make up.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Third Embodiment>
First, the operation start condition table 222b provided in the ROM 222 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the operation start condition table 222b of the present modified example, the types of the characters constituting each group are changed from the operation start condition table 222b of the third embodiment. Specifically, the group 2 includes the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, the claw-shaped objects 1063, and the half-moon-shaped objects 1060. In addition, movable movable objects other than these are group 1. Note that the belongings belonging to the group 1 are composed of, for example, a part that swings on the spot and the like, which is not likely to interfere with another part. Therefore, no operation start condition is set for the group 1 in the operation start condition table 222b. The hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 do not have any operating conditions because they do not interfere with other objects. However, it is necessary to execute relatively complicated control when returning to the origin. Therefore, it belongs to group 2.

  On the other hand, an operation start condition is provided for each of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 and the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 belonging to Group 2. Specifically, as a condition for starting the operation of the claw-shaped accessory 1063, it is defined that the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is at the origin position or the overhang position. In addition, as a condition for starting the operation of the lunar month accessory 1060, it is specified that the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is at the origin position. By following these operating conditions, the accessory can be operated without interfering with each other.

  Next, the origin return operation table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. The origin return operation table 222f of the present modified example defines three types of operation scenarios. In each operation scenario, any one of the belongings belonging to the group 2 is set to execute the home return operation. In addition, in each of the operation scenarios, it is configured that the origin return is set in parallel with each of the items in the group 2 for the items in the group 1. Based on the origin return operation table 222f, the origin return operation of each accessory can be set efficiently. In addition, as described above, if the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is operated in a state where the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is in the overhanging position, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 exposed from each of the upper and lower half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is separated from each other. However, there is a possibility that they will interfere with each other in accordance with the rotation of the half-moon-shaped accessory. For this reason, the present modification is configured such that the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is first returned to the origin position (operation scenario 2), and then the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is returned to the origin. Thereby, the interference between the accessory can be suppressed.

  Next, the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 of this embodiment is provided with an operation scenario execution flag 223n and an initial operation flag 223o in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the third embodiment.

  The operation scenario execution flag 223n indicates whether or not each accessory is varied according to an operation scenario for setting the operation of the accessory, similarly to the operation scenario execution flag 223n in the modification of the first embodiment. This is a flag. In the modification of the first embodiment, the operation according to the operation scenario is set in the power supply return operation of the accessory performed after the return to the origin of the accessory is completed. In the return, an operation according to the operation scenario is set. That is, the operation scenario execution flag 223n of the present modification is configured to be turned on when the operation according to the operation scenario is set in the return to origin (see S1233 in FIG. 94).

  The initial operation flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not the origin belonging to the group 1 is being returned to the origin. If the initial operation flag 223o is on, it indicates that the home position return of the belonging belonging to the group 1 is being executed. If the initial operation flag 223o is off, the home position return of the group 1 is not performed (before the home position return is executed). Or after completion of the origin return). The initial operation flag 223o is set to ON when the origin return of the group 1 is set (see S1227 of FIG. 94), and is set to OFF when the origin return of the group 1 is completed (see S1239 of FIG. 94). ).

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 94, the origin return process (S1141) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the present modification will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the origin return process 3 (S1141).

  This origin return process 3 is a process executed in place of the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the third embodiment in the start-up process (see FIG. 37). This is a process for returning.

  In the home position return process 3 (see FIG. 94), first, an operation scenario execution flag 223n indicating whether or not the operation of the accessory based on any of the operation scenarios defined in the home position return operation table 222f is set. The state is determined (S1221). As described above, if the operation scenario execution flag 233n is on, it indicates that the operation is being performed in accordance with each operation scenario defined in the origin return operation table 222f. Indicates that the specified operation has not been performed.

  If it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is not on (S1221: No), it means that no operation scenario has been set, and then the origin return operation table 222f is read to update the operation scenario ( In step S1222, the updated operation scenario is read (S1223). Then, it is determined whether or not the read operation scenario is the END information (S1224). If the read operation scenario is the END information (S1224: Yes), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the read operation scenario is not END information (S1224: No), it is determined whether or not it is an operation start scenario (operation scenario 1) of group 1 (S1225).

  In the process of S1225, when it is determined that the scenario is the operation start scenario of group 1 (that is, the operation scenario 1) (S1225: Yes), the character of group 1 is set by setting the initial operation command of group 1. The operation is started (S1226), the initial operation flag 223o is set to ON to indicate that the group 1 is returning to the origin (S1227), and the process proceeds to S1228. Note that, as described above, the initial operation flag 223o is a flag that indicates that the character of the group 1 is returning to the origin when it is on, and that the origin of the group 1 is not returning when it is off. is there. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1225 that the operation scenario is not the group 1 operation scenario (S1224), the processing also proceeds to S1228.

  In the processing of S1228, it is determined whether or not the operation scenario read from the origin return operation table 222f is the origin return of the nail-shaped accessory 1063 (operation scenario 2) (S1228), and the return operation of the nail-shaped accessory 1063 is performed. If it is to be performed, a claw-shaped accessory return process is executed (S1231), and the process proceeds to S1233. If the read operation scenario is not the origin return of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (operation scenario 2) (S1228: No), it is determined whether the operation scenario is the operation scenario of returning the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 to the origin (operation scenario 3). Is determined (S1229), and if it is a scenario for returning to the origin of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 (that is, operation scenario 3) (S1229), a half-moon-shaped accessory recovery process is executed (S1232), and the process proceeds to S1233. And transfer processing.

  On the other hand, when the read scenario is neither the origin return of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (operation scenario 2) nor the origin return of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 (operation scenario 3) (S1228: No, S1229: No), the read is performed. Since the operation scenario is a scenario (operation scenario 1) indicating a return operation of the hemispherical character objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, a hemispherical character object return process is performed (S1230), and the process proceeds to S1233. Transition. In the subsequent process of S1233, the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to ON (S1233), and the process proceeds to S1221. Thereafter, the processes of S1221 to S1233 and the processes of S1234 to S1241 described later are repeated until the END information is read from the origin return operation table 222f.

  In the process of S1221, if it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is on (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether the initial operation flag 223o is on (S1234), and if it is on (S1234: Yes), which means that the home position of the belonging belonging to the group 1 is being executed, so it is determined whether the origin sensor corresponding to the belonging of the group 1 is on (S1235). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S1235: Yes), the stop of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the origin sensor that has been detected to be on is set (S1336), and the stop corresponds to the stopped accessory. The origin position is set by setting the step counter to 0 (S1337). Then, it is determined whether or not the home position return of all the belongings belonging to the group 1 has been completed (S1338). If it is determined that the home position return has been completed (S1338: Yes), the initial operation flag 223o is set to off. (S1239), the process proceeds to S1240. On the other hand, if any of the characters in the group 1 is returning to the origin (S1338: No), the process skips S1239 and shifts the process to S1240.

  If the initial operation flag 223o is off in the process of S1234, it indicates that it is out of the period for executing the home position return for the group 1, so the processes of S1235 to S1239 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1240. And migrate. Also, in the processing of S1235, when it is determined that the origin sensor corresponding to any of the characters in group 1 is off (S1235: No), the position of the character belonging to group 1 is shifted from the origin. Since it means that there is a certain accessory (origin return has not been completed yet), the process of S1236 to S1239 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1240.

  In the processing of S1240, it is determined whether or not the operation of the group 2 has been completed (S1240). If the operation has been completed (S1240: Yes), the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to off (S1241), and the processing in S1221 is performed. Move to. If the operation of group 2 has not been completed (S1240: No), the process proceeds to S1221.

  By executing this processing, it is possible to perform the returning operation to the origin of the group 2 in parallel while performing the returning operation to the origin of the group 1, so that the period required for the returning to the origin can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a description will be given of the hemispherical accessory recovery processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the hemispherical role object return process. The hemispherical accessory returning process is a process for returning each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 to the origin. In the present embodiment, the origin position is in the closed state shown in FIG. 71 (d).

  In the hemispherical accessory recovery process (see FIG. 95), two processes are executed roughly. That is, after performing the process of returning the opening / closing unit to the position shown in FIG. 71C (the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor) (S4401 to S4411), the opening / closing unit is set to the origin position starting from the arrangement of FIG. A process (origin position setting process) for returning to the position where the opening / closing unit is completely closed (see FIG. 71D) is executed. These processes will be specifically described.

  In the hemispherical accessory return process, first, it is determined whether or not the light shielding sensor is on (S4401). That is, it is determined whether or not the hemispherical object to be set is located within five steps from the closed position (see FIG. 71D). If it is determined that the light-shielding sensor is ON (S4401: Yes), then an operation command for operating the accessory motor 229 in the forward direction (the direction of opening the opening / closing unit) for one step is issued. Are output to the motor driver that drives the accessory motor 229. Then, the process waits until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4403: No). That is, the operation waits until the set operation for one step is completed. If an execution signal has been received from the motor driver (S4404: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S4404). That is, by operating the accessory motor 229 by one step, it is determined whether or not the arrangement is more open than the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c). The reason why the opening / closing section is opened until the output of the light shielding sensor becomes L (off) is that the position of the opening / closing section cannot be accurately determined while the output of the light shielding sensor is H (on). is there. Therefore, the opening / closing section is configured to be retracted (opening operation) outside the range where the light-shielding sensor is turned on (H). Once the output of the light-shielding sensor is operated to the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off), the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) due to the closing operation is always the position shown in FIG. The opening / closing part can be accurately changed to the position shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4404 that the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on) (S4404: No), the process proceeds to step S4402, and thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4402 until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off). Steps S4404 to S4404 are repeated. If the output of the light-shielding sensor is determined to be L (off) in the process of S4404 (S4405: Yes), it means that the output is at a position that is more open than the output start position of the light-shielding sensor. Then, in order to set the accurate number of steps until the closing, a process of returning to the position of FIG. 71 (c) which is the detection start position of the sensor is executed.

  Specifically, first, an operation command is set so as to operate by one step in the negative direction (the direction in which the opening / closing unit is closed) (S4406). Then, the process waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4406: No). When the execution signal is received (S4406: Yes), it means that the accessory motor 229 has operated by one step. It is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor has become H (ON) (S4407). That is, it is determined whether or not the arrangement shown in FIG. If the output of the light-shielding sensor remains in the H (ON) state (S4407: No), the processes of S4405 to S4407 are repeated until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (OFF).

  In the process of S4407, when it is determined that the output of the light shielding sensor has become H (ON) (S4407: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the detection start position of the light shielding sensor has been reached, the origin position setting process is executed. Then (S4408), this processing ends. This origin position setting process is a process of setting the opening / closing section to a closed state, which is the origin position of the present modification, and setting the origin position in the step counter. Details of the origin position setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4401, if it is determined that the light-shielding sensor is not on (that is, it is off) (S4401: No), then a command for operating the accessory motor 229 in the negative direction by one step is sent to the motor driver. It is set (S4409). Then, the process waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4410), and when it is determined that the execution signal has been received from the motor driver (that is, the accessory motor 229 has operated one step) (S4410: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) (S4411).

  In the process of S4411, if the light-shielding sensor is determined to be L (OFF) (S4411: No), the processes of S4409 to S4411 are repeated until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (ON). That is, the accessory motor 229 is operated one step at a time until the arrangement shown in FIG. If the output of the light-shielding sensor has become H (ON) (S4411: Yes), an origin position setting process (S4408) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in this processing, if the opening / closing unit is out of the detection range of the light shielding sensor when the power is turned on, the opening / closing unit is closed one step at a time until the light shielding sensor detects H (ON). As a result, it is possible to always stop at the arrangement shown in FIG. If the open / close section is within the detection range of the light-blocking sensor when the power is turned on, the open / close section is opened one step at a time until the light-blocking sensor detects L (off), and the open / close section is temporarily closed. Is configured to operate outside the detection range of. Then, as in the case of the home return operation when the sensor detects L (off) when the power is turned on, the opening / closing unit is closed one step at a time, and in this case, the operation is stopped in the arrangement shown in FIG. Can be. Therefore, by operating the same number of steps (five steps in the direction in which the opening / closing unit is closed) in the subsequent processing, it is possible to accurately return to the closed position (see FIG. 71 (d)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the origin position setting process (S4408), which is one of the above-described hemispherical accessory return processes, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the origin position setting processing (S4408).

  In this origin position setting processing (S4408), first, the value of the step counter of the hemispherical character is set to 5 (S4501), and then a command to operate in five steps in the negative direction (the direction in which the opening / closing unit is closed) is issued. Output to the motor driver (S4502). Thereby, it can be changed from the arrangement of FIG. 71 (c) to the closed position (see FIG. 71 (d)) at the position operated by 5 steps. When the process of S4502 is completed, the process stands by until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4503: No). When the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4503: Yes), the step of the hemispherical character is performed. The counter is decremented by 1 (S4504). As a result, the remaining operation step number and the step counter value can be matched.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter is 0 (S4505). If it is determined that the value is not 0, the processes of S4503 to S4505 are repeated until the value of the step counter becomes 0. Then, when the value of the step counter becomes 0 (that is, when the closed position at the origin position is reached), a stop control command for the accessory motor 229 is set to operate the accessory motor 229. The process is stopped (S4506), and the process ends. By setting this stop command, the accessory motor 229 can be reliably stopped at the origin position without excessively operating.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a description will be given of a claw-shaped accessory returning process for returning the claw-shaped accessory 1063 to the origin. In this processing, first, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4601). If the origin sensor is off (S4601: No), the accessory motor 229 is moved by one step in the negative direction (origin direction). An operation command for moving is set (S4602). Next, the process stands by until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4603: No). When the execution signal is received (S4603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor of the claw-shaped handpiece 1063 is on. (S4604). If the origin sensor is off (S4604: No), the processing of S4602 to S4603 is repeated until the original sensor detects on.

  If it is detected in step S4601 or S4604 that the origin sensor is on, the process shifts to step S4605. In the process of S4605, 0 is set to the value of the step counter of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (S4605), a stop control command of the accessory motor 229 is set (S4606), and this process ends. By executing this processing, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 can be accurately returned to the origin position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a half-moon-shaped object return process (S1232), which is a process for returning the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 to the origin, will be described. In this processing, first, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4701). If the origin sensor is off (S4701: No), the accessory motor 229 is moved by one step in the negative direction (origin direction). An operation command for moving is set (S4702). Next, the process stands by until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4703: No). When the execution signal is received (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor of the half-moon-type accessory 1060 is on. (S4704). If the origin sensor is off (S4704: No), the processes of S4702 to S4703 are repeated until the origin sensor detects on.

  If it is detected in step S4701 or S4704 that the origin sensor is on, the process advances to step S4705. In the process of S4705, 0 is set to the value of the step counter of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 (S4705), a stop control command of the accessory motor 229 is set (S4706), and the process ends. By executing this processing, the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 can be accurately returned to the origin position.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, it is possible to perform the return-to-origin operation in parallel with the accessory of the group 1 and the accessory of the group 2. Further, in the present modified example, when the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory is returned to the original point, the operation direction when performing the original point returning operation in accordance with the detection result of the light-shielding sensor when the power is turned on is made different. In both cases, after the operation is always performed at the position shown in FIG. 71 (c), by setting the operation of the accessory motor 229 in five steps, the original position can be set to the closed state. That is, before operating to the origin position, it is possible to determine where the origin position is based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor, and set the number of operation steps corresponding to the origin position. Therefore, even if the origin position is not the detection start position of the light shielding sensor (see FIG. 71 (c)), the origin can be accurately returned. In this way, the configuration in which the origin position is determined starting from the detection start position of the light shielding sensor (see FIG. 71 (c)) as a starting point leads to an increase in the size of a circuit such as providing an origin sensor separately from the light shielding sensor. The opening / closing part can be reliably returned to the origin position without performing.

  In this modification, the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the H state from the state where the opening and closing portions of the respective hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are closed to the origin position shown in FIG. Although the position of the light shielding sensor is set as described above, the position is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the opening / closing section is opened and a state where the opening / closing section is closed, both of the light-shielding sensors are in an L-output state, and the transition from the closed state to the open state (the transition from the open state to the closed state). , The light-shielding sensor may be set to the H output state. In this case, when returning to the origin, by operating alternately between the open state side and the closed state side, a boundary position where the output of the light shielding sensor switches from L (off) to H (on) is searched, and the boundary position is determined. The number of steps from the position to the closed position may be set and the operation may be performed to return to the origin position.

  For a more specific description, a case will be described as an example where the opening / closing unit is arranged so that the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H in the range of the fifth step to the tenth step from the origin position. First, when the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (ON) when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the opening / closing unit is closed one step at a time until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (OFF) (origin position). When the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off), the opening operation is performed until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on). Thus, the opening / closing section can be moved to the position of the fifth step from the origin position, so that by setting the opening / closing section to move 5 steps in the direction of the origin position, the opening / closing section can be easily returned to the origin position. .

  On the other hand, if the output of the light-blocking sensor is L (off) at the time of turning on the power, the opening operation and the closing operation are repeated, and the number of operation steps of one opening operation or one closing operation is gradually increased. As a result, a position where the output of the light shielding sensor becomes H (ON) is searched. For example, first, the opening operation is performed for one step, and if the output of the light-shielding sensor remains at L (off), then the opening / closing unit is returned to the original position (the position at power-on), and The closing operation is performed for a minute. If the output of the light-shielding sensor remains at L (off), the opening / closing unit is returned to the original position (the position at the time of power-on) again, and then the opening / closing is performed in two steps starting from the original position. An operation and a two-step closing operation are performed. Then, the opening operation and the closing operation are alternately repeated by increasing the number of operation steps from the original position until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (ON). By searching for the detection position of the light-shielding sensor while increasing the amplitude one step at a time, it is possible to suppress excessive opening or closing when the opening / closing unit is operated in the direction opposite to the origin position.

  If the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) during the opening operation, it means that the opening / closing unit has been opened from the origin position to the position of the fifth step and thus has entered the detection range of the light-shielding sensor. Therefore, by setting a five-step closing operation, the opening / closing part can be returned to the origin position. On the other hand, when the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) during the closing operation, it means that the opening / closing unit has been closed from the origin position to the position of the tenth step, and thus has entered the detection range of the light-shielding sensor. Therefore, by setting the closing operation in 10 steps, the opening / closing section can be returned to the origin position.

  As described above, even when the origin position does not exist within the detection range of the light-shielding sensor, if the number of steps from the detection range of the light-shielding sensor to the origin position is known, the opening / closing unit is opened based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor. It can be easily returned to the origin position. Note that, in the above specific example, an example has been described in which the amplitude of the closing operation and the opening operation is increased in one-step increments when the light-blocking sensor is L (off) when the power is turned on. Steps or five steps may be used. As the number of steps is increased, the time required for the opening / closing unit to enter the detection range of the light-shielding sensor can be shortened, so that the time required for returning to the origin can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the driving load reference value is defined for each type of the accessory, and it is determined whether or not to cancel the operation of the accessory based on the driving load reference value. is not. For example, whether to cancel the operation of the accessory may be determined based on the number of the accessory motors 229 to be operated, the number of commands for operating the accessory, the voltage value, and the like.

  In each of the above embodiments, the operation of each accessory is set by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (the accessory motor 229 is driven). However, the MPU 110 of the main control device 110 controls the operation of each accessory. The operation may be controlled. That is, the accessory motor 229 may be electrically connected to the main controller 110. In the second embodiment, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. However, the brightness may be controlled by the MPU 110 of the main control device 110. . That is, the LCD backlight 230 may be configured to be electrically connected to the main control device 110. As a result, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments, a liquid crystal display is employed as the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a PDP (plasma display panel), an organic EL display, a CRT display, or the like may be employed. Since these are self-luminous displays and do not include a backlight in the configuration, when the luminance is reduced as in the second embodiment, the brightness of the display is reduced by controlling the light emitting elements themselves. Thus, the load current (power consumption) may be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, only one third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display) is provided, but a plurality of third symbol display devices 81 may be provided. For example, two types of main display and a sub-display having a smaller screen size than the main display may be provided. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the display effect is further increased, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. Further, for example, the position of the sub-display may be configured to be variable. In the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by operating the accessory, the display effect is executed only on the sub-display, and the main display is turned off. The load current (power consumption) supplied to the display may be reduced to fall within the range of the current capacity (rated power). Further, when the main display is turned off, the position of the sub-display may be changed so that the sub-display is arranged at the position of the main display. Thereby, the discomfort of the main display being turned off can be reduced, and the player can be recognized as a kind of effect.

  In the above embodiments, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. However, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied and the power is cut off. May be configured to be able to hold the stored content. With this, when the power is cut off during the production, the progress of the production at the time of the power supply being turned off after the power is turned on can be determined, and the production can be executed from the continuation. be able to.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  It should be noted that a pachinko machine combining some or all of the above-described embodiments may be used.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (A limit is imposed on the total drive current of the accessory motor)
Power supply means for supplying electric power, a plurality of variable means driven based on the electric power supplied by the power supply means, a plurality of variable members changed by the variable means, and at least one of the plurality of variable members When changing the unit, the power determining means for determining whether the power required to drive the corresponding variable means exceeds a predetermined power, and if the power exceeds the predetermined power by the power determining means A gaming machine A1 comprising: the variable means being driven when it is determined; and a drive suppressing means for suppressing at least a part of the variable means to be newly driven.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of the variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the plurality of variable means are driven based on the power supplied by the power supply means, and the plurality of variable members are changed by the variable means. When at least a part of the plurality of variable members is changed, the power determining means determines whether the power required to drive the corresponding variable means exceeds a predetermined power. Then, when it is determined by the power determining means that the power exceeds the predetermined power, at least a part of the variable means being driven and the variable means to be newly driven is suppressed by the drive suppressing means.

  Thus, it is possible to prevent the power from being excessively increased by driving the variable unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the variable means can be operated appropriately.

  In the gaming machine A1, storage means for storing power information which is information corresponding to power for driving each of the variable means, and all of the variable drives to be driven based on the power information stored in the storage means. Calculating means for calculating a total power value that is a value corresponding to a total value of the power of the means, wherein the power determining means determines that the power required to drive the variable means based on the total power value is determined in advance. A gaming machine A2 for determining whether or not power exceeds a predetermined power.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, power information, which is information corresponding to the power for driving each variable means, is stored in the storage means, and based on the power information stored in the storage means, the sum of the powers of all the variable means to be driven is calculated. The total power value corresponding to the value is calculated by the calculating means. Based on the total power value, the power determining means determines whether the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power.

  Thereby, when calculating the total power value corresponding to the total value of the power supplied to the driving variable means, the power information stored in the storage means may be simply read and summed, and the current value or the voltage value may be calculated. Since it is not necessary to actually measure the size of the game machine, it is possible to suppress an increase in the circuit scale of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine A2, there is provided a driving power storage means for storing a value corresponding to a total value of the power of the variable means being driven, and the calculating means calculates the value stored in the driving power storage means, The gaming machine A3, wherein the total electric power value is calculated based on the electric power information corresponding to the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, a value corresponding to the total value of the power of the variable means being driven is stored in the drive power storage means, and the value stored in the drive power storage means and power information corresponding to the variable means to be newly driven are stored. The total power value is calculated by the calculating means based on the calculated total power value.

  Thus, only the power information corresponding to the variable means to be newly driven needs to be read from the storage means, and every time the variable means is newly driven, it is necessary to read the power information of all the driving variable means from the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the load of the calculation processing in the calculation means can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the drive suppression unit newly drives when the power determination unit determines that the power required to drive the variable unit exceeds the predetermined power. A gaming machine A4, which suppresses driving of the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, if the power determining means determines that the power required to drive the variable means exceeds the predetermined power, a new one is obtained. Since the driving of the variable means to be driven is suppressed by the drive suppressing means, stopping the variable means being driven can prevent the variable member from stopping during the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that a trouble has occurred in the gaming machine due to the variable member being stopped during the operation.

  In the gaming machine A4, a storage control unit that controls the total power value calculated by the calculation unit to be stored in the drive power storage unit, and an electric power required to drive the variable unit by the power determination unit. A storage control suppressing unit configured to prevent the storage control unit from controlling to store the total power value in the driving power storage unit when it is determined that the power exceeds the predetermined power. Gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, the total power value calculated by the calculation means is controlled by the storage control means to be stored in the drive power storage means. When it is determined by the power determining means that the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power, the storage control means controls to store the total power value in the driving power storing means. Suppressed by suppression means.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the power information corresponding to the variable means whose driving has been suppressed from being added to the total power value, so that it is unnecessary to subtract the power information once added to the total power value. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unnecessary processing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the display device includes a display unit that displays a display effect, and a display control unit that controls a display content that is displayed on the display unit. When the driving of part or all of the variable means and the newly driven variable means is suppressed, control is performed such that an effect corresponding to the variable means whose driving is suppressed is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being possible.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5. That is, the display effect is displayed by the display means, and the display content to be displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means. In the case where the driving of the variable means being driven by the drive control means and a part or all of the variable means to be newly driven are suppressed, an effect corresponding to the variable means whose drive is suppressed is displayed on the display means. As described above.

  Thereby, even if the driving of the variable means is suppressed, the corresponding effect is displayed on the display means, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the driving of the variable means has been suppressed. .

  In the gaming machine A1, the power determining means determines whether or not the predetermined threshold value is exceeded based on the number of the variable means being driven and the number of the variable means to be newly driven. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the power determining means determines whether or not a predetermined threshold value is exceeded based on the number of the variable means being driven and the number of the variable means to be newly driven. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the power exceeds a predetermined power by a simple process of counting the number of variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the determination process by the power determination unit can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the drive suppressing means causes the variable means being driven and at least two specific variable means among the variable means to be newly driven to repeat the variable operation and the operation stop at least for at least one. The power required to drive the variable means is controlled to be equal to or less than a predetermined power by variably operating the other specific variable means while the specific variable means is not operating. Gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, at least two or more specific variable means of the variable means being driven and the variable means to be newly driven are repeatedly changed and stopped by the drive suppressing means. Then, during the period in which at least one specific variable unit stops operating, another specific variable unit is variably operated by the drive suppressing unit.

  This makes it possible for the player to recognize that all the variable means including the specific variable means are operating without being stopped, and gives the player an uncomfortable feeling in the operation of the variable means. Can be suppressed.

<Characteristic B group> (Reduce power of backlight to secure power for operation of accessory)
Control means for performing control relating to a game; display means for displaying display information; and brightness variable at least capable of changing the brightness of the display means to a first brightness and a second brightness darker than the first brightness. Means, wherein the brightness variable means is capable of changing the brightness of the display means to the second brightness when a condition for executing a specific control by the control means is satisfied. Gaming machine B1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the number of the variable members is increased in order to enhance the effect, there is a possibility that the process for operating the variable members may not be performed normally. That is, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to appropriately control the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the control means controls the game. The display information is displayed by the display means, and the brightness of the display means is changed at least to the first brightness and the second brightness lower than the first brightness by the brightness changing means. When the condition for executing the specific control is satisfied by the control means, the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness changing means.

  As a result, even if the power required for the control is increased by performing the specific control, the power can be offset by the power reduced by changing the display means to the second luminance, so that the specific control can be surely executed. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the gaming machine can be suitably performed.

  In the gaming machine B1, a power supply unit for supplying power to the control unit and the display unit, and a power determination unit for determining whether the power supplied by the power supply unit exceeds a predetermined power. The brightness varying means, when the specific control is executed by the control means, when it is determined by the power determination means that exceeds the predetermined power, the brightness of the display means the said A gaming machine B2 characterized by being variable to a second luminance.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, power is supplied to the control unit and the display unit by the power supply unit, and the power determination unit determines whether the power supplied by the power supply unit exceeds a predetermined power. When it is determined by the power determination unit that the predetermined power is exceeded by the execution of the specific control by the control unit, the brightness of the display unit is changed to the second brightness by the brightness variation unit.

  Thereby, even if the specific control is executed, the power can be made equal to or less than the predetermined power. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem from occurring in the gaming machine due to exceeding the predetermined power.

  The gaming machine B3, wherein the gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a plurality of variable members that can be varied, and the specific control is control for varying some or all of the plurality of variable members.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, since the specific control is control for changing some or all of the plurality of variable members, a large number of Even if the variable member is mounted, there is an effect that the power can be reduced to a predetermined power or less when the variable member is changed.

  In the gaming machine B3, when performing control for varying some or all of the plurality of variable members, the game machine B3 includes a control suppression unit capable of suppressing control for varying at least some of the variable members, The control suppression means is configured to at least partly determine that the power determining means determines that the power exceeds the predetermined power even after the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness changing means. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the power for reducing the variable member is suppressed to be equal to or less than the predetermined power.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3. That is, when performing control for changing some or all of the plurality of variable members, control for changing at least some of the variable members is suppressed by the control suppression unit. If it is determined that the power of the display means exceeds the predetermined power by the power determining means even after the brightness of the display means has been changed to the second brightness by the brightness varying means, control for varying at least some of the variable members is controlled. Suppressed by suppression means.

  Thereby, even if a higher brightness is set as the second brightness, there is an effect that the gaming machine can be operated so as not to exceed the predetermined power by performing the control by the control suppression means.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the control means controls the plurality of variable members to perform a predetermined turning-on operation based on power-on, and the brightness changing means controls power-on. A gaming machine B5 wherein the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness based on the following.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3 or B4. That is, the control means controls the plurality of variable members to perform a predetermined closing operation based on turning on the power. The brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness changing means based on power-on.

  Thereby, since the second luminance is set at the time of the turning-on operation, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the power from exceeding the predetermined power during the turning-on operation.

  The gaming machine B6 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, wherein the luminance varying means varies the luminance of the display means to the first luminance after the specific control is completed.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the brightness of the display means is changed to the first brightness by the brightness changing means after the specific control is completed. The period set for the luminance can be the minimum period. Therefore, the luminance of the display means can be set to the first luminance which is longer than the second luminance for a longer period, so that the visual quality of the display means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6, after the specific control is completed, the luminance varying means increases the luminance according to an elapsed time to thereby increase the luminance of the display means until the predetermined time elapses. A gaming machine B7 characterized by varying the brightness.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the brightness is increased by the brightness varying means according to the elapsed time after the specific control is completed, and the display means is not changed until the predetermined time elapses. Since the brightness is changed to the first brightness, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the brightness as compared with the case where the switching from the second brightness to the first brightness is performed instantaneously. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable in the appearance of the display means.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, when the brightness of the display unit is changed by the brightness changing unit, the display control unit can be controlled to display a black image on the entire display unit. Gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of B1 to B7, when the brightness of the display means is changed by the brightness change means, the display control means controls the display means to display a black image on the entire display means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the luminance has changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable in the appearance of the display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the display means includes a display panel and a light source for illuminating the display panel, and the brightness variable means sets the brightness of the light source to PWM. A gaming machine B9 characterized by being variable by control.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8. That is, the display means includes a display panel and a light source for illuminating the display panel. The luminance of the light source is varied by the PWM control by the luminance varying means.

  This makes it possible to vary the luminance by a simple control of repeatedly turning on and off the light source. Therefore, a simple circuit can be employed as a circuit for controlling the light source, and thus there is an effect that cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the display means includes a display panel and a light source configured by an LED for illuminating the display panel, and the brightness varying means includes: A gaming machine B10 wherein the brightness of the light source is varied by varying the drive current of the LED.

  According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8. That is, the display means is configured to include the display panel and a light source configured by LEDs for illuminating the display panel. By varying the drive current of the LED, the luminance of the light source is varied by the luminance varying means.

  Thus, when the brightness is reduced to the same level as that of the PWM control, the anode voltage of the LED can be reduced with a decrease in the drive current of the LED. Therefore, the power of the light source can be further reduced as compared with the PWM control. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that energy saving of the gaming machine can be achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the brightness varying means includes a plurality of area brightness varying means for varying brightness of a partial area of the display means, and the plurality of variable members Includes a specific variable member that, when changed based on the control of the control unit, blocks a part of the display unit by changing the display unit to the front side of the display unit with respect to the game board; The brightness varying means varies the brightness of an area partially or entirely covered by the specific variable member to the second brightness by the corresponding area brightness varying means when the specific variable member is variable. A gaming machine B11, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B3 to B5. That is, the brightness varying means is provided with a plurality of area brightness varying means for varying the brightness of a partial area of the display means. The plurality of variable members include a specific variable member that, when changed based on the control of the control unit, is changed toward the front side of the display unit with respect to the game board so that a part of the display unit is shielded. When the specific variable member is variable, the luminance of a region partially or wholly shielded by the specific variable member is changed to the second luminance by the corresponding region luminance variable means.

  Thereby, only the brightness of the area that is shielded by the specific variable member and cannot be visually recognized by the player is set as the second brightness, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the brightness has changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable in the appearance of the display means.

<Characteristic C group> (The accessory is divided into a group in which the accessories interfere with each other and a group in which the accessories do not interfere with each other, and the accessory motor is controlled according to the group.)
A first member group composed of one or more variable members that can be varied, a second member group composed of one or more variable members different from the first member group, and varying the variable members And the variable member constituting the first member group is disposed at a position where the variable member does not interfere with the other variable members by being changed, and the second member group At least two of the variable members are arranged at positions where they can interfere with each other by making them variable, and the variable means, when changing the variable members that make up the second member group, A gaming machine C1 characterized by being variable in accordance with predetermined operating conditions.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include an accessory operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of accessories (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of the variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first member group is configured by one or more variable members that can be changed, and the second member group is configured by one or more variable members different from the first member group. The variable member is changed by the changing means. The variable members constituting the first member group are arranged at positions where they do not interfere with other variable members by being changed. At least two variable members constituting the second member group are arranged at positions where they can interfere with each other by making them variable. When the variable member constituting the second member group is changed by the variable means, the variable member is changed according to a predetermined operating condition.

  Thus, the operating conditions for the variable members constituting the second member group need only be specified, and the specified operating conditions can be minimized. That is, the process for changing the variable member can be simplified. Therefore, there is an effect that the variable member can be suitably varied.

  In the gaming machine C1, the operating condition includes, as a condition for changing the variable member constituting the second member group, a case where the other variable members constituting the second member group are at positions where they do not interfere with each other. The game machine C2 further includes a condition that allows the variable member to be variable.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the operating conditions include, as conditions for changing the variable members constituting the second member group, other variable members constituting the second member group. Since the condition that the variable member can be changed is included when the variable member is at the position where no interference occurs, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the variable members constituting the second member group from interfering with each other.

  In the gaming machine C2, a regulation information storage unit that stores regulation information that defines a type of a variable member to be varied for each effect, and the operating condition when the variable member is varied by the variable unit based on the regulation information. Condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the variable member defined in the specification information by the variable means when the condition determining means determines that the operating condition is not satisfied. A game machine C3 comprising: avoiding means for avoiding the change of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, the regulation information that defines the type of the variable member to be varied for each effect is stored in the regulation information storage means. In the case where the variable member is changed based on the specified information by the variable means, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not the operating condition is satisfied. When it is determined by the condition determining means that the operating condition is not satisfied, the avoiding means avoids the variable member specified in the defining information by the variable means.

  This makes it possible to more reliably suppress the interference between the variable members. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such as the variable member being damaged by interference.

  The gaming machine C4, wherein in the gaming machine C3, the specification information defines a type of the variable unit that varies in association with an elapsed time from the start of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, the type of the variable means that is varied in association with the elapsed time from the start of the production is defined in the definition information. By a simple process of selecting the type of means, the variable means according to the effect can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load for changing the variable means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the specification information includes information indicating whether or not the variable member to be changed includes a variable member belonging to the second member group. Gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the regulation information defines information indicating whether or not the variable members to be varied include the variable members belonging to the second member group. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is necessary to refer to the operating conditions. Therefore, even when the variable member belonging to the second member group is defined in the definition information, it is possible to suppress the execution of useless processing of comparing each accessory with the operation condition, There is an effect that the processing load for changing the variable means can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the display device includes a display unit that displays a display effect, and a display control unit that controls a display content that is displayed on the display unit. When the change of the variable member defined in (1) is avoided, the effect can be controlled to display on the display means an effect corresponding to the variable means in which the change is avoided. Machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C3 to C6. That is, the display effect is displayed by the display means, and the display content to be displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means. When the avoiding means avoids the change of the variable member specified in the regulation information, the display control means controls the display means to display an effect corresponding to the variable means whose change has been avoided.

  Thereby, even if the change of the variable member is avoided, it is possible to suppress an unnatural effect by displaying the corresponding effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the effect.

<Characteristic D group> (Return processing at power-on is executed based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor)
A variable member that can be changed, a variable unit that changes the variable member, and a closing control unit that controls the variable unit to perform a closing operation that is a predetermined operation based on power-on, Discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the variable member is located within an operation start range which is a predetermined operation range for starting the closing operation; and And a return operation executing means for executing a return operation for operating the variable means so as to be positioned within the operation start range when it is determined that the variable operation means is not located within the operation start range. Gaming machine D1.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of performing various effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation of the variable member due to the diversification of the variable member.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the variable member that can be changed is changed by the changing means. The variable control means controls the variable means so that the variable member performs a predetermined operation based on the power-on. The determination unit determines whether the variable member is located within an operation start range that is a predetermined operation range for starting the closing operation. When the variable member is determined not to be within the operation start range by the determination unit when the power is turned on, the return operation for operating the variable unit to be positioned within the operation start range is performed by the return operation execution unit. Be executed.

  This allows the variable means to be moved into the operation start range by the return operation based on the power-on, so that the power-on operation can be suitably performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the action of the accessory can be appropriately set.

  In the gaming machine D1, the return operation execution unit is located within the operation start range from a position where it is determined that the variable member is not located within the operation start range based on the determination result by the determination unit. The gaming machine D2, wherein the return operation is terminated when the position is changed to a position determined to be.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the variable member is positioned within the operation start range from the position where it is determined that the variable member is not located within the operation start range based on the determination result by the determination unit. The return operation is terminated by the return operation executing means when the position is determined to be within the range determined to be present. The return operation can be completed when the member operates. Therefore, there is an effect that the return operation can be completed in a shorter time.

  In the gaming machine D2, the variable means is capable of bidirectionally changing the variable member between a first position and a second position different from the first position. Specific range determination for determining whether or not the variable member is located within a specific operation range between the first position and the second position and including at least the first position. Means, the operation start range is an operation range included in the specific operation range, includes the end of the second position side in the specific operation range, the return operation execution means, When the specific range determining means determines that the variable member is positioned within the specific operation range, the variable member is moved to the second position side as the return operation, and the specific range determination is performed. Means for operating the specific operation range. Gaming machine D3 that when said variable member is judged to be not located, characterized in that said variable member as the return operation is intended to operate to the first position side within.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the variable member is bidirectionally changed by the changing means between the first position and the second position different from the first position. The specific range determination means determines whether the variable member is located within a specific operation range between the first position and the second position and at least including the first position. You. The operation start range is included in the specific operation range, and the end of the specific operation range on the second position side is included in the operation start range. When it is determined that the variable member is located within the specific operation range by the specific range determination unit, the variable member is moved to the second position side by the return operation execution unit as a return operation. When the specific range determining means determines that the variable member is located within the specific operation range, the variable member is moved to the first position by the return operation executing means as a return operation.

  This makes it possible to determine whether the operation start range is on the first position side or the second position side based on the determination result by the specific range determination means. Thus, there is an effect that the variable member can be efficiently operated without operating the variable member.

  In the gaming machine D3, the operation start range is an end of the specific operation range on the second position side.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, since the operation start range is the end of the second position side of the specific operation range, the return operation execution means performs the closing operation as the closing operation. Only the operation that starts from the end of suffices to be specified. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity for defining the input operation can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, when the insertion operation is being performed, an abnormality determining unit that determines whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the variable member, and the abnormality determining unit determines that there is an abnormality. And a notifying means for executing a predetermined notifying operation when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4. That is, it is determined by the abnormality determining means whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the variable member while the closing operation is being performed, and a predetermined notification operation is notified when the abnormality determining means determines that there is an abnormality. Performed by means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the abnormality can be eliminated based on the notification by the notification means.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the abnormality determining unit determines that the operation of the variable member is abnormal, the gaming machine D5 includes a specifying unit that specifies a type of the variable member having the operation abnormality, and the notifying unit includes: A gaming machine D6 for performing a notification operation corresponding to the type of the variable member specified by the specifying means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5. That is, when the operation of the variable member is determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determining unit, the type of the variable member having the abnormal operation is specified by the specifying unit. The notifying operation corresponding to the type of the variable member specified by the specifying means is executed by the notifying means.

  Thus, the type of the variable member can be easily recognized by the notification operation, so that the abnormality can be eliminated more quickly.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a period discriminating unit for discriminating whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the end of the returning operation by the returning operation executing unit is provided. A gaming machine D7 for controlling the variable means so as to perform the insertion operation when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6. That is, whether the predetermined period has elapsed since the end of the return operation by the return operation execution unit is determined by the period determination unit, and the closing operation is performed when the period determination unit determines that the predetermined period has elapsed. The variable means is controlled by the input control means.

  Thereby, the state in which the variable member is within the operation start range can be maintained for a predetermined period, so when it is necessary to shut off the power while the variable member is within the operation start range during shipping inspection or the like, The power can be turned off for the inspector during this predetermined period. That is, it is not necessary to wait until the closing operation is completed for each test or to manually operate the variable member within the operation start range after the power is turned off, thereby improving the test efficiency. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic E group> (Determining the timing of turning off the centerpiece based on the detection result of the sensor)
An effect display unit that can change the effect mode, and an opening / closing unit that is arranged so as to be able to open and close on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the gaming board, and that the effect display unit is configured to be exposed as it is opened. Opening / closing display means having a section, a rendering mode setting means capable of at least setting the rendering mode to a first mode, a second mode different from the first mode, and an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing section. Opening / closing control means for controlling, a position where the opening / closing section can take from the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing section to the time when the opening / closing section is completely closed, and a part of the effect display section from the opening / closing member. Discriminating means for discriminating whether or not a specific opening position which is a position to be exposed is provided, wherein the effect mode setting means is provided when the effect display section is set to the first mode. The opening / closing part is in the specific opening position Characterized in that the representation display section is for setting the second aspect based on being judged to have become the gaming machine E1.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a variable means operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing various effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, JP-A-2008-012194).

  However, with the above-described conventional gaming machines, there has been a possibility that it may be difficult to appropriately perform an effect on the variable means having a complicated configuration with the diversification of the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, an effect display unit capable of changing the effect mode, and an opening / closing operation that can be opened / closed on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the gaming board, so that the effect display unit is exposed as it is opened. Is provided in the open / close display means. The production mode is set at least to the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode by the production mode setting means. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing part is controlled by the opening / closing control means, and the opening / closing part can be located between the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing part and the complete closing thereof, and a part of the effect display part is provided with an opening / closing member It is determined by the determination means whether or not the specific opening position which is a position exposed from the camera is reached. When the effect display unit is set to the first mode, the effect display unit is switched to the second mode by the effect mode setting unit based on the determination unit determining that the opening / closing unit is at the specific open position. Is set.

  Thus, the second mode can be set before the opening / closing section is completely closed. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.

  In the gaming machine E1, a detection unit for detecting whether the degree of opening of the opening / closing unit is equal to or less than the degree of opening at the specific opening position is provided, and the determination unit is configured to perform the determination based on a detection result by the detection unit. A gaming machine E2 for determining whether or not a specific opening position has been reached.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the detection unit detects whether the degree of opening of the opening / closing unit is equal to or less than the degree of opening at the specific opening position, and determines whether the specific opening position has been reached based on the detection result by the detection unit. Is determined.

  Thus, the degree of opening can be determined only by the detection result of the detection result, so that the determination by the determination unit can be further simplified. That is, when determining the degree of opening / closing of the opening / closing section, there is no need to predict according to the setting of the opening / closing operation such as the opening / closing speed and the elapsed time from the start of opening / closing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for the determination by the determination unit can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect mode setting means sets, as the first mode, the brightness of the effect display unit to a first luminance, and as the second mode, the effect mode display means The gaming machine E3, wherein the brightness of the section is set to a second brightness lower than the first brightness.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, as a first mode, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to the first luminance by the effect mode setting means. As a second aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to a second brightness lower than the first brightness by the effect mode setting means.

  Accordingly, when the opening / closing section is closed, the second brightness can be set to be lower than the first brightness from the time when the opening / closing section reaches the specific opening position until the opening / closing section is completely closed. Therefore, the brightness of a part of the effect display unit exposed from the opening / closing unit can be made inconspicuous, so that there is an effect that the visual quality of the effect display unit can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E3, the second luminance is in a state where the effect display unit is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, the second luminance is in a state in which the effect display unit is turned off. Until it is closed, a part of the effect display unit exposed from the opening / closing unit can be made more inconspicuous. Therefore, there is an effect that the visual quality of the effect display unit can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the effect mode is set to the second mode, the effect mode setting means determines that the opening / closing section is at the specific open position by the determining means. The gaming machine E5, wherein the effect mode is set to the first mode based on the operation.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the effect mode is set to the second mode, the determination unit determines that the opening / closing unit is at the specific open position. The effect mode is set to the first mode by the effect mode setting means based on the fact that the effect mode can be switched at the same position in both the case where the opening / closing section is closed and the case where the opening / closing section is opened. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the opening / closing display means includes abnormality determining means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing section, and the effect mode setting means has a function for determining whether an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determining means. A gaming machine E6 characterized in that when it is determined that an effect has occurred, the effect mode is set to a third mode different from both the first mode and the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, in the open / close display means, the abnormality determination means determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the open / close section. When the abnormality determining unit determines that an abnormality has occurred, the effect mode is set by the effect mode setting unit to a third mode different from both the first mode and the second mode.

  Thus, there is an effect that the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing section based on whether or not the effect mode is set to the third mode.

  A gaming machine E7 comprising a plurality of the opening / closing display means in the gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, since a plurality of open / close display means are provided, the third mode is set when an abnormality occurs in some of the open / close display means. There is an effect that the open / close display means having the open / close portion in which the abnormality has occurred can be easily specified based on whether or not the display is performed.

<Characteristic F group> (The peak current value is reduced by shifting the lighting timing of each LED)
A plurality of actuation means, an actuation control means for controlling the actuation of the plurality of actuation means based on the actuation control data, and an actuation control data for setting the actuation control data for a corresponding one of the plurality of actuation means Setting means, wherein the operation control data setting means includes: a plurality of states including at least a first operation state and a second operation state having lower power consumption than the first operation state. A plurality of states including at least a first operation control data controlled by a pattern and a third operation state and a fourth operation state having lower power consumption than the third operation state are controlled by a second operation pattern. Setting at least operation control data, wherein the operation control data setting means sets the first operation control data and the second operation control data for the plurality of operation means. Is set so that there is a period in which the first operation state performed in the first operation pattern does not overlap with the third operation state performed in the second operation pattern. A gaming machine F1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a light emitting member that performs a light emitting operation, and an effect member such as a variable member that is changed by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing various effect operations by operating a plurality of effect members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of effect members is increased, there is a concern that power consumption may increase.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the operation of the plurality of operation units is controlled by the operation control unit based on the operation control data. The operation control data is set by the operation control data setting means for the corresponding one of the plurality of operation means. First operation control data in which a plurality of states including at least a first operation state and a second operation state having lower power consumption than the first operation state are controlled by a first operation pattern; A second operation control data in which a plurality of states including at least a state and a fourth operation state having lower power consumption than the third operation state are controlled by the second operation pattern is at least set by the operation control data setting means. . When the first operation control data and the second control data are set for the plurality of operation units by the operation control data setting unit, the first operation state performed in the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern are set in the second operation pattern. The operation control data setting means sets such that there is a period in which the third operation state to be performed does not overlap.

  Thus, power consumption can be suppressed during a period in which the first operation state and the third operation state are not performed in an overlapping manner. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption due to an overlap of periods in which the operating means are in an operation state with high power consumption.

  In the gaming machine F1, the operation control data setting means is performed in the first operation pattern when setting the first operation control data and the second operation control data for the plurality of operation means. The gaming machine F2, wherein at least one of the first operation state and the third operation state performed in the second operation pattern are set so as not to be performed in an overlapping manner.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, when the first operation control data and the second operation control data are set by the operation control data setting unit for the plurality of operation units, at least one operation state performed in the first operation pattern; It is set by the operation control data setting means so that the third operation state performed in the two operation patterns does not overlap.

  Accordingly, it is possible to disperse the period in which the operation unit is operated and controlled in the operation state where power consumption is high, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption consumed by the operation unit. .

  In the gaming machine F2, a display means for displaying display information is provided, and the operation control means controls backlighting provided on the display means based on the operation control data; Illumination control means for controlling lighting of the light source of the member based on the operation control data, wherein the operation control data setting means transmits the first operation control data to a backlight provided on the display means. A gaming machine F3 comprising: a backlight setting means for setting; and an illumination setting means for setting the second operation control data for a light source of an illumination member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F2. That is, the display information is displayed on the display means. In the operation control means, lighting of the backlight provided on the display means is controlled by the backlight control means based on the operation control data. The lighting of the light source of the illuminated member is controlled by the illuminated control means based on the operation control data.

  This makes it possible to provide a period in which the backlight and the light source of the illuminated member are lit so that the lighting periods do not overlap. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption during the overlapping period due to overlapping lighting periods in the period.

  In the gaming machine F3, the first operation pattern is an operation pattern in which a light-up state and a light-off state are repeated in the first cycle, and the second operation pattern is the light-up state and the light-out state in the second cycle. The operation control data setting means is configured to prevent the lighting state performed in the first operation pattern from overlapping with the lighting state performed in the second operation pattern. A gaming machine F4 characterized by being set to:

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3. That is, in the first operation pattern, the ON state and the OFF state are repeated in the first cycle. In the second operation pattern, the ON state and the OFF state are repeated in the second cycle. The lighting state performed in the first operation pattern and the lighting state performed in the second operation pattern are controlled so as not to be performed in an overlapping manner.

  Thereby, while one of the backlight and the illuminated member is on, the other can be off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more effectively suppress an increase in power consumption due to both the backlight and the illumination member being turned on.

  In the gaming machine F4, there are provided an effect control means for controlling execution of various effects of the gaming machine, and a display control means for controlling a display effect executed in the display means based on a command output from the effect control means. The display control means, the backlight control means, the backlight setting means, a synchronization signal generation means for generating a synchronization signal every predetermined period, and an output means for outputting the synchronization signal to the effect control means; Wherein the backlight control means controls the backlight to operate in the first operation pattern based on the synchronization signal when the first operation control data is set by the backlight setting means. The effect control means includes the illumination control means and the illumination setting means, and the illumination control means includes the illumination setting means. When the second operation control data is set, the game machine F5 controls the light source of the illuminated member to operate in the second operation pattern based on the synchronization signal. .

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F4. That is, the execution of various effects of the gaming machine is controlled by the effect control means. The display effect executed on the display means based on the command output from the effect control means is controlled by the display control means. In the display control means, the configuration includes a backlight control means and a backlight setting means. Further, a synchronization signal is generated at predetermined intervals by the synchronization signal generation means, and the synchronization signal is output to the effect control means by the output means. When the first operation control data is set by the backlight setting means, the backlight control means controls the backlight to operate in the first operation pattern based on the synchronization signal. In the effect control means, the illumination control means and the illumination setting means are included in the configuration. When the second operation control data is set by the illumination setting means, the illumination control means controls the light source of the illumination member to operate in the second operation pattern based on the synchronization signal.

  With this, it is possible to set the period of the lighting state and the period of the unlit state for the backlight and the light source of the illuminated member based on the same synchronization signal. In addition, there is an effect that overlapping of the lighting states can be more reliably suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F5, the synchronizing signal generation means generates the synchronizing signal in synchronization with a cycle of updating display contents of the display means, and the display control means performs the display means based on the synchronizing signal. A game machine F6 comprising a display updating means for updating the display content of the game machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F5. That is, the synchronizing signal is generated by the synchronizing signal generating means in accordance with the cycle of updating the display content of the display means. In the display control means, the display content of the display means is updated by the display update means based on the synchronization signal.

  Thus, the synchronization signal required for updating the display on the display means can be used also as the synchronization signal for the lighting control by the backlight control means and the illumination control means, so that the number of synchronization signals can be reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine F7 according to any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, wherein the first operation pattern has a shorter period of the light-off state than a period of the light-on state.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the period of the light-off state is shorter than the period of the light-on state in the first operation pattern. The brightness of the backlight can be improved. In other words, the timing at which the backlight is turned on and the timing at which the light source of the illuminated member is turned on overlap with each other, so that the driving current supplied to the light emitting means is prevented from increasing instantaneously. This has the effect that the quality of the appearance of the display means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, in the second operation pattern, the lighting state is performed after a predetermined delay period has elapsed after the lighting state of the backlight operated in the first operation pattern ends. A gaming machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, in the second operation pattern, a predetermined delay period elapses after the lighting state of the backlight operated in the first operation pattern ends. After turning on the backlight, the backlight must be completely turned off during the delay period, even if there is a time lag between when the backlight is turned off and when the backlight completely turns off. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress an increase in power consumption due to the overlapping of the lighting state of the backlight and the lighting state of the illumination member.

<Characteristic G group> (The accessory is divided into a plurality of groups, and the accessory motor is controlled so that each group does not interfere.)
A plurality of variable members that can be changed, and a variable control unit that controls the plurality of variable members to be changed in units of a variable member group configured by one or a plurality of the variable members, as the variable member group, At least a first member group and a second member group different from the first member group are provided, and at least one of the variable members constituting the first member group and the second member group The at least one variable member to be configured is in a positional relationship of interfering with each other by being variable, and the variable control means configures the variable member group according to an operation condition determined for each variable member group. A gaming machine G1 comprising means for variably controlling a variable member to perform.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include an accessory operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of accessories (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of the variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the variable control means is controlled so that the plurality of variable members that can be changed are changed in units of one or a plurality of variable members. As the variable member group, at least a first member group and a second member group different from the first member group are provided. At least one variable member that constitutes the first member group and at least one variable member that constitutes the second member group have a positional relationship in which they interfere with each other by being varied. Means for variably controlling the variable members constituting the variable member group according to the operating conditions determined for each variable member group is provided in the variable control means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that each variable member group can be suitably operated based on the operation condition.

  In the gaming machine G1, the operating conditions include, when each of the variable members constituting the first member group is at a position where they do not interfere with each other even if the second member group is changed, A gaming machine G2 characterized by including a condition that can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G1, the operating conditions include a case where each of the variable members constituting the first member group is at a position where they do not interfere with each other even if the second member group is changed. Since the condition that the second member group can be changed is included, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress mutual interference of the useful objects.

  In the gaming machine G2, the variable control means variably controls the variable member such that the variable member performs a predetermined turning-on operation based on power-on, and the operating condition includes: A gaming machine G3 characterized by including operating conditions for a throwing operation.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G2. That is, the variable member is variably controlled by the variable control means such that the variable member performs a predetermined operation based on power-on. The operating condition includes the operating condition of the closing operation.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the closing operation can be performed without the variable members interfering with each other according to the operating condition.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a pointer unit whose value is updated as time elapses, and a regulation that defines the operation content of the variable unit for each variable member group in association with the value of the pointer unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the regulation information storage means for storing information and the variable control means control to vary the corresponding variable member group based on the regulation information corresponding to the pointer means. G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, the value of the pointer means is updated with the passage of time, and the specified information in which the operation content of the variable means is specified for each variable member group is stored in the specified information storage means in association with the value of the pointer means. The variable control means controls the variable member group corresponding to the pointer information based on the specified information.

  Thus, the operation of the variable unit can be set by simple control of setting the operation in accordance with the contents of the specified information specified by the value of the pointer unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for the control of the variable control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines G3 and G4, information discriminating means for discriminating whether or not prescribed information corresponding to the pointer means is predetermined information, and the information discriminating means corresponds to the pointer means during execution of the inserting operation. A gaming machine G5 comprising: an operation ending means for ending the insertion operation when the prescribed information is determined to be the predetermined information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G3 and G4. That is, the information discriminating means determines whether or not the prescribed information corresponding to the pointer means is predetermined information, and the prescribed information corresponding to the pointer means is the prescribed information during execution of the insertion operation by the information discriminating means. Is determined, the closing operation is ended by the operation ending means.

  Thus, there is an effect that the closing operation can be more easily completed without determining the elapsed time from the start of the closing operation, the operation state of the variable unit, and the like.

  In any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, determination means for determining whether or not the insertion operation has been normally performed, and a notification operation when the determination means determines that the insertion operation has not been normally performed. A gaming machine G6 comprising: a notifying unit for executing.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5. That is, it is determined by the determining unit whether or not the closing operation has been normally performed. If the determining unit determines that the closing operation has not been normally performed, the notifying unit performs the notification operation.

  Thus, if an abnormality has occurred in the variable means, the occurrence of the abnormality can be recognized by the hall clerk at the time of the closing operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the abnormality can be quickly eliminated based on the notification operation.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3, characterized in that: Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
910 Hemispherical accessory (open / close display means)
911 Light-emitting part (effect display part)
912a, 912b Open / close unit (open / close unit)
916 Light-blocking sensor (detection means)
S1102 Part of the input control means S1331 production mode setting means S1332 opening / closing control means S3902 discriminating means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include an operation member operated by a motor or the like. In some of such gaming machines, a variety of effect operations can be executed by operating a plurality of operation members .

JP 2008-012194 A

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a possibility that Rukoto operates the operation member in good suited difficult.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable Rukoto suitably by operating the operation member.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has at least a light emitting means capable of emitting light, a luminance of the light emitting means being at least a first luminance, and a second luminance darker than the first luminance. A variable brightness variable unit, a plurality of operable operation members, and an operation control unit for controlling the plurality of operation members to perform a predetermined operation based on power-on. The brightness changing means changes the brightness of the light emitting means to the second brightness when the operation control means controls the making operation .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the light emitting means capable of emitting light, and the brightness of the light emitting means can be changed at least between the first brightness and the second brightness lower than the first brightness. Means, a plurality of operable operating members, and an operation control means for controlling the plurality of operating members to perform a predetermined operation based on power-on, and the brightness varying means. Is configured to vary the luminance of the light emitting means to the second luminance when the operation control means controls to perform the closing operation .

Thereby, there is an effect that the operation member can be suitably operated .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit in the state where the 2nd slide operation unit was attached to the back case. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where the upright part moved to the overhang position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where the tilting role object moved to the overhang position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide accessory moved to the overhang position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide role and tilting role moved to the overhang position, respectively. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide character and the standing character moved to the overhang position, respectively. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide character and the center rocking character moved to the extended position. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the second random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation start condition table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a load reference value table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the power return operation | movement table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory operation setting table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. (A), (b) is a figure which illustrated the content of an accessory composite reach effect. It is the figure which illustrated the content of the substitute production of a role item combination reach production. (A), (b) is a figure which illustrated the content of the opening effect. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an initial operation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of LED current at the time of employ | adopting the current dimming system in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the LED at the time of employ | adopting PWM dimming system in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the time change of an electric current. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an initial operation process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation stop process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the backlight control processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the hemispherical accessory in the third embodiment, (b) is a side view of the hemispherical accessory in the third embodiment, and (c) is the third embodiment. It is a front view of the hemispherical accessory in FIG. (A)-(d) is a side view of the hemispherical accessory in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(d) is a side view of the light shielding sensor and light shielding plate provided in the hemispherical accessory in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between a positional relationship between a light-shielding sensor and a light-shielding plate and an output of the light-shielding sensor in a third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the operation | movement start condition table in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the load reference value table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing a power return operation table in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed origin return processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory lighting control processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory lighting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory opening / closing process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the operation start condition table in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the load reference value table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the power return operation table in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the content of the power return operation for every accessory in the modification of 1st Embodiment. . It is a figure showing the accessory operation setting table in the modification of a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an initial operation process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to a modification of the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the operation | movement start setting process performed by the MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a stepping motor, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of an excitation table and a correspondence relationship between an excitation counter and a state of the stepping motor. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a priority order table in a second modification of the first embodiment, and (b) is a priority order in a second modification of the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed another example of the table typically. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory control processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an adjustment control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to a second modification of the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the control timing of the LCD backlight and the accessory motor in the modification of 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the LCD backlight in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of light control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation start condition table in a modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an origin return operation table in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory recovery process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the origin position setting process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the modification of the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the nail-shaped accessory return process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the half moon-shaped accessory return process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 14) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 228 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 228 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 228 is operated by the player during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 228 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 228 while the selection screen is being displayed, the effect at the time of super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guide nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are illustrated. (Not shown), rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first opening 64, a second opening 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device (not shown), ordinary The entrance 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 14) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion (a lower left portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are used for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. . Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated. On the other hand, when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate in a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, during a time saving operation, or during a normal operation, or to indicate in a lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is changing. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, there is prepared a probability-variable jackpot (jackpot A) and a time-saving jackpot (jackpot B). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the change is completed, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot. .

  Here, the “probable change jackpot” is a probability change jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 16 rounds of jackpots, and the “time saving jackpot” is the maximum round number after the 16 rounds of jackpots. A transition to the low-probability state, and a predetermined number of times of change (for example, 100 times of change) is a jackpot in which the time saving state is set.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, the state shifts to the special game state (jackpot). It is a game state that is easy to play. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the winning probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of probability change. In the “low probability state”, the time saving state (medium time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the hit probability of an ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased to the second entrance 640. This refers to a state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (the state in which neither the special jackpot probability nor the ordinary symbol hit probability increases).

  During probable changes or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the symbol usually increase, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and a longer time than normal is used. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one time are not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing symbol variation display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball at the normal entrance 67. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 14), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 14) described later is a big hit, a fluctuating display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. In the case of "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device alternates a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. A variable display for lighting is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ball is hit. If the lottery results in a win, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the normal symbol (the second symbol) is changed and displayed. Further, if the lottery result of winning or non-winning is out of order, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol).

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is held for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (open).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than in the normal game state. Accordingly, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the ordinary symbol can be performed more often than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of hitting the normal symbol increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. Accordingly, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, other methods (for example, increasing the probability of hitting a normal symbol, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the electric accessory 640a per hit, etc.) are used to perform promising or working hours. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set shorter than during the normal change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. In addition, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entrance 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board is used. It is configured to allow passage. When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a winning lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is changed to the above-described first symbol display device 37a. , 37b, and is also lit on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of times of holding, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The change display of the second symbol is performed by alternately lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol (a symbol of “○” and a symbol of “X”) on the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment. , The first symbol display device 37a, 37b and a part of the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). . Further, the number of assembled normal entrances 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). The position where the normal entrance 67 is assembled is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on when the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view, a second entrance 640 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on by the second entrance switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are different numbers (for example, the first entry). The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins the mouth 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 may be five).

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is higher during the probability change and during the shortened working hours, and the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is shorter than that during the normal time. Therefore, the symbol “O” is easily displayed in the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol), and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (increased) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable changes and during working hours, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 as compared with during normal times.

  Here, the probability of a big hit in the case where a ball has won in the first entrance 64 and the case where a ball has won in the second entrance 640 is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. Further, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult for the second entrance 640 to win a prize. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the 64 (so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for a player to aim for a jackpot.

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, by passing a ball through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. The ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-hit”), and passes through the normal entrance 67. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640 while the electric accessory is opened.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is provided on the lower right side of the first entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses. The first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to become a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening-hole solenoid (shown in FIG. Zu). The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed, and is in a closed state where a ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. On the other hand, at the time of a big hit, the large open mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning ports 65a is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first entrance 64 or the lower left side of the first entrance 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first entrance port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided. In the present embodiment, a first slide operation unit 500 is provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a front view (see FIG. 2). A decoration accessory unit 700 is provided on the upper center of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 14). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 14). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 300 when the disassembled operation unit 300 is viewed from the front. In FIG. 7,
The state where the second slide operation unit 800 is mounted on the rear case 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 300 has one side (the front side in FIG. 6) opened from the bottom wall 311 and the outer wall 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 311. And a rear case 310 formed in a box shape. The rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 300, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, the decorative accessory unit 700, and the second slide operation unit 800 are accommodated in the internal space of the rear case 310, respectively. It is configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the second slide operation unit 800 is formed with an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall 312 of the rear case 310, and contacts the inner surface of the outer wall 312 while (See FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the second slide operation unit 800 has a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 in a front view.

  7, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, and the decorative accessory unit 700 are stacked on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800, respectively. It is arranged in a state and accommodated in the rear case 310 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 800) and another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 500) are stacked on the front side in a stacked state. Since it is provided, a predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in a front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, the predetermined operation unit Can be visually recognized by the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by other operation units. Thus, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation units on the assumption that the entire effect member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, an outline of an operation mode of the standing character 400, the first slide operation unit 500, and the second slide operation unit 800 will be described. 8 to 10 refer to FIGS. 5 to 7 as appropriate.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the upright part 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 are arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 9 shows a state in which the tilting part 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the extended position. FIG. 10 shows a state in which each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 is arranged at the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 400 includes an arm member 420 whose base end is pivotally supported so as to be swingable, and a swing end side which is opposite to the base end of the arm member 420. An upright supporting member 410 is provided so as to be rotatably supported, and the arm member 420 and the upright supporting member 410 are operated between a retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and an extended position shown in FIG. Let it. At the evacuation position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the uprights 410 and the arm member 420 are evicted below the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 420 is lifted, and the upright member 410 is disposed at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, at the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first sliding operation unit 500 includes a tilting member 510 that is slid diagonally downward, and a rotation that can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 520a as a rotation axis. An accessory 520 is provided. The tilting role object 510 operates between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the tilting accessory 510 is retracted to the right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 9, the tilting role object 510 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 800 includes slide members 810, 820, 830, and 840 formed to be slidable, and the respective slide members 810, 820, 830, and 840. Is operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the right sliding accessory 810 and the left sliding accessory 820 are retracted to the left and right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and the upper sliding accessory 830 and the lower The side sliding role item 840 is retracted above and below the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and is made invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 10, each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 is disposed at the center of the opening 311 a of the rear case 310 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). You.

  The right sliding role 810 and the left sliding role 820 are configured to operate on the same plane. As shown in FIG. 10, the overhang position of the right slide accessory 810 is on the right side of the overhang position of the left slide accessory 820, and the right slide accessory 810 and the left slide accessory 820 interfere with each other. (Not touch). Similarly, the upper sliding role 830 and the lower sliding role 840 are configured to operate on the same plane. As shown in FIG. 10, the extended position of the upper sliding role 830 is above the extended position of the lower sliding role 840, and the upper sliding role 830 and the lower sliding role 840 interfere with each other. They do not touch each other.

  Furthermore, the plane on which the right sliding role 810 and the left sliding role 820 operate is closer to the game board 13 than the plane on which the upper sliding role 830 and the lower sliding role 840 operate. (See FIG. 10). Therefore, the operation of the upper sliding role 830 or the lower sliding role 840 is not hindered by the right sliding role 810 or the left sliding role 820. Conversely, the operation of the right sliding role 810 or the left sliding role 820 is not hindered by the upper sliding role 830 or the lower sliding role 840. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the operation of each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, 840 can be increased, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  The second slide operation unit 800 is formed such that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view in a state where the slide roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 are overhanging.

  Next, a case where a plurality of units constituting the operation unit 300 operate in a combined manner will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 11 shows an operation unit 300 in a case where the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 and the respective slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended positions. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 510 operates on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800 with respect to the game board 13. That is, the operation of the tilting member 510 is not hindered (interfered) regardless of the arrangement of the respective slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800. Also, regardless of the arrangement of the tilting member 510, the operation of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 is not hindered (interfered). Therefore, the degree of freedom of the operation of the tilting member 510 and each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 can be increased, so that the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 800 is disposed between the first slide operation unit 500 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 500 and the third symbol display are provided. A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 800 is generated between the device 81 and the device 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the extended position, the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is partially shielded so as to be invisible when viewed from the front. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by observing the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined leftward and rightward from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 and the respective slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are both arranged at the extended position. Thus, the gap that the player looks at from an oblique direction can be filled with each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840. Thus, a part of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so as not to be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 shows a case in which the upright member 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 and the respective slide members 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended positions. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operation unit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the upstanding object 410 and the arm member 420 operate on the game board 13 on the nearer side than the second slide operation unit 800. That is, regardless of the arrangement of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second sliding operation unit 800, the operation of the standing role 410 and the arm member 420 is prevented (interfered). There is no. Also, regardless of the arrangement of the standing role 410 and the arm member 420, the operation of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 is not hindered (interfered). Therefore, the degree of freedom of the operation of the standing role 410, the arm member 420, and each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 can be increased, so that the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 800 is disposed between the swing operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the oscillation operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 are arranged. And a gap for the second slide operation unit 800 is generated. Therefore, when only the standing role object 410 of the swinging operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhang position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as to be invisible when viewed from the front. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from viewing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by observing the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined leftward and rightward from the front view).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the uprights 410 of the swing operation unit 400 and the respective slides 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended position. Thus, the gap that the player looks at from an oblique direction can be filled with each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840. Thereby, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be surely shielded so as not to be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

  FIG. 13 shows an operation unit 300 in a case where the center swinging object 720 of the decorative accessory unit 700 and each of the sliding objects 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second sliding operation unit 800 are arranged at the extended position. FIG. Here, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative accessory unit 700 is configured to include a left swinging accessory 710, a center swinging accessory 720, and a right swinging accessory 730. Is operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. The decoration unit 700 also causes the swinging members 710, 720, and 730 to swing at the retracted position (origin position) (see FIG. 5).

  In addition, the center swinging role 720 is disposed closer to the gaming board 13 than the left swinging role 710 and the right swinging role 730 (that is, the central swinging role 720 is , And not on the same plane as the left rocking role 710), even if the left rocking role 710 and the right rocking role 730 are rocked, the central rocking role There is no interference (contact) with the object 720. Further, even if the swinging operation or the overhanging operation is performed on the central swinging role 720, the center swinging role does not interfere (contact) with the left swinging role 710 or the right swinging role 730. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the swinging role objects 710, 720, and 730 from interfering with each other in the operation of the other swinging role items, and to increase the degree of freedom of the movement. Therefore, the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  In addition, the center swinging role 720 is disposed on the game board 13 at a position closer to the front side than each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840. Therefore, it is possible to operate the central rocking role 720 and the respective sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 without interfering with each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the operation can be increased, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  The box-shaped unit 600 does not have a member that protrudes into the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 400, 500, 700, and 800. . Therefore, the box-shaped unit 600 is always kept in a state of being arranged on the left side of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, each of the units 400 to 800 is formed so as to be operable independently of each other, and is disposed in a state of being overlapped (laminated) as described above. With respect to the components arranged in different layers, the components can be operated at the same time even if the operating member extends inward of the opening 311a of the rear case 310. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 13, not only can each of the units 400 to 800 operate independently, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The units 400 to 700 are arranged in the same layer, and the units 400 to 700 and the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7). In other words, when the accessory included in any one of the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, and the decorative accessory unit 700 is at the overhang position, the accessory included in the other unit If they are moved to the overhang position, they will interfere with each other (contact). Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the operating conditions are defined in units of units in order to prevent interference of the characters constituting the units arranged in the same layer. Then, when the accessory constituting any one of the units 400 to 700 is operated, the operation of the accessory is permitted only when it is determined that the accessory does not interfere with the other units. . Thus, it is possible to prevent the role articles from colliding with each other and from being damaged by the impact of the collision. Further, since the action of the accessory is obstructed by another accessory, the action of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are shifted, giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of accessories are provided to execute various motion effects. These accessories are driven by corresponding accessory motors 229 (see FIG. 14). Here, if each accessory motor 229 is driven indefinitely, a current (power) exceeding the available current capacity (rated power) is consumed by the accessory motor 229, and normal operation can be performed. There is a risk of disappearing. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total value of the load current value (power consumption) consumed by driving each accessory is calculated, and the total value of the load current value (power consumption) is calculated as described above. When it is determined that the current capacity (rated power or less) is exceeded, the driving of part or all of the accessory motor 229 is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) usable for the accessory motor 229. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the pachinko machine 10 from operating abnormally or from breaking down. Note that whether to stop the accessory may be determined based on whether the total load current exceeds the current capacity or based on whether the total power consumption exceeds the rated power. Good. Based on the specifications of the power supply device 15 employed in the pachinko machine 10, the more severe condition may be selected as the determination symmetry.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c. , A variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. Although the details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start is determined by one of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 15 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit types are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is assigned to each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, the jackpot A is defined in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”. The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as the determination value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 15C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 15C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, the normal symbol It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the main control device 110, a lottery of a special symbol, a lottery of a normal symbol, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device, setting of display on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. Is performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, one execution area and four reserved areas corresponding to the first entrance 64 (special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas) and four reserved areas corresponding to the second entrance 640 ( A special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including special figure 2 holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and in each of these areas, a first symbol holding ball storing area 203a is set in accordance with the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. When the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the special symbol with a high probability and the first random number table 202a for the special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability. Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is 300 and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is 1, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers which are the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270” are: It is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 out of the total number of random numbers, and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/30”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability and the random number of the big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability are stored. In order to prevent the values from being duplicated with the numerical values, a random number value for each jackpot is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value of the jackpot, there is a possibility that the timing at which the random number value appears may be analyzed. That is, there is a possibility that the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to analyze a random number value which becomes a special symbol jackpot, thereby suppressing fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, the hit type when the random value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. When the value is “50 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that one of the two types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) is determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. I have. The random number value for determining the special symbol big hit type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random value) is set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 15B). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) that stores a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Have been.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, “variation (for long time)”, “variation (for short time)”, various types of “normal reach”, “variation of super reach”, “variation” Various types of "special reach" are defined, and as the fluctuation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B, "common normal reach" various, "common super reach" various, and "common special reach" various are defined. Various types of "special reach" are defined, and various types of "common normal reach", "common super reach", and "special special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns of winning / losing sharing. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number to be a hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set by a second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device. When the value of the random number counter C4 matches the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the winning is the second symbol (normal symbol). The second random number table is used for a low probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) (a period in which the symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability having a higher probability of hitting the symbol than the low probability. The number is divided into two types, one for time (a period in which the symbol is normally in a time saving state), and the number of random hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 15C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers that can hit the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, since the total number of random numbers is 240 out of the total of 240 random numbers, the probability of winning the normal symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes the ordinary entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the variation of the ordinary symbol in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) As a result, a symbol “○” is displayed and displayed, and the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, if the ordinary symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. Is released, but the release time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, the total number of the random hits is 200 out of the total of 240 random numbers, so the probability of the hit of the normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) And the symbol “○” is displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and furthermore, it is attached to the second entrance 640. Since the opening period of the electric accessory is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15 (c)) storing a random number value for determining whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202. Is provided. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 only has “1 second × 2 times” when it hits the normal symbol. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 35).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 16, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 35), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 34). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special figure 1 retaining ball number counter 203c, a special figure 2 retaining ball number counter 203d, It has a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e, a probable change flag 203f, and a time reduction counter 203g.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a includes one execution area, four holding areas (special figure 1 holding first area to special figure 1 holding fourth area) corresponding to the first entrance 64, and a second input area. It has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to special figure 2 reserved fourth area) corresponding to the ball opening 640. Each of these areas stores a value of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is transmitted to the first entrance 64. Among the vacant areas of the corresponding four reserved areas (special figure 1 reserved first area to special figure 1 reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). . That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  The same applies to the case where a ball enters the second entrance 640. That is, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) the second entrance 640, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the 4 corresponding to the second entrance 640. Of the vacant areas of the two reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to special figure 2 reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). Further, when data is stored in all four holding areas corresponding to the second entrance 640, nothing is newly stored.

  When a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each of the special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203a stored in either the special figure 1 reserved first area or the special figure 2 reserved first area is stored. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 is shifted (moved) to an execution area, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a lottery of a special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (lottery of the special figure 2) is performed by the ball to the first entrance 64. The lottery is configured to be executed with higher priority than the special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 1) based on the ball entry. That is, when data is stored in the special figure 2 reservation first area, the shift processing is performed in the special figure 2 reservation first area regardless of whether data is stored in the special figure 1 reservation first area. The stored data is shifted to the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from any of the reserved first areas to the execution area in the special figure 1 reserved first area or the special figure 2 reserved first area, the reserved data shifted first reserved area becomes empty. Become. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first opening 64 or the second opening 640, and when the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired in accordance with the starting winning. Immediately, in addition to the original special symbol jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S407 and S414 in FIG. 30). When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / failure, a stop type, and a variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). Of the vacant areas, the areas are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the first ball entry is performed. The number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth 64 is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S206 in FIG. 28).

  The special figure 2 pending ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the second entered ball is counted. The number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth 640 is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 (see S411 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S209 in FIG. 28).

  The value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N1 of the variable display based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d (the second entrance port) The number of suspensions N2 of the variable display based on the entry to the ball 640 is notified to the sound ramp control device 113 by a suspension ball number command (see S207 and S210 in FIG. 28 and S405 and S412 in FIG. 30). Each time the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 is issued. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs the main control by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d are changed. The value of the number of retained balls in the variable display retained in the device 110 can be obtained. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203e sets the maximum number of waiting balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67 to a maximum of four. This is a counter that counts up to the number of times. The initial value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the ordinary entrance 67 and the number of retaining balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 31).

  If the ball passes through one of the left and right ordinary entrances 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the second random number counter per second The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the ball passes through one of the right and left normal entrances 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 32: No).

  The probable change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). When the probability change flag 203f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state, and when it is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Show. The initial value of the probability change flag 203f is set to OFF, and when the jackpot A (probably variable jackpot) is won, the probability change flag 203f is set to ON when the end of the jackpot A is set.

  When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 29) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process, the probable change flag 203f is referred to. If the probable change flag 203f is on, a special symbol is drawn based on the first-period random number table 202a for high probability, while the probable change flag 203f is off. For example, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first-period random number table 202a for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 29).

  The time reduction counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving counter 203g is set to zero, and when a jackpot B (time saving jackpot) is won, the value is set to 100 when the end of the jackpot B is set. That is, when the jackpot B is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the counter 203g during the time reduction.

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203g during the time saving is referred to. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for low probability time (see S510 and S511 in FIG. 31).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and the lower side of the open / close plate of the specific winning opening 65a are set as axes. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 228, the accessory motor 229, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The accessory motor 229 is formed of, for example, a known stepping motor, and a plurality of the accessory motors 229 are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. The accessory motor 229 is driven by a corresponding motor control IC (motor driver). Specifically, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 sends a command to the motor control IC (motor driver) including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed. Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives the corresponding accessory motor 229 based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC capable of setting the operation of a plurality of accessory motors 229, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor driver ICs). ) May be provided to operate the accessory motors 229 corresponding to different accessories. When a motor control IC (motor driver) capable of setting operations for a plurality of accessory motors 229 is employed, the type of the accessory accessory motor 229 to be driven is included in a command for transmitting the number of rotation steps and the like. May be included and output.

  When the control IC (motor driver) operates the accessory motor 229 based on the set command, the operation is performed on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 each time the one-step operation is performed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the operation has been performed is output. The execution signal allows the MPU 221 to grasp the progress of the set operation. Note that a step counter (not shown) is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. The step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter for counting how many steps each accessory has moved from the origin position. That is, the origin position is set to the position of 0 step, and the value is updated by 1 each time the execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, each time the accessory moves one step in the direction from the origin position to the overhang position (positive direction), its value is incremented by one. Further, the value is decremented by 1 each time the step moves in the direction (negative direction) from the overhang position to the origin position. Therefore, the operating position of each accessory can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and refers to a position to which a transition is made in returning to the origin when the power is turned on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor for detecting whether or not the origin position is at the origin position. (That is, the accessory motor 229 is driven). This origin position is a reference position for the operation of each accessory. Note that the above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory comes to the origin position due to the origin return (that is, when the origin sensor detects ON). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  An example of control of the accessory motor 229 by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the description easy to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one revolution in four steps) will be described as an example, but the actual accessory motor 229 is a one-step motor. The rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 88A is a diagram showing an outline of the accessory motor 229 constituted by a stepping motor. The accessory motor 229 is configured such that a portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited by sending the excitation control data from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. More specifically, the motor control IC is excited by excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to “A, B, C, D” shown in FIG. 88 (a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part of the accessory motor 229 (that is, any one of A, B, C, and D) is “1”, the excitation is performed, and the excitation control data is “0”. If it is not excited. For example, if the data of the excitation control is “1100”, A and B are excited, and C and D are not excited. The excitation control data is specified in an excitation table (see FIG. 88 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The sound lamp control device 113 includes an excitation counter used to select and set one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data specified in an excitation table (see FIG. 88 (b)). Is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from “0”, and a loop counter that returns to “0” when the value of the excitation counter is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes “3”. Has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part is immediately performed based on the excitation control data (that is, the accessory motor 229 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). In addition, the excitation counter can be updated in the negative direction. That is, the values can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. In the case of updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the accessory motor 229 is opposite to the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether the direction is positive or negative) and the frequency of updating the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which an operation is set. The maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the accessory motor 229. Specifically, for example, in the case of the accessory motor 229 that rotates once in one step (that is, 360 steps are required for the motor to make one rotation), the excitation counter is in the range of “0” to “359”. It becomes the loop counter to be updated.

  Next, a specific example of the excitation control data for exciting each part of the accessory motor 229 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the excitation table defining the excitation control data and the state of the accessory motor 229 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the excitation table defines excitation control data for each value of the excitation counter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), as the sequence data corresponding to the accessory motor 229, the excitation control of “1100, 0110, 0011, 1001” in the order of the excitation counters “0” to “3” is performed. Data is specified respectively. When the sequence data “1100” corresponding to the excitation counter value “0” is set, the positions of A and B of the accessory motor 229 are excited. Also, when the sequence data “0110” corresponding to the excitation counter value “1” is set, the positions of B and C of the accessory motor 229 are excited, so that the excitation counter value becomes “0”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state. Further, when the sequence data “0011” corresponding to the excitation counter value “2” is set, the positions of C and D of the accessory motor 229 are excited, and the excitation counter value is “1”. From 90 degrees clockwise. Further, when the sequence data “1001” corresponding to the excitation counter value “3” is set, the positions of A and D of the accessory motor 229 are excited, so that the excitation counter value becomes “2”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state. In this manner, in the example shown in FIG. 88, the accessory motor 229 rotates clockwise by 90 degrees each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by one in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the accessory motor 229 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

  As described above, the control of the accessory motor 229 has been described using the simplified operation model. However, in the accessory motor 229 actually used in the present embodiment, the excitation counter is updated every step (that is, the excitation counter is updated by one). Can be rotated once each time. That is, when varying each of the accessories, the value of the excitation counter is updated one by one by the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be varied, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set every time the excitation counter is updated. Each character can be accurately changed.

  It should be noted that a unique operation pattern corresponding to the effect is set for each accessory. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the above-described motor control IC (motor driver) for each elapsed time. For example, the operation pattern of the standing accessory 410 is defined to operate the accessory motor 229 in the forward direction by 10 steps in a period from the timing of the operation start until 0.2 seconds elapse. ing. That is, at the start timing of the operation of the standing accessory 410, the number of operation steps is set to 10 for the motor driver, the forward direction (direction toward the overhang position) is set as the rotation direction, and the rotation speed is set every 20 ms. An operation pattern for outputting a command for setting a rotation speed (0.2 seconds / 10 steps) for one-step operation is defined. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and after 0.2 seconds from the start of the operation, the operation is performed for 10 steps.

  Further, for 1.6 seconds from 0.2 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the operation start timing, it is stipulated that the accessory motor 229 is operated in 160 steps in the forward direction. That is, when 0.2 seconds have elapsed from the operation start timing of the standing object 410 (that is, when the value of the step counter becomes 10), 160 operation steps are set for the motor driver, An operation pattern for setting a forward direction (direction toward the overhang position) as the rotation direction and outputting a command for setting a rotation speed (1.6 seconds / 160 steps) for performing one step operation every 10 ms as the rotation speed is described. Stipulated. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and the operation is performed 170 steps (160 steps + 10 steps until 0.2 seconds) from the start of the operation.

  Further, for 0.2 seconds from 1.8 seconds to 0.2 seconds after the operation start timing, it is stipulated that the accessory motor 229 is operated for 10 steps in the forward direction. In other words, when 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the operation start timing of the standing object 410 (that is, when the value of the step counter becomes 170), the number of operation steps is set to 10 for the motor driver, An operation pattern for setting a forward direction (direction toward the overhang position) as the rotation direction and outputting a command for setting a rotation speed (0.2 seconds / 10 steps) for performing one step operation every 20 ms as the rotation speed is described. Stipulated. On the basis of this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and after 180 seconds from the start of the operation, 180 steps (170 steps from 10 steps to 1.8 seconds) are activated. This position coincides with the overhanging position of the standing object 410 (see FIG. 8).

  An operation pattern is defined so that a stop command for setting operation stop for two seconds is set. The operation pattern is defined so that an operation for returning the upright character 410 to the origin position is performed after stopping at the overhang position for 2 seconds. Specifically, four seconds after the start of the operation, the number of operation steps is set to 10 times, the negative direction (direction toward the origin position) is set as the rotational direction, and the rotational speed is set to perform one step every 20 ms as the rotational speed. An operation pattern for outputting a command for setting is defined. Thus, it is possible to return to the origin position side by 10 steps over 0.2 seconds.

  Next, after 4.2 seconds from the start of the operation (that is, 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation from the overhang position to the origin position), 160 operations are set as the number of operation steps, and the rotation direction is set to a negative value. An operation pattern for setting a direction and outputting a command for setting a rotation speed for performing a one-step operation every 10 ms as a rotation speed is defined. Thus, it is possible to return to the origin position side by 160 steps over 1.6 seconds. Then, after 5.8 seconds from the start of the operation, a command for setting the number of operation steps to 10 times, setting the rotation direction to the negative direction, and setting the rotation speed to set the rotation speed to perform one step operation every 10 ms is output. Operating patterns are defined. Thereby, it can return to the origin position.

  By operating according to this operation pattern, it is possible to move the standing object 410 to the overhang position for 2 seconds, then stop at the overhang position for 2 seconds, and then return to the original position over 2 seconds. . The reason why the operation speed (the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229) is set to be lower than the rotation speed set in another period immediately after the operation starts or after the operation stop period has elapsed is that the operation of the accessory motor 229. Is to be excited normally. That is, when the operation of the stopped accessory motor 229 is started, if the rotation speed is too high (the frequency of the pulse output from the motor driver is too high), the accessory motor 229 is based on the excitation control data. In some cases, the excitation based on the next excitation control data may be started before the excitation is performed, and the excitation of the accessory motor 229 may become impossible (step out) in the order of the excitation control data. . Therefore, when the operation of the accessory motor 229 is started, a relatively slow rotation speed is set so that the output interval of the excitation control data is not too short, and the accessory motor 229 may lose synchronism. Has been suppressed.

  Also, before stopping the accessory motor 229 (a period of 1.8 seconds to 2 seconds and a period of 5.8 seconds to 6 seconds after the start of operation), the rotation speed is slower than the rotation speed set in other periods. This is to ensure that the rotation of the accessory motor 229 is stopped at the number of steps to be stopped. That is, by reducing the rotation speed and lengthening the output interval of the excitation control data, the period from the last output of the excitation control data to the output of the stop command can be increased. Can be received more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the stop command, and to surely stop the rotation of the accessory motor 229 at a predetermined timing.

  As described above, the accessory motor 229 of this embodiment is configured such that the motor rotates once each time one excitation control data is set. This one-step operation is configured such that every time new excitation control data is set, the motor is instantaneously excited with the new setting and rotates once. The period from the start to the end of this one-step (one-time) operation is constant irrespective of the excitation control data set interval (excitation counter update interval). In other words, the load current (power consumption) required to operate the motor for one step (once) is constant regardless of the setting interval of the excitation control data. The frequency of consuming load current (power) is reduced. Therefore, the load current (electric power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is also reduced. Therefore, the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 is set to be slower than the other periods immediately after the start of the operation, after the elapse of the operation stop period, and before the operation stop. Power). Therefore, when the operation start timing of one accessory is slightly before the operation stop timing of the other accessory (that is, the rotational speed of the accessory motor 229 is reduced toward the stop of operation). The load current (power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 for changing these accessories can be suppressed from becoming too high.

  As described above, the control content of the accessory motor 229 has been described using the standing accessory 410 as an example. It is defined in a motor control command setting table (not shown) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in association with the elapsed time from the operation start timing of the object. The motion pattern is defined for each character and for each type of effect. When setting the operation of the accessory, it is easy to output the command specified in the motor control command setting table (not shown) at the timing specified in the motor control command setting table. , A predetermined operation can be set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, the accessory motor 229 can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize various effect operations using the accessory.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the operation of the accessory motor 229 has been completed is determined based on a command set for the motor driver based on the number of steps in which the accessory motor 229 has operated. That is, the operation set for the accessory motor 229 is completed based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of receptions of the execution signal output from the motor driver each time the operation of one step is set by the motor driver. It is determined whether or not it has been done, but it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration is adopted in which the elapsed time after setting a command for operating the accessory motor 229 is measured, and whether or not the operation of the accessory motor 229 has been completed is determined based on the elapsed time. May be.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 228, and when the player operates the frame button 228, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, an operation error or a vibration error of the accessory) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay. .

  The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 defines at least a fluctuation pattern table 222a, an operation start condition table 222b, a load reference value table 222c, a power supply return operation table 222d, and a accessory operation setting table 222e. .

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is referred to in order to select a detailed mode of the fluctuation effect (variation display) based on the rough fluctuation effect (variation display) mode notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is a table. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S1704 in FIG. 43).

  The operation start condition table 222b is a data table that specifies operation start conditions for starting operation of each accessory. In the operation start condition table 222b, operation start conditions are defined for each group composed of one or more accessories. By operating each group in accordance with the operation start condition, each accessory can be changed without interference (contact) between the accessories.

  Here, a group refers to a set of one or more characters that do not interfere with each other even if the constituent characters are simultaneously changed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, five groups from group 1 to group 5 are provided. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the accessory is operated, it is configured to perform a predetermined operation in a group unit in principle, and the pachinko machine 10 may operate the group alone or simultaneously (compositely) a plurality of groups. By performing such operations, various effects can be realized. The operation predetermined for each group is defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is configured to read and set the operation content from the ROM 222 when the operation of each group starts.

  In addition, the group 1 is constituted by each accessory provided in the second slide operation unit. When the operating condition is satisfied, the group 1 operates each of the slide characters 810, 820, 830, and 840 from the origin position (see FIG. 5) to the overhang position (see FIG. 10), and then moves to the original position (see FIG. 5). (See Reference) is performed. The group 2 is constituted by each accessory provided in the first slide operation unit 500. When the operating condition is satisfied, the group 2 tilts while rotating the rotating accessory 520 clockwise around the rotating shaft 520 as a rotation axis. After operating the accessory 510 to the extended position (see FIG. 11), a series of returning the tilting accessory 510 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) while rotating the rotating accessory 520 counterclockwise. The operation is performed.

  The group 3 is constituted by the respective accessories provided in the swing operation unit 400. When the operating condition of the group 3 is satisfied, the erecting character 410 is operated to the overhang position (see FIG. 8), and then the erecting character is activated. A series of operations of returning the object 410 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) is performed. The group 4 is composed of the right swinging accessory 710 and the left swinging accessory 730 among the accessories provided in the decoration accessory unit 700, and when the operating condition is satisfied, the right swinging accessory 710, and After the left swinging object 730 performs the swinging operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5), a series of operations is performed in which the operation stops at the origin position (see FIG. 5).

  The group 5 is constituted by the central swinging actor 720 among the accessories provided in the decoration accessory unit 700, and is configured to be able to execute two kinds of operations according to the effect. Specifically, a series of operations in which the swing operation is performed at the origin position (see FIG. 5), and then the operation is stopped at the origin position (see FIG. 5). 13), and a series of operations of returning to the origin position (see FIG. 5) after execution of the descending operation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of groups are provided, and a predetermined operation is performed for each group. Thereby, one group can be operated independently, or a plurality of groups can be operated simultaneously (complexly), so that various effects can be realized. In addition, if the configuration is such that the actions of a plurality of characters are independently set one by one, the operating conditions become complicated. That is, at the time of starting the fluctuating effect or at the time of starting the operation of the character, such as during the effect, it is determined whether or not to start each of the characters, and further, the operation corresponding to the character to be started. Need to be set respectively. On the other hand, if a group is defined as in the present embodiment, a simple operation of selecting a group to be operated and setting a predetermined operation for the selected group is performed, Each accessory can be operated appropriately. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In addition, among the respective swinging members 710, 720, and 730 constituting the decorative accessory unit 700, only the center swinging member 720 is set as a different group (group 5) because of the other rocking members 710 and 730. There is no risk of interference with a role included in another unit, while the central swinging role 720 moves to another position (a standing role 410 or a tilting role when the descent operation is performed to the overhang position). This is because there is a risk of interference with the object 510). In other words, if all the belongings constituting the decorative accessory unit 700 are grouped into the same group, the central rocking role 720 must be operated at a timing that does not interfere with the other rocking roles. 710 and the operation of the right swinging accessory 730 are limited. In order to prevent this, in the present embodiment, the center rocking role 720 is grouped differently from the left rocking role 710 and the right rocking role 730, and the left rocking role 710 and the right rocking role are arranged. The degree of freedom of the operation of the object 730 is increased.

  The above-described operation start condition table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation start condition table 222b. As shown in FIG. 17A, the operation start condition table 222b defines operation start conditions for each group. Specifically, as the operation condition of the group 2, it is defined that both of the characters constituting the groups 3 and 5 are the origin positions. This is because the standing role 410 included in the group 3 or the tilting role 510 included in the group 2 moves to the extended position in a state where the central swinging component 720 included in the group 5 operates in the extended position. This is because, in such a case, there is a risk of colliding with the standing role 410 or the central swinging role 720.

  In addition, as the operation condition of the group 3, it is specified that both the characters constituting the groups 2 and 5 are the origin positions. This is because the tilting component 510 included in the group 2 or the central swinging member 720 included in the group 5 is operated to the overhang position and the upright agent 410 included in the group 3 is operated to the overhang position. This is because, in such a case, there is a risk of colliding with the tilting role object 510 or the central swinging role object 720.

  Further, as the operating condition of the group 5, it is defined that both the characters constituting the groups 2 and 3 are the origin positions. This is because the central swinging actor 720 included in the group 5 moves to the overhang position in a state where the tilting actor 510 included in the group 2 or the upright actor 410 included in the group 3 operates at the overhang position. In such a case, there is a risk of colliding with the tilting role object 510 or the standing role item 410.

  On the other hand, for groups 1 and 4, the operation start conditions are not specified. This is because, regardless of the arrangement of the slide roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 constituting the group 1, and the right swing role 710 and the left swing role 730 constituting the group 5, This is because the positional relationship is such that there is no risk of interfering with the operation of other characters.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by setting the operating condition of the accessory in units of groups, interference of the accessories in different groups is suppressed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the role articles from colliding with each other and from being damaged by the impact of the collision. Further, since the action of the accessory is obstructed by another accessory, the action of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are shifted, giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the operating conditions need not be set for each accessory but only for each group, the design can be simplified. Therefore, at the time of design, it is possible to reduce the work of the designer who sets the operation of the accessory. Also, it is sufficient to prepare a table for setting the operating conditions in groups, and it is not necessary to prepare a data table for setting the operating conditions for each accessory, and the operating conditions for each group are defined. It is sufficient to reduce the amount of data in the operation start condition table 222b. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage area.

  In the present embodiment, five groups are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of groups may be reduced, for example, three groups may be provided. Thereby, the data amount of the data table can be further reduced. In addition, the number of groups may be increased, for example, seven groups may be configured. Thereby, the action of the accessory can be set more finely, so that the degree of freedom of the effect action can be increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The load reference value table 222b is a data table that defines a value (drive load reference value) corresponding to a load current (power consumption) for driving each accessory motor 229 for each accessory. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the load reference value table 222b, the total value of the load current (power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the driven accessory is represented by the current capacity (rated power). (The sum of the drive load reference values exceeds 100). When it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed, the driving of the accessory to be newly driven is cancelled.

  Details of the load reference value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the load reference value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 17B, the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 17B) stores the drive load reference value (the load current (the consumption Power)).

  Specifically, the drive load reference value when driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 (group 1) is 15 It is. That is, when the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 is driven, a load current (electric power) corresponding to the drive load reference value 15 is consumed. Therefore, when the respective slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 (group 1) are simultaneously varied (see FIG. 10), this corresponds to the drive load reference value 60 (15 × 4). Load current (power) is consumed. Therefore, even if all the characters in Group 1 are simultaneously varied, there is a margin of 40 in terms of the driving load reference value with respect to the current capacity (rated power). , And can be operated simultaneously with other groups of characters.

  In addition, when the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the tilting accessory 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 (group 2) is driven, the driving load reference value is 30, and the accessory corresponding to the rotating accessory 520 is provided. The driving load reference value when the driving motor 229 is driven is 10. Therefore, when the characters constituting the group 2 are simultaneously changed, a load current (power) corresponding to the driving load reference value 40 (30 + 10) is consumed. The rotating accessory 520 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise about the rotating shaft 520a as a rotation axis. However, the rotating load 520 has the same driving load reference value in either direction. ).

  The group 3 is composed of only the standing object 410 of the swing operation unit 400. The driving load reference value corresponding to the standing character 410 is 15, and by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the standing character 410, the load current (power) corresponding to the driving load reference value of 15 is increased. Consumed.

  The group 4 is composed of the left swinging role 710 and the right swinging role 730 out of the bonuses constituting the decoration accessory unit 700. As shown in FIG. 17, the load reference values corresponding to these are all 10, and by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each swinging accessory 710, 730, the drive load reference value becomes 10. The corresponding load current (power) is consumed.

  The group 5 is composed of only the central swinging object 720 of the decorative accessory unit 700. The driving load reference value corresponding to the central swinging role 720 is 15, and by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the central swinging role 720, the load current corresponding to the driving load reference value of 15 is obtained. (Power) is consumed.

  In the present embodiment, based on the drive load reference value defined in the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 17B), the accessory motor corresponding to the variable accessory and the newly-variable accessory. 229 so that the total load current (power consumption) is equal to or less than the current capacity (less than the rated power). More specifically, a driving load reference value corresponding to the driven accessory motor 229 and a driving load reference value of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the newly changed accessory are added, and the total is 100. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that the number exceeds 100 (that is, the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed by newly changing the role), the role that is to be changed newly is changed. It is configured to stop the operation of the object.

  Here, conventionally, there are few types of accessories as compared with recent gaming machines, and even if the accessories are operated freely, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. I never did. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and the load current (electric power) consumed by operating the accessories has also increased. Therefore, when a plurality of characters are operated at the same time, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) may be consumed. In such a case, as a result of exceeding the specifications of the power supply device, the control device for controlling the accessory may be shut down, the power of the gaming machine itself may be turned off, or an abnormal operation of the accessory may occur. There is a possibility that a problem of being lost may occur.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed, the role of a new accessory to be operated is determined. Since the operation is canceled, the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within the range of the load current (power consumption) of the current capacity or less (the rated power or less). That is, it is possible to prevent the load current (power consumption) from exceeding the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 for controlling the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the operation of the accessory is abnormal. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the current capacity from being exceeded, the operating condition is not set in detail for each accessory motor 229, but the accessory motor 229 is simply newly driven. In this case, it is determined whether or not the drive load reference value exceeds a predetermined value (100), and it is determined whether or not the accessory motor 229 is to be newly driven. In other words, the driving of the accessory motor 229 within the range of the current capacity or less is realized by relatively simple processing. Therefore, the designer of the pachinko machine 10 only needs to describe a simple discriminating process in the program, and it is not necessary to define in detail a condition for changing each accessory in a data table or the like. Work amount can be reduced. Further, since the data amount of the data table and the like can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage capacity.

  In the load reference value table 222c of the present embodiment, only one type of load reference value corresponding to each character is defined, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, for example, the drive load reference value in the case where each accessory motor 229 is rotated at a normal speed (when each operation step of the accessory motor 229 is set at regular time intervals), Two types, that is, a drive load reference value when the motor is rotated at a low speed (when each operation step of the accessory motor 229 is set at a time interval longer than usual) may be provided. In this case, when the total of the drive load reference values when the normal speed is set exceeds 100, the total of the drive load reference values becomes 100 or less by rotating the motor at a speed lower than normal. May be controlled as follows. If the operation step interval of the accessory motor 229 is made longer, the average value of the load current (power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 becomes smaller, so that the drive load reference value can be made smaller.

  Also, the operation pattern of the accessory may be configured such that the operation speed changes during the operation (that is, the rotation speed of the motor changes), and a drive load reference value for each operation speed may be defined. . For example, within one second after starting the operation and within one second before the end of the operation, the accessory control motor 229 is operated at a lower speed than another operation period (operation period for a normal speed). Alternatively, the driving load reference value for the low speed and the driving load reference value for the normal speed may be defined. Thus, for example, when the operation start timing of one accessory is within one second before the end of the operation of the other accessory, it is possible to refer to the drive load reference value for the low speed instead of the normal speed. Since it is possible to start the operation, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the current capacity (rated power) may be exceeded.

  The power supply return operation table 222d is a data table that is referred to when performing a power supply return operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally changed when the power is turned on. The power return operation is executed each time the power is turned on (regardless of whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed). In the power return operation table 222d, a return operation for each type of accessory is defined in association with the value of the return pointer 223f. If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation of any of the accessories by the return operation, an error command is set (see S1503 in FIG. 41). This error command includes information indicating the type of abnormality and the location where the abnormality has occurred. The display control device 114 that has received the error command performs a display on the third symbol display device 81 indicating the type of abnormality and the location of the abnormality. As described above, by performing the return operation based on turning on the power, it is possible to quickly grasp whether or not each accessory has an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the clerk of the hall starts the game for the player without noticing that the accessory of the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to return all the accessories to the origin position (origin return) before executing the power return operation based on the power return operation table 222d. In other words, when the power supply is cut off during the change of the accessory, the power supply return operation is executed after the home position is returned based on the power-on. As a result, only one type of operation that starts from the origin position needs to be prepared for the power return operation. Therefore, the data amount of the power return operation table 222d can be reduced.

  When the power is cut off and the power is turned on again during the change of the accessory, the reason why the operation of the accessory is not executed from the continuation of the operation is that the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. That is, once the power is turned off, it becomes impossible to grasp the progress of the effect performed so far. Therefore, regardless of whether the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed or not, when the power is turned on, the home return operation is performed and then the power return operation is performed. In the case where the effect is in the middle of the effect when the power is turned off, a simple display effect is configured to be executed at least until the effect period elapses after the power is restored. This simple display effect (an effect using a power-on image, which will be described later) is configured so that the same effect is repeated until the end time of the effect, regardless of the degree of progress of the effect. The effect can be displayed immediately without requiring the progress of the effect. Therefore, since no effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the effect period elapses after the power is turned on, it is possible to suppress anxiety of the player. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the storage contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up. However, a configuration may be adopted in which backup power is supplied and the information stored in the RAM 223 can be retained even after the power is cut off. With this, when the power is cut off during the production, the progress of the production at the time of the power supply being turned off after the power is turned on can be determined, and the production can be executed from the continuation. be able to.

  The details of the power return operation table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of the power return operation table 222d. As shown in FIG. 18, the operation contents of the accessory are defined in the power supply return operation table 222d for each value of the return pointer 223f. Although the details will be described later, the return pointer 223f sets the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) every time the main process (see FIG. 39) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed until the return operation ends. Is updated one at a time.

As shown in FIG. 18, the power return operation table 222d of the present embodiment (see FIG. 18)
Are configured to execute the return operation in the order of group 1 → group 2 → group 3 → group 4 → group 5 in accordance with the update of the return pointer 223f. Further, in the return operation, each accessory is changed from the origin position to the overhang position, and then is changed to return to the origin position. That is, the entire operation range in which the accessory may change during the normal game is exhaustively operated by the return operation. Thus, when an abnormality has occurred in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected.

  In addition, the power return operation table 222d of the present embodiment is configured to stop the operation for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after changing each accessory to the overhang position. This makes it possible to detect whether an error has occurred during the operation from the overhang position and the operation from the overhang position to the origin position, and also to detect whether or not an abnormality has occurred during operation stop. can do. Note that the abnormality during the suspension of the operation is, for example, a case where the operation is not stopped in spite of the fact that the operation has been suspended, or the point of origin before the predetermined period (2000 ms) designated as the operation suspension period elapses. The return to the position may occur, or the return to the origin position may not be started even after the operation stop period has elapsed.

  Further, the power supply return operation table 222d of the present embodiment is configured to set an operation stop period for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after the return operation of all the characters from group 1 to group 5 is completed. I have. This suspension period is used as a timing for ending the confirmation and shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10 when confirming whether or not the sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 113 normally starts up by shipping inspection or the like. Is provided. That is, if the accessory is operated immediately after the return operation is completed, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 waits until the operated accessory returns to the original point and then shuts off the power or operates the accessory. It is necessary to shut down the power supply during the operation and manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power supply is cut off, which may deteriorate the inspection efficiency. On the other hand, by providing an operation stop period after the end of the return operation as in the present embodiment, if the power is shut off during the operation stop period, the power is shut off in a state where all the characters are at the origin positions. State. Therefore, since it is not necessary to wait until returning to the origin position or to manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power is turned off, it is possible to improve inspection efficiency such as shipping inspection.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The accessory operation setting table 222e is a data table that defines the type (group) of the accessory to be operated and the operation timing in various effects of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is set based on the accessory operation setting table 222e.

  The details of the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the accessory operation setting table 222e. As shown in FIG. 19, in the accessory operation setting table 222e, the timing of operating the accessory and the group of the accessory operated at the operation timing are defined for each corresponding effect.

  Specifically, in the opening effect in which the effect time is 5 seconds, the operation timing of the accessory is set at the start of the effect, and it is defined that the group of the accessory to be operated at the operation timing is Group 1. . That is, it is stipulated that the slide combination items 810, 820, 830, 840 are operated in accordance with the start of the opening effect. As described above, when the operating condition of Group 1 is satisfied, each of the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840 is moved from the origin position (see FIG. 5) to the overhang position (see FIG. 10), A series of operations of returning to the position (see FIG. 5) is performed. Further, as described above, the control contents (commands output to the motor driver for each elapsed time) for setting the series of operations are defined in the motor control command setting table (not shown).

  In addition, in super-reach productions where the production time is 20 seconds and super-reach productions and shared super-reach productions, it is stipulated that at least 8 seconds have passed since the production started, and the characters in groups 4 and 5 are rocked. I have. Note that, as described above, when the operating condition of the group 4 is satisfied, the right swinging accessory 710 and the left swinging accessory 730 perform the swinging operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5), and then move to the origin position (see FIG. 5). 5)), and when the operating condition of the swing operation is satisfied in the group 5, the central swinging member 720 performs the swing operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5). A series of operations that stop at the origin position (see FIG. 5) are executed.

  In addition, in the out-of-reach super-reach effect and the shared super-reach effect, it is defined that the character of group 2 is operated at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect. As described above, when the operating condition of the group 2 is satisfied, the tilting role object 510 is rotated clockwise around the rotation shaft 520 while the tilting role object 510 is extended to the extended position (see FIG. 11). After this operation, a series of operations of returning the tilting role object 510 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) while rotating the rotating role object 520 counterclockwise is executed. By operating different accessories at different timings, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation of the jackpot.

  In the special reach A for which the production time is 30 seconds and the special reach A for common use, it is specified that the character of group 3 is operated at the timing when 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production. Note that, as described above, when the operating condition of the group 3 is satisfied, the standing character 410 is moved to the overhang position (see FIG. 8), and then the standing character 410 is returned to the origin position (see FIG. 5). Is performed.

  Thereafter, it is defined that the character of group 2 is operated at a timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, and the characters of group 1 and group 3 are operated at a timing at which 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect ( That is, the operation is performed so as to be in the state shown in FIG. 12). The more actors act, the more the appearance of the effect becomes flashy, and it is possible to improve the player's expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, by operating a plurality of groups (group 1 and group 3) in combination at the end of the effect, it is possible to excite the player's expectation as the effect progresses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the special reach B for which the production time is 30 seconds and the shared special reach B, at the timing when 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, the characters in the groups 1 and 2 are operated (that is, the state shown in FIG. 11). To operate). In addition, it is defined that the character of group 3 is operated at a timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, and that the characters of group 1 and group 3 are to be operated at the time when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect. Is stipulated. By setting the movement pattern of the accessory to be different from the out-of-special reach A and the shared special reach A, it is possible to execute effects in different modes even during the same effect period. Therefore, the effects can be diversified.

  Also, in the special reach which is selected only when the production period is 30 seconds and the jackpot A is won, the characters in the group 1 and the group 2 are operated at a timing when 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production (ie, , Operating in the state shown in FIG. 11). In addition, it is defined that the character of group 3 is operated at a timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, and the character of group 1 is operated at a timing at which 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, and the group 5 is operated. Is made to move down (that is, to move to the state shown in FIG. 13).

  That is, until 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, the movement pattern of the accessory is the same as the special reach B and the shared special reach B, and only the operation after 25 seconds from the start of the effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the action of the accessory before the elapse of 25 seconds, whether it is the special reach B, the shared special reach, or the special reach. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player watch whether the player hits or misses the game until 25 seconds, which is the end of the effect. In addition, when the character in Group 5 descends after 25 seconds, the player recognizes that the current production was a special reach (that is, a big hit A after the end of the variable production). Can be done. Therefore, for the player who recognizes that the big hit will occur before the end of the production, for the remaining production period, the satisfaction with the big hit and the occurrence of the character action in which the big hit is determined You can have a sense of accomplishment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the operation timing of the accessory and the group of the accessory to be operated are defined in the accessory operation setting table 222e, each group is assigned based on the accessory operation setting table 222e. By simply performing a predetermined operation on the other hand, it is possible to realize operations of various kinds of accessories.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is not performed in all the variable effects, but the operation of the accessory is set only in a part of the variable effects having a relatively long fluctuation time. A fluctuation production with a relatively long fluctuation time has a low probability of being selected as a production for notifying a departure, and is likely to be selected as a production for notifying a jackpot. Thus, the player can have a high sense of expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether the accessory operates or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the accessory is operated only in the opening effect or a part of the variation pattern effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that an accessory may operate also in other effects, such as an ending effect and a round effect. Further, the type of the variable effect for operating the accessory may be increased, and for example, the accessory may be operated even in the off-normal reach or the hit normal reach. This makes it possible to further diversify the effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a load value storage area 223e, and a return pointer 223f. , An initialization flag 223g, a closing operation flag 223h, an accessory operation flag 223i, and a discrimination value storage area 223j.

  The winning information storage area 223a corresponds to one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first entrance 64 (special figure 1 first area to special figure 1 fourth area), and a second entrance 640. There are four areas (first area of special figure 2 to fourth area of special figure 2), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and holds the variable effect held by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of times of waiting) up to four times for each type of the entrance that has entered the ball.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control apparatus 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added due to the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, the special figure 1 reservation after the addition is performed. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the ball number counter 203c or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the fluctuation display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is changed. The command for indicating the number of retained balls is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113 calculates the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and special figure 2 reserved ball number of main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203d is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1608 in FIG. 42). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command and the type of the reserved ball (whether the reservation is based on the entering ball into the first entrance port 64 or not). , And whether the hold is based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the 81 small area Ds1. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also changed to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 42), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 42), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1708 in FIG. 43). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The load value storage area 223e is a storage area in which a value (drive load total value) corresponding to the total load current supplied to the driven accessory motor 229 is stored. The drive load total value is a value represented by the ratio of the load current value to the current capacity, similarly to the drive load reference value. For example, when all of the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840 constituting the group 1 are variable, and the other roles constituting the group are inactive, the driving load reference corresponding to the group 1 is set. The total value of 60 is stored in the load value storage area 223e.

  Based on the driving load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the driving load reference value corresponding to the newly changed accessory, whether the current capacity is exceeded when the accessory is newly driven is determined. Is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the driving load total value and the newly variable driving load reference value exceeds 100. If it is determined that the total exceeds 100 (that is, the load current supplied to the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity), the accessory corresponding to the accessory that is to be newly changed Of the motor 229 is canceled. This allows the accessory motor 229 to be constantly driven within the range of the load current that is equal to or less than the current capacity, so that the load current can be prevented from exceeding the current capacity. Therefore, when the current capacity is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or an abnormal operation of the accessory occurs. It is possible to suppress the situation.

  The return pointer 223f is used to select the operation data of the accessory from the power supply return operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) that defines the operation content of the return operation of the accessory performed based on the power-on. More specifically, each time the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) executed at 1 ms intervals is performed, the return pointer 223f is updated (1 is added to the value of the return pointer 223f), and the updated value is updated. The action of the accessory indicated by the value is set. Since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the return pointer 223f is cleared to zero (the value becomes 0000H) when the power is turned off. For this reason, every time the power is turned on, the return operation of the accessory can be executed from the beginning of the power return operation table 222d.

  The initialization flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the return operation of the accessory performed upon turning on the power is performed. While the initialization flag 223g is on, an initial operation process (see FIG. 41) for setting a return operation of the accessory is executed. On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223g is off, it indicates that the return operation of the accessory has already been completed, and thus the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) is skipped (see S1401: No in FIG. 40). The initialization flag 223g is set on (see S1206 in FIG. 38) in the home position return process (see S37) of the startup process (see FIG. 37). On the other hand, in the initial operation process, when it is determined that the return operation of the accessory has been completed (that is, when the END information is read from the power return operation table 222d), it is set to off (see S1513 in FIG. 41). ).

  The closing operation flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the return to the original position of the accessory executed before the power return operation is completed. If the throwing operation flag 223h is on, it indicates that the return to origin of the accessory has been completed, and if it is off, it indicates that the return to origin has not been completed. The closing operation flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that the home position return has been completed (see S1507 in FIG. 41). Further, as described above, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the power-on operation flag 223h is also cleared (ie, turned off) when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The accessory operation flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not each accessory is being changed. The accessory operation flag 223i is composed of 2 bytes, and each accessory is associated with each bit. Specifically, in order from the lower bit, a right sliding role 810, a left sliding role 820, an upper sliding role 830, a lower sliding role 840, a tilting role 510, a rotating role 520, and a standing role. 410, a left swing role 710, a right swing role 730, and a center swing role 720 are associated with each other.

  Each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i has a value of 1 indicating that the corresponding accessory is being changed, and has a value of 0 indicating that the corresponding accessory has been stopped. The value of the empty bit is fixed to 0. For example, if the upper byte of the accessory operation flag 223i is 00H (that is, 00000000B in binary notation) and the lower byte is 40H (that is, 01000000B in binary notation), the standing agent 410 is variable. Yes, the other characters mean that they are suspended. Based on the state of each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i, the type of the operating accessory can be specified.

  The determination value storage area 223j is a storage area for storing a determination value for determining whether or not the total load current supplied to drive the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity. Specifically, a value (determination value) obtained by adding the drive load total value stored in the load value storage area 223i and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory motor 229 to be newly driven is determined. It is memorized. It is determined whether or not a load current exceeding the current capacity is to be supplied based on whether or not this determination value is 100. If the load current exceeds the current capacity, the accessory motor newly attempted to be driven is determined. 229 is canceled. This allows the accessory motor 229 to be constantly driven within the range of the load current that is equal to or less than the current capacity, so that the load current can be prevented from exceeding the current capacity. Therefore, when the current capacity is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or an abnormal operation of the accessory occurs. It is possible to suppress the situation.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 42) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power (drive current) to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storage. The character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. For transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and setting the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The processing of reading from the other bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table to be described later) used in the control program are stored in the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, by a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) which is executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1801 in FIG. 44) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list described later (see FIG. 23) transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 44). The power-on main image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, This is a simple image having a smaller data amount than an image displayed during a normal game. Therefore, the image data can be transferred quickly after the power is turned on, and the image can be displayed.

  During display of the main image at power-on, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 On the power-on main image display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "O" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on of the symbol "X" in the same position as the symbol "○" The change image is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the change period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", display "○" symbol for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if "missing special symbol", display "X" symbol after stopping the variable effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, for example, when the operation abnormality of the accessory is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 uses the error command to display both the type of the error and the location where the error has occurred in the display control device 114. Notify to The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. It is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, an opening data transfer flag. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, a stop symbol indicating the departure is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be performed in the future. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state. As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces (back surfaces A to C) corresponding to the stage (one of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, Information for specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Is defined (address "0002H" in FIG. 22 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 44). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 55B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 46B), and When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 46) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 46 (b) (see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 55A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for the image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 23) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 23) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image of one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. ) In S2103), a pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 52) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 23), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Accordingly, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 23, the back image used for the one-frame image, the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 46B Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The opening data transfer flag 233i is a flag indicating whether or not it is a timing to start the transfer of the image data used for the opening effect. Show. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that it is not the transfer timing of the image data used for the opening effect.

  The opening data transfer flag 233i is used for the display suspension received from the sound lamp control device 113 in the stop type command process (see FIG. 48B) which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 47). When it is determined that the type command is a command indicating a jackpot stop type, it is set to ON (see S2405 in FIG. 48). Also, in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56), this is set to off when setting the transfer of image data used for the opening effect (see S3510 in FIG. 56).

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite in which no image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 56). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 46B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 57).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, an example in which the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and the operation of various accessories are combined to perform one effect will be described. First, FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reach effect (combination reach reach effect) in which the display image and the operation of the accessory are combined. As described above in the description of FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the above-described combined benefit reach effect is generated in a part of the effect performed when the reach occurs. In addition, the role-combined reach effect is configured to easily appear in the case of a reach effect that is a big hit, and is configured to be less likely to appear in the case of an out-of-reach reach. As described above, the probability of a special symbol jackpot is 1/300 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/30 in the high probability state of the special symbol, so that most of the lottery is missed. Therefore, the appearance frequency of the role combination reach effect that is difficult to appear in the case of the off-reach becomes low.

  In the example of FIG. 24, in the special reach A or the shared special reach A, out of the combination composite reach production, immediately before 8 seconds elapse from the production start (see FIG. 24A), and 8 seconds elapse. And a state in which the accessory is operated based on the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 24B). As shown in FIG. 24A, in the role-combined reach effect, the right symbol column and the left symbol column among the varying symbol columns stop at the same symbol (for example, “7” symbol) ( FIG. 24 (a)). Then, before the middle symbol row stops, the standing character 410 is changed to operate up to the overhang position (the central portion of the third symbol display device 81) (see FIG. 24B). Although not shown, the swinging members 710, 720, and 730 constituting the decorative accessory unit are caused to swing at the origin positions. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the uprising role 410 has been operated and that it is a role-product composite reach effect. In addition, as described above, the role-combined reach effect is configured to easily appear when a big hit occurs, so that the player can expect the big hit after the end of the change. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity is exceeded by newly operating the accessory motor 229, the drive of the accessory motor 229 is canceled. Is configured. In other words, there may be a case where the standing character 410 cannot be changed in spite of the selection of the character combined reach effect. For example, in the power supply return operation, when the transfer operation of all the resident images is completed and the start condition of the accessory composite reach effect is satisfied while the return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is being executed. It is. In this case, a load current corresponding to a driving load reference value of 60 is used to operate each of the slide characters (group 1) (see FIG. 17B). When each of the swinging members 710, 720, and 730 is operated, a load current exceeding the current capacity is consumed. Therefore, the operations of the standing member 410 and each of the rocking members 710, 720, and 730 are performed. Canceled. Also in this case, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an alternative effect which is an alternative to the role-effect composite reach effect so that the player can recognize that the effect is the composite-effect reach effect.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of the alternative effect. In this alternative effect, the fish jumps to the middle symbol row portion of the third symbol display device 81 instead of changing the standing character 410 to the overhang position (see FIG. 24B) in the accessory complex reach effect. Display the image. This fish bouncing effect is configured not to appear in effects other than the alternative effect. In addition, even when the standing role 410 moves to the overhanging position (see FIG. 24B) in the role-combined reach effect, the appearance is as if the fish jumped on the water. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the alternative effect is an effect of the same system executed in place of the role-combined reach effect. Therefore, even if the operation of the standing role 410 is cancelled, by displaying the substitute effect, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit after the end of the reach effect.

  FIG. 26A is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect (opening effect) for notifying the player of the start of the big hit when the result of the variable effect is a big hit. In this opening effect, the operation of group 1 is set, and a predetermined display effect (see FIG. 26A) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 moves to the extended position, and each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the third symbol display device 81. Are displayed in the display area corresponding to the "heart" -shaped opening formed by the (see FIG. 26A). In this way, by displaying the character indicating the blessing, the player can easily recognize that the big hit state, which is an advantageous state for the player, has been achieved. In addition, by swinging the swinging members 710, 720, 730 at the origin position, the player's attention is attracted to the pachinko machine 10 more. Thereby, it is possible to make the player surely notice that the big hit is started. Therefore, as a result of the player not noticing the start of the jackpot and not launching the ball, the end condition of one or a plurality of rounds is suppressed without causing the ball to win at the specific winning opening 65a. can do.

  Note that, similarly to the role-combined reach effect, when the current capacity is determined to be exceeded by newly operating the special-purpose motor 229, the driving of the special-purpose motor 229 is canceled. I have. In other words, there is a case where the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840 cannot be changed regardless of the start timing of the opening effect. For example, when the opening effect is started during the return operation of the accessory, the current capacity is increased by operating each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 and each swinging accessory 710, 720, 730. For example, a case in which a load current exceeding the above is supplied. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an alternative effect instead of the opening effect so that the player can recognize that the big hit is started.

  FIG. 26 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an alternative effect executed when the operation of the accessory is canceled in the opening effect. In the alternative effect of the opening effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image similar to the appearance when each of the slide characters 810, 820, 830, and 840 has moved to the overhang position. In addition, as in the case of the normal opening effect, the character “Congratulations” is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, even if the operation of each of the bonuses is canceled, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is the timing to start the big hit. Therefore, since the player can have a sense of happiness due to the start of the jackpot, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol changing process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Execute (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d are acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204), (S204: No) Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S205).

  In the process of S205, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 203c is 0 (S205: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S206). ), A reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S207). The set ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. I do.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S207, the data corresponding to the entry into the first entry opening 64 among the data stored in the special symbol reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved first area to the special figure 1 reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, special figure 1 reserved first area → execution area, special figure 1 reserved second area → special figure 1 reserved first area, special figure 1 reserved third area → special figure 1 reserved second area, special figure 1 reserved second area The data in each area is shifted, for example, the fourth area in FIG. 1 reservation → the third area in special figure 1 reservation. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S212.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one. Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S210). The set ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. I do.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S210, the data corresponding to the entry into the second entrance 640 is shifted among the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S211). In the process of S211, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area to the special figure 2 reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, Toku-zu 2 reserved first area → execution area, Toku-zu 2 reserved second area → Toku-zu 2 reserved first area, Toku-zu 2 reserved 3 area → Toku-zu 2 reserved 2nd area, toku The data in each area is shifted, for example, FIG. 2 reserved fourth area → special figure 2 reserved third area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S212.

  In the process of S212 executed after the process of S208 or S211, a special symbol change start process for starting a change display (change effect) based on the data of the execution area is executed (S212). Details of the special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the variable effect executed on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S214), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S212) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S217), and the process proceeds to S220. When the start of the special symbol big hit is set by the process of S217, the opening command is set when the big hit control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed. As a result, an opening effect (see FIG. 26 (a)) is executed, and a big hit is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S218). If the value of the counter 203g is 1 or more (S218: Yes), the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is decremented by 1 (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0 (S218: No), the process of S219 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S220.

  In the process of S220, a stop command for stopping and displaying the changing third symbol is set on the third symbol display device 81 (S220), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of a special symbol change start process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S212). This special symbol change start process (S212) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203f of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probable change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change flag 203f is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state (probable change state). If the probability change flag 203f is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol.

  If the probability change flag 203f is ON (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state (probability change state), so that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the high Based on the first random number table 202a for probabilities, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, ten random numbers of “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270” are set as the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot, and the first random number When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value which is the winning, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability change flag 203f is off (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 is obtained because the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol. Then, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the first probability random number table 202a for the low probability time (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. Only "7" is set as the random number value which becomes the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches "7", it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. . When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the processing of S305, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots) are compared. A, jackpot B), it is determined which is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined to be the big hit A (probably variable big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the big hit B (A time saving big hit) is determined (see FIG. 15B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for a long time)”, “outside (for a short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “outside special reach” various types are defined. The variation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B are defined as "common normal reach", "common super reach", and "special special reach". The variation pattern for jackpot A is "special reach". Are defined, and as the variation patterns of winning / losing sharing, various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “shared super reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot (that is, the special symbol is out of the way) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out-of-special is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete out is set. If it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (FIG. 35). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and when there is a start winning, a value indicated by various random number counters. And a process for executing the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the held random numbers counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, even if there is no ball entering the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is not changed. If it is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S408. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special figure 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S901) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. I do.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (special figure 1 reserved first area to special figure 1 reserved fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 1 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 1 reserved second area is used. If the value is 2, the special figure 1 reserved third area is used. If the value is 3, the special figure 1 reserved fourth area is used. And the first area.

  Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. Then, a winning information command for notifying the prediction result to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S407), and the process proceeds to S408.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / no-go, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  In the processing of S401, when the ball entry to the first entrance 64 is not detected (S401: No), there is a prize to the first entrance 64 and the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203c In the case where the value (N1) is 4, which is the maximum value (S403: No), and in the process of S408 executed when the process of S407 is completed, the ball has entered the second entrance 640. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S408). In the process of S408, similarly to the process of S401, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S408: Yes), the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S409), and the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N2) of the number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S410).

  Then, whether there is no ball entering the second entrance 640 (S408: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is not changed. If it is not less than 4 (S410: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S408: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S410: Yes), the special figure 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S411). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S412).

  The reserved ball count command set here is also stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201 in the same manner as the reserved ball count command set in the processing of S405. In the external output process (S901) of FIG. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. I do.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S412, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to special figure 2 reserved fourth area) (S413). In the process of S413, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 2 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 reserved second area is used. If the value is 2, the special figure 2 reserved third area is used. If the value is 3, the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is used. And the first area.

  Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S413, the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and its variation pattern are predicted. Then, a winning information command for notifying the prediction result to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S414), and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric power attached to the second ball entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

  In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the middle symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device, and the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is performed. In the middle. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S502). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of the variable display is held on the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the during-hours counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time reduction counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203g during the time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol.

  If the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during a special symbol big hit, it is configured such that a lottery of a normal symbol is hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. The specific winning opening 65a is provided in the front right upper direction with respect to the second ball entrance 640 (see FIG. 2). Further, in the closed state of the specific winning opening 65a, the ball reaching the specific winning opening 65a is guided to the lower right direction because the upper part of the variable winning device 65 has a gentle inclination toward the lower right direction. Is done. Therefore, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second entrance 640 during the special symbol jackpot, a large number of balls that flow downward and to the lower right without entering the specific winning opening 65a. The ball enters the mouth 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so it is acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 15C).

  In the processing of S508, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 (S508: No), the processing shifts to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the low Based on the random number table for ordinary symbols for probability, a lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is obtained (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 15C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512), and when it is determined that it is a winning of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S514). If the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the special symbol is hit at this moment. It is determined whether or not it is (S515). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the processing of S515, if the special symbol is not during the jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 640 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S512: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203g during the time reduction is 1 or more (S519). If the value of the counter 203g during the time reduction is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the second entrance 640 is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed (S502). S522). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S520 or S521 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or the processing of S518, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S524). If the result of the lottery is a normal symbol hit (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and the process ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the processing of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, the first pass is performed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per two.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ordinary entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203e is less than 4 If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203e is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In the processing of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). If it is not stored (S805: No). Since the processing at the time of the previous power-off may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S812 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S812 in such a case. Although details will be described later in the description of the main processing (see FIG. 35), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S815, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power-off information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly performed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S804: No). S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to a main process described later (see FIG. 35).

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic processing of a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripherals). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27). Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command to hold the number of balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) and the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). A jackpot control process for opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process (S906), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends, the first symbol display is updated. The variable display executed on the symbol display device 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29). (1) Stop display (lighting display) on the symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S523 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31). I do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). In the process of S908, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has elapsed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S908, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 33 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the initialization process (see S801 in FIG. 34). When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from the processing of S901. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). The jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the (large opening port) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and the process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1003, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1003: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is in a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1007, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all eight rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the processing of S1009, if it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects an ending effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1009, if it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect. If this is done (S1011: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1012), and this processing ends. The setting performed in the process of S1012 includes, for example, a process of setting the probability change flag 203f to ON when the jackpot to be ended is the jackpot A and a process of setting the jackpot to be ended when the jackpot to be ended is the jackpot B. A process of setting 100 to the counter 203g is exemplified. By executing the processing of S1012, it is possible to shift to the gaming state according to the type of big hit based on the end of the ending effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), this processing is ended as it is.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 37, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, the arrangement of each accessory is confirmed, and an origin return process for returning the accessory shifted from the origin position to the origin position is executed (S1102). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, by executing the origin return processing (S1102), the return operation of the accessory can be started from the origin position.

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). It is determined whether the process is started during the execution of (see FIG. 39) (S1103). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 39), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1317. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1317 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1103: No), this start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1317. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1104).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1105 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1104: No), the process proceeds to S1109.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1104: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1105. On the other hand, this startup process is started after the momentary power failure and after the execution of the power-off process in S1317 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1104: No), and the process proceeds to S1209.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1103: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1105 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1105, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1105). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1106: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1107). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1106: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1108), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1109, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1109). The power-off flag is turned on when executing the power-off process in S1317 (see S1316 in FIG. 39). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1317 is executed, the process starting at S1109 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1317 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1109: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1110), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1111), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1109 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1105 to S1107 is performed. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1109: No), the process skips S1110, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1210, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1111), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1112), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process in S1110 is skipped is that when the process from S1105 to S1109 is performed via the process in S1107, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1105. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the origin return processing (S1102) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 during the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the origin return processing. As described above, if there is any accessory deviating from the origin position when the power is turned on, this origin return process is executed to return the accessory deviating from the origin position to the origin position.

  When the origin return process (S1102) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is any accessory deviated from the origin position. As a method of determining whether or not the accessory is shifted from the origin position, for example, the state (rotation angle, etc.) of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each accessory may be determined.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1201 that there is a role object deviating from the origin (S1201: Yes), first, all the role components (each slide role product 810, 820, 830, 840) constituting the group 1 have the origin. It is determined whether or not the position is at the position (S1202), and if it is determined that all the characters constituting the group 1 are at the origin position (S1202: Yes), it is determined that the position is deviated from the origin position in the processing of S1201. The operation of the accessory motor 229 is started (S1205) in order to return all the accessories to the origin position, and the process shifts to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the characters constituting group 1 are deviated from the origin position (S1202: No), it is determined that all characters other than group 1 return to the origin position. The object motor 229 is operated (S1203), and after the completion of the original restoration, it is set so as to return to the origin of the character constituting the group 1 (S1204), and the process shifts to S1206.

  It should be noted that the different processing is performed depending on whether or not it is necessary to return the group 1 to the origin position, because the characters constituting the group 1 and the characters constituting the other groups are simultaneously moved to the origin position. This is because a load current exceeding the current capacity may be supplied to the accessory motor 229 during the return to origin operation. That is, even if the driving load reference values of the groups 2 to 5 are totaled, the sum is only 90 (see FIG. 17B). Even if it is made variable, it does not exceed the current capacity. On the other hand, the total of the drive load reference values of the group 1 is 60, and when it is changed at the same time as the role constituting the other group, a load current exceeding the current capacity may be supplied. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the characters constituting the group 1 are shifted from the origin position, the characters of the group 1 are returned to the origin position at a different timing from the other groups. It is composed. Therefore, when the accessory is returned to the origin, it is possible to suppress a problem that a load current exceeding the current capacity is supplied and the sound lamp control device 113 is shut down or the like.

  In the process of S1201, if it is determined that there is no accessory deviated from the origin position, the process of S1202 to S1205 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1206. In the processing of S1201, when there is no character deviating from the origin position (S1201: No), when the processing of S1204 is completed, and in the processing of S1206 executed when the processing of S1205 is completed, an initial state is set. The activation flag 223g is set to ON (S1206), and the process ends. When the initialization flag 223g is set to ON, it indicates that the home return operation is being performed.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processes in S1302 to S1310 are mainly related to display (production). , S1312, and the variable display setting process in S1313 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1313 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and thereafter, the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 228 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 228 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this processing, when an operation of the frame button 228 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 228 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 228 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 228 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 228 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 228 is not provided, the processing of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1310 ends, the accessory control process is executed (S1311), and the process shifts to S1312. In the accessory control process (S1311), the operation start and stop of the accessory are set according to the state of the game. Details of the accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the end of the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1313 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1314 (S1314: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1316), and the power-off processing is executed (S1317). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1318), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1315), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1315: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the accessory control process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the accessory control process (S1311). This accessory control process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and starts and stops the operation of the accessory as described above. This is a process for setting.

  In this accessory control process (S1311), first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is ON to determine whether or not the power supply return operation of the accessory has been completed (S1401). If it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is ON (S1401: Yes), then, an initial operation processing for setting a power supply return operation of the accessory is executed (S1402), and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it is determined whether there is a character to be set to stop the operation (S1401: No). S1403). The accessory that should be stopped is, for example, an accessory that has set an operation and has reached the overhang position, or has set a return operation from the overhang position and has returned to the origin position. In the processing of S1403, when it is determined that there is a character to be stopped (S1403: Yes), the operation stop of the character is set, and the operation stop is set among the bits of the character operation flag 223i. The bit corresponding to the character is set to 0 (S1404).

  Next, by referring to the load reference value table 222c, a drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which operation is set to be stopped is specified. By subtracting the reference value, the driving load total value is updated (S1405), and the process shifts to S1406. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1403 that there is no character to be set to stop the operation, the processes of S1404 and S1405 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1406.

  In the process of S1406, it is determined whether or not there is a character to be set to start operation (S1406). Specifically, when the operation timing specified in the accessory operation setting table 222e comes, the corresponding operation group is set to operate. For example, at the start of the opening effect, the group 1 corresponds to an accessory for which operation start should be set. If it is determined in the process of S1406 that there is no character that should be set to start the operation, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1406 that there is a character to be set to start operation (S1406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation start condition of the group to which the character to start operation belongs is satisfied. , Based on the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17A) (S1407). Then, if it is determined that the operation start condition is not satisfied by the process of S1407 (S1407: No), the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1407, when it is determined that the operation start condition of the accessory for which the operation start should be set is satisfied (S1407: Yes), the driving load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the operation A value obtained by adding the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to start to be set is stored in the determination value storage area 223j (S1408).

  Next, it is determined whether the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S1409). If it is determined that the stored value is equal to or less than 100 (S1409: No), even if the accessory determined to be started in the processing of S1406 is operated, it is supplied to the accessory motor 229. It means that the total value of the load currents to be applied falls within the range of the current capacity or less, so that the operation start of the accessory is set, and among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i, the accessory that sets the operation start is set. Is set to 1 (S1410). Then, the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (the sum of the drive load stored in the load value storage area 223e and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to set the operation start) is added. Is stored in the load value storage area 223e to update the driving load total value (S1411), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S1409: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. Setting the operation start means that a load current exceeding the current capacity is supplied to the accessory motor 229. Therefore, in this case, the start of the operation of the accessory is canceled (S1412), a display alternative effect command for displaying an alternative effect is set (S1413), and the process ends. The display alternative production command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display alternative effect command, the display control device 114 starts an alternative effect (see FIGS. 25 and 26 (b)) corresponding to the character whose operation stop has been canceled in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, even if the operation of the accessory is canceled, a display effect that makes the user feel as if the accessory has operated can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect has the same degree of expectation as when the accessory is operated, so that the player can play the game while having an appropriate degree of expectation for each effect. Can be done.

  In the present embodiment, a determination value storage area 223j for temporarily storing a calculation result for determining whether the sum of the drive load reference values exceeds 100 is provided separately from the load value storage area 223e. However, the determination value storage area 223j may be omitted. In this case, the driving load reference value corresponding to the character to be newly operated is once added to the driving load total value stored in the load value storage area 223e, and the operation of the character is canceled when the operation of the character is canceled. What is necessary is just to subtract the drive load reference value corresponding to the canceled accessory. Thereby, the storage area can be reduced.

  Next, an initial operation process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this initial operation processing (S1402). This initial operation process (S1402) is executed in the accessory control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for setting the power return operation of the accessory as described above.

  In the initial operation process (S1402), first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation of the accessory has been detected (S1501). If an abnormal operation is detected in the processing of S1501 (S1501: Yes), a notification operation is set according to the character that has detected the abnormal operation (S1502). In addition, the notification operation according to the accessory includes, for example, notifying by voice the type of the accessory in which the abnormality has occurred, blinking an LED around the accessory in which the abnormality has occurred, or generating an abnormality. For example, LEDs of different colors are turned on in accordance with the type of the accessory being performed. Thereby, it is possible to make the hall clerk easily recognize which of the plurality of the bonus items provided in the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to cause the clerk in the hall to take measures according to the character with the abnormality.

  Next, an error command is set (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. The error command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output processing (S1302) of the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to 114. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 starts error display on the third symbol display device 81 based on information indicating the type of error included in the error command and the type of the character in abnormal operation. Thereby, the type of the error and the accessory in which the error has occurred can be easily recognized by the hall clerk, so that the abnormal operation of the hall clerk can be more easily eliminated.

  On the other hand, if no abnormal operation is detected in the process of S1501 (S1501: No), the processes of S1502 and S1503 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1504. In the processing of S1504, it is determined whether or not the closing operation flag 223h is turned on (S1504). If it is determined that the closing operation flag 223h is turned off (S1504: Yes), the power return operation of the accessory is performed. Is not during the period of executing (that is, the origin is being returned to the origin). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S1505). If it is determined that is present (S1505: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, if it is determined that there is no accessory that is returning to the origin (S1505: No), either when the return to origin is completed, or when all powers are at the origin position when the power is turned on, the origin is returned. Either there is no need to perform a return. In other words, in either case, it is indicated that all the characters are at the origin position. Therefore, in this case, first, the number of driving steps of all the accessory motors is set to 0 (S1506), and the number of operation steps of the accessory motor 229 can be set based on the origin position of each accessory. I do. When the process of S1506 ends, an operation stop period of one second is set (S1507). The operation suspension period is a period set as a timing for shutting off the power in a shipping inspection or the like. That is, in the shipping inspection or the like, the audio lamp control device 113 or the like may determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 normally starts up based on the power supply to the pachinko machine 10, and then shut off the power and shift to the next inspection. In such a case, it is conceivable to return to the original position and then shift to the next inspection. However, unless an operation stop period is provided (that is, the home return operation ends, the power supply return operation of the accessory immediately occurs). Is started), it is necessary to wait until the power supply return operation is completed in all the inspections and all the accessories return to the origin positions, and then shut off the power supply, thereby lowering the inspection efficiency. There is a fear. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is stopped for a predetermined period (1 second) after the return to the origin is completed. The power supply can be shut off while in the position. Therefore, inspection efficiency can be improved in shipping inspection and the like.

  When the processing in S1507 ends, the power-on operation flag 223h is set to ON to indicate that it is the execution period of the power return operation (S1508), and the processing ends. In addition, in the processing of S1504, if it is determined that the closing operation flag 223h is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the return to the origin of the accessory has been completed, and thus the setting is performed by the processing of S1506. It is determined whether or not the operation stop period (1 second) has elapsed (S1509). If the operation stop period has not elapsed (S1509: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1509, when it is determined that the operation suspension period has elapsed (S1509: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the return pointer 223f (S1510), and the power return operation table 222d (FIG. 18) (step S1511), the data (defined content) corresponding to the value of the return pointer 223f after the update is read out (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the read data is END information (S1512). If it is determined that the data is not END information (S1512: No), the data read from the power return operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) is used. The drive of the accessory motor 229 is set based on the result (S1513), and the process ends.

  In the process of S1512, when it is determined that the data read from the power return operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) is the END information (S1512: Yes), both the initialization flag 223g and the input operation flag 223h are turned off. To indicate that the power return operation has ended (S1514), and ends this processing.

  By executing the initial operation process (S1402), the power supply of the accessory can be restored based on the power-on. Therefore, during the power supply return operation, whether or not each accessory operates normally. Can be checked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in a state where the accessory in which the operation abnormality has occurred remains.

  Next, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Processing.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1603). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 43) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). If the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 43) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 ( N1) or the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). In the process of S1608, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1608, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning) and when a special symbol is drawn by lottery. Since it is transmitted from 110, each time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is mainly controlled by the processing of S1608 by the processing of S1608. The value can be adjusted to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Even if it is deviated, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of detecting the start winning and the lottery of the special symbol, and the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, and It can be adjusted to the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d. When the process of S1608 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1607, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S1607: No), then, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1609). Then, when an opening command is received (S1609: Yes), first, a display opening command is set (S1610). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect.

  When the processing of S1610 ends, the operation pattern of the accessory for the opening effect is set (S1611), and the process returns to the main processing. As described above with reference to FIG. 19, in the opening effect, the operation of group 1 is set at the start of the effect. That is, a series of operations is set in which each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 is moved to the overhang position (see FIG. 26A) and is moved to the origin position (see FIG. 5). Based on the operation set here, an operation start is set in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) (see S1410 in FIG. 40). Note that, as described above, at the timing when the accessory is to start operating, as described above, the group of the accessory that is to start the operation determines the operation condition specified in the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17). When it is determined that it is not satisfied (see S1407: No in FIG. 40), by newly operating the accessory, the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 becomes equal to the current capacity (rated power). ) Is exceeded (see S1409: Yes in FIG. 40), the operation start of each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, 840 is canceled, and an alternative effect is set (S1412, FIG. 40). See S1413).

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1609 (S1609: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1612). When the round number command is received (S1612: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1613), and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S1613). S1614), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output processing (S1302) of the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1612 (S1612: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1615). Then, when the ending command is received (S1615: Yes), the display ending command for notifying the display mode of the ending effect is set (S1616), and the process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the processing of S1615 (S1615: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed (S1617). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1313). The variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1707. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then, in the process of S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the operation pattern of the accessory corresponding to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the processing of S1703 is set (S1705). That is, the operation of the accessory is set based on the specified contents of the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 19). Based on the operation set here, an operation start is set in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) (see S1410 in FIG. 40). As described above, at the timing when the accessory is to start operating, it is determined that the group of the accessory that is to start the operation does not satisfy the operation condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17). In this case (see S1407: No in FIG. 40), it is determined that the total of the load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by newly operating the accessory. In this case (see S1409: Yes in FIG. 40), the operation start of the accessory in which the operation pattern is set in the processing of S1703 is canceled, and an alternative effect is set (see S1412 and S1413 in FIG. 40).

  When the processing in S1705 ends, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1706). In the process of S1706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S1707.

  In the process of S1707, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1707). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1707: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1707: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1708), and then, in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1709).

  When the process of S1709 is completed, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1710), and based on the set stop type. Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1711), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing in S1902, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 44). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S1802 in FIG. 44) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S1801) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 45, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S1902 and S1902, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 55A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 55A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B), the simple command determination processing (FIG. 46 (b) (see S2108) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 46 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. If the main controller 110 has received the display variation pattern command via the audio lamp controller 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command has been received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the simple variation is performed. You can make a production. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1806, the command interruption processing (see FIG. 46A) and the V interruption processing (FIG. 46B) are performed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal. ))).

  Next, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 46B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S2102) is performed so as to be displayed on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2103) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined according to each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2105) determined in the task processing (S2104). The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, reach out). The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), and returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. Is set (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402. In the above-described task process (S2104), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the process of S2403, the stop type information (any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the out-of-order reach, the reach other than the out-of-order or the out-of-order reach) indicated by the stop type command for display is the stop type of the jackpot. Is determined (S2404), and if the type is the jackpot stop type (S2404: Yes), the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) notifies the start of the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect when the switch is on. The opening data transfer flag 223i is set to ON (S2405), the stop type command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not the jackpot stop type (S2404: No), the process of S2505 is skipped, the stop type command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on the opening data transfer flag 223i, the image data to be used in the opening effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the variable effect that is a big hit is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. Can be transferred. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Since the display opening command for instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the display opening command is received. Therefore, when the image data used in the opening effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a lot of waiting time is generated from the end of the variable effect to the start of the opening effect. There is a fear that the user may feel uneasy or uncomfortable about stopping.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device is started. By 81, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is controlled by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit. With this, when the variable effect which becomes a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned about whether or not the operation is stopped. There is no unpleasant feeling. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2402.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the process of S2206, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among unprocessed commands (S2208), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2208: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In this opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2503). S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2505), the opening command processing is completed, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2504, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the content of the image is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated and the player will feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Also, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds) are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, a long waiting time is required between the end of the round effect and the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and until the change display of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 ends. , And the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to end. Thus, when the opening effect is completed on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds). ) When the game is finished, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not have anxiety as to whether or not the operation is stopped, and does not give a feeling of strangeness. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, if the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81. With this, when the variable effect which becomes a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned about whether or not the operation is stopped. There is no unpleasant feeling. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2208, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is a round number command for use (S2210: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2210), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2210, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command has a display ending command (S2212). If there is an ending command for use (S2212: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2213) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d is read. Is set to (S2701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

  Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2703). S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2212, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2214). If there is a change command (S2214: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S2802. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2802 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 228 within 20 milliseconds or less, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2214, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2216). If it is (S2216: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2902). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the processing of S2901, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the processing of S2902 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the error type is an operation error of the accessory, information indicating which of the accessories has an error and a warning image indicating the content of the error of the accessory are displayed. .

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S2216 (S2216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2218), and the processing returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2202 to S2218 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2201 to S2218 is repeatedly executed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 48B), which are the processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on which are set and required in this case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation image area at power-on 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, a pointer update process is performed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table buffer is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and the present processing is terminated and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the rendering contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3206). ), End this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the address immediately before the End information is described. Since the drawing content is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state (S3014), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the previous change effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is on rather than off (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the demonstration display data table is stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S3017), and then write Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and thus the display setting process ends. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S2105), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3401). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S3401: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3402). In the process of S3402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3402 (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here) The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B), the command is not used in the simple command determination processing (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 46B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 56) (see S3301: No in FIG. 55A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2103). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3502). If the obtained information is the transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process shifts to S3505.

  Also, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been performed (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the processing in S3505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S3505: No), the processing shifts to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various kinds of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509).

  If the opening data transfer flag is ON (S3509: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 47), and as a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. This means that the type of stop has been determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed before the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 ends. That is, if the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), the opening data transfer flag is set to off (S3510), and the image data used in the opening effect is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data used in the opening effect and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained. Then, the flow shifts to the process of S3517.

  In the process of S3509, if the opening data transfer flag is not on but off (S3509: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after setting the back image change flag to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S3516), and the flow shifts to the process of S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S3517, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3517, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104), and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending) The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated from the information, the color information, the filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) (S3601). In other words, in the processing of S3601, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, so that the drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 46B) is executed, the process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to have a plurality of effect parts for production that can be varied by driving the accessory motor 229. Various entertainment effects can be realized by making the variable according to the situation. Each accessory motor 229 for driving these accessories is configured to operate based on a load current supplied from the power supply device 115.

  A unique current capacity (rated power) is set in the power supply device 115 (in this embodiment, 7 A / 1750 W), and the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 is equal to the current capacity (rated power). If the value exceeds (), the pachinko machine 10 may shut down or the sound lamp control device 113 may stop operating. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a load reference value table 222c is provided in order to set the load current value (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 to a current capacity or less (rated power or less). A value (drive load reference value) corresponding to the load current consumed when each accessory is varied is defined. When it is desired to change the accessory, a load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is supplied by newly changing the accessory based on the driving load reference value. When it is determined that the driving is performed, the driving of the accessory is cancelled. This allows the accessory to be varied within the range of the current capacity or less (the rated power or less), so that the pachinko machine 10 operates abnormally by supplying a load current exceeding the current capacity, Failure can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the action of the accessory is cancelled, the substitute effect corresponding to the accessory is executed. This alternative effect is equivalent to the effect of changing the character, even if the operation of the character is canceled, by displaying a display effect of the same system as the effect of changing the character on the third symbol display device 81. Can be held to the player. Also, when trying to execute a composite effect of a character and a display image, if the action of the character is simply canceled and the display content remains the same as the composite effect, an unnatural display effect There is a possibility that it becomes. For example, in the opening effect (see FIG. 26 (a)), if the movement of each of the slides 810, 820, 830, 840 to the overhang position is simply canceled, the center of the third symbol display device 81 will be displayed. The character "congratulations" is only displayed, and no display is performed around the character, resulting in an unnatural display. On the other hand, by preparing the above-described alternative effect that is completed only by the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress an effect of an unnatural display content. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the accessories are classified into a plurality of groups, and the operation is set for each group. Also, the characters constituting each group are characters in a positional relationship that does not interfere with each other. And when changing an accessory, it is comprised so that it may change, when the operation start conditions defined for every group are satisfy | filled. Specifically, the operation start condition is a condition that the presence or absence of interference with another group is determined, and the operation is performed at a timing at which interference with another group does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the interference between the characters in different groups and prevent the character from being damaged by the impact of the collision between the characters. Further, since the action of the accessory is obstructed by another accessory, the action of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are shifted, giving a sense of incongruity to the player. Can be suppressed. When the operation start condition of the group is not satisfied, the operation start of the accessory is canceled, and control is performed so as to execute the above-described alternative effect. Thereby, even if the action of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to make the player have the same degree of expectation as the effect of varying the accessory. Also, by preparing an alternative effect, it is possible to suppress the effect of an unnatural display content, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect. it can.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operating condition is not set for each of the accessories, but the operating condition is set for each group, so that the design can be simplified. Therefore, at the time of design, it is possible to reduce the work of the designer who sets the operation of the accessory. Also, it is sufficient to prepare a table for setting the operating conditions in groups, and it is not necessary to prepare a data table for setting the operating conditions for each accessory, so that the number of data tables is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the current capacity (rated power) is set as a threshold value, and when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the operation start of the accessory is canceled, but the present invention is limited to this. Not something. For example, a drive load reference value corresponding to 90% of the current capacity (rated power) is set as a threshold, and the operation start of the accessory is canceled based on whether or not the total load current (power consumption) exceeds the threshold. It may be configured to judge whether or not. By providing a margin of 10% with respect to the current capacity (rated power), there is included in the configuration a role-playing object whose load current (power consumption) is higher than the average due to individual variation of the role-playing motor 229. In this case, the accessory can be reliably operated within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that a load current (power) exceeding a predetermined threshold value (7 A / 1750 W) is supplied, the operation start of the accessory that is to be newly operated is canceled. But it is not limited to this. For example, the load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 may be configured to be equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power) by stopping a part of the operating accessory. Also, instead of stopping the operation of the accessory, the load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is reduced by reducing the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 to reduce the current capacity (rated power). ) May be configured.

  In addition, when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), the operation start and operation stop of each accessory is switched at high speed, and the timings during operation are shifted from each other. Thus, the load current (power consumption) may be configured to be equal to or less than the current capacity (not more than the rated power). For example, when it is determined that all the characters in group 1 and all the characters in groups 3 to 5 are to be moved at the same time (that is, the sum of the drive load reference values is 110, and it is determined that the current capacity is exceeded). In this case, first, only the characters forming the group 1 are operated for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second), and then the operation is stopped. Then, the operation of the characters constituting group 1 is stopped, and the characters constituting group 3 to group 5 are operated for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) and then stopped. Thereafter, the group 1 and the groups 3 to 5 are alternately operated by 0.1 seconds. Thus, a load current (power consumption) corresponding to the driving load reference value 60 can be obtained during the operation period of the group 1, and a load current corresponding to the driving load reference value 50 can be obtained during the operation periods of the groups 3 to 5. It can be power (power consumption). Therefore, the load current (power) supplied to the accessory motor 229 can be reduced to the current capacity (rated power) or less while operating all the accessories to be operated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble in the pachinko machine 10 due to the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  In the present embodiment, when performing an opening effect or various variable effects, the actor to be operated is determined in advance according to the type of effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be determined by lottery. For example, when the main controller 110 determines a variation pattern (variation time) in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) and is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device At 113, it may be configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to operate each accessory, and to set the operation of the accessory determined to be operated by the lottery. The accessory set here is determined in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) as an accessory to be started (see S1406 in FIG. 40), and satisfies the operation condition for each group (S1407: Yes), When the load current is equal to or smaller than the current capacity (S1409: No), the operation start is set (S1410).

  In addition, in the lottery of whether or not to operate the accessory, the operation probability may be changed according to the variation pattern type (variation time), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether or not a big hit), the type of the accessory, and the like. . Specifically, for example, in the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, it may be configured to make it easier to operate the accessory than the outlier variation pattern, or in the variation pattern with a longer variation time, than in the variation pattern with a shorter variation time. The accessory may be configured to be easily operated. As a result, the sense of expectation for the jackpot can be increased as the number of the bonus items moves, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, a priority order for operating each accessory is determined, and when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by operating the accessory, a load current (power consumption) equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power). Until, the operation may be canceled in order from the lower-priority role (the higher-priority role is operated as much as possible). Further, the priority order for operating the accessory may be made different according to conditions (type of effect, type of variation pattern, lottery result of special symbol, etc.).

  In the present modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), and whether or not the operation start of the accessory is canceled is determined. Yes, but it is not necessary. For example, in the case of a model in which the type of the accessory is small and the load current (power consumption) is equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power) even when all the variable items that can be operated at the same time are operated, or the current capacity (rated power) For example, when the power supply 115 having a sufficiently large power supply is employed, the determination of the load current (power consumption) can be omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, since the load reference value table 222c of the ROM 222, the load value storage area 223e and the determination value storage area 223j of the RAM 223 can be omitted, the storage capacity can be reduced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when it is attempted to newly change the accessory so that the load current exceeding the current capacity is not supplied by the power supply device 115, the operating accessory and the new The system is configured to calculate a value corresponding to the sum of the load currents when all of the accessories to be operated are operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded based on the calculated value. It was configured to cancel the operation start. Thus, the load current (power) supplied to the accessory motor 229 is configured to be equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, instead of canceling the operation start of the accessory, the third symbol display device 81 is illuminated. By controlling the brightness (brightness) of the LCD backlight 230, the total load current (power consumption) consumed by the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is configured. With such a configuration, each accessory can be operated without limitation of current capacity, so that the degree of freedom of the accessory operation can be increased.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that an LCD backlight 230 is added (the LCD backlight 230 is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113). The point that the content of the RAM 223 is partially changed in the audio lamp control device 113 is possible. Also, in the sound ramp control device 113, the start-up process (see FIG. 37) and the partial process included in the main process (see FIG. 39) are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. Is the same as the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. An LCD backlight 230 for illuminating the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the back side is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment. The LCD backlight 230 is constituted by an LED light source. The RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a backlight flag 223k and a luminance reduction flag 2231 in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment.

  The backlight flag 223k is a flag indicating that the process of returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 from a state darker than during the normal game to the normal luminance is being executed. More specifically, in the present embodiment, when turning on the LCD backlight 230 based on turning on the power, the brightness is set to be darker than during the normal game until the power return operation of the accessory ends. It is configured. As a result, even if the operation of the accessory based on the power return operation and the operation of the accessory based on another trigger (for example, the start of a jackpot) must be performed at the same time, the LCD backlight 230 may be set in advance. The load current (power consumption) that can be consumed by the accessory motor 229 can be given a margin by reducing the load current (power consumption) consumed by the power supply device 115. The current (power) can be within the range of the current capacity (rated power). Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power return operation ends, a process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 set to the dark brightness to the normal brightness is performed. The backlight flag 223k is a flag indicating that it is the execution period of the luminance return processing.

  If the backlight flag 223k is on, it indicates that it is during the execution period of the luminance return process, and if it is off, it indicates that it is outside the execution period of the return process. The backlight flag 223k is set to ON when the power return operation is completed (see S1522 in FIG. 63), and is set to OFF when the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 returns to the normal luminance (see FIG. 63). See S3805 in FIG. 65).

  The brightness reduction flag 223l causes the LCD backlight 230 to have a low brightness based on the determination that the total load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity (rated power). This flag indicates that the state has been set. If the luminance reduction flag 230 is on, it indicates that the LCD backlight 230 is in a dark state, and if it is off, it indicates that the luminance is normal. The luminance reduction flag 223l is set to ON when the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced in the accessory control processing 2 (see FIG. 62) described later (see S1427 in FIG. 62), and returns to the normal luminance. In this case, it is set to off (see S3706 in FIG. 64).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a transition of the LED current when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is varied will be described by taking a power-on example as an example. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the time change of the LED current flowing through the LEDs constituting the LCD backlight 230. FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show examples in which the brightness is varied by different light control methods, and either light control method can be adopted.

  Here, conventionally, there are few types of accessories as compared with recent gaming machines, and even if the accessories are operated freely, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. I never did. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and the load current (electric power) consumed by operating the accessories has also increased. Therefore, when a plurality of characters are operated at the same time, a load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) may be consumed. In such a case, as a result of exceeding the specifications of the power supply device, the control device for controlling the accessory may be shut down, the power of the gaming machine itself may be turned off, or an abnormal operation of the accessory may occur. There is a possibility that a problem of being lost may occur.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed by newly operating the accessory, FIG. ) Or the dimming method illustrated in FIG. 59 (b) so that the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced. That is, by reducing the load current (power) consumed in the LCD backlight 230, the total current supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is secured while securing the load current (power consumption) for newly operating the accessory. The configuration is such that the load current (power consumption) is less than the current capacity (less than the rated power). Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 for controlling the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the operation of the accessory is abnormal. Can be prevented from occurring.

  First, FIG. 59A is a diagram showing an example (current dimming method) of dimming the LCD backlight 230 by changing the absolute value of the LED current. As shown in FIG. 59A, the current cannot be supplied to the LEDs until the control of the LCD backlight 230 becomes possible after the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, The LED current is turned off (current is 0). Thereafter, when the control of the LCD backlight 230 becomes possible, a current value (IL) lower than the current value (IH) set during the normal game is set as the LED current value for the LCD backlight 230. You. By setting a current value lower than usual, the load current (power consumption) consumed by the LED can be reduced, so that the load current (power consumption) that can be supplied to the accessory motor 229 is increased. be able to. Also, by setting a current value lower than usual, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 becomes darker than usual.

  The state in which the luminance is reduced and the load current (power consumption) is reduced continues until the power return operation of the accessory ends. This is because, in the power supply return operation, since a plurality of accessories operate, the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 tends to be a large value. That is, when the operating conditions other than the power return operation are satisfied, the accessory may operate in a complex manner, and the load current (power consumption) may exceed the current capacity (rated power). By reducing the load current (power consumption) of the light 230, the total load current (power consumption) is prevented from exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  In the present embodiment, the luminance at power-on is configured to be 80% of the luminance during a normal game (that is, the current value IL is set to a value of 80% of the current value IH). There). The value of 80% is a value that is set so that the total value of the load current (power consumption) is surely lower than the current capacity (rated power) even if each accessory operates in combination. Therefore, it can be changed according to the number of the accessories of the pachinko machine 10 (the number of the accessory motors 229). For example, in a model with a small number of characters, even if a plurality of characters are operated in a complex manner, the amount of load current consumed is small. Therefore, the reduction amount of the load current (power consumption) in the LCD backlight 230 should be reduced. Can be. Therefore, the current value IL can be set high. Conversely, in a model with a large number of characters, the current capacity may be exceeded unless more load current (power consumption) is reduced in the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, in this case, the current value IL may be set to a lower value to ensure that the current capacity (rated power) is lower.

  When the power supply return operation of the accessory ends, the current value is gradually increased over a predetermined period so that the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 becomes a normal luminance. Specifically, the current value is increased by 1% every second, so that the brightness during the normal game is obtained over 20 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize a change in luminance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 from greatly changing due to a large change in the luminance in a short period, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  After returning to the normal brightness, the normal brightness is maintained until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off unless it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. After the power is turned off, the LED current cannot be supplied to the LCD backlight 230, so that the LED current is turned off. After the power is turned off, the LED current is turned off until the next power is turned on.

  FIG. 59B is a diagram showing an example in which the LED backlight 230 is dimmed by setting the LED current value to a fixed value and changing the ratio between the ON period and the OFF period of the LED current. Hereinafter, the dimming method shown in FIG. 59B is referred to as a PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) pulse dimming method.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the power is turned on and the control of the LCD backlight 230 becomes possible, IH is set as the LED current, and the LED is set to be repeatedly turned on and off. . The turning on and off of this LED is repeated at a constant frequency (for example, 320 Hz). Further, in one cycle composed of one set of the on-period and the off-period, the length of the on-period is set to 80% of one cycle, and the length of the off-period is set to 20% of one cycle. .

  Here, the setting of the ON period and the OFF period means that a lighting control command including data indicating the length of the ON period and data indicating the frequency is output to a known LED driver. The LED driver is configured to be able to switch between the ON period and the OFF period of the LCD backlight 230 based on the received lighting control command. For example, when a lighting control command indicating that the ON period is 80% and the frequency is 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the operation of the LED includes an ON period of 80% of one cycle (1/320 seconds) and one cycle. The 20% off period is repeatedly set by the LED driver. This operation is continued until a new lighting control command is received.

  A more specific description will be given of a method of specifying the ON period by a lighting control command output to the LED driver. The data indicating the length of the ON period (lighting rate data) described above is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (0 in decimal notation), the lighting rate is 0%, and if the lighting rate data is FFH (255 in decimal notation), the lighting rate is 100%. Further, the lighting rate is set to increase at regular intervals as the lighting rate data goes from 00H to FFH. For example, when 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as the lighting rate data, the lighting state is 50% (that is, 128/255).

  The reference signal (synchronization signal) serving as a reference for the lighting frequency of the LED can generate the frequency designated by the lighting control command by the LED driver itself (set it to free run), or can be input from outside the LED driver. The synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) can be used. Further, whether to use the free-run mode or use the external synchronization signal can be specified by a lighting control command. When an external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, it is not necessary to set the lighting frequency by the lighting control command.

  In one cycle of turning on and off the LED, the position of the on-period can be changed by the lighting control command. That is, the LED on-period can be set at the same time as the detection of the synchronization signal, and the LED off-period can be set at the end of the on-period. An on-period can also be set after the end of the period.

  A specific example of the lighting control command for setting the position of the ON period will be described in detail. The setting start position of the ON period is specified by, for example, 8-bit data. Specifically, one cycle is divided into 255 equal parts, and it is possible to specify from which section the on-period is started by 8-bit data. For example, if the data that specifies the position of the ON period is 00H, the ON period starts from the first section of one cycle divided into 255 (that is, simultaneously with the start of one cycle). If the data specifying the position of the on-period is 1EH (that is, 30 in decimal notation), the on-period is started from the 31st section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts.

  As described above, the LED driver for controlling the LED according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to receive a lighting control command including a plurality of data. Although not shown, the lighting control command is defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in association with the setting timing. For example, the lighting control command to be set when the power is turned on specifies that the ON period is 80%, the lighting frequency is 320 Hz, and the start position of the ON period is the first section of 255 equal periods. Data is specified.

  Note that the LED driver is not limited to the one that receives the lighting control command in the above-described mode. For example, a driver that can specify the position and length of the ON period with a simpler lighting control command may be employed. For example, an LED driver that can receive a lighting control command that associates the lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal parts for each bit of 8-bit data may be used. Specifically, the sections that are earlier in time are associated with the lower bits in order, the section corresponding to the bit of data 1 is set to the lighting state, and the section corresponding to the bit of data 0 is set to the off state. For example, if the control data is 07H (that is, 00000111B in binary notation), of the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight, the first three sections are turned on and the second half are turned off. Thus, the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver can be simplified, so that the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 59 (b), the description will be continued. The frequency at which the LED is turned on and off (lighting frequency) is a frequency (for example, 320 Hz) sufficiently high that the on period and the off period cannot be visually distinguished. Therefore, the luminance felt by the player is the luminance (that is, 80% of the normal luminance) obtained by averaging (integrating) the 80% on period and the 20% off period. The state in which the ON period is 80% continues until the power return operation of the accessory ends. When the power supply return operation of the accessory is completed, the length of the ON period is gradually increased over a predetermined period. Specifically, the length of the ON period is increased by 1% each time one second elapses, and the ON period is controlled to become 100% after 20 seconds. As a result, similarly to the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59A), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 from greatly changing due to a large change in the luminance in a short period, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  After the ON period of the LED becomes 100% and returns to the normal brightness, unless the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off unless it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. Normal brightness is maintained. Then, after the power is cut off, the LED current cannot be supplied to the LCD backlight 230, so that the LED current is turned off. After the power is turned off, the LED current is turned off until the next power is turned on.

  In the case of the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), it is only necessary that the LED current can be switched between the ON state (the state of the current value IH) and the OFF state, so that the LED driver is relatively simple. A circuit having a configuration can be employed. That is, since a relatively inexpensive driver can be adopted, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59A), it is necessary to employ an LED driver capable of setting the LED current value to a plurality of values. There is an advantage that the power consumption can be reduced. This is because the power consumption of the LED is proportional to both the LED current value and the anode voltage. That is, in order to reduce the LED current value to 80%, it is necessary to lower the anode voltage. Therefore, the power consumption is reduced to 80% of that in the normal game by the decrease in the LED current (20%) and the decrease in the anode voltage. Less than. On the other hand, in the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)), when the LED current is in the ON state, the current value is always IH and the anode voltage does not change. Is proportional to the lighting rate. Therefore, the power is 80% of the power during the normal game, and the current dimming method has a larger power drop than the power during the normal game. Therefore, by adopting the current dimming method, it is possible to save energy of the pachinko machine 10.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. This startup process is a process that is started when the power is turned on, similarly to the startup process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

  Of the start-up processes, in the processes of S1101 to S1112, the same processes as those of S1101 to S1112 of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment are respectively executed. Then, in the start-up process (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, when the initialization of the RAM 203 is executed by the process of S1111, then the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 becomes 80% of the luminance during the normal game. Is set to (S1121). Here, the current dimming method (see FIG. 59 (a)) or the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)) may be employed as a method for setting the luminance to 80%. . Further, a method different from these methods (for example, a method of reducing the LED current value to some extent and then performing PWM dimming) may be used.

  By reducing the load current (power consumption) in advance by lowering the brightness of the LCD backlight 230, even when a number of accessories are operated in the power return operation, the total load current (power consumption) is reduced. Can be suppressed from exceeding the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the pachinko machine 10 due to exceeding the current capacity (rated power). When the process of S1121 is completed, interrupt permission is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 61).

  Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In this main processing (see FIG. 61), in each processing of S1301 to S1310 and S1312 to S1318, the same processing as each processing of S1301 to S1310 and S1312 to S1318 of the main processing in the first embodiment is executed. Is done. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1310 ends, the accessory control process 2 for setting the start and stop of the operation of each accessory is executed (S1321). . Next, after the power supply return operation of the accessory is completed, a backlight control process for returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to the luminance during the normal game is executed (S1322), and the process proceeds to S1312. And migrate. Details of the accessory control process 2 (S1321) and the backlight control process (S1322) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64 and 65, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the accessory control processing 2 (S1321) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this accessory control processing (S1321). This accessory control process 2 (S1321) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 61) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As described above, the operation of each accessory is started. And a process for setting operation stop.

  In each of S1401, S1403, S1406, S1407, S1409, S1412, and S1413 of the accessory control process 2 (S1321), S1401, S1403 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S1406, S1407, S1409, S1412, and S1413 are executed.

  Then, in the accessory control process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is ON (S1401: Yes), the accessory control process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 40). ) Is performed (S1421) instead of the initial operation process (see FIG. 41). The initial operation process 2 (S1421) is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory, similarly to the initial operation process (see FIG. 41). Details of the initial operation process 2 (S1421) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the accessory control process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1403 that there is an accessory that should be set to stop the operation, the accessory operation is a process for setting the operation stop of the accessory. A stop process is performed (S1422). Details of the accessory operation stop processing (S1422) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the accessory control processing 2 of the present embodiment, after the processing of S1409 ends, the driving load corresponding to the accessory that starts operating is added to the total driving load stored in the load value storage area 223e. Then, that value is updated as a new driving load total value (S1423). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value (total drive load value) is greater than 100 (S1424). If it is determined that the updated value is less than or equal to 100 (S1424: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the total drive load value is greater than 100 (S1424: Yes), then it is determined whether the initialization flag 223g is on (S1425). If it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is ON as a result of the determination in S1425 (S1425: Yes), the power return operation of the accessory is not completed (that is, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 has already been increased). This state is set to 80%), and the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the processing of S1425 that the initialization flag 223g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1425: No), the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is set to 80% of that in the normal game to reduce the load. The current (power consumption) is reduced (S1426), the luminance reduction flag 223l is set to ON (S1427), and the present process ends to return to the main process (see FIG. 61).

  In the accessory control processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 40), the load value storage area 223e is not updated when it is determined that the sum of the drive load reference values exceeds 100. In the role control process 2 (see FIG. 62), when there is a role to be newly operated, the load value storage area 223e is updated regardless of whether the sum of the drive load reference values exceeds 100 (ie, , And a value greater than 100 is also stored as the driving load total value) (see S1423). This is because the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to always operate the accessory, even if the total drive load exceeds 100. As described above, when the total drive load value exceeds 100, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced by darkening the brightness of the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is configured to operate in a range of current capacity (rated power) or less. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from breaking down or malfunctioning due to the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  Next, an initial operation process 2 (S1421) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process 2 (S1421). This initial operation process 2 (S1421) is a process executed in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and is performed in the initial operation process ( As in the case of (40), this is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory.

  In the initial operation processing 2 (S1421), in each processing of S1501 to S1514, the same processing as each processing of S1501 to S1514 of the initial operation processing (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment is respectively executed.

  In the initial operation process 2 (S1421) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1512 that the data read from the power return operation table 222d is the END information (S1512: Yes), the LCD backlight 230 is determined. Is set so as to increase the luminance by 1% (S1521). That is, when the power is turned on, the LCD backlight 230 that has been set to have a luminance of 80% of the luminance during a normal game is controlled to have a luminance of 81%. Specifically, in the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59A), the LED current value flowing through the LED of the LCD backlight 230 is increased by 1%. In the case of the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), the on-period is increased by 1%, and 81% of one cycle composed of one set of on-period and off-period is used. Is set so that the off period is 19%.

  When the setting of the LCD backlight 230 is completed by the process of S1521, the backlight flag 223k is set to ON (S1522), and the process proceeds to S1514. By turning on the backlight flag 223k in the process of S1522, the power supply return operation of the accessory ends, indicating that it is the execution period of the process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the normal brightness. . Therefore, thereafter, control is performed so as to increase the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 by 1% every one second. Controlling the luminance so as to gradually increase over a predetermined time (20 seconds in the present embodiment) makes the change in luminance less noticeable to the player, This is to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from giving a strange feeling to the appearance. That is, if the brightness is instantaneously set to the brightness during the normal game (that is, if the brightness is increased by 20%) at the end of the power return operation, the game is performed based on the rapid change in brightness. This is to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from feeling uncomfortable when viewed by the user.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the accessory operation stop processing (S1422) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the accessory operation stop processing (S1422). This accessory operation stop process (S1422) is a process executed in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This is a process for stopping the operation of the object.

  In the accessory operation stop processing (S1422), first, in the processing of S1403 of the accessory control processing 2 (see FIG. 62), the operation stop of the accessory determined to be stopped is set, and the accessory operation is performed. In the flag 223i, 0 is set to the bit corresponding to the character for which the operation stop is set (S3701). Next, the driving load reference value corresponding to the character whose operation has been stopped by the processing of S3701 is subtracted from the driving load total value stored in the load reference value table 222c, and the value after the subtraction is used as the new driving load total. The value is overwritten in the load reference value table 222c (S3702).

  When the process of S3702 is completed, next, a process (S3703 to S3706) of returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the brightness during the normal game is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on (S3703). In the processing of S3703, if the initialization flag 223g is ON (S3703), it means that the power-return operation of the accessory has not been completed, and the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is set to 80% of that in the normal game. Since there is no need to make any changes, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223g is off (S3703: No), then whether or not the luminance reduction flag 223l is on (that is, when the operation of the accessory stopped this time is started, the LCD It is determined whether or not the brightness of the light 230 has been reduced to 80% (S3704), and if the brightness reduction flag 223l is off (S3704: No), it means that the brightness is during the normal game. Since there is no need to perform the process of returning the luminance, the present process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3704 that the luminance reduction flag 223l is on (S3704: Yes), it is next determined whether the total driving load value updated in the processing of S3702 is 100 or less (S3705). ). If it is determined in the process of S3705 that the total drive load value is larger than 100 (S3705), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is returned to the brightness during the normal game, and the load current (power consumption) is reduced. Since the current capacity may exceed the current capacity (rated power), the present process is terminated without changing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 from 80%.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3705 that the updated driving load total value is equal to or less than 100 (S3705: Yes), the current of the LCD backlight 230 may be returned to the luminance during the normal game, Since there is no possibility of exceeding the capacity (rated power), the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is set to the luminance during the normal game (S3706), and this processing ends.

  Next, a backlight control process (S1322) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the backlight control processing (S1322). The backlight control process (S1322) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 61) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As described above, the power supply return operation of the accessory is performed. This is a process for returning the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to the luminance during the normal game after the end.

  In this backlight control processing (S1322), first, it is determined whether or not the backlight flag 223k is on (S3801). If it is determined that the backlight flag 223k is off (S3801: No), the power return operation of the accessory is performed. This means that it is not the execution period of the brightness return process based on the completion of the process, and thus this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the backlight flag 223k is ON (S3801: Yes), then it is determined whether one second has elapsed since the last change in the brightness of the LCD backlight 230. (S3802), and if it is determined that one second has not elapsed (S3802: No), the process ends as it is not the timing to increase the brightness of the LCD backlight 230.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if it is determined that one second has elapsed since the last change in the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 (S3802: Yes), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is increased by 1% (S3802: Yes). S3803). Next, it is determined whether or not the increased brightness has reached 100% (that is, the brightness during a normal game) (S3804). If the brightness has not reached 100% (S3804: No), the brightness is maintained thereafter. In order to continue the process of gradually increasing, this process is ended as it is. Also, in the processing of S3804, when it is determined that the luminance has become 100% (the luminance has become a normal game luminance) (S3804: Yes), the backlight flag 223k is turned off (S3805). The process ends.

  By performing the backlight control process (see FIG. 65), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is gradually increased (1% per second) after the power supply return operation of the accessory has been completed, and is performed for 20 seconds. To return to the brightness during the normal game. In this way, by changing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 stepwise, it is possible for the player to have difficulty in recognizing the change in brightness. Therefore, by causing the player to recognize the change in the luminance, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling strange in the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by newly operating the accessory, or when the power of the accessory is restored based on power-on. In the execution period of the operation, the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced so that the load current (power consumption) consumed as the pachinko machine 10 as a whole falls within the range of the current capacity (rated power). I have. As a result, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 drops, or the operation of the accessory. The occurrence of an abnormality can be suppressed.

  Also, unlike the first embodiment, even if the total value of the driving load exceeds 100, the action of the accessory is not canceled, so that there is no need to prepare an alternative effect. Therefore, the storage capacity for storing the substitute effect can be omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the brightness is gradually increased when the power supply return operation of the accessory ends, and the brightness is returned to the brightness during the normal game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even after the power supply return operation of the accessory is completed, the luminance is gradually increased when it is determined that the driving load total value exceeds 100 and the reduced luminance is returned to the luminance during the normal game again. Is also good. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance, so that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the change in luminance.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to immediately increase the luminance during the normal game only when returning the reduced luminance to the luminance during the normal game again when it is determined that the driving load total value exceeds 100. However, even when the power supply return operation of the accessory ends, the luminance may be immediately increased to the luminance during the normal game. Thus, the period during which the brightness is low can be shortened, so that the appearance of the third symbol display device can be improved. Further, in a case where the luminance is immediately increased to the luminance during the normal game, a black image of the entire screen may be displayed as a video at the timing of changing the luminance. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the change in brightness of the LCD backlight 230, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by recognizing the change in brightness. be able to. For the same reason as in the case of increasing the luminance, a black image of the entire screen may be displayed even at the timing of decreasing the luminance. If the liquid crystal display used in the third symbol display device 81 adopts a system in which the transmittance is minimized (that is, a black image) in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal, a change in luminance is noticed to the player. In addition to the effect of making it difficult to obtain, the power consumption of the driver for driving the liquid crystal can be reduced.

  In addition, as the liquid crystal display, a type in which the transmittance becomes maximum (that is, a white image) in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal may be adopted. In this case, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, a white image is displayed to reduce the power of the driver for driving the liquid crystal and secure a margin for the current capacity (rated power). You may comprise.

  In the present embodiment, all the accessories determined to be operated are operated. However, control for reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 to reduce the load current (power consumption) and driving Control for canceling the operation start for all or a part of the accessory to be performed may be made to coexist. The control may be given a priority. For example, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, first, the brightness is reduced to a predetermined value (for example, 90% of a normal game). If it is determined that it exceeds, the operation of the accessory to be driven may be stopped. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the apparent brightness of the third symbol display device 81 becomes too dark.

  In the present embodiment, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced when the power is turned on or when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by driving the accessory. Although the configuration is such that the load current (power consumption) is reduced, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display backlight unit 230 may be configured to be controllable in the display control device 114, and the brightness of the backlight may be adjusted according to the type of video displayed on the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, for example, in an image having a low APL (Average Picture Level, average image level) (an image having a relatively large number of low gradation pixels), the load current (power consumption) is reduced by reducing the luminance. May be configured. By reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 in an image with a low APL, the brightness of black can be reduced, so that an image with a good sense of contrast (an image in which black is tightened) can be obtained. Further, energy saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved. Further, for example, when a black image of the entire screen is detected as a video, the LCD backlight 230 may be turned off. This is because it is useless to turn on the LCD backlight 230 even though no video is displayed. Thereby, energy saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved.

  If there is room to increase the gain of the image according to the histogram of the image, the gain of the image may be increased instead of greatly reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230. More specifically, for example, if the histogram of an image is determined and the image is determined to be an image composed of only pixels having a pixel level of 50% or less, the gain of the image is increased to double the pixel level of all pixels. Instead, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 may be reduced by reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230 without changing the apparent brightness. As a result, the load current (power consumption) can be further reduced and the apparent brightness can be ensured as compared with the case where the LCD backlight 230 is simply darkened according to the video.

  In the present embodiment, when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced, control is performed so that the entire third symbol display device 81 becomes dark. However, a plurality of regions are defined in the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, an LCD backlight 230 that illuminates each area may be provided so that the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 can be controlled for each area. When the accessory is operated to block a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 with the accessory, and in the third symbol display device 81, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the shielded portion. The LCD backlight 230 that illuminates an area that is difficult to view may be turned off. For example, the LCD backlight 230 that illuminates the central area of the screen is turned off when the upstanding character 410 or the central swinging material 820 moves to the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 at the overhang position. You may be comprised so that it may be performed. As a result, the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity (rated power) can be obtained without dimming the luminance of the portion visible to the player.

  When controlling the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 for each area, the brightness of the entire screen is reduced by the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), and the off period of the LED current is set for each area. You may comprise so that it may stagger. That is, the on-period of one region may be configured to coincide with the off-period of another region. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the current (power) of the LCD backlight 230 from instantaneously increasing at the timing when the ON periods of all the regions overlap. Therefore, it is possible to suppress not only the average value of the load current (power consumption) but also the instantaneous value from exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  In the present embodiment, the dimming frequency is set to 320 Hz in the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is difficult to recognize the period (that is, flicker does not occur), the frequency may be higher than 320 Hz (for example, 400 Hz) or lower than 320 Hz (for example, 200 Hz).

  In the present embodiment, during the normal game, it is determined whether or not the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded. If the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the luminance is reduced to reduce the load current (power consumption). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation pattern of the LCD backlight 230 may be determined in advance according to the effect, and the LCD backlight 230 may be operated according to the operation pattern. For example, in the out-of-range super-reach and the shared super-reach, the configuration is such that the luminance is reduced when the operation timing of the accessory is 8 seconds and 15 seconds, and the load current (power consumption) is reduced. You may. This allows the load current (power consumption) to be within the range of the current capacity (rated power). In this case, the brightness is gradually reduced from before the operation timing of the accessory (for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect), and the operation timing of the accessory (when 8 seconds and 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect). The luminance may be set to be the lowest (for example, 80% luminance). This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in luminance, so that it is possible to prevent the player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable with the effect.

  Alternatively, only the operation pattern of the LCD backlight 230 may be determined in advance, and a role to be operated at each operation timing may be selected by lottery. For example, when the main controller 110 determines a variation pattern (variation time) in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) and is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device At 113, each accessory is operated at the operation timing of the accessory determined for each variation pattern (for example, at the time of 8 seconds, 15 seconds, and 25 seconds after the start of the production in the case of special reach). It may be configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not the action of the accessory determined to be operated by the lottery is set. On the other hand, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 may be reduced in accordance with the operation timing of the accessory provided for each effect. As a method of reducing the luminance of the LCD backlight 230, for example, a method of decreasing the luminance by gradually decreasing the luminance several seconds before the operation timing of the accessory, or a method of reducing the luminance of the entire object as an image at the operation timing of the accessory. And a method of reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to a target brightness at once. Thereby, it is possible to realize operation effects of various kinds of accessories while keeping the total load current (power consumption) supplied to the pachinko machine 10 within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less.

  In the present embodiment, when the brightness of the backlight is reduced, the brightness is set to be 80% of the brightness during the normal game. However, the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is reduced. The brightness set in accordance with the value may be varied. For example, when the current capacity (rated power) exceeds 30% or more (that is, the driving load total value becomes 130 or more), the luminance is set to 80% of the normal game, and the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is If it is 20% to 30% (that is, if the total driving load value is in the range of 120 to 130), the luminance is set to 85%, and the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is set to 10% to 20%. In some cases (i.e., if the total drive load value is in the range of 110 to 120), the luminance is set to 90%, and if the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is less than 10% (i.e., the drive load is If the total value is less than 110), the luminance may be 95%. As a result, the reduction in luminance can be suppressed to the minimum, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the apparent brightness of the third symbol display device 81 has decreased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the pachinko machine including only the accessory that operates between the retreat position (origin position) and the overhang position, and the accessory that rotates or swings from the origin position as a starting point. 10 has been described.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, an accessory that can perform the opening / closing operation and the lighting operation in a combined manner is included. In other words, the configuration includes a staging accessory having a member that opens and closes, and a light source provided inside the member that opens and closes. It becomes visible. In this way, by including a role that can execute a complex operation in the configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the role. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the role of a staging machine provided on the game board 13 is the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the audio ramp control device 113, the configuration of the RAM 223 is changed, and the start-up process (see FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 221 and the main process (see FIG. 39) are different. The difference is that the included processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Is the same as the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the game board 13 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 66, in the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the first entrance 64 in front view. The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance 640.

  Next, an operation unit 300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. 67, the operation unit 300 includes a back case 310 formed in a box shape having one open side from a bottom wall 311 and an outer wall 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 311. Prepare. The rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 66) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The operation unit 300 includes four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 that perform opening and closing operations and lighting operations in a combined manner in the inner space of the rear case 310. As shown in FIG. 67, the hemispherical accessory 910 is provided on the upper right of the opening 311a in a front view, and the hemispherical accessory 920 is provided on the upper left of the opening 311a in a front view. The hemispherical accessory 930 is provided on the lower right of the opening 311a in a front view, and the hemispherical accessory 940 is provided on the lower left of the opening 311a in a front view.

  In addition, the composite operation unit 1000 is accommodated in the internal space of the rear case 310. The composite operation unit 1000 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310, and abuts on the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 while being surrounded by the outer wall portion 312. It is arranged on the wall 311. In the combined operation unit 1000, in an assembled state (see FIG. 67), a rectangular opening is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 in a front view.

  Next, an outline of an operation mode of the composite operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. FIG. 68 shows a state in which the pair of half-moon-shaped objects 1060 of the combined operation unit 1000 are arranged at the overhang position.

  At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 67, the pair of half-moon members 1060 of the combined operation unit 1000 are retracted above and below the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and are invisible to the player (FIG. 66). reference). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 68, the pair of half-moon-shaped objects 1060 is slid in the directions facing each other, and the pair of half-moon-shaped objects 1060 is moved to the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, the third symbol). It is arranged on the front side of the display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Each of these hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 and the composite operation unit 1000 are formed so as to be operable independently of each other, and are disposed in a superimposed (laminated) state as described above. Therefore, for each of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, and the composite operation unit 1000 that are arranged in different layers, the operation members are disposed inside the opening 311a of the rear case 310. However, even if they are overhanging, they can be operated simultaneously. In other words, the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, and the composite operation unit 1000 can be operated not only individually but also in combination, so that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the composite operation unit 1000, the retracted position (origin position) and the extended position of the pair of slide members 1020 are formed as the ends of the movable range of the pair of slide members 1020.

  Next, the composite operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 69A and 69B are front perspective views of the composite operation unit 1000. FIG. In FIG. 69 (a), the slide member 1020 and the half-moon shaped object 1060 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 69 (b), the slide member 1020 and the half-moon shaped object 1060 are arranged at the extended position. Is illustrated. Note that the overhang position of the slide member 1020 and the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is formed as the end of the end of the movable range of the slide member 1020 which is located on the opposite side to the above-described retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pair of slide members 1020 of the composite operation unit 1000 is slid vertically, and in the process of the slide movement, the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 rotates 180 degrees. In other words, the pair of half-moon-shaped objects 1060 are stationary at the retracted position (see FIG. 69 (a)) with the semicircular arc sides facing the other half-moon-shaped object 1060. In the process of being slid vertically by the slide member 1020, the slide member 1020 rotates about a rotation axis in a direction perpendicular to a plane including the game board 13 and has a semicircular shape with respect to the other half-moon shaped object 1060. Is rotated until the straight line portion (string portion) of the is turned. In the overhang position (see FIG. 69 (b)), the straight portions (string portions) of the pair of upper and lower half-moon-shaped objects come into contact with each other, so that the pair of semicircular-shaped objects 1060 is combined. Form a circular shape. Furthermore, when the semicircular-shaped accessory 1060 moves to the overhang position, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 housed inside the semi-circular accessory 1060 is normally exposed to the outside of the semi-circular accessory 1060 when the semicircular accessory 1060 operates to the overhang position. Operate. Four claw-shaped objects 1063 are provided for each one half-moon-shaped object 1060, and are arranged at equal intervals in an arc portion of the half-moon-shaped object 1060.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72, the structure of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 will be described. Since all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 have the same structure, here, the hemispherical item 910 will be described as an example, and the other hemispherical items 920, 930, The description of 940 is omitted.

  FIG. 70A is a front perspective view when the hemispherical accessory 910 is taken out of the operation unit 300. FIG. This hemispherical accessory 910 includes a light source 231 for the accessory inside, and emits light by turning on or off the light source 231 for the accessory, and a pair of upper and lower opening and closing units that can open and close. 912a, 912b and a plurality of gears 913a, 913b, 913c, 913d, 913e for transmitting the power of the accessory motor 229 to the opening / closing portions 912a, 912b are provided.

  The state of FIG. 70A shows a state in which the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are each opened to the maximum extent. By driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the hemispherical accessory 910, the opening / closing portion 912a is opened. Can be changed downward, and the opening / closing portion 912b can be changed downward to be in a closed state. When the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are in the closed state, the light emitting portion 911 is in a state where the light emitting portion 911 cannot be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 67).

  FIG. 70B is a side view of the hemispherical accessory 910. The gear 913a and the gear 913b are fixed (adhered) to the opening / closing section 912b and the opening / closing section 912a, respectively, and the opening / closing sections 912b and 912a perform opening / closing operations in conjunction with the rotation amounts of the gears 913a and 913b. It is configured as follows. Further, a light-shielding plate 916 is provided in the opening / closing part 912b. Although details will be described later, the light-shielding plate 916 is used for determining the degree of opening and closing of the opening and closing unit 912b. Since the light blocking plate 916 is fixed to the opening / closing section 912b, it operates in conjunction with the operation of the opening / closing section 912b.

  A light shielding sensor 915 is provided behind the gear 913a. The light-shielding sensor 915 is a sensor for determining whether or not the position of the opening / closing unit 912b is closer to the closed state (below the specific position) than the specific position (see FIG. 71C). Although the details will be described later, based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor 915, it is determined that the opening / closing unit 912b is closer to the closed state (below the specific position) than the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)). In this case, the light emitting unit 911 is turned off, and when it is determined that the light emitting unit 911 is on the open state side (above the specific position) with respect to the specific position (see FIG. 71C), the light emitting unit 911 is turned on. Is configured. When the light shielding by the light shielding plate 916 is detected by the light shielding sensor 915, it is determined that the opening / closing unit 912b is closer to the closed state (below the specific position) than the specific position (see FIG. 71C). .

  Here, as in the case of the hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 mounted on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an accessory that operates the opening / closing unit and the light emitting unit in a combined manner (combined operation accessory). Has existed conventionally. In addition, as a method of controlling the turning on or off of the composite operating accessory, there is a control of turning off the light based on whether or not the opening / closing unit is completely closed. However, in this conventional control, if the opening / closing section is slightly opened, the light emitting section remains lit. Therefore, when the opening / closing section immediately before closing is slightly opened, the gap between the opening / closing section is small. The light of the light emitting part leaked out from the camera. That is, there is a problem that the appearance of the composite action character is poor. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the light blocking sensor 915 detects that the opening / closing portion 912b has reached the specific position (see FIG. 71C) (that is, before the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed). B) Since the light emitting portion can be turned off, light leakage in a state where there is a slight gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b is prevented, and the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, The quality of the 940 is improved.

  FIG. 70 (c) is a front view of the hemispherical accessory 910. As shown in FIG. 70 (c), when the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are opened to the maximum extent, the entire light emitting portion 911 becomes visible from the front side.

  Next, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b of the hemispherical accessory 910 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram illustrating a state where the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are opened to the maximum limit, and FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram illustrating a state where the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are approximately half open. FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing a case where the opening / closing unit 912b is at the above-described specific position (a detection start position of the light shielding sensor 915). FIG. 71 (d) shows that the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are completely closed. It is a figure showing the state where it was done.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d), the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b operate so that the positions are always vertically symmetric. The operation of the opening / closing members 912a and 912b is performed in a positive direction (opening direction) or a negative direction (closing direction) with respect to the accessory motor 229 using the specific position as a reference position (position where the number of steps is 0). The number of steps is set. Specifically, in order to operate (open) from the position of FIG. 71 (c) to the position of FIG. 71 (a), it is necessary to operate the accessory motor 229 in the forward direction by 25 steps (25 degrees). . On the other hand, in order to operate (close) from the position of FIG. 71 (c) to the position of FIG. 71 (d), it is necessary to operate the accessory motor 229 in the negative direction by 5 steps (5 degrees). That is, when changing the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b from a completely closed state to a completely open state, the accessory motor 229 that is advanced five steps in the negative direction is moved in the positive direction. What is necessary is just to operate 30 steps, and to make it the state which advanced 25 steps as a step number in the forward direction. Also, when changing from a completely opened state to a completely closed state, the accessory motor 229 which is in a state advanced 25 steps in the positive direction is operated in the negative direction for 30 steps, and What is necessary is just to make it the state which advanced 5 steps as a step number in the negative direction. As described above, by controlling the operation of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b by the number of steps starting from the origin position, the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b can be arranged as desired.

  As the opening / closing unit 912b of the accessory motor 229 moves toward the closed state (upper side), the light blocking plate 916 moves down (see FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b)). The operation of the light shielding plate 916 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the light shielding sensor 915 and the light shielding plate 916. FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (d) show the states of the light shielding sensor 915 and the light shielding plate 916 when the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state of FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d), respectively. FIG.

  The light-blocking sensor 915 is provided with a light-blocking detection section 915a (see FIG. 72A), and it is determined whether or not the light-blocking plate 916 overlaps the light-blocking detection section 915a (whether or not the light-blocking plate 916 is blocked). The output of the sensor 916 is changed (set to the H output state). In the states of FIG. 72A and FIG. 72B, the light-shielding sensor 916 is in the L output state because the light-shielding detector 915a and the light-shielding plate 916 do not overlap. Then, when the arrangement shown in FIG. 72C is obtained (that is, the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state shown in FIG. 71C), a part of the light-shielding detection unit 915a is shielded by the light-shielding plate 916. The light-blocking sensor 915 is set to the H output state. Note that the position at which the light-blocking sensor 915 starts detection is set as the origin position of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b. The origin position is a return position when the origin return operation is performed based on power-on. However, when the operation of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b is completed during a normal game, the origin position is closed beyond the origin position. State (see FIG. 71 (d)).

  Even if the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed from the origin position and the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed, the state where the light shielding detection portion 915a is blocked by the light shielding plate 916 continues (see FIG. 72 (d)). ). That is, while the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state shown in FIG. 71 (c) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (d), the output of the light shielding sensor 916 is always in the H state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the arrangement of the light shielding sensor 916 and the light shielding plate 915 and the output of the light shielding sensor 916 will be described in association with each other. 73 shows the positional relationship between the light shielding sensor 916 and the light shielding plate 915, and the lower part of FIG. 73 shows the output of the light shielding sensor 915 in each positional relationship.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in a state where the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely opened (see FIG. 71A), the output of the light-shielding sensor 916 is in the L state. Then, when the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are changed to the closed state side and the light shielding plate 916 blocks a part of the light shielding detection portion 915a (see FIG. 71 (c)), the output of the light shielding sensor 916 is output. Rises to the H state. The state where the output is H does not change even if the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the normal game, while the output of the light-shielding sensor 915 is in the H state, the light-emitting unit 911 is turned off, and when the output of the light-shielding sensor 915 is in the L state, The unit 911 is turned on. That is, when closing the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b in the open state (see FIG. 71 (a)), the light-emitting portion is brought to a specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)) before being completely closed. 911 can be turned off.

  If the light-emitting unit 911 is kept turned on until the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are completely closed, the light-emitting unit 911 is in a state immediately before closing (a state where a slight gap is formed between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b). Also, since the light emitting unit 911 is turned on, light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, and the quality of appearance is deteriorated.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four hemispherical accessories are provided, but the period and the number of steps until each accessory is closed due to individual variation or the like are not always the same. Under such a situation, a situation may occur in which the opening / closing portion is closed first of only some of the four hemispherical objects. In this case, the hemispherical accessory that closes slower than the other will be in a state where light leaks from a slight gap created before the opening and closing part is closed, so the hemispherical shape with the other opening and closing part closed There is a possibility that light leakage may be conspicuous due to comparison with the accessory.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the positions of the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are determined based on the output of the light-shielding sensor 915, and the light emitting unit 911 is activated when the light emitting unit 911 is operated closer to the closed state than the specific position (see FIG. 71C). It is configured to be turned off. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a state in which light leaks from the gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b, so that the apparent quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

  Further, by configuring only the output state of the light-shielding sensor 915 to turn on and off the light emitting unit 911, even if a plurality of operation patterns of the hemispherical accessory 910 are provided, the opening / closing unit 912b can be used. When the light reaches the specific position (see FIG. 71C), the light emitting unit 911 can be mechanically turned off. That is, it is not necessary to define the lighting timing and the lighting-off timing of the light emitting unit 911 for each of the plurality of operation patterns. Therefore, by defining the lighting data and the turning-off data for each operation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. A light source 231 for the accessory, which is a light source of each of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940, is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment. In addition, the contents of various tables specified in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from the load reference value table 222b in the first embodiment. That is, the content is changed to match the character of the present embodiment. The RAM 223 is provided with a lighting flag 223m in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. The other electrical configurations are the same as the electrical configurations in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  The lighting flag 223m is a flag indicating the state of the accessory light source 231 corresponding to each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. This flag is composed of 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. Specifically, hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are sequentially associated with the lower bits.

  If the value of each bit of the lighting flag 223m is 1, it indicates that the corresponding accessory is being lit, and if it is 0, it indicates that the corresponding accessory is being turned off. The value of the empty bits (upper 4 bits) is fixed to 0. For example, if the lighting flag 223m is 03H (00000011B in binary notation), it means that the hemispherical accessory 910 and the hemispherical accessory 920 are on, and the other accessories are off. . Based on the state of each bit of the lighting flag 223m, it is possible to specify the hemispherical accessory that is lighting.

  Next, an operation start condition table 222b and a load reference value table 222c provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation start condition table 222b in the present embodiment. The operation start condition table 222b is a table in which, similarly to the operation start condition table 222b in the first embodiment, the operation start condition of the accessory is defined for each group. Only when this occurs, the operation start of the corresponding accessory can be set.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the characters in this embodiment are classified into three groups. Specifically, four hemispherical characters 910, 920, 930, and 940 are classified into group 1, a plurality of claw-shaped characters 1063 are classified into group 2, and a half-moon-shaped character 1060 is classified into group 3. ing. Since the group 1 does not interfere with other groups, no operation start conditions are defined. The group 2 is defined so that the operation can be started only when the group 3 is stopped. Further, the group 3 is defined so that the operation can be started only when the group 2 is at the origin position (in a state where the group 2 is housed inside the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060).

  Similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, by starting the operation of the accessory according to the conditions defined in the operation start condition table 222b, each of the accessories can be changed without interference (contact) between the accessories. be able to.

  FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the load reference value table 222c in the present embodiment. The load reference value table 222c is a load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each accessory when operating each accessory in the same manner as the load reference value table 222c in the first embodiment. Is a data table that defines values (drive load reference values) corresponding to. By operating the accessory based on the load reference value table 222c in a range where the total of the driving load reference values is 100 or less, the accessory can be operated in a range equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power).

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the drive load reference value when opening / closing any of the opening / closing portions of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 is 10. That is, the drive load reference value when the four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are simultaneously opened and closed is 40. The drive load reference value is 10 when any of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 is turned on. That is, when all the four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are turned on, this corresponds to the drive load reference value 40. As a result, the driving load reference value when the accessory of group 1 is operated becomes 80 at the maximum.

  In addition, the driving load reference value for operating the claw shaped object 1063 constituting the group 2 is 15, and the driving load reference value for rotating the half-moon shaped object 1060 of the group 3 is 15, respectively. In other words, the driving load reference value when rotating the upper and lower half-moon-shaped objects 1060 simultaneously is 30. The driving load reference values when the half-moon-shaped object 1060 is slid from the retracted position (origin position) to the overhang position or from the extended position to the retracted position (origin position) are respectively Fifteen. That is, the driving load reference value when the upper and lower half-moon-shaped objects 1060 are simultaneously slid is 30. Therefore, the drive load reference value when the accessory of group 3 is operated is 60 at the maximum.

  Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, based on the drive load reference value defined in the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 75 (b)), the variable character and the role to be newly changed. Control is performed so that the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the object is equal to or less than the current capacity (not more than the rated power). This allows the accessory motor 229 to be constantly driven within the range of the load current (power consumption) of the current capacity or less (the rated power or less), so that the load current (power consumption) reduces the current capacity (rated power). Excess can be suppressed. Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the sound lamp control device 113 for controlling the accessory motor 229 is shut down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the operation of the accessory is abnormal. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, a power return operation table 222d provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The power supply return operation table 222d executes a return operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally changed when the power is turned on, similarly to the power supply return operation table 222d in the first embodiment. This is a data table that is referred to at the time.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the power return operation table 222d (see FIG. 76) of the present embodiment is configured such that the return operation is executed in the order of group 1 → group 2 → group 3 in accordance with the update of the return pointer 223f. Have been. Further, in the return operation of the present embodiment, as the power return operation of the four hemispherical objects constituting Group 1, the opening / closing unit is opened to the maximum extent, and then the closing operation is performed until it is completely closed. It is configured as follows. That is, the return operation is performed beyond the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)). This is because the boundary position (see FIG. 71 (c)) at which the output of the light shielding sensor switches from the L state to the H state is set as the origin position of the opening / closing unit. By setting the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) as the origin position, the origin position can be accurately determined based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. Therefore, in the home position return operation performed before performing the power supply return operation using the power supply return operation table 222d, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 have the same degree of opening. Can be. Therefore, since the power return operation can be performed starting from the same state, the same power return operation may be performed for all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 each time. Therefore, only the single data table shown in FIG. 76 needs to be prepared as the power return operation table 222d, and it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns according to the start position, so that the data amount can be reduced.

  In addition, when the state where the opening / closing section is completely closed is set as the origin position, whether or not the opening / closing section is completely closed cannot be detected by the light-shielding sensor according to the present embodiment. , 93, and 940 may be completely closed before they are completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be further driven several steps after being completely closed. If the home position return processing is completed before completely closing, the operation start position of the power supply return operation may vary, and the power supply return operation may not be able to be executed accurately. Further, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing portions may come into contact with each other and be pushed into each other, so that the opening / closing portions and gears may be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor, the start position of the power return operation can be made exactly the same position. Further, by causing the opening / closing section to close excessively, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing section and the gear from being damaged.

  Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, by executing the power supply return operation of the accessory based on the power supply return operation table 222d, the entire operation range in which the accessory may operate during the normal game Can be exhaustively operated. Thus, when an abnormality has occurred in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in any of the opening and closing operations of each of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, a sound, an LED, and a display on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. In addition to notifying the abnormality by, for example, it is configured to notify that the abnormality has occurred by blinking the light emitting portion of the hemispherical accessory in which the abnormality has occurred. By blinking the accessory in which the abnormality has occurred, the hall clerk can more easily recognize the portion in which the abnormality has occurred. In addition, since the light-emitting portion of the hemispherical accessory performs either a lighting operation or a light-off operation during a normal game, some abnormality occurs by executing a blinking operation that is not performed during a normal game. Can be more easily recognized. Note that the operation mode of the light emitting unit when an abnormality occurs is not limited to the blinking operation. For example, it may be configured to be lit at a brightness higher than when lit during a normal game, or conversely, may be lit at a darker brightness. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the location of the abnormality is visually notified by continuously changing the luminance of the light emitting unit corresponding to the hemispherical accessory in which the abnormality has occurred. These also allow the clerk of the hall to more easily recognize the site where the abnormality has occurred.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the home position return process 2 (S1131) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. This origin return process 2 (S1131) is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 37) by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed instead of the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. This is the process to be performed.

  In the origin return process 2 (S1131), in the process of S1206, the same process as the process of S1206 of the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the origin return process 2 (S1131) of the present embodiment, when the process is started, first, the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory corresponding to the light-shielding sensor that is detecting the H (ON) output (ie, FIG. 71). The opening / closing part located closer to the closed state than the arrangement (c) is set to be opened until the original position (see FIG. 71 (c)) is reached (S1211).

  If the opening operation is performed in the state of the H (ON) output, the origin position cannot be detected. This is because the light shielding sensor is in an H (on) output state even at the origin position. Therefore, in the process of S1211, the opening operation is performed until the light-shielding sensor is set to the L (off) output state (that is, until the light-shielding sensor passes the origin position), and then the light-shielding sensor outputs the L (off) output. Then, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing unit is stopped, and the accessory motor 229 is driven in the direction of the closing operation by one step. Thus, even if the light-shielding sensor performs the home return operation from the H (on) output state, the opening / closing unit can be returned to the home position.

  When the process of S1211 is completed, the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory corresponding to the light-shielding sensor that is detecting the L (off) output (ie, is located closer to the open state than the arrangement of FIG. 71 (c)). The opening / closing section is set to perform the closing operation until it reaches the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)) (S1211). That is, the opening and closing unit is closed until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (ON) first.

  Next, it is determined whether or not all of the characters (plural claw-shaped characters 1063) constituting Group 2 are at the origin position (S1213). If any of the characters are deviated from the origin position (S1213: No) ), The setting is made so that the characters constituting group 2 return to the origin position (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1215. On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if it is determined that all the characters constituting the group 2 are at the origin position (S1213: Yes), the process of S1214 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1215.

  In the processing of S1215, it is determined whether or not all the characters constituting the group 3 are at the origin position (S1215). The group 3 is set so as to start the origin return after the origin return of the character has been completed (S1216), and the process proceeds to S1206. If there is no character that is shifted from the origin position in group 3 (S1215: No), the process of S1216 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1206.

  By executing the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77), each accessory can be set at the origin position, similarly to the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Therefore, at the time of starting the power return operation performed after the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77) is completed, it is possible to ensure that the respective accessories are in the same arrangement state. Therefore, since the same operation may be set each time as the setting of the power return operation, the prescribed contents of the power return operation table 222d can be reduced.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  In this main processing (see FIG. 78), in each processing of S1301 to S1310 and S1311 to S1318, the same processing as each processing of S1301 to S1310 and S1311 to S1318 of the main processing in the first embodiment is executed. Is done. Then, in the main processing (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S1310 ends, the accessory lighting for setting the lighting operation and the light-off operation of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. A control process is executed (S1331). Next, a hemispherical role opening / closing process, which is a process for setting an opening / closing operation of each hemispherical role 910, 920, 930, 940, is executed (S1332), and the process proceeds to S1311.

Next, the accessory lighting control process (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This accessory lighting control process (S1331) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 78), and as described above, for setting the lighting operation and the extinguishing operation of the hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. This is the process.

  In the accessory lighting control process (S1331), first, it is determined whether or not the lighting flag 223m has an ON bit (S3901). If it is determined that there is no ON bit (S3901: No), all Since the light emitting portion of the hemispherical accessory is turned off and there is no additional accessory for setting the light-off, the processing for setting the light-off (S3902 to S3907) is skipped and the process proceeds to S3908. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3901 that there is an ON bit (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor corresponding to the ON bit is H (ON) (S3902). If it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S3902: No), it means that the opening / closing unit is closer to the open state than the position to be turned off (see FIG. 71 (c)). Since there is no need to set off, the process moves to S3908.

  In the process of S3902, if it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (ON) (S3902: Yes), then, among the bits of the lighting flag 223m, the H (ON) state is set as the output of the light-shielding sensor. The bit corresponding to the detected hemispherical character is set to 0 (S3903).

  When the processing of S3903 ends, it is next determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on and the closing operation flag 223h is off to determine whether or not the home position return operation is being performed (S3904). , S3905). If it is determined that the home position return operation is being performed (S3905: Yes, S3906: Yes), the driving of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the accessory including the light-blocking sensor that has detected the H (ON) output state is configured. , The opening / closing unit is stopped (S3906), and the process shifts to S3908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3904 that the initialization flag 223g is off (S3904: No), the light emitting unit of the accessory corresponding to the light shielding sensor that has detected the state of H (on) in the processing of S3902. Light-off is set (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908. Also, in the process of S3905, if it is determined that the closing operation flag 223h is off (S3906: No), the home position return operation has already been completed and the power supply return operation is being performed (that is, the current light-shielding sensor ON detection means that it has not returned to the origin position due to the origin return), and the process shifts to S3908.

  In the process of S3908, a hemispherical accessory lighting process for setting lighting of the hemispherical accessory is executed (S3908), and this process ends. The details of the hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In this way, by executing the accessory lighting control process (see FIG. 79), each of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 is moved when the opening / closing unit is at the position shown in FIG. 71 (c). Can be turned off. Here, assuming that the light-emitting unit 911 is kept turned on until the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed, a state immediately before closing (a slight gap is generated between the opening / closing portion 912a and the opening / closing portion 912b). State), the light emitting unit 911 is turned on, so that light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, and the quality of appearance deteriorates. I will.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four hemispherical accessories are provided, but the period and the number of steps until each accessory is closed due to individual variation or the like are not always the same. Under such a situation, a situation may occur in which the opening / closing portion is closed first of only some of the four hemispherical objects. In this case, the hemispherical accessory that closes slower than the other will be in a state where light leaks from a slight gap created before the opening and closing part is closed, so the hemispherical shape with the other opening and closing part closed There is a possibility that light leakage may be conspicuous due to comparison with the accessory.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by turning off the light at the stage when the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 71 (c), it is possible to prevent a state in which light leaks from the gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b. . Thereby, the appearance quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

  Further, by executing the above-mentioned accessory lighting control process (see FIG. 79), in the origin return operation, the opening / closing portion of each accessory can be stopped at the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)). The reason why the detection start position of the light shielding sensor is set to the origin position instead of the state where the opening / closing unit is completely closed (see FIG. 71 (d)) is that the origin position is determined by the detection result of the light shielding sensor. This is because it can be accurately determined based on this. That is, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 can have the same degree of opening. Therefore, since the power return operation can be performed starting from the same state, the same power return operation may be performed for all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 each time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns for the power return operation, the data amount of the power return operation table 222d can be reduced.

  Further, when the completely closed state is set as the origin position, it is not possible to detect whether or not it is completely closed by the light-shielding sensor of the present embodiment. In some cases, the return to origin may be completed before the shutter is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be further driven several steps after the shutter is completely closed. If the home position return processing is completed before completely closing, the operation start position of the power supply return operation may vary, and the power supply return operation may not be able to be executed accurately. Further, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing portions may come into contact with each other and be pushed into each other, so that the opening / closing portions and gears may be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor, the start position of the power return operation can be made exactly the same position. Further, by causing the opening / closing section to close excessively, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing section and the gear from being damaged.

  Next, the hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) executed in the above-described accessory lighting control process will be described with reference to FIG. The hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) is a process for setting lighting of the hemispherical accessory.

  In the hemispherical accessory lighting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an off bit in the lighting flag 223m (S4001). If it is determined that there is no off bit (S4001: No), all the hemispheres are determined. Since the characters 910, 920, 930, and 940 are being lit, which means that there are no characters to be newly lit, the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4001 that there is an off bit (S4001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor corresponding to the off bit is L (off) (S4002). If it is determined that the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) (S4002: No), the opening / closing part of the accessory corresponding to the OFF bit is closer to the closed state than the arrangement shown in FIG. (That is, the arrangement is in the light-off state), and the present processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S4002: Yes), the light-shielding sensor that has detected off of the bits of the lighting flag 223m is configured. The bit corresponding to the included hemispherical accessory is set to 1 (S4003).

  When the process of S4003 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on and the closing operation flag 223h is off in order to determine whether or not the home position return operation is being performed (S4005). S4006). If it is determined that the home position return operation is being performed (S4005: Yes, S4006: Yes), the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the hemispheric accessory including the light-shielding sensor that has detected the L (off) output is included. After the drive is stopped to stop the opening / closing unit, the accessory motor 229 is closed by one step (S4007), and the process ends. Thus, even when the light-shielding sensor detects H (ON) when the power is turned on (the degree of opening is lower than the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), the home position return operation is performed as shown in FIG. 71 (c). Can be returned to the configuration. That is, regardless of the arrangement of the opening / closing portions when the power is turned on, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 can be returned to the origin positions (see FIG. 71 (c)).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4004, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is off (S4004: No), the light emitting unit of the accessory corresponding to the light shielding sensor that has detected the L (off) state in the process of S4002. Lighting is set (S4007), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4005, when it is determined that the closing operation flag 223h is off (S4006: No), the home position return operation has already been completed and the power supply return operation is being performed (that is, the current light-shielding sensor The ON detection means that it has not returned to the origin position due to the origin return), and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  As described above, since the detection start position of the light shielding sensor is set at the origin position in the origin return, the start position of the power return operation can be set to the exact same position. Further, when the completely closed position is set as the origin position, after the light shielding sensor detects the state of the H output, it is necessary to further drive the accessory motor 229 by 5 steps to close the opening / closing section. is there. However, due to individual variations in the opening / closing unit, individual variations in the accessory motor 229, and variations in the installation position of the light shielding sensor, the position driven by five steps is not necessarily completely closed. In addition, taking into account the individual variation of the accessory, the number of steps from when the light-shielding sensor is in the H output state to when the light-shielding sensor is in the closed state is set to one by one (further, one pachinko machine 10 is provided with one step). It is not realistic to set individually for each of the four hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940, and set the same number of steps for all pachinko machines 10 There is a need to. Therefore, when the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are operated until the opening / closing portions are completely closed (the same number of steps is set for the accessory motor 229) every time the home position is returned, Depending on the individual, the number of steps may be too large. For example, the opening / closing unit may be closed at the stage of performing four steps in the negative direction from the origin position, and the upper and lower opening / closing units may be pushed into each other at the fifth step. That is, there is a possibility that the upper and lower opening / closing portions are pushed into each other during the return to the origin, thereby damaging the opening / closing portion. Therefore, in this embodiment, since the origin position is set to the position where the light-shielding sensor is in the H output state (see FIG. 71 (c)), it is possible to suppress further pushing after the opening / closing part is completely closed. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion from being damaged during the return to the origin.

  Next, a hemispherical accessory opening / closing process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The hemispherical accessory opening / closing process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 78), and is a process for setting opening and closing of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940.

  In the hemispherical accessory opening / closing process (S1332), first, it is determined whether or not there is a light-shielding sensor in an H (on) state (S4101). (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4104. On the other hand, if there is a light blocking sensor in the H (on) state (S4101), it is determined whether the number of times of detection of the on state is the fifth (S4102). That is, it is determined whether or not H (ON) is continuously detected over five main processes (see FIG. 78), and the case where H (ON) is momentarily caused by noise or the like is eliminated. I have.

  In the process of S4102, if the detection of the H (ON) state is less than five times (S4102: No), the process proceeds to S4104. On the other hand, in the process of S4102, when the H (ON) state is detected five times consecutively (S4102: Yes), then, the hemispherical character corresponding to the light-shielded sensor that has detected the H (ON) state is removed. The number of operation steps until the operation is stopped is set for the accessory motor 229 to be operated (S4103). The number of steps is the number of steps from when ON is detected by the light shielding sensor to when the opening / closing unit is completely closed.

  In the process of S4104, it is determined whether or not there is an L (off) state light-shielding sensor (S4104). If there is no L (off) state light-shielding sensor (S4104: No), the present process is terminated as it is. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the light-shielding sensor in the L (off) state exists, it is determined whether the L state (off) has been detected five times in a row (S4105), and the fifth L (off) state is not detected. In this case (S4105: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the detection of the current L (off) state is the fifth detection, the number of operation steps of the accessory motor 229 for driving the hemispherical accessory for which lighting is set is determined by the state in which the opening and closing unit is fully open (FIG. 71). (Refer to (a)), the number of steps up to (step S4106) is set, and the process ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a hemispherical accessory capable of performing an opening / closing operation and a lighting operation in a combined manner. Further, in order to control the turning on and off of the hemispherical accessory, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can determine whether or not the opening / closing unit is closed for a certain amount or more based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. And turning on and off is controlled based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor. That is, the light-blocking sensor detects light-blocking, turns off the light-emitting unit while the output is in the H (on) state, and turns on the light-emitting unit while the output is in the L (off) state. It is composed. That is, the light emitting unit can be turned off before the opening / closing unit is completely closed.

  If the light-emitting unit 911 is kept turned on until the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are completely closed, the light-emitting unit 911 is in a state immediately before closing (a state where a slight gap is formed between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b). Also, since the light emitting unit 911 is turned on, light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, and the quality of appearance is deteriorated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the positions of the opening / closing units 912a and 912b are determined based on the output of the light-shielding sensor 915, and the light emitting unit 911 is activated when the light emitting unit 911 is operated closer to the closed state than the specific position (see FIG. 71C). It is configured to be turned off. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a state in which light leaks from the gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b, so that the apparent quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor (the position at which the state switches from the L output state to the H output state) is set to the origin position of the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory. This is because the origin position can be accurately determined based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. That is, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 can have the same degree of opening. Therefore, since the power return operation can be performed starting from the same state, the same power return operation may be performed for all the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 each time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns for the power return operation, the data amount can be reduced.

  Further, when the completely closed state is set as the origin position, it is not possible to detect whether or not it is completely closed by the light-shielding sensor of the present embodiment. In some cases, the return to origin may be completed before the shutter is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be further driven several steps after the shutter is completely closed. If the home position return processing is completed before completely closing, the operation start position of the power supply return operation may vary, and the power supply return operation may not be able to be executed accurately. Further, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing portions may come into contact with each other and be pushed into each other, so that the opening / closing portions and gears may be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor, the start position of the power return operation can be made exactly the same position. Further, by causing the opening / closing section to close excessively, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing section and the gear from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, when each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 93, 940 is opened from a closed state to a certain level or higher (see FIG. 71 (c)), the corresponding accessory is turned on, When the door is closed to a certain level or higher from the open state (see FIG. 71 (c)), the corresponding accessory is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the accessory is turned on, the accessory may be turned on at the same time as the opening operation of the accessory starts. In addition, instead of configuring the light emitting unit to be turned on or off, the light emitting unit may be configured to be turned on even in a closed state and set to have a darker luminance than the luminance in an open state. .

  In the present embodiment, the state of the light emitting unit is switched based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor, but the switching is not limited to the brightness of the light emitting unit. For example, in place of the light emitting unit, a display unit capable of displaying display information such as an image is mounted on the hemispherical accessory, and the image displayed on the display unit is switched based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor. Is also good. In this case, a transparent or translucent member may be adopted as the opening / closing section, and the image displayed on the display means may be visible to the player even while the opening / closing section is closed. . Further, as a specific example of the image displayed on the display means, for example, when the light blocking sensor is in an H (ON) output state (that is, when the opening / closing unit is completely closed or slightly opened), And the image of a person is displayed while the light-blocking sensor is in the L (OFF) output state (ie, the state in which the opening / closing unit is opened from the position shown in FIG. 71C). Good. Further, a different image may be selected for a displayed person's shadow or a displayed person's image depending on the mode of the effect and the result of the effect (whether or not a big hit will occur). This allows the player to play the game while being interested in which person is displayed while the figure is displayed. In addition, when the light-shielding sensor outputs L (OFF) and an image of a person is displayed, it is possible to predict the contents and results of the effect depending on the type of the person. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the effect using the hemispherical accessory can be further increased, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing section having a structure in which the upper and lower members operate symmetrically is employed, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, a sliding door-type opening / closing unit in which left and right members open / close, a door-type opening / closing unit that opens / closes inward or forward, a shutter-type opening / closing unit that opens / closes in one direction, or the like may be employed.

  In the present embodiment, in the origin return operation, it is configured to always return to the specific position (the position shown in FIG. 71 (c)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off), the closing operation is performed to return to the specific position, and when the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on), the opening / closing unit is stopped without operating. It may be left as it is. During a normal game, the opening / closing portions of the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are in a completely closed state for most of the period. The likelihood increases. That is, the period required for the return to the origin tends to be longer. On the other hand, if the origin return is not performed when the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on), the time required for the origin return can be reduced. In the power return operation performed thereafter, first, the opening / closing portions of the respective hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 may be opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off). . Then, the opening operation and the closing operation may be performed starting from the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the L (off) state. Thereby, the operation after the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (OFF) can be shared.

  In the present embodiment, the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the H state from the state where the opening / closing portions of the respective hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, 940 are closed to the origin position shown in FIG. Although the position of the light shielding sensor is set as described above, the position is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the opening / closing section is opened and a state where the opening / closing section is closed, both of the light-shielding sensors are in an L-output state, and the transition from the closed state to the open state (the transition from the open state to the closed state). , The light-shielding sensor may be set to the H output state. Further, the origin position may be the edge on the open state side or the edge on the closed state side among the detection positions of the light shielding sensor. Further, for example, when the edge on the open state side is set to the origin position, if the light-shielding sensor is in the H state when the power is turned on, the accessory motor 229 is opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L when the power is turned on. You just have to move it to the side. Then, when the output of the light-shielding sensor detects L, it may be returned by one step in the direction of the closed state (negative direction). On the other hand, if the output of the light-shielding sensor is L when the power is turned on, it cannot be determined whether the origin position is in the open state or the closed state. If one step operation is performed and the output of the sensor does not change, two step operation is performed in the closed state side (negative direction). If the output of the sensor does not change, the steps may be incremented by one and the operation may be alternately performed in the positive direction and the negative direction until the light shielding sensor detects the state of the H output. As a result, the origin position can be searched for while increasing the amplitude by one step in the positive direction and the negative direction, so that if it is moved in the direction opposite to the origin position, it will be excessively opened or closed. Can be suppressed. If the light-shielding sensor detects H by operating in the forward direction, it means that the edge on the opposite side of the origin position has been reached, so that the accessory motor 229 is opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L. You just have to move it to the side. Then, when the output of the light-shielding sensor detects L, it may be returned by one step in the direction of the closed state (negative direction). Conversely, if the output of the sensor is switched to H while operating in the negative direction during home return, this means that the position is the home position, so the home return is performed when the light shielding sensor detects H. May be ended. Thus, even when the light-shielding sensor is at an intermediate position between the closed state and the open state, the opening / closing section is returned to the original position without excessively opening or closing the opening / closing section excessively. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion from being damaged by excessive operation.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, one or a plurality of characters that do not interfere with each other are grouped, and the operating conditions are set for each group. In other words, in the case of changing the characters constituting one group, the operation is performed only when the condition that does not interfere with other groups is satisfied based on the operation condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b. The start was configured to be configurable. In addition, each group is composed of an accessory that operates simultaneously (executes an operation effect of the same system) at an operation timing such as at the start of an effect.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, while there is a possibility that the characters that do not possibly interfere with all the other characters are grouped (group 1), the characters that may interfere with each other by changing Are grouped (group 2). Then, an operating condition for each of the accessories constituting the group 2 is defined, and the accessory is operated according to the operating conditions. As a result, it is possible to freely (freely) change the accessories constituting the group 1 except for the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the movement of the accessory constituting Group 1. In addition, it is possible to suppress occurrence of troubles such as breakage of the accessory due to interference between the accessory.

  The modification of the first embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the configuration of the first embodiment in that the operation start condition table 222b and the load reference value table specified in the ROM 222 are different in the sound lamp control device 113. The point that the contents of 222c are changed, the point that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is provided in the RAM 223, and the partial processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 39) are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. This is a different point. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. Is the same as the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, an operation start condition table 222b, a load reference value table 222c, a power return operation table 222d provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the first embodiment, And the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, the load reference value table 222c will be described first, and then the operation start condition table 222b and the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described.

  The load reference value table 222c is a data table that defines a drive load reference value for each accessory when each accessory is varied, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the drive load reference value when varying each accessory is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), in this modification, two types of groups, group 1 and group 2, are provided, and the characters constituting each group are the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Has been changed from. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the group 1 includes each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840, the rotating role 520, the left swing role 710, and the right swing role. 730 and a central swinging component 720. It should be noted that the central swinging member 720 is configured so that only the swinging operation belongs to group 1 and the descending operation belongs to group 2. All of the characters constituting group 1 are characters that have no possibility of interfering with other characters regardless of the arrangement of the other characters. Therefore, it is not necessary to set an interference condition with respect to the belongings forming the group 1, and the accessories can be freely operated in principle.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the roles constituting the group 2 are the tilting role 510, the standing role 410, and the center swinging role 720. As described above, since all of these accessories are moved to the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 by being changed, one of the accessories constituting the group 2 is operating or is in the overhang position. In this case, when the other characters constituting the group 2 are operated, there is a possibility that these characters come into contact with each other (collide). Therefore, in the present embodiment, an operation start condition is set for group 2. The operation start condition for this group 2 is defined in the operation start condition table 222b.

  Next, an operation start condition table 222b according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. The operation start condition table 222b is a data table that defines operation start conditions for starting the operation of each accessory, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the operation start condition table 222b of the present embodiment, only the operation start condition of each of the roles (the tilting role 510, the standing role 410, and the center swinging role 720) constituting the group 2 is defined. There is no provision for Group 1. This is because, as described above, there is no risk that even if the characters in Group 1 are operated, they will interfere with other characters, and it is not necessary to set operation start conditions.

  The operation start condition table 222b stipulates that the standing role 410 and the center swinging role 720 are at the origin position as conditions under which the tilting role 510 can start operating. In addition, as a condition under which the standing role 410 can start operating, it is defined that the tilting role 510 and the center swinging role 720 are at the origin positions. In addition, as a condition under which the lowering operation of the central swinging member 720 can be started, it is defined that the tilting member 510 and the standing member 410 are at the origin positions. By operating each of the characters constituting the group 2 according to these conditions, it is possible to suppress the respective characters constituting the group 2 from interfering with each other. Therefore, the action of the accessory and the action of the accessory are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the action of the accessory being damaged due to the interference between the accessories and the action of the accessory being prevented by the other accessory. It is possible to prevent the content of the displayed presentation effect from being shifted and giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the order of operation, the operation prohibition condition, and the like are finely set for each accessory without setting the group. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and setting various conditions for all of the accessories increases the work load of the designer, and the operating conditions. However, there is a problem that the data capacity of the data table for defining the data size also increases.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, a plurality of accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 are divided into a group 1 composed of only an accessory that does not cause interference with other accessories, and a group 1 in the group. Is divided into a group 2 composed of a character with a possibility of interfering with the character with the other. Then, as the operation start conditions specified in the operation start condition table 222b, only the conditions for the belongings belonging to the group 2 are specified. As a result, the data amount of the operation start condition table 222b can be reduced, so that a storage device with a small capacity can be adopted as the ROM 222. Therefore, an inexpensive storage device can be introduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Note that, in this modification, as the operation condition of the group 2, when one of the characters in the group 2 is operated, the operation can be started only when no other characters in the group 2 are operating. But it is not limited to this. For example, a character (property A) that may interfere with another character only during operation (that is, has no possibility of interfering with another character of group 2 at the origin position and the overhang position). May be added to the configuration, or a role that may only interfere with a specific role in group 2 (for example, standing character 410) (position B) may be added to the configuration. In the case of such a configuration, for example, in addition to the condition that the tilting role object 510 and the center swinging role item 720 are at the origin positions, the operating condition of the standing role object 410 is, And the condition that the accessory B is not operating. In this way, even if the number of actors to be operated is increased, the operation of the accessory can be set appropriately.

  Next, a power return operation table 222d according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83A is a diagram showing the specified contents of a power return operation table 222d in the present modification. The power return operation table 222d is a table that is referred to when performing a power return operation, as in the first embodiment.

  In the present modification, the operation is roughly divided into three stages (operation of operation scenario 1 to operation scenario 3). In the power return operation table 222d, the type of the accessory to be operated is defined for each of the above-mentioned stages (operation scenarios). Specifically, in the operation scenario 1, the power return operation of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840, the power return operation of the rotating role 520, and the power return operation of the tilting role 510 are simultaneously performed. It is specified that it will be executed. That is, it is stipulated that a plurality of characters belonging to the group 1 and one character belonging to the group 2 operate simultaneously. As described above, a character belonging to group 1 can be operated without interfering with another character, so that a plurality of characters can be simultaneously operated. On the other hand, since there is a possibility that a character belonging to group 2 may interfere with another character belonging to group 2, it is stipulated that only one character is operated at a time so that interference does not occur. I have. Note that, in the operation scenario 1, all the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840 and the rotating role 520 among the roles in the group 1 are operated without moving all the roles in the group 1 at the same time. The reason for this is to prevent the total of the load currents (power consumption) from exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the contents of the power return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 include the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 in which the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is extended from the original position. (See FIG. 10), an operation of returning to the origin position is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)). In addition, as the power return operation of the rotating accessory 520, an operation of rotating the rotating accessory 520 one turn clockwise to return to the origin position, and then performing one rotation counterclockwise to stop at the origin position is executed. (See FIG. 83 (b)). Further, as the power return operation of the tilting role object 510, an operation is performed in which the tilting role item 510 is operated from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 9), and then returned to the origin position and stopped (FIG. 83 ( b)).

  In the operation scenario 2 executed after the power restoring operation of the tilting accessory 510 is completed, the power restoring operation of each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 is executed following the operation scenario 1. This is because the power return operation of each of the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840 is configured to require a longer time than other combinations. In addition, by ending the operation of the tilting accessory 510 belonging to the group 2, a new accessory belonging to the group 2 can be operated. Therefore, the power returning operation of the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 is performed in parallel. It is specified to execute. In addition, in the operation scenario 1, when the power return operation of the rotating accessory 520 of the group 1 is not completed, the operation may be performed over the operation scenario 2. This is because the rotating accessory 520 belonging to the group 1 does not interfere with another accessory, and therefore does not have any influence on the other accessories even if it extends over the operation scenario 2.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the power-return operation of the standing role object 410 involves operating the standing role item 410 from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 8), and then returning to the origin position. An operation to stop is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)).

  Further, in the operation scenario 3 that is executed after the power restoring operation of the standing accessory 410 is completed, the power restoring operation of each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 is executed following the operation scenario 2. As described above, this is because the power return operation of each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840 is configured to take a longer time than other combinations. In addition, the power returning operation of the left swinging role 710 and the right swinging role 730 belonging to the group 1 is started. Further, by ending the operation of the standing role member 410 belonging to the group 2, a new character belonging to the group 2 can be operated, so that the power returning operation of the central swinging role 720 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), as the power return operation of the left swinging role 710 and the right swinging role 730, after each swinging role is oscillated, the swinging role is set at the origin position. An operation to stop is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)). Further, as the power return operation of the central rocking role 720, an operation of operating the central rocking role 720 from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 13), and then returning to the origin position and stopping is performed. (See FIG. 83 (b)).

  Although not shown, when the operation scenario is updated after the control based on the operation scenario 3 is completed, the END data is read. By defining the END data, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is the end timing of the power return operation.

  As described above, in the power return operation table 222d of the present modification, when performing the power return operation, the power return operations are performed one by one for the belongings of Group 2 that cannot be operated simultaneously. It is stipulated as follows. In addition, with respect to the accessories in Group 1 that do not interfere with other accessories, the configuration is such that any of the accessories in Group 2 is operated while the power supply return operation is being performed. Thus, the power return operation can be performed on a plurality of characters in parallel, so that the time required until the power return operation ends can be reduced.

  Next, the accessory operation setting table 222e in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. Like the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the accessory operation setting table 222e is a data table in which the operation timing of the accessory and the accessory to be operated are defined for each type of effect. As described above, in the present modified example, one or a plurality of characters to be operated simultaneously is not formed as a group, but the groups are distinguished according to whether or not they interfere with other characters. Therefore, in the accessory operation setting table 222e in the present modification, the accessory itself to be started to operate is defined for each group.

  More specifically, in the opening effect, each slide item 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to group 1 is defined as an item to start operating at the start of the effect. On the other hand, there is no stipulation on the belongings belonging to group 2. Further, in the out-of-range super-reach and the shared super-reach, the swinging role objects 710, 720, and 730 belonging to the group 1 are defined as the role to start the operation when 8 seconds elapse. On the other hand, there is no stipulation on the belongings belonging to group 2. In addition, a rotating role item 520 belonging to group 1 and a tilting role item 510 belonging to group 2 are defined as the role items to be started when 15 seconds have elapsed.

  In the out-of-reach special reach A and the shared special reach A, a standing role 410 belonging to group 2 is defined as a role to be started when eight seconds elapse after the production starts. On the other hand, there is no stipulation on the belongings belonging to group 1. In addition, a rotating role item 520 belonging to group 1 and a tilting role item 510 belonging to group 2 are defined as the role items to be started when 15 seconds have elapsed. In addition, as the role to start the operation after 25 seconds, the slide roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 belonging to group 1 and the standing role 410 belonging to group 2 are defined.

  In the off-special reach B and the shared special reach B, as slides to be started when 8 seconds elapse from the production start, each slide role 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to the group 1 and a rotating role 520, A falling role item 510 belonging to group 2 is defined. In addition, as the accessory to start the operation when 15 seconds have elapsed, the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 is defined. On the other hand, there is no stipulation on the belongings belonging to group 1. In addition, as the role to start the operation after 25 seconds, the slide roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 belonging to group 1 and the standing role 410 belonging to group 2 are defined.

  In the special reach, each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, 840 and the rotating role 520 belonging to the group 1 and the tilting role 510 belonging to the group 2 as the role to be started when 8 seconds elapse from the production start. It is prescribed. In addition, as the accessory to start the operation when 15 seconds have elapsed, the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 is defined. In addition, as the accessory to be started when 25 seconds have elapsed, the sliding operation of each of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 belonging to group 1 and the descending operation of the central swinging accessory 720 belonging to group 2 are defined.

  As described above, in the accessory operation setting table 222e of the present embodiment, the accessory to be started at each production start timing is defined separately for the belonging belonging to the group 1 and the belonging belonging to the group 2. I have. Thus, instead of distinguishing each of the characters defined in the operation start condition table 222b and the characters to be started, only the items defined as the belongings belonging to the group 2 in the character operation setting table 222e are determined. What is necessary is just to make it a judgment object. Therefore, in the processing for determining the operation start condition, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification Example of First Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the accessory control process 3 (S1341) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification. This accessory control process 3 (S1341) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed instead of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. This is the process to be performed.

  In this accessory control process 3 (S1341), S1401 and each process of S1403 to S1405 are the same as S1401 and S1403 to S1405 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is performed. Then, in the accessory control process 3 (S1341) of the present embodiment, when the process of S1405 ends, or when it is determined in the process of S1403 that there is no accessory that should be set to stop operation (S1403). : No), an operation start setting process, which is a process for setting the operation start of the accessory, is executed (S1431), and this process ends. The operation start setting process (S1431) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is ON (S1401: Yes), then the initial operation processing 3 is executed (S1432), and this processing ends. The details of the initial operation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the initial operation process 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process 3. The initial operation process 3 is a process for setting the power supply return operation of the accessory and the like, similarly to the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment.

  In the initial operation processing 3 (S1432), in each of the processing of S1501 to S1509 and S1512 to S1514, the processing of S1501 to S1509 and the processing of S1512 to S1514 of the initial operation processing (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed. In the initial operation process 3 (S1432) of the present modification, if it is determined that the operation suspension period has ended in the process of S1509 (S1509: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the operation scenario execution flag 223n is on. (S1531), and if it is on (S1531), it means that one of the operation scenarios (see FIG. 83 (a)) is being executed, and the accessory of group 2 ends the power return operation. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1532). Then, when it is determined that the power recovery operation is being performed based on the operation scenario (see FIG. 83A) in which the character of Group 2 is set (S1532: No), the power recovery operation is continued in the current operation scenario. May be executed, and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1532, when it is determined that the power return operation of the character belonging to group 2 has been completed (S1532: Yes), the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to off (S1533), and this process ends. . By setting the operation scenario execution flag 223n to off, a new scenario can be started in the next initial operation setting process 3.

  In the process of S1531, if it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is off (S1531: No), the operation scenario is updated (S1534), and the updated operation scenario is read (S1535). For example, if the completed operation scenario is the operation scenario 1, the operation scenario 2 is newly read.

  In addition, in the initial operation processing 3 of the present modification, when the processing of S1512 ends, the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to ON (S1536), and the processing ends. By turning on the operation scenario execution flag 223n, the power supply return operation of the accessory can be executed according to the currently selected operation scenario.

  In this manner, by performing the initial operation process 3 (see FIG. 86), the power return operation of the belongings of group 1 is executed in parallel with the power return operation of the belongings of group 2 in order. be able to. Therefore, the power return operation can be efficiently executed.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the operation start setting process (S1431). In this operation start setting process, first, it is determined whether there is a character to be set to start the operation (S4201), and if it is determined that there is no character to be started (S4201: No), This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4201 that there is a character to be set to start the operation (S4201: Yes), then, there is a character belonging to group 2 among the characters to be set to start the operation. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S4202). That is, in the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 84), it is determined whether or not the data of the accessory of Group 2 is not blank (Null data). If there is a character belonging to group 2 (that is, the data of the character in group 2 is not null data) (S4202), the operation start condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b is read (S4203). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation start condition is satisfied (S4204).

  If it is determined that the operation start condition is satisfied as a result of the determination in S4204 (S4204: Yes), the process proceeds to S4207. Also, in the process of S4202, when it is determined that there is no role belonging to group 2 among the roles to be started (that is, the role belonging to group 1) (S4202: No), The process of S4206 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4207. If all of the characters to be set to start operation belong to group 1, skipping the process from S4203 to S4206 means that even if the characters belonging to group 1 are operated, they will interfere with other characters. This is because there is no possibility, and it is not necessary to read the operation start condition from the operation start condition table 222b to determine whether the operation can be started. In this way, by performing grouping from the viewpoint of whether or not there is a possibility of interfering with another character, it is possible to omit the process of determining the operation start condition for the character in group 1. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  In the process of S4204, when it is determined that the operation start condition is not satisfied (S4204: No), the operation start of the character of Group 2 that does not satisfy the operation start condition is canceled (S4205), and A corresponding display effect command is set (S4206), and the process moves to S4207. As described above, since the operation start condition is not set for the group 1 character, the operation start is not canceled in the process of S4205. That is, in order to prevent interference with another accessory, only a minimum operation of the accessory can be canceled.

  In the process of S4202, when it is determined that there is no character belonging to group 2 among the characters to be started (S4202: No), the character to be started includes the character of group 2 and In the case where the accessory belonging to the group 2 satisfies the operation start condition (S4204: Yes), or in the process of S4207 executed after the process of S4206 is completed, the character is stored in the load value storage area 223e. The sum of the driving load total value and the driving load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to be set to start operation is stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (S4207).

  Next, it is determined whether the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S4208). If it is determined that the stored value is 100 or less (S4208: No), even if the accessory determined to be started in the processing of S4201 is operated, the accessory is supplied to the accessory motor 229. It means that the total value of the load currents to be applied falls within the range of the current capacity or less, so that the operation start of the accessory is set, and among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i, the accessory that sets the operation start is set. Is set to 1 (S4209). Then, the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (the sum of the drive load stored in the load value storage area 223e and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to set the operation start) is added. Is stored in the load value storage area 223e to update the driving load total value (S4210), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4208, when it is determined that the value stored in the determination value storage area 223j is greater than 100 (S4208: Yes), the operation start of the accessory is canceled (S4211), and an alternative effect is displayed. Is set (S4212), and the process ends. Note that, when the display alternative effect command is set in the process of S4206, the display alternative effect command by this process is overwritten. The display alternative production command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display alternative effect command, the display control device 114 starts an alternative effect (see FIGS. 25 and 26 (b)) corresponding to the character whose operation stop has been canceled in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, even if the operation of the accessory is canceled, a display effect that makes the user feel as if the accessory has operated can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect has the same degree of expectation as when the accessory is operated, so that the player can play the game while having an appropriate degree of expectation for each effect. Can be done.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the first embodiment, there is a case where a role that does not have a possibility of interfering with another role is defined as a group 1 and interferes with each other by changing the group. Characters are defined as Group 2. Then, an operating condition is defined for each of the characters constituting the group 2, and the characters belonging to the group 2 are operated according to the operating conditions. As a result, it is possible to freely (freely) change the accessories constituting the group 1 except for the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the movement of the accessory constituting Group 1. In addition, it is possible to suppress occurrence of troubles such as breakage of the accessory due to interference between the accessory. Further, since the operation start condition and the interference condition are not set for all the characters, the operation start condition is set only for the character in group 2, so that the operation conditions can be simplified. . Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the present modification, a group 1 composed of characters that do not interfere with each other and a group 2 composed of characters that may interfere with each other are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a plurality of groups composed of characters that do not interfere with each other may be provided. In this case, it may be configured such that the roles that are operated at the same time (for example, each of the slides 810, 820, 830, and 840) are grouped into one group, and a predetermined operation is performed according to the group. . Thus, when the accessory is operated, the operation may be set for each group instead of for each accessory, so that the processing load can be reduced. In addition, a plurality of groups each including an accessory that does not interfere with an accessory of another group but interfere with an accessory in the same group may be provided. This makes it possible to simplify the operating conditions of each accessory, even if the types of the accessory increase and the interference conditions become complicated. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the present modification, the pachinko machines 10 that interfere with each other when one of the characters belonging to the group 2 is at the overhanging position and the other characters belonging to the group 2 change are described. It is not something that can be done. As another character constituting group 2, if another character is operated during the change of one character, the other characters may interfere with each other, but the one character stops at the origin position or the overhang position. In such a case, an accessory that does not have a risk of interference may be included in the configuration. For example, a case where a set of bar-shaped accessories that are in parallel with each other when located at the origin position and the overhang position is changed in an arc shape such that one end thereof is a starting point and is close to the other accessory. Is mentioned. In other words, it is possible to operate from the origin position to the overhang position by changing the angle by 180 degrees from one end of the accessory, or to move to the origin position by changing the angle by 180 degrees from the overhang position. An accessory can be illustrated. In this case, as the operation condition of the group 2, the operation can be started only when the other character is at the origin position or the overhang position (that is, the other character of the group 2 is not being changed). ) May be specified.

  In the present modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), and whether or not the operation start of the accessory is canceled is determined. Yes, but it is not necessary. For example, in the case of a model in which the type of the accessory is small and the load current (power consumption) is equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power) even when all the variable items that can be operated at the same time are operated, or the current capacity (rated power) For example, when the power supply 115 having a sufficiently large power supply is employed, the determination of the load current (power consumption) can be omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, since the load reference value table 222c of the ROM 222, the load value storage area 223e and the determination value storage area 223j of the RAM 223 can be omitted, the storage capacity can be reduced.

<Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, when setting the action of the accessory, if it is determined that the total value of the load reference values exceeds 100, the actions of all the accessories for which the action is to be newly set are canceled. Was configured as follows. On the other hand, in the second modified example, the priority of stopping the operation is set for each accessory, and the operation is stopped from the accessory having the higher priority. Thereby, even when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, more accessories can be operated.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the priority table 222f which defines the priority of the accessory in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided. This is provided, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. Is the same as the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical Configuration of Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a priority table 222f added to the ROM 222 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the priority table 222f is a table in which the priorities for setting the operation stop are determined. In the priority table 222f, the smaller the priority number, the higher the priority of stopping the operation.

  FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are diagrams each showing an example of the priority order table 222f. The priority order table 222f defines the priority order for setting the operation stop for each type of character.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the priority order table 222f in the case where the higher the driving load reference value, the higher the priority. As shown in the figure, the tilting role object 510 having the largest driving load reference value has the highest priority. In addition, there are a plurality of characters with the second highest driving load reference value (that is, 15 characters with a driving load reference value of 15). I have. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that only a part of each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840 that operate at the same time stops operating. Similarly, with respect to the rotating role component 520, the left swing role component 710, and the right swing role component 730 having the lowest drive load reference values, the priorities of the swing role components 710 and 730 that are simultaneously operated in the effect are lowered. Thus, the swinging objects 710 and 730 are preferably operated together.

  By determining the role to be stopped based on the priority order table 222f, when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), the operation of more roles is started. be able to.

  FIG. 89B is another example of the priority order table 222f. The example of FIG. 89 (b) is an example of a case where the operation stop is set for each of the role objects (for example, each slide role 810, 820, 830, 840) which are operated in combination in various effects. . That is, the priority order for setting the operation stop is set higher in the descending order of the load reference value for each unit to be operated simultaneously. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which only a part of the accessory that normally operates in a combined manner operates, and the player does not feel uncomfortable with the effect contents.

  In the example of FIG. 89 (b), the priority of each of the sliding roles 810, 820, 830, and 840 is the highest, and the priority of the combination of the tilting role 510 and the rotating role 520 is the highest. . In addition, each swinging character 710, 730 is defined as one unit of the character having the third highest priority, and then the standing character 410 is defined, and the central rocking character is the lowest priority character. A moving object 720 is defined.

  In this way, by preferentially stopping the operation of the combination that operates, only a part of the combination that normally operates operates, and the player feels uncomfortable with the effect contents. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the method of assigning priorities is not limited to this. For example, the priority may be set based on the distance from the third symbol display device 81 that the player will pay attention during the normal game. That is, the player is harder to notice the presence / absence of the action of the accessory as being farther from the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the accessory is farther from the third symbol display device 81, the priority of setting the operation stop is set higher. Good. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the operation has been canceled even when the operation of the accessory is cancelled.

  In addition, for example, a configuration may be such that a role that operates independently has a higher priority of stopping operation. For example, when a plurality of combinations are stopped, such as each of the slide combinations 810, 820, 830, and 840, the player is likely to notice that the operation has been stopped. There is a fear. Therefore, by stopping the accessory that operates alone, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the operation has been canceled.

  Further, for example, for an accessory that gives some notification to the player depending on the operation content, the priority of canceling the operation may be set lower. For example, if a roulette-shaped accessory is included in the configuration, and if the jackpot of the roulette is notified of whether or not the jackpot is stopped, if the operation is canceled during the operation of the roulette-shaped accessory, There is a possibility that the needle of the roulette-shaped accessory may be stopped at a position different from the lottery result of the original special symbol. That is, there is a possibility that the player may mistake the result of the special symbol lottery. On the other hand, by configuring the operation of the accessory that gives some notification to the player so as not to be easily canceled, it is possible to allow the player to accurately recognize the notification content of the accessory.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device of Second Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the second modification example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 90, the accessory control processing 4 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the second modified example will be described. This accessory control process 4 (S1351) replaces the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. This is the process to be performed.

  Of the accessory control processing 4 (S1351), in the processing of S1401 to S1406 and S1408 to S1411, each of S1401 to S1406 and S1408 to S1411 of the accessory control processing (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing is performed. Further, in the accessory control process 4 (S1351) of the present embodiment, in the process of S1409, the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (the drive load reference value corresponding to the active accessory and a new operation start When it is determined that the sum of the drive load reference values to be set) is greater than 100 (S1441), an adjustment control process for stopping the operation of the accessory according to the priority is executed (S1441). This processing ends. By executing the adjustment control process (S1441), it is possible to operate more accessories while keeping the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity.

  Next, details of the adjustment control process (S1441) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the adjustment control processing (S1441) for setting the operation stop of the accessory according to the priority order. In this adjustment control process (S1441), first, the operation priority data is read from the priority order table 222f (S4301). Next, the operation data of the character with the highest priority of the operation stop among the characters with the operation data set is set to be released (S4302), and the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (during operation). (The sum of the driving load reference value corresponding to the character and the driving load reference value to be newly set to start operation) is subtracted from the driving load reference value corresponding to the character whose release is set by the process of S4302. (S4303). Next, by setting a display alternative effect command corresponding to the character for which the operation data is set to be released, the display effect is set to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 in place of the character whose operation has been released. (S4304). Thereby, even if the action of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to display an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  When the processing of S4304 ends, it is then determined whether or not the sum of the drive load reference values after the subtraction in the processing of S4303 exceeds 100 (S4305). If it is determined that it exceeds (S4305: Yes), the process is repeated. The process proceeds to S4302, and the processes of S4302 to S4305 are repeated until the sum of the drive load reference values becomes 100 or less.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4305, when it is determined that the total of the drive load reference values is 100 or less (S4305: No), the operation data of the accessory is set by setting the drive data of the accessory in which the operation data is set. The start is set (S4306), and among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i, 1 is set to the bit corresponding to the accessory for which the operation start is set (S4307). Then, the driving load total value of the load value storage area e is updated based on each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i updated in the process of S4307 and the load reference value table 222c (S4308), and this process ends. I do.

  By executing the adjustment control process (S1441), it is possible to operate more accessories while keeping the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second modified example is configured such that the operation stop priority is set for each of the accessories, and the operation is stopped from the higher-priority accessory. Thereby, even when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, more accessories can be operated.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment described above, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced, so that a larger load current (power consumption) can be used for the operation of the accessory motor 229. Was.

  In this modification, various examples in which a period in which the load current (power consumption) is low in one configuration matches a period in which the load current (power consumption) is high in another configuration will be described. That is, various examples for preventing the load current (power consumption) of the entire pachinko machine 10 from excessively increasing will be described. The period during which the load current (power consumption) is high includes, for example, a period during which the LED current of the LED such as the LCD backlight 230 is turned on, and a period during which excitation is set for the accessory motor 229. . Examples of the period in which the load current (power consumption) is high include a period in which the LED current of the LED such as the LCD backlight 230 is on, a period in which the excitation of the accessory motor 229 is not set, and the like. Can be

  First, an example in which a period during which the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 is turned off and a period during which excitation is set for the accessory motor 229 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a time change of the LED current value of the LCD backlight 230 and a timing of setting the excitation to the accessory motor 229. As shown in the drawing, in the present modification, periods a to g are associated with a period in which the LCD backlight 230 is off. In this modified example, the excitation is set for the accessory motor 229 during these periods a to g. More specifically, for example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 periodically turns on and off in an ON period of 80% and an OFF period of 20%. It is set as follows.

  Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the operation of returning to the origin of the accessory and the operation of returning to the power supply are executed. In these home position return and power return operations, it is necessary to set the operation for a plurality of accessories, so that the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 tends to increase. For this reason, in this modification, the operation of one step of the accessory motor 229 is set every time the LED of the LCD backlight 230 is turned off (each of the periods a to g). As a result, the load current (power consumption) is prevented from instantaneously increasing, and the total of the load current (power) supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated as an average value or an instantaneous value. It can be within the range of capacity (rated power).

  In this modification, the off-period of the LCD backlight 230 is set to an audio lamp so that the off-period of the LCD backlight 230 does not deviate from the timing for setting the excitation of the accessory motor 229. The MPU 221 of the control device 113 is configured to be able to grasp. Specifically, the LED driver that controls the LCD backlight 230 sends a reference signal (synchronous signal) used for periodically setting the LED on period and the off period to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Output. Based on this reference signal, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether the LCD backlight 230 is currently in the ON period or the OFF period, and sets the excitation when it is in the OFF period. Is configured.

  In the above modification, the LED driver outputs a reference signal to the MPU 221. On the contrary, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a means for generating a reference signal (synchronization signal), You may comprise so that a reference signal may be output to a driver.

  Next, an example in which the LCD backlight 230 is independently controlled in association with a plurality of areas of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, the area about three-quarters above the screen is area a, and the area about one-fourth below the screen is area b. It is configured to be variable. That is, different control commands are set for the LED driver in the area a and the area b.

  As a configuration for making the lighting timing variable between the area a and the area b, for example, LED bars are provided on the upper and lower sides of the screen, and the upper and lower LED bars are respectively assigned to different channels of the LED driver. By connecting, the upper and lower LED bars may be controlled independently. In this case, a light guide plate having a shape that covers each of the region a and the region b may be adopted as a light guide plate for uniformly irradiating the light of the LED bar to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel. That is, a light guide plate (light guide plate A) having substantially the same shape as the region a is provided on the back surface of a portion corresponding to the region a in the liquid crystal panel, and a light guide plate (light guide plate B) having substantially the same shape as the region b is provided on the liquid crystal panel. It is provided on the back of a portion corresponding to the area b. Accordingly, the light from the LED bar provided on the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 is incident on the light guide plate A, so that the incident light can be uniformly applied to the region a. . Further, since the light from the LED bar provided on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81 is incident on the light guide plate B, the incident light can be uniformly applied to the region b. .

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing the time change of the LED current flowing through the LED bar (LEDa) for illuminating the area a and the LED bar (LEDb) for illuminating the area b. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), in this modification, the lighting phase of the LED is inverted between the LEDa and the LEDb, and the LED current of one LED bar is turned off (the light is turned off), and The LED current of the LED bar is turned on (lit).

  More specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 92 (b), the LED current of LEDa rises from the state where the LED current of LEDa is off and the LED current of LEDb is on, and the LED current of LEDb rises. Fall off. Then, after a certain period (for example, 1.5 ms when the lighting frequency of the LED is 320 Hz and the ON period is 50%), the LED current of the LEDa falls off and the LED current of the LEDb rises on. Then, this state is maintained for a certain period (for example, 1.5 ms), and after the certain period elapses, the LED current of LEDa rises again and the LED current of LEDb falls off. Thereafter, the ON / OFF of the LED current of LEDa and the LED current of LEDb is switched every 1.5 ms. Thus, the peak current can be reduced as compared with the case where the ON periods of the LEDa and the LEDb are synchronized. Further, by setting the on-periods of the LEDa and the LEDb to the same length (50% in this specific example), the luminance of the LEDa and the luminance of the LEDb can be made equal. That is, since the apparent brightness of the area a and the area b can be made equal, it is possible to suppress the player from having a strange feeling in the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the lighting frequency of the LCD backlight 230 is not limited to 320 Hz, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as the frequency is high enough that the player cannot recognize the ON period and the OFF period. At least a frequency equal to or higher than the update frequency (50 Hz in the present embodiment) of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, if one cycle of the ON period and the OFF period is set to 20 ms or less). It is possible to set at least one or more ON periods during the period in which each image is displayed. That is, when the period during which a part of the image is displayed coincides with the off period of the LCD backlight 230, it is possible to prevent the part of the image displayed during the off period from becoming invisible. Can be. Therefore, since all the images sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable in the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In this specific example, the on-period and the off-period of the LED current are both set to 50%, and the apparent luminances of the area a and the area b match, but the luminance of the area b is darker than the area a. It may be configured as follows. For example, the period during which the LED current of the LEDa is on may be 80%, and the period during which the LED current is off may be 20%. Then, the LED b may be turned on only during the off period of the LED a. The area b provided on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81 is a part that is relatively difficult for the player to pay attention to, and thus it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable even when the luminance is low.

  Alternatively, both the ON period and the OFF period of the LED current of LEDa may be kept at 50%, and only the ON period of the LED current of LEDb may be shortened (for example, 20%). That is, the LED current of the LEDb may be set to ON at a timing such that the ON period of the LEDb is included during the 1.5 ms period during which the LED current of the LEDa is OFF. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load current (power consumption) in the region b in which the player is relatively hard to pay attention (that is, the change is difficult for the player to recognize even if the luminance is changed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the peak of the LED current value can be reduced more reliably.

  In the diagram of FIG. 92 (b), the LEDa is turned on at the same time as the LEDa is turned on, and the LEDb is turned on at the same time as the LEDa is turned off. May be delayed. Thus, for example, even if the fall of the LED current value becomes slow when the LEDa is turned off (that is, even if the current value of the LEDa does not turn off instantaneously), it is possible to set the LEDb on. During the delay, the current value of LEDa can be turned off. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the LEDa and the LEDb from being simultaneously turned on.

  This control is not limited to the LED of the LCD backlight 230. For example, the overall peak current of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by shifting the lighting phases of the illumination LEDs (illumination units 29 to 33) provided at different positions. Also, by making the brightness of the illumination LED in an arrangement that is relatively difficult for the player to pay attention to to be darker than that of the illumination LED that easily enters the field of view of the player, the pachinko game does not give the player a sense of incongruity. Energy saving of the machine 10 can be achieved.

  Further, the above control is not limited to the same type of LEDs. For example, a configuration is adopted in which the lighting phase of the LED of the backlight 230 for LCD and the lighting phase of the LED for illumination are shifted, and May be configured to turn on the other LED during the period when is turned off. Further, the above control is not limited to the LED current value, and control is performed so that the timing for operating the accessory motor 229 does not overlap with the lighting period of the LCD backlight 230 or the LED for illumination. By shifting the operation timings of the respective accessory motors 229 from each other, the current value supplied to each section of the pachinko machine 10 may be prevented from instantaneously increasing.

  As a specific example of shifting the on-period of the load current supplied to the different configurations, a period during which the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 is on, and a period during which the LED current value of the LED for illumination is on. Will be described in detail. In this specific example, a case where the LCD backlight 230 is electrically connected to the display control device 114 will be described as an example. That is, for the configuration controlled by the different control devices (the LED for illumination which is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and the backlight 230 for LCD which is controlled by the display control device 114), the ON period of the supplied load current, An example in which the off period is shifted will be described. That is, when controlling the illumination LED, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver. On the other hand, when controlling the LCD backlight 230, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 outputs a lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver.

  In this case, the LED driver (lighting driver) provided for the LED for illumination and the LED driver (backlight driver) provided for the LCD backlight set the LED on period and the off period. If the reference signals (synchronization signals) do not match, the lighting periods may overlap with the passage of time. In other words, if the frequencies of the reference signals do not match, the on-periods may overlap with the passage of time even if the on-periods do not overlap at the start of control. Further, even if the frequency of the reference signal is the same, the generation timing of the reference signal is shifted, and if the timing of starting the setting of the lighting state for each LED is shifted, the ON periods of the LEDs are mutually different. There is a risk that they will overlap.

  Thus, in the present modification, the display control device 114 is configured to periodically output a synchronization signal to the audio lamp control device 113, and each LED (lighting device) is set based on the timing at which the synchronization signal is output. , And on / off of the LCD backlight 230). That is, the same synchronization signal is output to the LED driver that drives the LED for illumination and the driver that drives the backlight 230 for LCD.

  As the synchronization signal, for example, a V interrupt signal (vertical synchronization interrupt signal) output from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds may be used. That is, the V interrupt signal configured to be output from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231 may be branched and output to the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 may be configured to directly output the V interrupt signal to the corresponding LED driver. Accordingly, the ON period and the OFF period can be set for each LED driver based on the same synchronization signal, so that the ON periods overlap each other, and the load current (power consumption) instantaneously decreases. The increase can be suppressed.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 outputs, as a lighting control command to be output to the backlight driver, information indicating that the ON period is 50% (lighting rate data 80H, 128 sections out of 255 divided one cycle are ON). And the information that the synchronization signal (V interrupt signal) is externally input, and the first half of one cycle is set to the ON period (the ON period starts from the first section of each section obtained by dividing one cycle into 255 equal parts) Set a lighting control command that includes the information. As a result, the LCD backlight 230 is turned on at the same time as detecting the V interrupt signal, and the on state is maintained for 10 ms (50% of the V interrupt signal generation cycle of 20 ms), and then the LCD backlight 230 is turned on. 230 can be set off until the next V interrupt signal.

  On the other hand, in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114, the LED driver for driving the LED for illumination is informed that the ON period is 50% (lighting rate data 7FH, 127 out of 255 divided one cycle. Information that the section is on), the external input of the synchronization signal (V interrupt signal), and the on-period in the second half of one cycle (on from the 129th section of each section obtained by dividing one cycle into 255 equal parts) Start a period) and set a command that includes the information. As a result, the LED for illumination is turned off at the same time as the detection of the V interrupt signal, and the off state is maintained for 10 ms (50% of the 20 ms which is the generation cycle of the V interrupt signal), and then the backlight for LCD is used. 230 can be set on until the next V interrupt signal.

  By outputting the above-mentioned lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver, the on-period and the off-period can be reversed by the LED for illumination and the backlight 230 for LCD. It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the load current (power) supplied thereto.

  The lighting control command for setting the lighting operation for the lighting LED is associated with the setting timing of the command, and the lighting control command (shown in FIG. None), the MPU 221 can easily select and set a lighting control command for executing the above control on the LED for illumination only by referring to the illumination setting table. it can.

  A lighting control command for setting the lighting operation for the LCD backlight 230 is defined as an LCD setting table in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in association with the command setting timing. (See FIG. 45). The MPU 231 can easily select and set a lighting control command for executing the above-described control on the LED for illumination only by referring to the LCD setting table.

  Note that the control setting timing specified in the LED driver setting table and the illumination driver setting table is, for example, a timing at which a light emission effect is performed by an illumination LED. In other words, when the lighting effect is performed by the illumination LED, the LCD backlight 230 is turned off during the ON period of the illumination LED in order to cover the increase in the load current to the illumination LED. By matching the periods, it is possible to suppress the peak of the load current from instantaneously increasing. Note that, in a gaming machine in which the LED for illumination is always in a light emitting state during the game, the time at which the power is turned on may be defined as the setting timing of the control.

  Note that the above control may be adopted by using a driver that can specify the position and length of the above-described ON period with a simpler lighting control command as the LED driver. In other words, an LED driver that can receive a lighting control command that associates the lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal to each bit of the 8-bit data may be used. In this case, as described above, when the LED driver of this aspect receives the 8-bit command, the section corresponding to the bit of data 1 is turned on, and the section corresponding to the bit of data 0 is turned off. The LED is controlled to perform the operation. Further, as described above, the sections that are earlier in time are associated with the lower bits of the 8-bit command in order. For example, when the control data is 0FH (that is, 000011111B in binary notation), in each of the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight, the first four sections are turned on, and the second four sections are turned off. Is controlled.

  When this driver is adopted, an 8-bit command output by the MPU 231 to the LED driver of the LCD backlight 230 and an 8-bit command output by the MPU 221 to the LED for illumination are mutually “1”. By simply setting the bits storing the data of "" not to overlap, it is possible to easily control the lighting of the LEDs so that the lighting periods of the LEDs do not overlap. The command may be separately defined in an illumination setting table (not shown) and an LCD setting table (not shown). For example, only the illumination setting table is provided, and the illumination setting table is provided. May be configured to output a lighting control command to the LED driver corresponding to the LED for illumination and to the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 when the data setting timing specified in (1) is reached. Then, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 inverts “1” data and “0” data of each bit of the command, and outputs a lighting control command to the LED driver corresponding to the LCD backlight 230. You may. For example, when “0FH” (that is, 000011111B in binary notation) is output as a lighting control command by the MPU 231, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 converts “1” data and “0” data of the lighting control command. By inverting the LED driver, it is converted into a lighting control command of “F0H” (that is, 11110000B in binary notation) and output to the LED driver. Thus, in the first half of one cycle, the backlight 230 for LCD can be in the on state, and the LED for illumination can be in the off state. In the latter half of one cycle, the backlight 230 for LCD can be turned off, and the LED for illumination can be turned on. Therefore, the overlapping of the ON periods can be suppressed, and the instantaneous increase in the load current (power consumption) supplied to each LED can be suppressed. Further, only the illumination setting table needs to be provided, and the LCD setting table can be omitted, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Further, this control can be realized even when a simpler LED driver capable of accepting only an LED on / off instruction (command) by the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 is used. That is, in the first 10 ms of the generation interval (1 V period) of the V interrupt signal, the illumination lamp control device 113 sets the illumination LED (the illumination portions 29 to 33) to ON and the display control device 114 sets the LCD. The backlight 230 for lighting may be turned off, and in the latter 10 milliseconds of the 1 V period, the LED for lighting (the lighting units 29 to 33) may be turned off and the backlight 230 for LCD may be turned on. . More specifically, for example, when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the audio lamp control device 113 that the V interrupt signal has been received from the display control device 114, the lighting of the LED for illumination is turned on. Configure to add processing to be set. On the other hand, in the display control device 114, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B) executed each time a V interrupt signal is detected, a process of setting the LCD backlight 230 to be turned off is added. To be configured. Thus, the backlight 230 for LCD can be turned off at the same time as turning on the LED for illumination.

  Further, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to grasp the elapsed time from the detection of the V interrupt signal, and when it is determined that 10 milliseconds have elapsed, The illumination LED is turned off and the LCD backlight 230 is turned on. Thereby, the backlight 230 for LCD can be turned on at the same time as turning off the LED for illumination. By repeating these processes, it is possible to invert the lighting phase of the illumination LED (illumination units 29 to 33) and the lighting phase of the LCD backlight 210 without providing a dedicated synchronization signal. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illumination LED (the illumination units 29 to 33) and the LCD backlight 230 from being turned on at the same time, so that the load current (supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10) (Power consumption) can be prevented from instantaneously increasing.

  Also, by setting the ON period and the OFF period of each LED based on the V interrupt signal output every 20 milliseconds, the illumination LED (the illumination units 29 to 33) and the LCD backlight are set. It is possible to prevent the lighting timing of the LED from being shifted from that of the LED 230. That is, even if the lighting timing of any of the LEDs is shifted during a certain 1V period, the 1V period ends, and the shift generated in the previous 1V period is canceled by receiving the next V interrupt signal. Then, the ON period and the OFF period of each LED can be set based on a new V interrupt signal.

  Note that a timer or the like that measures 10 milliseconds is provided only in the audio lamp control device 113, and when the LED for illumination is turned off in the audio lamp control device 113, a command for notifying that is turned off. A light-off command may be output to the display control device 114. In the command interruption process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a light-off command. May be configured to add a process for setting lighting of the LCD backlight 230. With this configuration, the display control device 114 does not need to determine the elapsed time from the detection of the V interrupt signal, so that the timekeeping means can be omitted.

  In addition, for example, each time the V interrupt signal is received, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to switch on and off the LED for illumination (the illumination portions 29 to 33), and the display control device 114 In this configuration, each time the V interrupt signal is received, the LCD backlight 230 may be switched on and off at a timing opposite to that of the illumination LED (the illumination units 29 to 33). By switching between the ON state and the OFF state of each LED in response to the reception of the V interrupt signal, it is possible to suppress the timing of setting each LED to the ON period or the OFF period from being shifted. In addition, since it is only necessary to switch the LED controlled by each control device between the on state and the off state in response to the V interrupt signal, the time elapsed from the reception of the V interrupt signal is given to each control device. There is no need to provide a configuration for timing. Therefore, the timekeeping means can be reduced.

  Note that the synchronization signal for setting the ON period and the OFF period of the LED is not limited to the V interrupt signal. For example, a synchronization signal output at a shorter cycle (for example, 3 milliseconds) than the V interrupt signal may be separately generated.

  Further, in the case of generating a synchronization signal different from the V interrupt signal, the generation position of the synchronization signal is not limited to the display control device 114, and may be provided on the audio lamp control device 113 side. A clock unit such as a crystal oscillator is electrically connected to the audio lamp control unit 113, and a synchronization signal periodically output from the clock unit is branched to the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114. It may be configured to output each of them. By employing a synchronization signal having a shorter cycle than the V interrupt signal (that is, a synchronization signal output at an interval shorter than the update interval of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81), one V interrupt can be achieved. The lighting period of the LCD backlight 230 can be set at least once during a 1 V period from when the display image is updated based on the signal to when the next V interrupt signal is output. Therefore, the load current supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 instantaneously increases while displaying all the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the LCD backlight 230 turned on. Can be suppressed.

  Note that, even when the on-period of the LED is shifted between the LCD backlight 230 and the illuminated LED (the illuminated portions 29 to 33), the on-period and the off-period need not necessarily be the same length. For example, the on-period of the LCD backlight 230 may be longer than the on-period of the illumination LEDs (illuminations 29 to 33). Since the third design display device 81 allows the player's line of sight to concentrate more easily (i.e., easily enters the field of view) than the illumination LED (illumination unit 29 to 33), the illumination LED (illumination). Even if the ON period of the units 29 to 33) is shortened (that is, even if the LED for illumination is darkened), the player is hard to notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the illumination LED. As a method of extending the ON period of the LCD backlight 230, for example, instead of making the ON period of the LCD backlight 230 longer than 50% (for example, 80%), an LED for illumination is used. The on-period of the (illuminated parts 29 to 33) may be shortened (for example, set to 20%). Then, the configuration may be such that one off-period is set for one on-period. This makes it possible to shift (disperse) the period during which the LED current is on while brightening the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. That is, it is possible to prevent the load current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 from instantaneously increasing.

  As another method of extending the on-period of the backlight 230 for LCD, for example, the on-period of the backlight 230 for LCD is set to 50%, and the on-period of the LED for illumination (the illumination parts 29 to 33) is set. May be shortened (for example, set to 20%). Then, the configuration may be such that one off-period is set for one on-period. This makes it possible to reduce the load current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 and suppress the load current value from instantaneously increasing.

  In this modification, the lighting frequency of the LED for illumination and the lighting frequency of the backlight 230 for LCD are matched (for example, 60 Hz or 320 Hz). If the lighting period of the light 230 does not overlap, it may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the lighting frequency of the illumination LED may be reduced to half the lighting frequency of the LCD backlight 230, and the length of the ON period may be reduced to half. With this configuration, the ON period of the LED for illumination is set once while the ON period and the OFF period of the LCD backlight 230 are repeated twice. Further, the ON period of the LED for illumination is set during the OFF period of the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the ON periods of the LEDs from overlapping, it is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the load current (power consumption) supplied to each unit of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present modification, the state that the LED can assume is one of the ON state and the OFF state, but is not limited to this. For example, a different current value can be set for each LED, and while some LEDs are set to a high current value, the current values of the other LEDs are set to a low current value, so that a pachinko machine is provided. The total load current value supplied to each section of the machine 10 may be prevented from instantaneously increasing.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, one or a plurality of characters that do not interfere with each other are grouped, and the operating conditions are set for each group. In other words, in the case of changing the characters constituting one group, the operation is performed only when the condition that does not interfere with other groups is satisfied based on the operation condition defined in the operation start condition table 222b. The start was configured to be configurable. In addition, each group is composed of an accessory that operates simultaneously (executes an operation effect of the same system) at an operation timing such as at the start of an effect. Further, in the third embodiment, the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) is returned to the position shown in FIG. 71C (ie, the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H first when the opening / closing portion is closed from the open state) in the home position return. And it was configured to return. That is, the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) is set as the origin position.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, while there is a possibility that the characters that do not possibly interfere with all the other characters are grouped (group 1), the characters that may interfere with each other by changing Are grouped (group 2). Then, in the case of setting the origin return operation, the origin of the group 1 and the group 2 can be returned to the origin in parallel. As a result, the time required for returning to the origin can be reduced. Furthermore, in this modification, the position where the opening / closing unit is completely closed (see FIG. 71 (d)) becomes the origin position without changing the position or number of the light shielding sensors. That is, the origin position of the opening and closing unit is set to a closed state that occupies most of the normal game, and the position at which the light emitting unit is closed can be detected based on a detection result of a light blocking sensor for switching between turning on and off the light emitting unit. Make up.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Third Embodiment>
First, the operation start condition table 222b provided in the ROM 222 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the operation start condition table 222b of the present modified example, the types of the characters constituting each group are changed from the operation start condition table 222b of the third embodiment. Specifically, the group 2 includes the hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, the claw-shaped objects 1063, and the half-moon-shaped objects 1060. In addition, movable movable objects other than these are group 1. Note that the belongings belonging to the group 1 are composed of, for example, a part that swings on the spot and the like, which is not likely to interfere with another part. Therefore, no operation start condition is set for the group 1 in the operation start condition table 222b. The hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 do not have any operating conditions because they do not interfere with other objects. However, it is necessary to execute relatively complicated control when returning to the origin. Therefore, it belongs to group 2.

  On the other hand, an operation start condition is provided for each of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 and the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 belonging to Group 2. Specifically, as a condition for starting the operation of the claw-shaped accessory 1063, it is defined that the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is at the origin position or the overhang position. In addition, as a condition for starting the operation of the lunar month accessory 1060, it is specified that the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is at the origin position. By following these operating conditions, the accessory can be operated without interfering with each other.

  Next, the origin return operation table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. The origin return operation table 222f of the present modified example defines three types of operation scenarios. In each operation scenario, any one of the belongings belonging to the group 2 is set to execute the home return operation. In addition, in each of the operation scenarios, it is configured that the origin return is set in parallel with each of the items in the group 2 for the items in the group 1. Based on the origin return operation table 222f, the origin return operation of each accessory can be set efficiently. In addition, as described above, if the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is operated in a state where the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is in the overhanging position, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 exposed from each of the upper and lower half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is separated from each other. However, there is a possibility that they will interfere with each other in accordance with the rotation of the half-moon-shaped accessory. For this reason, the present modification is configured such that the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is first returned to the origin position (operation scenario 2), and then the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is returned to the origin. Thereby, the interference between the accessory can be suppressed.

  Next, the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 of this embodiment is provided with an operation scenario execution flag 223n and an initial operation flag 223o in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the third embodiment.

  The operation scenario execution flag 223n indicates whether or not each accessory is varied according to an operation scenario for setting the operation of the accessory, similarly to the operation scenario execution flag 223n in the modification of the first embodiment. This is a flag. In the modification of the first embodiment, the operation according to the operation scenario is set in the power supply return operation of the accessory performed after the return to the origin of the accessory is completed. In the return, an operation according to the operation scenario is set. That is, the operation scenario execution flag 223n of the present modification is configured to be turned on when the operation according to the operation scenario is set in the return to origin (see S1233 in FIG. 94).

  The initial operation flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not the origin belonging to the group 1 is being returned to the origin. If the initial operation flag 223o is on, it indicates that the home position return of the belonging belonging to the group 1 is being executed. If the initial operation flag 223o is off, the home position return of the group 1 is not performed (before the home position return is executed). Or after completion of the origin return). The initial operation flag 223o is set to ON when the origin return of the group 1 is set (see S1227 of FIG. 94), and is set to OFF when the origin return of the group 1 is completed (see S1239 of FIG. 94). ).

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 94, the origin return process (S1141) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the present modification will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the origin return process 3 (S1141).

  This origin return process 3 is a process executed in place of the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the third embodiment in the start-up process (see FIG. 37). This is a process for returning.

  In the home position return process 3 (see FIG. 94), first, an operation scenario execution flag 223n indicating whether or not the operation of the accessory based on any of the operation scenarios defined in the home position return operation table 222f is set. The state is determined (S1221). As described above, if the operation scenario execution flag 233n is on, it indicates that the operation is being performed in accordance with each operation scenario defined in the origin return operation table 222f. Indicates that the specified operation has not been performed.

  If it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is not on (S1221: No), it means that no operation scenario has been set, and then the origin return operation table 222f is read to update the operation scenario ( In step S1222, the updated operation scenario is read (S1223). Then, it is determined whether or not the read operation scenario is the END information (S1224). If the read operation scenario is the END information (S1224: Yes), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the read operation scenario is not END information (S1224: No), it is determined whether or not it is an operation start scenario (operation scenario 1) of group 1 (S1225).

  In the process of S1225, when it is determined that the scenario is the operation start scenario of group 1 (that is, the operation scenario 1) (S1225: Yes), the character of group 1 is set by setting the initial operation command of group 1. The operation is started (S1226), the initial operation flag 223o is set to ON to indicate that the group 1 is returning to the origin (S1227), and the process proceeds to S1228. Note that, as described above, the initial operation flag 223o is a flag that indicates that the character of the group 1 is returning to the origin when it is on, and that the origin of the group 1 is not returning when it is off. is there. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1225 that the operation scenario is not the group 1 operation scenario (S1224), the processing also proceeds to S1228.

  In the processing of S1228, it is determined whether or not the operation scenario read from the origin return operation table 222f is the origin return of the nail-shaped accessory 1063 (operation scenario 2) (S1228), and the return operation of the nail-shaped accessory 1063 is performed. If it is to be performed, a claw-shaped accessory return process is executed (S1231), and the process proceeds to S1233. If the read operation scenario is not the origin return of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (operation scenario 2) (S1228: No), it is determined whether the operation scenario is the operation scenario of returning the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 to the origin (operation scenario 3). Is determined (S1229), and if it is a scenario for returning to the origin of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 (that is, operation scenario 3) (S1229), a half-moon-shaped accessory recovery process is executed (S1232), and the process proceeds to S1233. And transfer processing.

  On the other hand, when the read scenario is neither the origin return of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (operation scenario 2) nor the origin return of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 (operation scenario 3) (S1228: No, S1229: No), the read is performed. Since the operation scenario is a scenario (operation scenario 1) indicating a return operation of the hemispherical character objects 910, 920, 930, and 940, a hemispherical character object return process is performed (S1230), and the process proceeds to S1233. Transition. In the subsequent process of S1233, the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to ON (S1233), and the process proceeds to S1221. Thereafter, the processes of S1221 to S1233 and the processes of S1234 to S1241 described later are repeated until the END information is read from the origin return operation table 222f.

  In the process of S1221, if it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is on (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether the initial operation flag 223o is on (S1234), and if it is on (S1234: Yes), which means that the home position of the belonging belonging to the group 1 is being executed, so it is determined whether the origin sensor corresponding to the belonging of the group 1 is on (S1235). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S1235: Yes), the stop of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the origin sensor that has been detected to be on is set (S1336), and the stop corresponds to the stopped accessory. The origin position is set by setting the step counter to 0 (S1337). Then, it is determined whether or not the home position return of all the belongings belonging to the group 1 has been completed (S1338). If it is determined that the home position return has been completed (S1338: Yes), the initial operation flag 223o is set to off. (S1239), the process proceeds to S1240. On the other hand, if any of the characters in the group 1 is returning to the origin (S1338: No), the process skips S1239 and shifts the process to S1240.

  If the initial operation flag 223o is off in the process of S1234, it indicates that it is out of the period for executing the home position return for the group 1, so the processes of S1235 to S1239 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1240. And migrate. Also, in the processing of S1235, when it is determined that the origin sensor corresponding to any of the characters in group 1 is off (S1235: No), the position of the character belonging to group 1 is shifted from the origin. Since it means that there is a certain accessory (origin return has not been completed yet), the process of S1236 to S1239 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1240.

  In the processing of S1240, it is determined whether or not the operation of the group 2 has been completed (S1240). If the operation has been completed (S1240: Yes), the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to off (S1241), and the processing in S1221 is performed. Move to. If the operation of group 2 has not been completed (S1240: No), the process proceeds to S1221.

  By executing this processing, it is possible to perform the returning operation to the origin of the group 2 in parallel while performing the returning operation to the origin of the group 1, so that the period required for the returning to the origin can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a description will be given of the hemispherical accessory recovery processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the hemispherical role object return process. The hemispherical accessory returning process is a process for returning each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 to the origin. In the present embodiment, the origin position is in the closed state shown in FIG. 71 (d).

  In the hemispherical accessory recovery process (see FIG. 95), two processes are executed roughly. That is, after performing the process of returning the opening / closing unit to the position shown in FIG. 71C (the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor) (S4401 to S4411), the opening / closing unit is set to the origin position starting from the arrangement of FIG. A process (origin position setting process) for returning to the position where the opening / closing unit is completely closed (see FIG. 71D) is executed. These processes will be specifically described.

  In the hemispherical accessory return process, first, it is determined whether or not the light shielding sensor is on (S4401). That is, it is determined whether or not the hemispherical object to be set is located within five steps from the closed position (see FIG. 71D). If it is determined that the light-shielding sensor is ON (S4401: Yes), then an operation command for operating the accessory motor 229 in the forward direction (the direction of opening the opening / closing unit) for one step is issued. Are output to the motor driver that drives the accessory motor 229. Then, the process waits until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4403: No). That is, the operation waits until the set operation for one step is completed. If an execution signal has been received from the motor driver (S4404: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S4404). That is, by operating the accessory motor 229 by one step, it is determined whether or not the arrangement is more open than the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c). The reason why the opening / closing section is opened until the output of the light shielding sensor becomes L (off) is that the position of the opening / closing section cannot be accurately determined while the output of the light shielding sensor is H (on). is there. Therefore, the opening / closing section is configured to be retracted (opening operation) outside the range where the light-shielding sensor is turned on (H). Once the output of the light-shielding sensor is operated to the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off), the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) due to the closing operation is always the position shown in FIG. The opening / closing part can be accurately changed to the position shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4404 that the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on) (S4404: No), the process proceeds to step S4402, and thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S4402 until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off). Steps S4404 to S4404 are repeated. If the output of the light-shielding sensor is determined to be L (off) in the process of S4404 (S4405: Yes), it means that the output is at a position that is more open than the output start position of the light-shielding sensor. Then, in order to set the accurate number of steps until the closing, a process of returning to the position of FIG. 71 (c) which is the detection start position of the sensor is executed.

  Specifically, first, an operation command is set so as to operate by one step in the negative direction (the direction in which the opening / closing unit is closed) (S4406). Then, the process waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4406: No). When the execution signal is received (S4406: Yes), it means that the accessory motor 229 has operated by one step. It is determined whether or not the output of the light shielding sensor has become H (ON) (S4407). That is, it is determined whether or not the arrangement shown in FIG. If the output of the light-shielding sensor remains in the H (ON) state (S4407: No), the processes of S4405 to S4407 are repeated until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (OFF).

  In the process of S4407, when it is determined that the output of the light shielding sensor has become H (ON) (S4407: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the detection start position of the light shielding sensor has been reached, the origin position setting process is executed. Then (S4408), this processing ends. This origin position setting process is a process of setting the opening / closing section to a closed state, which is the origin position of the present modification, and setting the origin position in the step counter. Details of the origin position setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4401, if it is determined that the light-shielding sensor is not on (that is, it is off) (S4401: No), then a command for operating the accessory motor 229 in the negative direction by one step is sent to the motor driver. It is set (S4409). Then, the process waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4410), and when it is determined that the execution signal has been received from the motor driver (that is, the accessory motor 229 has operated one step) (S4410: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the output of the light shielding sensor is H (ON) (S4411).

  In the process of S4411, if the light-shielding sensor is determined to be L (OFF) (S4411: No), the processes of S4409 to S4411 are repeated until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (ON). That is, the accessory motor 229 is operated one step at a time until the arrangement shown in FIG. If the output of the light-shielding sensor has become H (ON) (S4411: Yes), an origin position setting process (S4408) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in this processing, if the opening / closing unit is out of the detection range of the light shielding sensor when the power is turned on, the opening / closing unit is closed one step at a time until the light shielding sensor detects H (ON). As a result, it is possible to always stop at the arrangement shown in FIG. If the open / close section is within the detection range of the light-blocking sensor when the power is turned on, the open / close section is opened one step at a time until the light-blocking sensor detects L (off), and the open / close section is temporarily closed. Is configured to operate outside the detection range of. Then, as in the case of the home return operation when the sensor detects L (off) when the power is turned on, the opening / closing unit is closed one step at a time, and in this case, the operation is stopped in the arrangement shown in FIG. Can be. Therefore, by operating the same number of steps (five steps in the direction in which the opening / closing unit is closed) in the subsequent processing, it is possible to accurately return to the closed position (see FIG. 71 (d)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the origin position setting process (S4408), which is one of the above-described hemispherical accessory return processes, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the origin position setting processing (S4408).

  In this origin position setting processing (S4408), first, the value of the step counter of the hemispherical character is set to 5 (S4501), and then a command to operate in five steps in the negative direction (the direction in which the opening / closing unit is closed) is issued. Output to the motor driver (S4502). Thereby, it can be changed from the arrangement of FIG. 71 (c) to the closed position (see FIG. 71 (d)) at the position operated by 5 steps. When the process of S4502 is completed, the process stands by until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4503: No). When the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4503: Yes), the step of the hemispherical character is performed. The counter is decremented by 1 (S4504). As a result, the remaining operation step number and the step counter value can be matched.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter is 0 (S4505). If it is determined that the value is not 0, the processes of S4503 to S4505 are repeated until the value of the step counter becomes 0. Then, when the value of the step counter becomes 0 (that is, when the closed position at the origin position is reached), a stop control command for the accessory motor 229 is set to operate the accessory motor 229. The process is stopped (S4506), and the process ends. By setting this stop command, the accessory motor 229 can be reliably stopped at the origin position without excessively operating.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a description will be given of a claw-shaped accessory returning process for returning the claw-shaped accessory 1063 to the origin. In this processing, first, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4601). If the origin sensor is off (S4601: No), the accessory motor 229 is moved by one step in the negative direction (origin direction). An operation command for moving is set (S4602). Next, the process stands by until an execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4603: No). When the execution signal is received (S4603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor of the claw-shaped handpiece 1063 is on. (S4604). If the origin sensor is off (S4604: No), the processing of S4602 to S4603 is repeated until the original sensor detects on.

  If it is detected in step S4601 or S4604 that the origin sensor is on, the process shifts to step S4605. In the process of S4605, 0 is set to the value of the step counter of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (S4605), a stop control command of the accessory motor 229 is set (S4606), and this process ends. By executing this processing, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 can be accurately returned to the origin position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a half-moon-shaped object return process (S1232), which is a process for returning the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 to the origin, will be described. In this processing, first, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4701). If the origin sensor is off (S4701: No), the accessory motor 229 is moved by one step in the negative direction (origin direction). An operation command for moving is set (S4702). Next, the process stands by until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4703: No). When the execution signal is received (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor of the half-moon-type accessory 1060 is on. (S4704). If the origin sensor is off (S4704: No), the processes of S4702 to S4703 are repeated until the origin sensor detects on.

  If it is detected in step S4701 or S4704 that the origin sensor is on, the process advances to step S4705. In the process of S4705, 0 is set to the value of the step counter of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 (S4705), a stop control command of the accessory motor 229 is set (S4706), and the process ends. By executing this processing, the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 can be accurately returned to the origin position.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, it is possible to perform the return-to-origin operation in parallel with the accessory of the group 1 and the accessory of the group 2. Further, in the present modified example, when the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory is returned to the original point, the operation direction when performing the original point returning operation in accordance with the detection result of the light-shielding sensor when the power is turned on is made different. In both cases, after the operation is always performed at the position shown in FIG. 71 (c), by setting the operation of the accessory motor 229 in five steps, the original position can be set to the closed state. That is, before operating to the origin position, it is possible to determine where the origin position is based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor, and set the number of operation steps corresponding to the origin position. Therefore, even if the origin position is not the detection start position of the light shielding sensor (see FIG. 71 (c)), the origin can be accurately returned. In this way, the configuration in which the origin position is determined starting from the detection start position of the light shielding sensor (see FIG. 71 (c)) as a starting point leads to an increase in the size of a circuit such as providing an origin sensor separately from the light shielding sensor. The opening / closing part can be reliably returned to the origin position without performing.

  In this modification, the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the H state from the state where the opening and closing portions of the respective hemispherical objects 910, 920, 930, and 940 are closed to the origin position shown in FIG. Although the position of the light shielding sensor is set as described above, the position is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the opening / closing section is opened and a state where the opening / closing section is closed, both of the light-shielding sensors are in an L-output state, and the transition from the closed state to the open state (the transition from the open state to the closed state). , The light-shielding sensor may be set to the H output state. In this case, when returning to the origin, by operating alternately between the open state side and the closed state side, a boundary position where the output of the light shielding sensor switches from L (off) to H (on) is searched, and the boundary position is determined. The number of steps from the position to the closed position may be set and the operation may be performed to return to the origin position.

  For a more specific description, a case will be described as an example where the opening / closing unit is arranged so that the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H in the range of the fifth step to the tenth step from the origin position. First, when the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (ON) when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the opening / closing unit is closed one step at a time until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (OFF) (origin position). When the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off), the opening operation is performed until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on). Thus, the opening / closing section can be moved to the position of the fifth step from the origin position, so that by setting the opening / closing section to move 5 steps in the direction of the origin position, the opening / closing section can be easily returned to the origin position. .

  On the other hand, if the output of the light-blocking sensor is L (off) at the time of turning on the power, the opening operation and the closing operation are repeated, and the number of operation steps of one opening operation or one closing operation is gradually increased. As a result, a position where the output of the light shielding sensor becomes H (ON) is searched. For example, first, the opening operation is performed for one step, and if the output of the light-shielding sensor remains at L (off), then the opening / closing unit is returned to the original position (the position at power-on), and The closing operation is performed for a minute. If the output of the light-shielding sensor remains at L (off), the opening / closing unit is returned to the original position (the position at the time of power-on) again, and then the opening / closing is performed in two steps starting from the original position. An operation and a two-step closing operation are performed. Then, the opening operation and the closing operation are alternately repeated by increasing the number of operation steps from the original position until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (ON). By searching for the detection position of the light-shielding sensor while increasing the amplitude one step at a time, it is possible to suppress excessive opening or closing when the opening / closing unit is operated in the direction opposite to the origin position.

  If the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) during the opening operation, it means that the opening / closing unit has been opened from the origin position to the position of the fifth step and thus has entered the detection range of the light-shielding sensor. Therefore, by setting a five-step closing operation, the opening / closing part can be returned to the origin position. On the other hand, when the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) during the closing operation, it means that the opening / closing unit has been closed from the origin position to the position of the tenth step, and thus has entered the detection range of the light-shielding sensor. Therefore, by setting the closing operation in 10 steps, the opening / closing section can be returned to the origin position.

  As described above, even when the origin position does not exist within the detection range of the light-shielding sensor, if the number of steps from the detection range of the light-shielding sensor to the origin position is known, the opening / closing unit is opened based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor. It can be easily returned to the origin position. Note that, in the above specific example, an example has been described in which the amplitude of the closing operation and the opening operation is increased in one-step increments when the light-blocking sensor is L (off) when the power is turned on. Steps or five steps may be used. As the number of steps is increased, the time required for the opening / closing unit to enter the detection range of the light-shielding sensor can be shortened, so that the time required for returning to the origin can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the driving load reference value is defined for each type of the accessory, and it is determined whether or not to cancel the operation of the accessory based on the driving load reference value. is not. For example, whether to cancel the operation of the accessory may be determined based on the number of the accessory motors 229 to be operated, the number of commands for operating the accessory, the voltage value, and the like.

  In each of the above embodiments, the operation of each accessory is set by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (the accessory motor 229 is driven). However, the MPU 110 of the main control device 110 controls the operation of each accessory. The operation may be controlled. That is, the accessory motor 229 may be electrically connected to the main controller 110. In the second embodiment, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. However, the brightness may be controlled by the MPU 110 of the main control device 110. . That is, the LCD backlight 230 may be configured to be electrically connected to the main control device 110. As a result, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments, a liquid crystal display is employed as the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a PDP (plasma display panel), an organic EL display, a CRT display, or the like may be employed. Since these are self-luminous displays and do not include a backlight in the configuration, when the luminance is reduced as in the second embodiment, the brightness of the display is reduced by controlling the light emitting elements themselves. Thus, the load current (power consumption) may be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, only one third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display) is provided, but a plurality of third symbol display devices 81 may be provided. For example, two types of main display and a sub-display having a smaller screen size than the main display may be provided. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the display effect is further increased, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. Further, for example, the position of the sub-display may be configured to be variable. In the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by operating the accessory, the display effect is executed only on the sub-display, and the main display is turned off. The load current (power consumption) supplied to the display may be reduced to fall within the range of the current capacity (rated power). Further, when the main display is turned off, the position of the sub-display may be changed so that the sub-display is arranged at the position of the main display. Thereby, the discomfort of the main display being turned off can be reduced, and the player can be recognized as a kind of effect.

  In the above embodiments, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. However, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied and the power is cut off. May be configured to be able to hold the stored content. With this, when the power is cut off during the production, the progress of the production at the time of the power supply being turned off after the power is turned on can be determined, and the production can be executed from the continuation. be able to.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and is not provided with a handle for launching a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  It should be noted that a pachinko machine combining some or all of the above-described embodiments may be used.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (A limit is imposed on the total drive current of the accessory motor)
Power supply means for supplying electric power, a plurality of variable means driven based on the electric power supplied by the power supply means, a plurality of variable members changed by the variable means, and at least one of the plurality of variable members When changing the unit, the power determining means for determining whether the power required to drive the corresponding variable means exceeds a predetermined power, and if the power exceeds the predetermined power by the power determining means A gaming machine A1 comprising: the variable means being driven when it is determined; and a drive suppressing means for suppressing at least a part of the variable means to be newly driven.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of the variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the plurality of variable means are driven based on the power supplied by the power supply means, and the plurality of variable members are changed by the variable means. When at least a part of the plurality of variable members is changed, the power determining means determines whether the power required to drive the corresponding variable means exceeds a predetermined power. Then, when it is determined by the power determining means that the power exceeds the predetermined power, at least a part of the variable means being driven and the variable means to be newly driven is suppressed by the drive suppressing means.

  Thus, it is possible to prevent the power from being excessively increased by driving the variable unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the variable means can be operated appropriately.

  In the gaming machine A1, storage means for storing power information which is information corresponding to power for driving each of the variable means, and all of the variable drives to be driven based on the power information stored in the storage means. Calculating means for calculating a total power value that is a value corresponding to a total value of the power of the means, wherein the power determining means determines that the power required to drive the variable means based on the total power value is determined in advance. A gaming machine A2 for determining whether or not power exceeds a predetermined power.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, power information, which is information corresponding to the power for driving each variable means, is stored in the storage means, and based on the power information stored in the storage means, the sum of the powers of all the variable means to be driven is calculated. The total power value corresponding to the value is calculated by the calculating means. Based on the total power value, the power determining means determines whether the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power.

  Thereby, when calculating the total power value corresponding to the total value of the power supplied to the driving variable means, the power information stored in the storage means may be simply read and summed, and the current value or the voltage value may be calculated. Since it is not necessary to actually measure the size of the game machine, it is possible to suppress an increase in the circuit scale of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine A2, there is provided a driving power storage means for storing a value corresponding to a total value of the power of the variable means being driven, and the calculating means calculates the value stored in the driving power storage means, The gaming machine A3, wherein the total electric power value is calculated based on the electric power information corresponding to the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, a value corresponding to the total value of the power of the variable means being driven is stored in the drive power storage means, and the value stored in the drive power storage means and power information corresponding to the variable means to be newly driven are stored. The total power value is calculated by the calculating means based on the calculated total power value.

  Thus, only the power information corresponding to the variable means to be newly driven needs to be read from the storage means, and every time the variable means is newly driven, it is necessary to read the power information of all the driving variable means from the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the load of the calculation processing in the calculation means can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the drive suppression unit newly drives when the power determination unit determines that the power required to drive the variable unit exceeds the predetermined power. A gaming machine A4, which suppresses driving of the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, if the power determining means determines that the power required to drive the variable means exceeds the predetermined power, a new one is obtained. Since the driving of the variable means to be driven is suppressed by the drive suppressing means, stopping the variable means being driven can prevent the variable member from stopping during the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that a trouble has occurred in the gaming machine due to the variable member being stopped during the operation.

  In the gaming machine A4, a storage control unit that controls the total power value calculated by the calculation unit to be stored in the drive power storage unit, and an electric power required to drive the variable unit by the power determination unit. A storage control suppressing unit configured to prevent the storage control unit from controlling to store the total power value in the driving power storage unit when it is determined that the power exceeds the predetermined power. Gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, the total power value calculated by the calculation means is controlled by the storage control means to be stored in the drive power storage means. When it is determined by the power determining means that the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power, the storage control means controls to store the total power value in the driving power storing means. Suppressed by suppression means.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the power information corresponding to the variable means whose driving has been suppressed from being added to the total power value, so that it is unnecessary to subtract the power information once added to the total power value. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unnecessary processing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the display device includes a display unit that displays a display effect, and a display control unit that controls a display content that is displayed on the display unit. When the driving of part or all of the variable means and the newly driven variable means is suppressed, control is performed such that an effect corresponding to the variable means whose driving is suppressed is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being possible.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5. That is, the display effect is displayed by the display means, and the display content to be displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means. In the case where the driving of the variable means being driven by the drive control means and a part or all of the variable means to be newly driven are suppressed, an effect corresponding to the variable means whose drive is suppressed is displayed on the display means. As described above.

  Thereby, even if the driving of the variable means is suppressed, the corresponding effect is displayed on the display means, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the driving of the variable means has been suppressed. .

  In the gaming machine A1, the power determining means determines whether or not the predetermined threshold value is exceeded based on the number of the variable means being driven and the number of the variable means to be newly driven. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the power determining means determines whether or not a predetermined threshold value is exceeded based on the number of the variable means being driven and the number of the variable means to be newly driven. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the power exceeds a predetermined power by a simple process of counting the number of variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the determination process by the power determination unit can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the drive suppressing means causes the variable means being driven and at least two specific variable means among the variable means to be newly driven to repeat the variable operation and the operation stop at least for at least one. The power required to drive the variable means is controlled to be equal to or less than a predetermined power by variably operating the other specific variable means while the specific variable means is not operating. Gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, at least two or more specific variable means of the variable means being driven and the variable means to be newly driven are repeatedly changed and stopped by the drive suppressing means. Then, during the period in which at least one specific variable unit stops operating, another specific variable unit is variably operated by the drive suppressing unit.

  This makes it possible for the player to recognize that all the variable means including the specific variable means are operating without being stopped, and gives the player an uncomfortable feeling in the operation of the variable means. Can be suppressed.

<Characteristic B group> (Reduce power of backlight to secure power for operation of accessory)
Control means for performing control relating to a game; display means for displaying display information; and brightness variable at least capable of changing the brightness of the display means to a first brightness and a second brightness darker than the first brightness. Means, wherein the brightness variable means is capable of changing the brightness of the display means to the second brightness when a condition for executing a specific control by the control means is satisfied. Gaming machine B1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the number of the variable members is increased in order to enhance the effect, there is a possibility that the process for operating the variable members may not be performed normally. That is, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to appropriately control the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the control means controls the game. The display information is displayed by the display means, and the brightness of the display means is changed at least to the first brightness and the second brightness lower than the first brightness by the brightness changing means. When the condition for executing the specific control is satisfied by the control means, the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness changing means.

  As a result, even if the power required for the control is increased by performing the specific control, the power can be offset by the power reduced by changing the display means to the second luminance, so that the specific control can be surely executed. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the gaming machine can be suitably performed.

  In the gaming machine B1, a power supply unit for supplying power to the control unit and the display unit, and a power determination unit for determining whether the power supplied by the power supply unit exceeds a predetermined power. The brightness varying means, when the specific control is executed by the control means, when it is determined by the power determination means that exceeds the predetermined power, the brightness of the display means the said A gaming machine B2 characterized by being variable to a second luminance.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, power is supplied to the control unit and the display unit by the power supply unit, and the power determination unit determines whether the power supplied by the power supply unit exceeds a predetermined power. When it is determined by the power determination unit that the predetermined power is exceeded by the execution of the specific control by the control unit, the brightness of the display unit is changed to the second brightness by the brightness variation unit.

  Thereby, even if the specific control is executed, the power can be made equal to or less than the predetermined power. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem from occurring in the gaming machine due to exceeding the predetermined power.

  The gaming machine B3, wherein the gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a plurality of variable members that can be varied, and the specific control is control for varying some or all of the plurality of variable members.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, since the specific control is control for changing some or all of the plurality of variable members, a large number of Even if the variable member is mounted, there is an effect that the power can be reduced to a predetermined power or less when the variable member is changed.

  In the gaming machine B3, when performing control for varying some or all of the plurality of variable members, the game machine B3 includes a control suppression unit capable of suppressing control for varying at least some of the variable members, The control suppression means is configured to at least partly determine that the power determining means determines that the power exceeds the predetermined power even after the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness changing means. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the power for reducing the variable member is suppressed to be equal to or less than the predetermined power.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3. That is, when performing control for changing some or all of the plurality of variable members, control for changing at least some of the variable members is suppressed by the control suppression unit. If it is determined that the power of the display means exceeds the predetermined power by the power determining means even after the brightness of the display means has been changed to the second brightness by the brightness varying means, control for varying at least some of the variable members is controlled. Suppressed by suppression means.

  Thereby, even if a higher brightness is set as the second brightness, there is an effect that the gaming machine can be operated so as not to exceed the predetermined power by performing the control by the control suppression means.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the control means controls the plurality of variable members to perform a predetermined turning-on operation based on power-on, and the brightness changing means controls power-on. A gaming machine B5 wherein the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness based on the following.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3 or B4. That is, the control means controls the plurality of variable members to perform a predetermined closing operation based on turning on the power. The brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness changing means based on power-on.

  Thereby, since the second luminance is set at the time of the turning-on operation, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the power from exceeding the predetermined power during the turning-on operation.

  The gaming machine B6 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, wherein the luminance varying means varies the luminance of the display means to the first luminance after the specific control is completed.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the brightness of the display means is changed to the first brightness by the brightness changing means after the specific control is completed. The period set for the luminance can be the minimum period. Therefore, the luminance of the display means can be set to the first luminance which is longer than the second luminance for a longer period, so that the visual quality of the display means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6, after the specific control is completed, the luminance varying means increases the luminance according to an elapsed time to thereby increase the luminance of the display means until the predetermined time elapses. A gaming machine B7 characterized by varying the brightness.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the brightness is increased by the brightness varying means according to the elapsed time after the specific control is completed, and the display means is not changed until the predetermined time elapses. Since the brightness is changed to the first brightness, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the brightness as compared with the case where the switching from the second brightness to the first brightness is performed instantaneously. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable in the appearance of the display means.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, when the brightness of the display unit is changed by the brightness changing unit, the display control unit can be controlled to display a black image on the entire display unit. Gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of B1 to B7, when the brightness of the display means is changed by the brightness change means, the display control means controls the display means to display a black image on the entire display means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the luminance has changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable in the appearance of the display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the display means includes a display panel and a light source for illuminating the display panel, and the brightness variable means sets the brightness of the light source to PWM. A gaming machine B9 characterized by being variable by control.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8. That is, the display means includes a display panel and a light source for illuminating the display panel. The luminance of the light source is varied by the PWM control by the luminance varying means.

  This makes it possible to vary the luminance by a simple control of repeatedly turning on and off the light source. Therefore, a simple circuit can be employed as a circuit for controlling the light source, and thus there is an effect that cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the display means includes a display panel and a light source configured by an LED for illuminating the display panel, and the brightness varying means includes: A gaming machine B10 wherein the brightness of the light source is varied by varying the drive current of the LED.

  According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8. That is, the display means is configured to include the display panel and a light source configured by LEDs for illuminating the display panel. By varying the drive current of the LED, the luminance of the light source is varied by the luminance varying means.

  Thus, when the brightness is reduced to the same level as that of the PWM control, the anode voltage of the LED can be reduced with a decrease in the drive current of the LED. Therefore, the power of the light source can be further reduced as compared with the PWM control. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that energy saving of the gaming machine can be achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the brightness varying means includes a plurality of area brightness varying means for varying brightness of a partial area of the display means, and the plurality of variable members Includes a specific variable member that, when changed based on the control of the control unit, blocks a part of the display unit by changing the display unit to the front side of the display unit with respect to the game board; The brightness varying means varies the brightness of an area partially or entirely covered by the specific variable member to the second brightness by the corresponding area brightness varying means when the specific variable member is variable. A gaming machine B11, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B3 to B5. That is, the brightness varying means is provided with a plurality of area brightness varying means for varying the brightness of a partial area of the display means. The plurality of variable members include a specific variable member that, when changed based on the control of the control unit, is changed toward the front side of the display unit with respect to the game board so that a part of the display unit is shielded. When the specific variable member is variable, the luminance of a region partially or wholly shielded by the specific variable member is changed to the second luminance by the corresponding region luminance variable means.

  Thereby, only the brightness of the area that is shielded by the specific variable member and cannot be visually recognized by the player is set as the second brightness, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the brightness has changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a player who has recognized the change in luminance from feeling uncomfortable in the appearance of the display means.

<Characteristic C group> (The accessory is divided into a group in which the accessories interfere with each other and a group in which the accessories do not interfere with each other, and the accessory motor is controlled according to the group.)
A first member group composed of one or more variable members that can be varied, a second member group composed of one or more variable members different from the first member group, and varying the variable members And the variable member constituting the first member group is disposed at a position where the variable member does not interfere with the other variable members by being changed, and the second member group At least two of the variable members are arranged at positions where they can interfere with each other by making them variable, and the variable means, when changing the variable members that make up the second member group, A gaming machine C1 characterized by being variable in accordance with predetermined operating conditions.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include an accessory operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of accessories (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of the variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first member group is configured by one or more variable members that can be changed, and the second member group is configured by one or more variable members different from the first member group. The variable member is changed by the changing means. The variable members constituting the first member group are arranged at positions where they do not interfere with other variable members by being changed. At least two variable members constituting the second member group are arranged at positions where they can interfere with each other by making them variable. When the variable member constituting the second member group is changed by the variable means, the variable member is changed according to a predetermined operating condition.

  Thus, the operating conditions for the variable members constituting the second member group need only be specified, and the specified operating conditions can be minimized. That is, the process for changing the variable member can be simplified. Therefore, there is an effect that the variable member can be suitably varied.

  In the gaming machine C1, the operating condition includes, as a condition for changing the variable member constituting the second member group, a case where the other variable members constituting the second member group are at positions where they do not interfere with each other. The game machine C2 further includes a condition that allows the variable member to be variable.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the operating conditions include, as conditions for changing the variable members constituting the second member group, other variable members constituting the second member group. Since the condition that the variable member can be changed is included when the variable member is at the position where no interference occurs, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the variable members constituting the second member group from interfering with each other.

  In the gaming machine C2, a regulation information storage unit that stores regulation information that defines a type of a variable member to be varied for each effect, and the operating condition when the variable member is varied by the variable unit based on the regulation information. Condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the variable member defined in the specification information by the variable means when the condition determining means determines that the operating condition is not satisfied. A game machine C3 comprising: avoiding means for avoiding the change of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, the regulation information that defines the type of the variable member to be varied for each effect is stored in the regulation information storage means. In the case where the variable member is changed based on the specified information by the variable means, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not the operating condition is satisfied. When it is determined by the condition determining means that the operating condition is not satisfied, the avoiding means avoids the variable member specified in the defining information by the variable means.

  This makes it possible to more reliably suppress the interference between the variable members. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such as the variable member being damaged by interference.

  The gaming machine C4, wherein in the gaming machine C3, the specification information defines a type of the variable unit that varies in association with an elapsed time from the start of the effect.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, the type of the variable means that is varied in association with the elapsed time from the start of the production is defined in the definition information. By a simple process of selecting the type of means, the variable means according to the effect can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load for changing the variable means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the specification information includes information indicating whether or not the variable member to be changed includes a variable member belonging to the second member group. Gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the regulation information defines information indicating whether or not the variable members to be varied include the variable members belonging to the second member group. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is necessary to refer to the operating conditions. Therefore, even when the variable member belonging to the second member group is defined in the definition information, it is possible to suppress the execution of useless processing of comparing each accessory with the operation condition, There is an effect that the processing load for changing the variable means can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the display device includes a display unit that displays a display effect, and a display control unit that controls a display content that is displayed on the display unit. When the change of the variable member defined in (1) is avoided, the effect can be controlled to display on the display means an effect corresponding to the variable means in which the change is avoided. Machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C3 to C6. That is, the display effect is displayed by the display means, and the display content to be displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means. When the avoiding means avoids the change of the variable member specified in the regulation information, the display control means controls the display means to display an effect corresponding to the variable means whose change has been avoided.

  Thereby, even if the change of the variable member is avoided, it is possible to suppress an unnatural effect by displaying the corresponding effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the effect.

<Characteristic D group> (Return processing at power-on is executed based on the detection result of the light shielding sensor)
A variable member that can be changed, a variable unit that changes the variable member, and a closing control unit that controls the variable unit to perform a closing operation that is a predetermined operation based on power-on, Discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the variable member is located within an operation start range which is a predetermined operation range for starting the closing operation; and And a return operation executing means for executing a return operation for operating the variable means so as to be positioned within the operation start range when it is determined that the variable operation means is not located within the operation start range. Gaming machine D1.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of performing various effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation of the variable member due to the diversification of the variable member.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the variable member that can be changed is changed by the changing means. The variable control means controls the variable means so that the variable member performs a predetermined operation based on the power-on. The determination unit determines whether the variable member is located within an operation start range that is a predetermined operation range for starting the closing operation. When the variable member is determined not to be within the operation start range by the determination unit when the power is turned on, the return operation for operating the variable unit to be positioned within the operation start range is performed by the return operation execution unit. Be executed.

  This allows the variable means to be moved into the operation start range by the return operation based on the power-on, so that the power-on operation can be suitably performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the action of the accessory can be appropriately set.

  In the gaming machine D1, the return operation execution unit is located within the operation start range from a position where it is determined that the variable member is not located within the operation start range based on the determination result by the determination unit. The gaming machine D2, wherein the return operation is terminated when the position is changed to a position determined to be.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the variable member is positioned within the operation start range from the position where it is determined that the variable member is not located within the operation start range based on the determination result by the determination unit. The return operation is terminated by the return operation executing means when the position is determined to be within the range determined to be present. The return operation can be completed when the member operates. Therefore, there is an effect that the return operation can be completed in a shorter time.

  In the gaming machine D2, the variable means is capable of bidirectionally changing the variable member between a first position and a second position different from the first position. Specific range determination for determining whether or not the variable member is located within a specific operation range between the first position and the second position and including at least the first position. Means, the operation start range is an operation range included in the specific operation range, includes the end of the second position side in the specific operation range, the return operation execution means, When the specific range determining means determines that the variable member is positioned within the specific operation range, the variable member is moved to the second position side as the return operation, and the specific range determination is performed. Means for operating the specific operation range. Gaming machine D3 that when said variable member is judged to be not located, characterized in that said variable member as the return operation is intended to operate to the first position side within.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the variable member is bidirectionally changed by the changing means between the first position and the second position different from the first position. The specific range determination means determines whether the variable member is located within a specific operation range between the first position and the second position and at least including the first position. You. The operation start range is included in the specific operation range, and the end of the specific operation range on the second position side is included in the operation start range. When it is determined that the variable member is located within the specific operation range by the specific range determination unit, the variable member is moved to the second position side by the return operation execution unit as a return operation. When the specific range determining means determines that the variable member is located within the specific operation range, the variable member is moved to the first position by the return operation executing means as a return operation.

  This makes it possible to determine whether the operation start range is on the first position side or the second position side based on the determination result by the specific range determination means. Thus, there is an effect that the variable member can be efficiently operated without operating the variable member.

  In the gaming machine D3, the operation start range is an end of the specific operation range on the second position side.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, since the operation start range is the end of the second position side of the specific operation range, the return operation execution means performs the closing operation as the closing operation. Only the operation that starts from the end of suffices to be specified. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity for defining the input operation can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, when the insertion operation is being performed, an abnormality determining unit that determines whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the variable member, and the abnormality determining unit determines that there is an abnormality. And a notifying means for executing a predetermined notifying operation when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4. That is, it is determined by the abnormality determining means whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the variable member while the closing operation is being performed, and a predetermined notification operation is notified when the abnormality determining means determines that there is an abnormality. Performed by means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the abnormality can be eliminated based on the notification by the notification means.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the abnormality determining unit determines that the operation of the variable member is abnormal, the gaming machine D5 includes a specifying unit that specifies a type of the variable member having the operation abnormality, and the notifying unit includes: A gaming machine D6 for performing a notification operation corresponding to the type of the variable member specified by the specifying means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5. That is, when the operation of the variable member is determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determining unit, the type of the variable member having the abnormal operation is specified by the specifying unit. The notifying operation corresponding to the type of the variable member specified by the specifying means is executed by the notifying means.

  Thus, the type of the variable member can be easily recognized by the notification operation, so that the abnormality can be eliminated more quickly.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a period discriminating unit for discriminating whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the end of the returning operation by the returning operation executing unit is provided. A gaming machine D7 for controlling the variable means so as to perform the insertion operation when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6. That is, whether the predetermined period has elapsed since the end of the return operation by the return operation execution unit is determined by the period determination unit, and the closing operation is performed when the period determination unit determines that the predetermined period has elapsed. The variable means is controlled by the input control means.

  Thereby, the state in which the variable member is within the operation start range can be maintained for a predetermined period, so when it is necessary to shut off the power while the variable member is within the operation start range during shipping inspection or the like, The power can be turned off for the inspector during this predetermined period. That is, it is not necessary to wait until the closing operation is completed for each test or to manually operate the variable member within the operation start range after the power is turned off, thereby improving the test efficiency. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic E group> (Determining the timing of turning off the centerpiece based on the detection result of the sensor)
An effect display unit that can change the effect mode, and an opening / closing unit that is arranged so as to be able to open and close on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the gaming board, and that the effect display unit is configured to be exposed as it is opened. Opening / closing display means having a section, a rendering mode setting means capable of at least setting the rendering mode to a first mode, a second mode different from the first mode, and an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing section. Opening / closing control means for controlling, a position where the opening / closing section can take from the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing section to the time when the opening / closing section is completely closed, and a part of the effect display section from the opening / closing member. Discriminating means for discriminating whether or not a specific opening position which is a position to be exposed is provided, wherein the effect mode setting means is provided when the effect display section is set to the first mode. The opening / closing part is in the specific opening position Characterized in that the representation display section is for setting the second aspect based on being judged to have become the gaming machine E1.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a variable means operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing various effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, JP-A-2008-012194).

  However, with the above-described conventional gaming machines, there has been a possibility that it may be difficult to appropriately perform an effect on the variable means having a complicated configuration with the diversification of the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, an effect display unit capable of changing the effect mode, and an opening / closing operation that can be opened / closed on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the gaming board, so that the effect display unit is exposed as it is opened. Is provided in the open / close display means. The production mode is set at least to the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode by the production mode setting means. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing part is controlled by the opening / closing control means, and the opening / closing part can be located between the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing part and the complete closing thereof, and a part of the effect display part is provided with an opening / closing member It is determined by the determination means whether or not the specific opening position which is a position exposed from the camera is reached. When the effect display unit is set to the first mode, the effect display unit is switched to the second mode by the effect mode setting unit based on the determination unit determining that the opening / closing unit is at the specific open position. Is set.

  Thus, the second mode can be set before the opening / closing section is completely closed. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.

  In the gaming machine E1, a detection unit for detecting whether the degree of opening of the opening / closing unit is equal to or less than the degree of opening at the specific opening position is provided, and the determination unit is configured to perform the determination based on a detection result by the detection unit. A gaming machine E2 for determining whether or not a specific opening position has been reached.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the detection unit detects whether the degree of opening of the opening / closing unit is equal to or less than the degree of opening at the specific opening position, and determines whether the specific opening position has been reached based on the detection result by the detection unit. Is determined.

  Thus, the degree of opening can be determined only by the detection result of the detection result, so that the determination by the determination unit can be further simplified. That is, when determining the degree of opening / closing of the opening / closing section, there is no need to predict according to the setting of the opening / closing operation such as the opening / closing speed and the elapsed time from the start of opening / closing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for the determination by the determination unit can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect mode setting means sets, as the first mode, the brightness of the effect display unit to a first luminance, and as the second mode, the effect mode display means The gaming machine E3, wherein the brightness of the section is set to a second brightness lower than the first brightness.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, as a first mode, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to the first luminance by the effect mode setting means. As a second aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to a second brightness lower than the first brightness by the effect mode setting means.

  Accordingly, when the opening / closing section is closed, the second brightness can be set to be lower than the first brightness from the time when the opening / closing section reaches the specific opening position until the opening / closing section is completely closed. Therefore, the brightness of a part of the effect display unit exposed from the opening / closing unit can be made inconspicuous, so that there is an effect that the visual quality of the effect display unit can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E3, the second luminance is in a state where the effect display unit is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, the second luminance is in a state in which the effect display unit is turned off. Until it is closed, a part of the effect display unit exposed from the opening / closing unit can be made more inconspicuous. Therefore, there is an effect that the visual quality of the effect display unit can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the effect mode is set to the second mode, the effect mode setting means determines that the opening / closing section is at the specific open position by the determining means. The gaming machine E5, wherein the effect mode is set to the first mode based on the operation.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the effect mode is set to the second mode, the determination unit determines that the opening / closing unit is at the specific open position. The effect mode is set to the first mode by the effect mode setting means based on the fact that the effect mode can be switched at the same position in both the case where the opening / closing section is closed and the case where the opening / closing section is opened. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the opening / closing display means includes abnormality determining means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing section, and the effect mode setting means has a function for determining whether an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determining means. A gaming machine E6 characterized in that when it is determined that an effect has occurred, the effect mode is set to a third mode different from both the first mode and the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, in the open / close display means, the abnormality determination means determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the open / close section. When the abnormality determining unit determines that an abnormality has occurred, the effect mode is set by the effect mode setting unit to a third mode different from both the first mode and the second mode.

  Thus, there is an effect that the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing section based on whether or not the effect mode is set to the third mode.

  A gaming machine E7 comprising a plurality of the opening / closing display means in the gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, since a plurality of open / close display means are provided, the third mode is set when an abnormality occurs in some of the open / close display means. There is an effect that the open / close display means having the open / close portion in which the abnormality has occurred can be easily specified based on whether or not the display is performed.

<Characteristic F group> (The peak current value is reduced by shifting the lighting timing of each LED)
A plurality of actuation means, an actuation control means for controlling the actuation of the plurality of actuation means based on the actuation control data, and an actuation control data for setting the actuation control data for a corresponding one of the plurality of actuation means Setting means, wherein the operation control data setting means includes: a plurality of states including at least a first operation state and a second operation state having lower power consumption than the first operation state. A plurality of states including at least a first operation control data controlled by a pattern and a third operation state and a fourth operation state having lower power consumption than the third operation state are controlled by a second operation pattern. Setting at least operation control data, wherein the operation control data setting means sets the first operation control data and the second operation control data for the plurality of operation means. Is set so that there is a period in which the first operation state performed in the first operation pattern does not overlap with the third operation state performed in the second operation pattern. A gaming machine F1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a light emitting member that performs a light emitting operation, and an effect member such as a variable member that is changed by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing various effect operations by operating a plurality of effect members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of effect members is increased, there is a concern that power consumption may increase.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the operation of the plurality of operation units is controlled by the operation control unit based on the operation control data. The operation control data is set by the operation control data setting means for the corresponding one of the plurality of operation means. First operation control data in which a plurality of states including at least a first operation state and a second operation state having lower power consumption than the first operation state are controlled by a first operation pattern; A second operation control data in which a plurality of states including at least a state and a fourth operation state having lower power consumption than the third operation state are controlled by the second operation pattern is at least set by the operation control data setting means. . When the first operation control data and the second control data are set for the plurality of operation units by the operation control data setting unit, the first operation state performed in the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern are set in the second operation pattern. The operation control data setting means sets such that there is a period in which the third operation state to be performed does not overlap.

  Thus, power consumption can be suppressed during a period in which the first operation state and the third operation state are not performed in an overlapping manner. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption due to an overlap of periods in which the operating means are in an operation state with high power consumption.

  In the gaming machine F1, the operation control data setting means is performed in the first operation pattern when setting the first operation control data and the second operation control data for the plurality of operation means. The gaming machine F2, wherein at least one of the first operation state and the third operation state performed in the second operation pattern are set so as not to be performed in an overlapping manner.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, when the first operation control data and the second operation control data are set by the operation control data setting unit for the plurality of operation units, at least one operation state performed in the first operation pattern; It is set by the operation control data setting means so that the third operation state performed in the two operation patterns does not overlap.

  Accordingly, it is possible to disperse the period in which the operation unit is operated and controlled in the operation state where power consumption is high, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption consumed by the operation unit. .

  In the gaming machine F2, a display means for displaying display information is provided, and the operation control means controls backlighting provided on the display means based on the operation control data; Illumination control means for controlling lighting of the light source of the member based on the operation control data, wherein the operation control data setting means transmits the first operation control data to a backlight provided on the display means. A gaming machine F3 comprising: a backlight setting means for setting; and an illumination setting means for setting the second operation control data for a light source of an illumination member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F2. That is, the display information is displayed on the display means. In the operation control means, lighting of the backlight provided on the display means is controlled by the backlight control means based on the operation control data. The lighting of the light source of the illuminated member is controlled by the illuminated control means based on the operation control data.

  This makes it possible to provide a period in which the backlight and the light source of the illuminated member are lit so that the lighting periods do not overlap. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption during the overlapping period due to overlapping lighting periods in the period.

  In the gaming machine F3, the first operation pattern is an operation pattern in which a light-up state and a light-off state are repeated in the first cycle, and the second operation pattern is the light-up state and the light-out state in the second cycle. The operation control data setting means is configured to prevent the lighting state performed in the first operation pattern from overlapping with the lighting state performed in the second operation pattern. A gaming machine F4 characterized by being set to:

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3. That is, in the first operation pattern, the ON state and the OFF state are repeated in the first cycle. In the second operation pattern, the ON state and the OFF state are repeated in the second cycle. The lighting state performed in the first operation pattern and the lighting state performed in the second operation pattern are controlled so as not to be performed in an overlapping manner.

  Thereby, while one of the backlight and the illuminated member is on, the other can be off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more effectively suppress an increase in power consumption due to both the backlight and the illumination member being turned on.

  In the gaming machine F4, there are provided an effect control means for controlling execution of various effects of the gaming machine, and a display control means for controlling a display effect executed in the display means based on a command output from the effect control means. The display control means, the backlight control means, the backlight setting means, a synchronization signal generation means for generating a synchronization signal every predetermined period, and an output means for outputting the synchronization signal to the effect control means; Wherein the backlight control means controls the backlight to operate in the first operation pattern based on the synchronization signal when the first operation control data is set by the backlight setting means. The effect control means includes the illumination control means and the illumination setting means, and the illumination control means includes the illumination setting means. When the second operation control data is set, the game machine F5 controls the light source of the illuminated member to operate in the second operation pattern based on the synchronization signal. .

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F4. That is, the execution of various effects of the gaming machine is controlled by the effect control means. The display effect executed on the display means based on the command output from the effect control means is controlled by the display control means. In the display control means, the configuration includes a backlight control means and a backlight setting means. Further, a synchronization signal is generated at predetermined intervals by the synchronization signal generation means, and the synchronization signal is output to the effect control means by the output means. When the first operation control data is set by the backlight setting means, the backlight control means controls the backlight to operate in the first operation pattern based on the synchronization signal. In the effect control means, the illumination control means and the illumination setting means are included in the configuration. When the second operation control data is set by the illumination setting means, the illumination control means controls the light source of the illumination member to operate in the second operation pattern based on the synchronization signal.

  With this, it is possible to set the period of the lighting state and the period of the unlit state for the backlight and the light source of the illuminated member based on the same synchronization signal. In addition, there is an effect that overlapping of the lighting states can be more reliably suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F5, the synchronizing signal generation means generates the synchronizing signal in synchronization with a cycle of updating display contents of the display means, and the display control means performs the display means based on the synchronizing signal. A game machine F6 comprising a display updating means for updating the display content of the game machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F5. That is, the synchronizing signal is generated by the synchronizing signal generating means in accordance with the cycle of updating the display content of the display means. In the display control means, the display content of the display means is updated by the display update means based on the synchronization signal.

  Thus, the synchronization signal required for updating the display on the display means can be used also as the synchronization signal for the lighting control by the backlight control means and the illumination control means, so that the number of synchronization signals can be reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine F7 according to any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, wherein the first operation pattern has a shorter period of the light-off state than a period of the light-on state.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the period of the light-off state is shorter than the period of the light-on state in the first operation pattern. The brightness of the backlight can be improved. In other words, the timing at which the backlight is turned on and the timing at which the light source of the illuminated member is turned on overlap with each other, so that the driving current supplied to the light emitting means is prevented from increasing instantaneously. This has the effect that the quality of the appearance of the display means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, in the second operation pattern, the lighting state is performed after a predetermined delay period has elapsed after the lighting state of the backlight operated in the first operation pattern ends. A gaming machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, in the second operation pattern, a predetermined delay period elapses after the lighting state of the backlight operated in the first operation pattern ends. After turning on the backlight, the backlight must be completely turned off during the delay period, even if there is a time lag between when the backlight is turned off and when the backlight completely turns off. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress an increase in power consumption due to the overlapping of the lighting state of the backlight and the lighting state of the illumination member.

<Characteristic G group> (The accessory is divided into a plurality of groups, and the accessory motor is controlled so that each group does not interfere.)
A plurality of variable members that can be changed, and a variable control unit that controls the plurality of variable members to be changed in units of a variable member group configured by one or a plurality of the variable members, as the variable member group, At least a first member group and a second member group different from the first member group are provided, and at least one of the variable members constituting the first member group and the second member group The at least one variable member to be configured is in a positional relationship of interfering with each other by being variable, and the variable control means configures the variable member group according to an operation condition determined for each variable member group. A gaming machine G1 comprising means for variably controlling a variable member to perform.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include an accessory operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of accessories (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the number of the variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it is difficult to appropriately set the operation.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the variable control means is controlled so that the plurality of variable members that can be changed are changed in units of one or a plurality of variable members. As the variable member group, at least a first member group and a second member group different from the first member group are provided. At least one variable member that constitutes the first member group and at least one variable member that constitutes the second member group have a positional relationship in which they interfere with each other by being varied. Means for variably controlling the variable members constituting the variable member group according to the operating conditions determined for each variable member group is provided in the variable control means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that each variable member group can be suitably operated based on the operation condition.

  In the gaming machine G1, the operating conditions include, when each of the variable members constituting the first member group is at a position where they do not interfere with each other even if the second member group is changed, A gaming machine G2 characterized by including a condition that can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G1, the operating conditions include a case where each of the variable members constituting the first member group is at a position where they do not interfere with each other even if the second member group is changed. Since the condition that the second member group can be changed is included, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress mutual interference of the useful objects.

  In the gaming machine G2, the variable control means variably controls the variable member such that the variable member performs a predetermined turning-on operation based on power-on, and the operating condition includes: A gaming machine G3 characterized by including operating conditions for a throwing operation.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G2. That is, the variable member is variably controlled by the variable control means such that the variable member performs a predetermined operation based on power-on. The operating condition includes the operating condition of the closing operation.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the closing operation can be performed without the variable members interfering with each other according to the operating condition.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a pointer unit whose value is updated as time elapses, and a regulation that defines the operation content of the variable unit for each variable member group in association with the value of the pointer unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the regulation information storage means for storing information and the variable control means control to vary the corresponding variable member group based on the regulation information corresponding to the pointer means. G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, the value of the pointer means is updated with the passage of time, and the specified information in which the operation content of the variable means is specified for each variable member group is stored in the specified information storage means in association with the value of the pointer means. The variable control means controls the variable member group corresponding to the pointer information based on the specified information.

  Thus, the operation of the variable unit can be set by simple control of setting the operation in accordance with the contents of the specified information specified by the value of the pointer unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for the control of the variable control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines G3 and G4, information discriminating means for discriminating whether or not prescribed information corresponding to the pointer means is predetermined information, and the information discriminating means corresponds to the pointer means during execution of the inserting operation. A gaming machine G5 comprising: an operation ending means for ending the insertion operation when the prescribed information is determined to be the predetermined information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G3 and G4. That is, the information discriminating means determines whether or not the prescribed information corresponding to the pointer means is predetermined information, and the prescribed information corresponding to the pointer means is the prescribed information during execution of the insertion operation by the information discriminating means. Is determined, the closing operation is ended by the operation ending means.

  Thus, there is an effect that the closing operation can be more easily completed without determining the elapsed time from the start of the closing operation, the operation state of the variable unit, and the like.

  In any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, determination means for determining whether or not the insertion operation has been normally performed, and a notification operation when the determination means determines that the insertion operation has not been normally performed. A gaming machine G6 comprising: a notifying unit for executing.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5. That is, it is determined by the determining unit whether or not the closing operation has been normally performed. If the determining unit determines that the closing operation has not been normally performed, the notifying unit performs the notification operation.

  Thus, if an abnormality has occurred in the variable means, the occurrence of the abnormality can be recognized by the hall clerk at the time of the closing operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the abnormality can be quickly eliminated based on the notification operation.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3, characterized in that: Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a variable means operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).
However, with the above-described conventional gaming machines, there has been a possibility that it may be difficult to appropriately perform an effect on the variable means having a complicated configuration with the diversification of the variable means.
This technical idea is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately set the operation of the accessory.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is provided with an effect display unit capable of changing the effect mode, and an opening / closing operation capable of being opened and closed on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the game board, and is opened. Opening / closing display means having an opening / closing section configured to expose the effect display section to a greater extent, and at least the effect mode to a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. Rendering mode setting means that can be set, opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing section, and a position that the opening / closing section can take between the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing section and the complete closing. And determining means for determining whether or not a part of the effect display unit is at a specific open position that is a position exposed from the opening / closing member, and the effect mode setting unit includes: When set to the first mode Is for setting the effect display unit on the basis that it is determined that the closing part has become the specific open position by said determination means to the second aspect.
The gaming machine of the technical concept 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1, further comprising a detecting unit configured to detect whether an opening degree of the opening / closing unit is equal to or less than an opening degree at the specific opening position. The determining means determines whether or not the specific opening position has been reached based on a detection result by the detecting means.
The gaming machine of the technical concept 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1 or 2, wherein the effect mode setting means sets the brightness of the effect display unit to a first luminance as the first mode. In the second aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to a second brightness lower than the first brightness.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the effect display unit that can change the effect mode and the opening and closing operation are installed on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the gaming board, and the effect display is displayed so that it is opened. An opening / closing part configured to expose the part is provided in the opening / closing display means. The production mode is set at least to the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode by the production mode setting means. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing part is controlled by the opening / closing control means, and the opening / closing part is located at a position where the opening / closing part can take between the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing part and the complete closing, and a part of the effect display part is provided by the opening / closing member. It is determined by the determination means whether or not the specific opening position which is a position exposed from the camera is reached. When the effect display unit is set to the first mode, the effect display unit is switched to the second mode by the effect mode setting unit based on the determination unit determining that the opening / closing unit is at the specific open position. Is set.
Thus, the second mode can be set before the opening / closing section is completely closed. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the detection unit detects whether the degree of opening of the opening / closing unit is equal to or less than the degree of opening at the specific opening position, and determines whether the specific opening position has been reached based on the detection result by the detection unit. Is determined.
Thus, the degree of opening can be determined only by the detection result of the detection result, so that the determination by the determination unit can be further simplified. That is, when determining the degree of opening / closing of the opening / closing section, there is no need to predict according to the setting of the opening / closing operation such as the opening / closing speed and the elapsed time from the start of opening / closing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for the determination by the determination unit can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects can be obtained. That is, as a first mode, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to the first luminance by the effect mode setting means. As a second aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to a second brightness lower than the first brightness by the effect mode setting means.
Accordingly, when the opening / closing section is closed, the second brightness can be set to be lower than the first brightness from the time when the opening / closing section reaches the specific opening position to the time when it is completely closed. Therefore, the brightness of a part of the effect display unit exposed from the opening / closing unit can be made inconspicuous, so that there is an effect that the visual quality of the effect display unit can be improved.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
115 power supply (power supply means)
222 ROM (storage means)
222c load reference value table (storage means)
223 RAM (drive power storage means)
223e load value storage area (drive power storage means)
229 Character motor (variable means)
230 Backlight for LCD (light emitting means)
410 standing object (part of the operating member)
510 tilting part (part of the operating member)
520 rotating accessory (part of the operating member)
710 Left swinging part (part of the operating member)
720 central swinging part (part of the operating member)
730 right swinging part (part of the operating member)
810 Right sliding role (part of moving member)
820 Left sliding role (part of the operating member)
830 Upper sliding accessory (part of the operating member)
840 Lower slide accessory (part of the operating member)
S1121 Brightness variable means
S1408 calculation means
S1409 Power determination means
S1412 drive suppression means
S1421 operation control means
S1501 determination means

Claims (3)

An effect display unit that can change the effect mode, and an opening / closing unit that is arranged so as to be able to open and close on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the gaming board, and that the effect display unit is configured to be exposed as it is opened. Opening / closing display means having a section;
Effect mode setting means that can at least set the effect mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
Opening and closing control means for controlling the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing unit,
A specific opening, which is a position that the opening / closing section can take between the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing section and the time when the opening / closing section is completely closed, and a position where a part of the effect display section is exposed from the opening / closing member. Determination means for determining whether the position has been reached,
The effect mode setting means is configured to, when the effect display section is set to the first mode, determine whether the opening / closing section is at the specific open position by the determination means. A gaming machine wherein a part is set in the second mode. A detection unit that detects whether the degree of opening of the opening / closing unit is equal to or less than the degree of opening at the specific opening position,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the determining means determines whether or not the specific opening position has been reached based on a detection result by the detecting means.   The effect mode setting means sets the brightness of the effect display unit to a first brightness as the first mode, and sets the brightness of the effect display unit to the first brightness as the second mode. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second brightness is set to be lower than the first brightness.

Images